Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G Circuit Breakers
2.1
Introduction
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eaton Molded Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
Series G ®
Globally Accepted Breakers
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3
Series
2.5
2.6
2.7
V4-T2-331
V4-T2-338
Specialty
Specialty Breakers
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Current Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVGard™ Solar Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-341
V4-T2-347
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-372
V4-T2-398
V4-T2-401
V4-T2-415
Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learn
Online
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-430
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Drawings
Online
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
Metering and Communications
Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
Definite Purpose
Optimized solution for HVAC/R and Pumping Applications.
Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
V4-T2-4
V4-T2-6
V4-T2-7
V4-T2-9
V4-T2-14
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
C®
North American Standards and Special Application Breakers
Product Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4
V4-T2-2
V4-T2-2
V4-T2-3
2
V4-T2-1
2.1
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Introduction
Series G E-Frame and Series C F-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Contents
Description
2
Page
Introduction
Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definite Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . .
Specialty Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
Learn
Online
2
V4-T2-4
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-331
V4-T2-338
V4-T2-341
Drawings
Online
2
2
2
2
2
Product Overview
Application Description
2
Series G vs. Series C
Eaton molded case circuit
breakers cover the widest
range of applications in the
industry:
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Eaton’s Electrical Sector,
under the Eaton brand, offers
the widest variety of molded
case circuit breakers available
today. Designed for electrical
and machinery OEMs serving
a range of industries and
applications, these proven
designs incorporate the latest
in innovation with the high
reliability that has been our
hallmark since the advent of
the circuit breaker in the
1920s.
The Series C family ranges
from 15–2500 amperes, and
includes thermal-magnetic
breakers, electronic trip
breakers, molded case
switches, motor circuit
protectors, and specially
designed breakers for engine
generator, DC and mining
applications.
The new Series G line
features an average 35%
size reduction, common
field-installable internal
accessories, and advanced
trip unit functionality that
eliminates the need for rating
plugs. These breakers meet
the requirements of UL®,
CSA®, IEC, CCC and CE,
allowing the OEM to
standardize on a design that
meets the needs of their
global customer base.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Electrical OEMs
Machinery OEMs
Navy breakers:
●
UL 489 Supplement SB
●
MIL-C-17588
●
MIL-C-17361
●
ABS/NVR
Mining breakers up to 1100
Vac
Earth leakage
DC breakers 125–750 Vdc
Engine generator breakers
15–1200 amperes
Current limiting breakers
Feeder Pillars
In distribution systems to
provide main and branch
circuit protection.
Individual Enclosures
Completely assembled in
enclosures to meet specific
customer requirements.
Switchgear
In distribution systems to
provide main and branch
circuit protection up to 2500
amperes (RG-Frame).
Additional Applications
Special versions of each Eaton
frame are available to provide
safe equipment control and
protection in mining and other
applications. Contact your
Eaton agent or distributor for
additional information.
Busbar Trunking Tap-Offs
In busbar trunking tap-offs to
provide circuit protection.
Typical Eaton Applications
Typical Applications
Machine Tool Control Panels
and Motor Control Centers
Designed for these
equipment requirements,
including new world-class
accessories.
Panelboard
Panelboards
As both main and branch
circuit protection devices.
Individual Circuit
Breaker Enclosure
Busbar Trunking
Tap-Off
Machine Tool
Control Panel
Switchboard
2
V4-T2-2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.1
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Introduction
Eaton Molded Case Circuit Breakers in Assemblies
2
Applications
Panelboards
Ampere
Frame Range
Switchboards
2
Motor Control Centers
1A
2A
1A-LX 2A-LX 3A
3E
4
4B
4D
5P
PRL-C PRL-i
PRL-C/i Freedom
IT.
Enclosed
Control
■
■
Bus
Plugs
Enclosed
Breaker
—
—
Series G
EG
15–160 1
—
—
—
—
—
■
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
JG
20–250
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
LG
100–630 2
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
—
■
—
■
—
—
—
—
■
NG
400–1600
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
—
—
■
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
—
■
■
■
—
—
—
FD/ED 15–225
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
JD
70–250
■
■
—
—
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
KD
70–400
■
■
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
LD
400–600
—
—
—
—
■
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
MDL
300–800
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
ND
400–1200
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
RD
800–2500
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
-
■
■
■
—
—
—
RG
800–2500
3
■
2
2
2
2
Series C
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for EG.
2 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for LG.
3 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-3
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for UL, CSA and IEC Applications
Contents
Description
2
Page
Series G
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Learn
Online
2
V4-T2-5
V4-T2-6
V4-T2-7
V4-T2-9
V4-T2-14
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
Drawings
Online
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Overview
Series G, 15–2500 Amperes for
UL, CSA and IEC Applications
Eaton Series G molded case
circuit breakers provide
increased performance in
considerably less space than
standard circuit breakers or
comparable fusible devices.
The “G” signifies global
applications: Series G circuit
breakers are marked with UL,
CSA, CE, IEC and KEMA
KEUR listings. Other
advantages include:
●
●
●
●
●
Field-fit accessories
Common accessories
through 630 amperes
Electronic trip units from
20 to 2500 amperes
UL-listed and IEC-rated,
30 mA ground fault/earth
leakage modules
Built-in ground fault
protection down to
20 amperes
The EG, JG and LG frames are
designed around space-saving
footprints. The NG and RG
use the proven Eaton Series C
ND and RD designs.
The Series G family includes
five frame sizes in ratings
from 15 to 2500 amperes.
Series G offers a choice of
several interrupting capacities
up to 200 kA at 480 volts AC
(200 kA at 240 volts AC).
Series G molded case circuit
breakers are also available in
direct current options. Please
see Specialty Breakers
Section 2.6 for more details.
Standard calibration is 40 °C.
For applications in high
ambient temperature
conditions, 50 °C factory
calibration is available on
thermal-magnetic breakers
(not UL).
The Most Logically Designed
Contact Assembly
The flexibility and outstanding
performance characteristics
of Eaton circuit breakers are
made possible by the best
contact designs in circuit
breaker history. Our
technology creates a highspeed “blow-open” action
using the electromechanical
forces produced by high-level
fault currents.
Eaton circuit breakers are
operated by a toggle-type
mechanism that is
mechanically trip-free from
the handle so that the
contacts cannot be held
closed against short circuit
currents. Tripping due to
overload or short circuits is
clearly indicated by the
position on the handle. This
remarkably fast and
dependable contact action is
designed to enhance safety.
2
2
2
V4-T2-4
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Thorough In-Plant Testing
The quality, dependability and
reliability of every Eaton
Circuit Breaker is ensured by
a thorough program of inplant testing. Two calibration
tests are conducted on every
pole of every circuit breaker
to verify the trip mechanism,
operating mechanism,
continuity and accuracy.
Current Limiting
Characteristics
Circuit breakers are current
limiting because of their
high repulsion contact
arrangement and use of
state-of-the-art arc
extinguishing technology.
Eaton offers one of the most
complete lines of current
limiting breakers in the
industry. The industrial
breakers are available in
current limiting versions with
interrupting capacities up to
200 kA at 480 V without
fuses in the same physical
size as standard and high
interrupting capacity
breakers.
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Operating Mechanisms
Eaton circuit breakers have
a toggle handle operating
mechanism, which also
serves as a switching position
indicator. The indicator shows
the positions of: ON, OFF and
TRIPPED.
The toggle handle snaps into
the TRIPPED position if the
breaker is tripped by one of
its overcurrent, short circuit,
shunt or undervoltage
releases. Before the circuit
breaker can be reclosed
following a trip-out, the toggle
handle must be brought
beyond the OFF position
(RESET). The circuit breaker
can then be reclosed.
As an additional switching
position indicator for EG- to
RG-Frame circuit breakers,
there are two windows on
the right and on the left of the
toggle handle, in which the
switching state is indicated
by means of the colors
red, green and white
corresponding to the ON,
OFF and TRIPPED positions
respectively.
Positions of the Toggle
Handle Drive
OFF
Reset
ON
Tripped
●
●
Japanese T-Mark standard
molded case circuit
breakers
2
2
2
Global Third-Party
Certification
Molded case circuit breakers
from Eaton are designed to
conform with the following
international standards:
●
2
2
Eaton Series G circuit
breakers meet applicable UL
489 and IEC 60947-2
standards.
Australian Standard AS
2184 and AS 3947-2
molded case circuit
breakers
British Standards
Institution Standard
EN60947.2
International
Electromechanical
Commission
Recommendations IEC
60947.2 circuit breakers
2
2
Standards and Certifications
●
2
●
●
●
National Electrical
Manufacturers Association
Standards Publication No.
AB1-1993 molded case
circuit breakers
South African Bureau of
Standards, Standard SANS
156, Standard Specification
for molded case circuit
breakers
Swiss Electro-Technical
Association Standard SEV
947.2, Safety Regulations
for circuit breakers
●
●
Union Technique de
l’Electricite Standard NF C
63-120, low voltage
switchgear and control
gear circuit breaker
requirements
Verband Deutscher
Elektrotechnike
(Association of German
Electrical Engineers)
Standard VDE 0660, low
voltage switchgear and
control gear, circuit
breakers
Certification marks ensure
product compliance with the
total standard via the third
party witnessing of tests
by globally recognized
independent certification
organizations.
KEMA is a highly recognized,
independent international
organization that offers
certification and inspection
facilities for equipment in
many industries. The KEMAKEUR mark is the highest
certification an electrical
product can receive from
KEMA. Our IEC 60947-2
molded case circuit breakers
are KEMA tested and
certified. These breakers are
also listed in accordance with
UL 489, as well as CSA C22.2
No. 5-02.
KEMA, UL and CSA provide
ongoing follow-up testing and
inspections to ensure that
Eaton molded case circuit
breakers continue to meet
their exacting standards.
ISO Certification
Eaton circuit breakers are
manufactured in ISO®
certified facilities.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-5
2.2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection Overview
Electronic Trip Units (Digitrip RMS Trip Units)—Multi-Function Electronic Trip Units for All Applications
True rms Sensing
Digitrip RMS trip units use Eaton’s microprocessor-based intelligence to provide true rms sensing,
permitting increased accuracy and reliable system protection. True rms sensing is not susceptible to
nuisance tripping when waveforms containing high harmonic currents are present.
Digitrip RMS 310+
Digitrip RMS 310+ electronic
trip units are available with
Eaton Series G circuit
breakers JG, LG, NG and RG,
as well as Series C FD, KD,
LD and MDL circuit breakers.
Digitrip 310+ trip units are
equipped with an integrated Ir
switch that allows users to
modify the continuous
current rating of the breaker
without having to replace a
rating plug. This provides
further flexibility for
coordination in systems.
The trip units may be used
in 50 Hz or 60 Hz applications.
The Digitrip 310+ offers true
rms sensing, is front
adjustable and has an optional
local display of current and
cause of trip.
Curve Shaping
When selectively coordinated
systems are called for,
Digitrip RMS 310+ will
provide a cost-effective
solution for a variety of
applications.
The standard Digitrip RMS
310+ includes an adjustable
short time pickup setting
encompassing an I2t ramp
function that provides the
basic LS curve shaping
function.
Digitrip 310+ trip units also
include selectable long time
delay (tLD) and pickup
settings (Ir). A rating plug is
not required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-6
The optional Digitrip RMS
310+ LSI and LSIG provide
additional flat response short
time delay adjustments and
an instantaneous setting to
provide LSI curve shaping
capability.
Digitrip RMS 310+ LSG and
LSIG units are available with
ground fault pickup and flat
response ground fault delay.
Ground fault alarm options
are available with trip and no
trip functionality as a means
to notify users of a ground
fault condition with the option
to maintain the breaker
online.
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units
can effectively coordinate
with both sophisticated
upstream power breakers as
well as downstream thermalmagnetic breakers, making
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units
the cost-effective reliable
choice for selectively
coordinated systems.
Thermal Memory
All Digitrip RMS trip units
incorporate a long delay.
Thermal memory prevents the
system from cumulative
overheating due to repeated
overcurrent events that may
occur in quick succession.
Field Testing
A field test kit is available for
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip units.
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance Mode (ARMS)
ARMS is an available feature
on KD, LG, LD, MDL, NG and
RG frames with 310+
electronic trip units. This
feature increases worker
safety by providing an
accelerated instantaneous trip
unit to reduce arc flash.
Additionally, LG, NG and RG
frames with the ARMS feature
include a fully adjustable
instantaneous setting.
Digitrip RMS 610 and 910
Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip
units are available with Eaton
R-Frame circuit breakers 800
through 2500 amperes.
Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units
provide unparalleled system
protection with the added
convenience of a local
display.
Curve Shaping
Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 trip
units are available with up to
nine curve shaping choices
achieved by adjusting up to
seven switches on the front
of the unit for optimum
system coordination.
Maximum curve shaping
flexibility is provided by
dependent long and short
delay adjustments that are
long delay pickup (Ir) based,
depicted on the front of the
unit by the blue portion of the
time-current curve.
Additional coordination
capability can be provided by
utilizing the short delay and
ground fault zone selective
interlocking features available
on these trip units.
System Diagnostics
Digitrip RMS 610 and 910
models of trip units provide
long delay, short delay,
instantaneous, and ground
fault cause of trip LEDs on
the front of the unit. Their
display shows a magnitude of
trip information, as well as
remote signal contacts, for
improved system alarming.
System Monitoring
Digitrip 610 and 910 trip units
have the capability to monitor
phase currents, as well as
neutral or ground currents.
This information is displayed
on a large digital display
mounted on the unit.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
can also provide the user with
power and energy monitoring
capability. Peak power
demand, present power
demand, and total energy, as
well as forward and reverse
energy can be monitored with
this unit.
Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
have the additional capability
of monitoring line-to-line
voltage, as well as system
power factor. Both
parameters are displayed in
the digital display window
and are supported by LEDs to
indicate which parameter is
being displayed.
Harmonics Monitoring
Digitrip RMS 910 trip units
are capable of displaying
values of current harmonics
in the digital display window.
Percentage of harmonic
content can be monitored for
each phase, up to the 27th
harmonic. Additionally, a total
harmonic distortion value can
be calculated and displayed.
Communications
Digitrip RMS 910 units have
built-in communications
options to allow all protection,
monitoring, and control
information to be transmitted
back to a central location via
the Eaton PowerNet™
system.
Field Testing
Integral field testing capability
is provided on all 610 and 910
trip units. No additional test
set is needed to perform both
trip and no trip field testing.
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection Guide
2
Electronic Trip Units
2
Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910
RMS 310+
RMS 610
2
RMS 910
2
JG
2
RG
2
LG/NG
2
Breaker Type
2
Series G frame(s)
JG-, LG-, NG- and RG-Frames
RG-Frame
RG-Frame
Ampere rating
20–2500 A
800–2500 A
800–2500 A
Interrupting rating at 415 V
35, 70, 100 kA
70, 100 kA
70, 100 kA
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG
Trip Unit Sensing
rms sensing
Protection and Coordination
Protection
Long delay
Short delay
Instantaneous
Ground fault
Ordering options
LS, LSG
LSI, LSIG
Fixed rating plug (In) 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Overtemperature trip
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adjustable lr switch
Yes
Yes
No
No
Long delay setting
VAR/frame
VAR/frame
0.5–1.0 x (ln)
0.5–1.0 x (ln)
Long delay time I2t at 6x
10 seconds 2
10 seconds 2
2–24 seconds
2–24 seconds
Long delay thermal memory
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
High load alarm
1.05 lr
1.05 lr
0.85 x Ir
0.85 x Ir
2
2
Short delay setting
VAR/frame 4
VAR/frame 4
200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600% S1 and S2 x (Ir)
100 ms
No
100, 300, 500 ms
100, 300, 500 ms
Short delay time flat
No
I–300 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Short delay time ZSI
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Independent adjustable Inst. setting
No
Yes 5
Yes
Yes
Instantaneous setting
No
VAR/frame
200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln)
200–600% M1 and M2 x (ln)
Discriminator
No
No
Yes 6
Yes 6
Instantaneous override
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
VAR/Frame 7
VAR/Frame 7
25–100% x (ln) 7
25–100% x (ln) 7
Ground fault delay I2t at 0.62x
No
No
100, 300, 500 ms
100, 300, 500 ms
Ground fault delay flat
I–300 ms
I–300 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Ground fault ZSI
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ground fault thermal memory
No
No
Yes
Yes
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
In = Rating plug rating.
Ir = Long delay setting.
1
2
2
Short delay time I2t
Ground fault setting
2
2
2
310+ trip units have selectable settings instead of a rating plug.
310+ trip units have adjustable long delay times of 2–24 seconds, except NG 310+ for 800 A frame, for which it is 2–14 seconds.
310+ details are included by frame in Pages V4-T2-44 (JG), V4-T2-62 (LG), V4-T2-72 (NG), and V4-T2-83 (RG).
JG/LG: 2X–14X (In); NG: 2X–8X (In); RG: 2X–9X (In); 2500 ampere RG-Frame 2X–6X% x (In).
LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG 310+ trip units include an independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting.
LS, LSG only.
Not to exceed 1200 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-7
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Digitrip—RMS 310+, 610 and 910, continued
RMS 310+
RMS 610
RMS 910
2
JG
2
2
2
2
2
2
RG
LG/NG
LS, LSG
LSI, LSIG
LSI, LSIG, LSIG (A)
LSI (A), LSIG
Cause of trip LEDs
Yes 1 2
Yes 1 2
Yes
Yes
Magnitude of trip information
No
No
Yes
Yes
Remote signal contacts
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
System Diagnostics
2
System Monitoring
Digital display
Yes 3
Yes 3
Yes
2
Current
Yes 3
Yes 3
Yes
Yes
Voltage
No
No
No
Yes
Power and energy
No
No
No
Yes
Power quality—harmonics
No
No
No
Yes
Power factor
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Test set 4
Test set 4
Integral
Integral
2
2
2
System Communications
2
Field Testing
2
2
2
PowerNet
Testing method
Notes
1 Using cause of trip module (catalog number TRIP-LED).
2 RG 310+ trip units include integrated cause of trip LEDs.
3 Using ammeter or remote ammeter/cause of trip display (catalog number DIGIVIEW and DIGIVIEWR06).
4 Test kit available for field testing 310+ trip units (catalog number MTST230V).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-8
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Ratings
2
Frames EG, JG and LG
EG
JG
2
LG
2
2
2
Maximum rated current (amperes)
125, 160 1
Breaker type 3
B
B
Number of poles
1
2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 1
S
S
H
H
C
E
2
400, 630 2
250
E
S
H
C
U
X
E
S
H
C
U
X
2, 3, 4 1
2, 3, 4 3, 4
2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
2
200
200
2
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) Vac 50–60 Hz
NEMA®,
UL, CSA
240 Vac
25
25
35
85
85
100
100
200
65
85
100
200
200
200
65
85
100
200
480 Vac
—
18
25
—
35
—
65
100
25
35
65
100
150
200
35
50
65
100
150
200
600 Vac 4
—
—
18
—
22
—
25
35
18
18
25
35
50
50
18
25
35
50
65
65
10 6
10
10
35 6
35
42 6
42
42
10
22
22
42
50
50
22
22
42
42
50
50
IEC 60947-2 220–240 Vac
125/250 Vdc 5
Icu
25
25
35
85
85
100
100
200
65
85
100
200
200
200
65
85
100
200
200
200
Ics
25
25
35
43
43
50
50
200
65
85
100
200
200
200
65
85
100
200
200
200
380–415 Vac
Icu
—
18
25
—
40
—
70
100
25
40
70
100
150
200
35
50
70
100
150
200
Ics
—
18
25
—
30
—
35
100
25
40
70
100
150
200
35
50
53
100
150
200
Icu
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
12
12
14
16
18
18
12
20
25
30
35
35
Ics
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
6
7
12
14
14
6
10
13
15
18
18
Icu
10 6
10
10
35 6
35
42 6
42
42
10
22
22
42
50
50
22
22
42
42
50
50
Ics
10 6
10
10
35 6
35
42 6
42
42
10
22
22
42
50
50
22
22
42
42
50
50
660–690 Vac
125/250 Vdc 5
Ampere range
15–160 A 1
20–250 A
100–630 A 2
Trip Units
F = Fixed
A = Adjustable
T = Thermal
M = Magnetic
FT-FM
AT-FM
FT-AM
AT-AM
Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310)
FT-AM
AT-AM
Electronic (Digitrip RMS 310)
Thermal
magnetic
Electronic
RMS 7
2
2
2
2
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Built-in
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Fixed thermal
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Adjustable
thermal
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Magnetic
Fixed
LS
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
LSI
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
LSG
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
LSIG
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
ALSI
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
ALSIG
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Utilization category
2
2
Interchangeable
Adjustable
2
Adjustable
Notes
1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG.
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
3 Breaker type C, U and X are current limiting per UL 489.
4 EG breaker rated 600/347 Vac.
5 Two poles in series.
6 125 Vdc only for single-pole breakers.
7 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-9
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Frames NG and RG
NG
RG
2
2
2
2
1600 1
800
1600, 2000, 2500
1600, 2000, 2500
H
C
2
S
U
H
C2
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
3
3
3, 4
3, 4
240 Vac
85
100
200
—
200
125
200
480 Vac
50
65
100
—
150
65
100
600 Vac
25
35
65
—
65
50
65
Icu
85
100
200
85
—
135
200
Ics
85
100
100
85
—
100
100
Icu
50
70
100
50
—
70
100
Ics
50
50
50
50
—
50
50
Icu
20 3
25 3
35
20 3
—
25 3
35 3
Ics
10
13
18
10
—
13
18
Icu
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Maximum rated current (amperes)
800, 1200
2
Breaker type
S
2
Number of poles
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz
2
NEMA,
UL, CSA
2
2
IEC 60947-2
2
220–240 Vac
380–415 Vac
2
660–690 Vac
2
250 Vdc
2
2
Ics
800, 1200
800, 1200
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ampere range
400–1200 A
400–1200 A
400–1200 A
1600 A
800 A
800–2500 A
800–2500 A
Trip units
Electronic
(Digitrip RMS 310+)
2
Electronic
(Digitrip RMS 310+ and 910)
Interchangeable
—
—
—
—
—
■5
■5
Built-in
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
LI
—
—
—
—
—
■6
■6
2
LS
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
LSI
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
2
LIG
—
—
—
—
—
■6
■6
LSG
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
2
LSIG
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
2
ALSI
■
■
■
■
—
■
■
ALSIG
■
■
■
■
—
■
■
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
2
2
2
2
2
Electronic 4
Utilization category
Notes
1 NG 1600 ampere frame is not UL or CSA listed.
2 Not KEMA-KEUR listed.
3 IEC 60947-2 H.5 Annex H is not KEMA-KEUR tested.
4 Not suitable for DC application. Four-pole ground fault not available.
5 RG 310+ are interchangeable with the exception of: FROM not ground fault equipped TO ground fault equipped
6 Available only on Digitrip 910 trip units.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-10
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
General Specifications
2
All Series G Frames
2
EG
JG
LG
NG
RG
160 A 1
250 A
400, 630 A 2
800, 1200, 1600 A 3
1600, 2000, 2500 A
Main conducting paths
500 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
750 Vac
Auxiliary circuits
500 Vac
690 Vac
690 Vac
690 Vac
690 Vac
Main conducting paths
6 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
8 kV
Auxiliary circuits
4 kV
4 kV
4 kV
4 kV
4 kV
IEC
415 Vac
690 Vac
690 Vac
690 Vac
690 Vac
NEMA
600Y/347 Vac
600 Vac
600 Vac
600 Vac
600 Vac
Yes 1
Yes
Yes 2
Yes 3
Yes
Maximum rated current In depending on the version
Rated insulation voltage U, according to IEC 60947-2
2
2
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
2
2
Rated operational voltage Ue
UL and CSA listed
–20 ° to 70 °C
–20 ° to 70 °C
2
2
2
Permissible ambient temperature
–20 ° to 70 °C
–20 ° to 70 °C
–20 ° to 70 °C
Permissible load for various ambient temperatures
close to the circuit breaker, related to the rated current
of the circuit breaker
4
5
4
5
4
5
—
—
At 40 °C
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
At 50 °C
96%
92%
96%
94%
96%
91%
91%
91%
At 55 °C
93%
87%
94%
90%
93%
86%
85%
85%
At 60 °C
91%
83%
92%
87%
90%
82%
81%
81%
At 70 °C
86%
73%
88%
80%
84%
70%
70%
70%
2
2
2
2
Circuit breakers for plant protection
2
2
Circuit breakers for motor protection
At 40 °C
—
100%
100%
—
—
At 50 °C
—
100%
100%
—
—
At 55 °C
—
100%
100%
—
—
At 60 °C
—
100%
100%
—
—
At 70 °C
—
90%
90%
—
—
At 40 °C
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
At 50 °C
100%
100%
100%
91%
91%
At 55 °C
96%
96%
95%
85%
85%
At 60 °C
91%
82%
90%
81%
81%
At 70 °C
86%
88%
84%
—
—
42 kA max.
42 kA max.
42 kA max.
6
6
2
42 kA max.
6
6
2
2
2
2
Circuit breakers for starter combinations and
isolating circuit breakers
2
2
2
2
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (DC) Not for circuit
breakers for motor protection (Time constant t = 10 rms)
Two conducting paths in series
For EG to LG up to 250 Vdc
NEMA (time constant t = 8 rms)
Two conducting paths in series 250 Vdc
42 kA max.
42 kA max.
2
Notes
1 125 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the EG.
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
3 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the NG.
4 Thermal overload release set to the lower value.
5 Thermal overload release set to the upper value.
6 Not suitable for DC switching.
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-11
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
All Series G Frames, continued
EG
JG
LG
NG
RG
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Main switch characteristics according to IEC 60947-2
in combination with lockable rotary drives
Yes
2
Rated short circuit breaking capacity according to
IEC 60947-2 (at AC 50/60 Hz)
For rated short circuit breaking capacity, see Page V4-T2-9.
2
Endurance (operating cycles)
10,000
10,000
8,000
3,000
3,000
Maximum switching frequency
300 1/h
240 1/h
240 1/h
60 1/h
60 1/h
Conductor cross sections and terminal types for
main conductors
Box terminals
Box terminals
Box terminals
Flat bar terminals Flat bar terminals
Flat bar terminals
Solid or stranded
2.5 to 95 mm2
50 to 150 mm2
95 to 240 mm2
—
—
—
Finely stranded with end sleeve
2.5 to 50/70 mm2
35 to 120 mm2
70 to 150 mm2
—
—
—
2
2
2
—
—
—
600 A
Optional
Optional
2
Tightening torque for box terminals
5.6 Nm
20 Nm
42 Nm
31 Nm
31 Nm
—
Tightening torque for busbar connection pieces
5.6 Nm
15 Nm
30 Nm
6 Nm
50 Nm
20 Nm
2
Conductor cross sections for auxiliary circuits with
terminal connection or terminal strip
Solid
0.75 to 2.5 mm2
0.75 to 2.5 mm2
0.75 to 2.5 mm2
Up to 2x4 mm2
Up to 2x4 mm2
Finely stranded with end sleeve
0.75 to 2.5 mm2
0.75 to 2.5 mm2
0.75 to 2.5 mm2
Up to 2x2.5 mm2
Up to 2x2.5 mm2
With brought-out cable ends
—
0.82 (AWG 18) mm2
0.82 (AWG 18) mm2
0.82 (AWG 18) mm2
0.82 (AWG 18) mm2
Tightening torque for fitting screws
—
0.8 to 1.4 Nm
0.8 to 1.4 Nm
0.8 to 1.4 Nm
0.8 to 1.4 Nm
2
2
2
2
2
2
Power loss per circuit breaker at maximum rated
current ln (the power losses of the undervoltage
releases (“r” releases) must be observed if necessary)
at three-phase symmetrical load)
400 A:
600 A:
For plant protection
40 W
45 W
65 W
120 W
87/210 W
220/270/400 W
As isolating circuit breaker
40 W
45 W
65 W
120 W
87/210 W
220/270/400 W
For starter combinations
40 W
45 W
65 W
120 W
—
—
For motor protection
—
45 W
65 W
120 W
—
—
Permissible mounting position
90
90
90
2
90
2
Busbar
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Arc spacing— suitable for reverse-feed applications
Yes (except HMCPE)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auxiliary Switches
Rated thermal current lth
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
Rated making capacity
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
AC-14
AC-14
AC-14
AC-15
AC-15
Rated operational voltage
230/400/600 V
230/400/600 V
230/400/600 V
600 V
600 V
Rated operational current
6/3/0.25 A
6/3/0.25 A
6/3/0.25 A
6A
6A
DC-13
DC-13
Rated operational voltage
125/250V
125/250V
125/250V
125/250V
125/250V
Rated operational current
0.5/0.25 A
0.5/0.15 A
0.5/0.15 A
0.5/0.15 A
0.5/0.25 A
Backup fuse
6/4/4 A
(4) 6/4/4 A
(4) 6/4/4 A
(4) 6/4/4 A
(4) 6/4/4 A
Miniature circuit breaker
6/4 A
6/4 A
6/4 A
6/4 A
6/4 A
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-12
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
All Series G Frames, continued
EG
JG
LG
NG
2
RG
2
Releases
Undervoltage releases (“r” releases)
2
Response voltage:
Drop (breaker tripped) Us
35–70%
35–70%
35–70%
35–70%
35–70%
Pickup (breaker may be switched on) Us
85–110%
85–110%
85–110%
85–110%
85–110%
2
50/60 Hz 12 Vac
—
—
—
1.9 VA
2.9 VA
2
50/60 Hz 24 Vac
0.72 VA
3.9 VA
3.9 VA
2.4 VA
3.1 VA
50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac
1.15–1.78 VA
2.5–3.8 VA
2.5–3.8 VA
2.3–4.1 VA
3.4–6.0 VA
50/60 Hz 110–127 Vac
0.96–1.25 VA
1.8–2.4 VA
1.8–2.4 VA
3.4–4.2 VA
3.3–3.8 VA
50/60 Hz 208–240 Vac
1.28–1.68 VA
2.7–3.8 VA
2.7–3.8 VA
4.8–6.5 VA
4.2–7.2 VA
50/60 Hz 380–500 Vac
2.2–3.9 VA
3.4–5.8 VA
3.4–5.8 VA
6.8–12.0 VA
3.8–10.0 VA
50/60 Hz 525–600 Vac
3.4–4.3 VA
3.4–4.3 VA
3.4–4.3 VA
—
—
12 Vdc
—
—
—
2.6W
3.4W
Power consumption in continuous operation at:
24 Vdc
0.70 W
3.1W
3.1W
3.6W
4.3W
48–60 Vdc
1.12–1.76W
2.0–3.1W
2.0–3.1W
3.5–5.5W
4.8–7.2W
110–125 Vdc
0.94–1.21W
1.6–2.2W
1.6–2.2W
2.9–3.6W
3.3–3.8W
220–250 Vdc
Maximum opening time
1.45–1.86W
3.1–4W
3.1–4W
4.8–6.3W
6.6–7.5W
50 ms
50 ms
50 ms
62 ms
62 ms
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Shunt Trips
Shunt trips (“f” releases)
2
Response voltage:
70–110%
70–110%
50/60 Hz 24 Vac
10–41 VA
50/60 Hz 48–60 Vac
139–210 VA
Pickup (breaker tripped) Us
70–110%
70–110%
70–110%
2
87–405 VA
87–405 VA
710–1105 VA
710–1105 VA
98–475 VA
612 VA
24–50 VA
403–666 VA
2
Power consumption in (short time) at:
2
50/60 Hz 48–127 Vac
—
—
—
—
—
50/60 Hz 110–240 Vac
83–360 VA
66–432 VA
66–432 VA
67–432 VA
396–1896 VA
50/60 Hz 380–440 Vac
—
127–188 VA
127–188 VA
76–110 VA
1596–2156 VA
50/60 Hz 380–600 Vac
418–1080 VA
—
—
—
—
50/60 Hz 480–600 Vac
—
34–60 VA
34–60 VA
19–42 VA
230–384 VA
12–24 Vdc
29–120 W
164–631 W
164–631 W
145–610 W
396 W
48–60 Vdc
475–720 W
830–1580 W
830–1580 W
67–102 W
341–528 W
110–125 Vdc
99–121 W
112–150 W
112–150 W
121–150 W
264–350 W
220–250 Vdc
—
40–58W
40–58 W
46–55 W
374–475 W
Maximum load duration
Interrupts automatically
Interrupts automatically
Interrupts automatically
Interrupts automatically
Interrupts automatically
Maximum opening time
50 ms
50 ms
50 ms
62 ms
62 ms
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Switch (with High Magnetic Trip)
Unfused kAIC at 480 Vac (415 Vac)
65 (70)
65 (70)
65 (70)
65 (70)
65 (70)
Self-protected, will trip above
1250 for EG125;
1600 for EG160
2500
4000/6300
12,500
20,000
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-13
2.2
2
2
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
EG
Single-pole
JG
LG
H
W
D
H
W
D
H
W
D
5.50 (139.7)
1.00 (25.4)
2.99 (76.0)
—
—
—
—
—
—
Two-pole
5.50 (139.7)
2.00 (50.8)
2.99 (76.0)
7.00 (177.8)
4.13 (105.0)
3.57 (87.4)
—
—
—
Three-pole
5.50 (139.7)
3.00 (76.2)
2.99 (76.0)
7.00 (177.8)
4.13 (105.0)
3.57 (87.4)
10.13 (258.0)
5.48 (140.0)
4.09 (104.0)
2
Four-pole
5.50 (139.7)
4.00 (101.6)
2.99 (76.0)
7.00 (177.8)
5.34 (135.6)
3.57 (87.4)
10.13 (258.0)
7.22 (183.0)
4.09 (104.0)
2
Series G—Frame NG and RG
2
NG
2
RG
H
W
D
H
W
D
2
Single-pole
—
—
—
—
—
—
Two-pole
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
Three-pole
16.00 (406.0)
8.25 (210.0)
5.50 (140.0)
16.00 (406.0)
15.50 (394.0)
9.75 (229.0)
Four-pole
16.00 (406.0)
11.13 (280.0)
5.50 (140.0)
16.00 (406.0)
20.00 (508.0)
9.75 (229.0)
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
2
Series G—Frame EG, JG and LG
EG
JG
LG
NG
RG
2
Single-pole
0.85 (0.39)
—
—
—
—
2
Two-pole
1.57 (0.71)
11.3 (5.13)
—
—
—
Three-pole
2.28 (1.04)
5.06 (2.30) T/M
5.31 (2.41) ETU
12.36 (5.61) T/M
13.04 (5.92) ETU
46.8 (21.3)
103.0 (47.0)
Four-pole
2.85 (1.29)
6.76 (3.07) T/M
7.12 (3.23) ETU
16.27 (7.39) T/M
16.92 (7.68) ETU
62.0 (28.3)
118.4 (54.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-14
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
2.2
Contents
Description
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-16
V4-T2-17
V4-T2-26
V4-T2-27
V4-T2-27
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
EG breaker is HACR rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-15
2.2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Series G—EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes)
E G H 3 015 FF G
2
Frame
2
2
E
Amperes
2
2
2
2
2
B
E
S
H
C
K
Performance
600Y/347
480
415
—
18
18
18
25
25
22
35
40
25
65
70
35
100
100
Molded case switch 2
2
2
2
Number of Poles
Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
240
25
35
85
100
200
1 = One
2 = Two
3 = Three
4 = Four—neutral 0% protected
7 = Four—neutral 100% protected
016 1
015
020
025
030
032 1
035
040
045
050
060
063 1
070
080
090
100
110
125
160 1
Notes
1 Cannot be UL rated.
2 Available only as 125 and 160 A sizes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-16
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Terminations/Hardware
Terminals
Mounting Hardware
M = Metric end caps
Metric
E = Imperial end caps
Imperial
G = Line/load standard
Metric
B = Bolt-on
—
Trip Unit
FF = Fixed fixed
AF = Adjustable thermal fixed magnetic
KS = Molded case switch
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals
and Mounting Hardware) IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
EG-Frame
2
EG-Frame—18/18
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
2
Four-Pole 3
Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Adjustable 2
Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Adjustable 2
Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number
15
EGB1015FFG
EGB2015FFG
EGB3015FFG
—
EGB4015FFG
—
16
EGB1016FFG
EGB2016FFG
EGB3016FFG
—
EGB4016FFG
—
20
EGB1020FFG
EGB2020FFG
EGB3020FFG
—
EGB4020FFG
EGB4020AFG
25
EGB1025FFG
EGB2025FFG
EGB3025FFG
EGB3025AFG
EGB4025FFG
EGB4025AFG
30
EGB1030FFG
EGB2030FFG
EGB3030FFG
—
EGB4030FFG
—
32
EGB1032FFG
EGB2032FFG
EGB3032FFG
EGB3032AFG
EGB4032FFG
EGB4032AFG
35
EGB1035FFG
EGB2035FFG
EGB3035FFG
—
EGB4035FFG
—
40
EGB1040FFG
EGB2040FFG
EGB3040FFG
EGB3040AFG
EGB4040FFG
EGB4040AFG
45
EGB1045FFG
EGB2045FFG
EGB3045FFG
—
EGB4045FFG
—
50
EGB1050FFG
EGB2050FFG
EGB3050FFG
EGB3050AFG
EGB4050FFG
EGB4050AFG
60
EGB1060FFG
EGB2060FFG
EGB3060FFG
—
EGB4060FFG
—
63
EGB1063FFG
EGB2063FFG
EGB3063FFG
EGB3063AFG
EGB4063FFG
EGB4063AFG
70
EGB1070FFG
EGB2070FFG
EGB3070FFG
—
EGB4070FFG
—
80
EGB1080FFG
EGB2080FFG
EGB3080FFG
EGB3080AFG
EGB4080FFG
EGB4080AFG
90
EGB1090FFG
EGB2090FFG
EGB3090FFG
—
EGB4090FFG
—
100
EGB1100FFG
EGB2100FFG
EGB3100FFG
EGB3100AFG
EGB4100FFG
EGB4100AFG
110
EGB1110FFG
EGB2110FFG
EGB3110FFG
—
EGB4110FFG
—
125
EGB1125FFG
EGB2125FFG
EGB3125FFG
EGB3125AFG
EGB4125FFG
EGB4125AFG
160
—
—
EGB3160FFG
EGB3160AFG
EGB4160FFG
EGB4160AFG
2
2
2
Notes
1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-17
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
EG-Frame—25/25 Single-Pole Unavailable
2
EG-Frame
EG-Frame—25/25
Two-Pole
2
Four-Pole 3
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Maximum Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15
EGE2015FFG
EGE3015FFG
—
EGE4015FFG
—
2
16
EGE2016FFG
EGE3016FFG
—
EGE4016FFG
—
20
EGE2020FFG
EGE3020FFG
—
EGE4020FFG
EGE4020AFG
2
25
EGE2025FFG
EGE3025FFG
EGE3025AFG
EGE4025FFG
EGE4025AFG
30
EGE2030FFG
EGE3030FFG
—
EGE4030FFG
—
2
32
EGE2032FFG
EGE3032FFG
EGE3032AFG
EGE4032FFG
EGE4032AFG
2
35
EGE2035FFG
EGE3035FFG
—
EGE4035FFG
—
40
EGE2040FFG
EGE3040FFG
EGE3040AFG
EGE4040FFG
EGE4040AFG
2
45
EGE2045FFG
EGE3045FFG
EGE3050AFG
EGE4045FFG
—
50
EGE2050FFG
EGE3050FFG
—
EGE4050FFG
EGE4050AFG
2
60
EGE2060FFG
EGE3060FFG
—
EGE4060FFG
—
63
EGE2063FFG
EGE3063FFG
EGE3063AFG
EGE4063FFG
EGE4063AFG
2
70
EGE2070FFG
EGE3070FFG
—
EGE4070FFG
—
2
80
EGE2080FFG
EGE3080FFG
EGE3080AFG
EGE4080FFG
EGE4080AFG
90
EGE2090FFG
EGE3090FFG
—
EGE4090FFG
—
2
100
EGE2100FFG
EGE3100FFG
EGE3100AFG
EGE4100FFG
EGE4100AFG
125
EGE2125FFG
EGE3125FFG
EGE3125AFG
EGE4125FFG
EGE4125AFG
2
160
—
EGE3160FFG
EGE3160AFG
EGE4160FFG
EGE4160AFG
2
Notes
1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-18
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame
EG-Frame—40/35
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
2
Four-Pole 3
Three-Pole
2
2
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable
Thermal, Fixed
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable
Thermal, Fixed
Magnetic
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15
EGS1015FFG
EGS2015FFG
EGS3015FFG
—
EGS4015FFG
—
16
EGS1016FFG
EGS2016FFG
EGS3016FFG
—
EGS4016FFG
—
20
EGS1020FFG
EGS2020FFG
EGS3020FFG
—
EGS4020FFG
EGS4020AFG
25
EGS1025FFG
EGS2025FFG
EGS3025FFG
EGS3025AFG
EGS4025FFG
EGS4025AFG
30
EGS1030FFG
EGS2030FFG
EGS3030FFG
—
EGS4030FFG
—
32
EGS1032FFG
EGS2032FFG
EGS3032FFG
EGS3032AFG
EGS4032FFG
EGS4032AFG
35
EGS1035FFG
EGS2035FFG
EGS3035FFG
—
EGS4035FFG
—
40
EGS1040FFG
EGS2040FFG
EGS3040FFG
EGS3040AFG
EGS4040FFG
EGS4040AFG
45
EGS1045FFG
EGS2045FFG
EGS3045FFG
—
EGS4045FFG
—
50
EGS1050FFG
EGS2050FFG
EGS3050FFG
EGS3050AFG
EGS4050FFG
EGS4050AFG
60
EGS1060FFG
EGS2060FFG
EGS3060FFG
—
EGS4060FFG
—
63
EGS1063FFG
EGS2063FFG
EGS3063FFG
EGS3063AFG
EGS4063FFG
EGS4063AFG
70
EGS1070FFG
EGS2070FFG
EGS3070FFG
—
EGS4070FFG
—
80
EGS1080FFG
EGS2080FFG
EGS3080FFG
EGS3080AFG
EGS4080FFG
EGS4080AFG
90
EGS1090FFG
EGS2090FFG
EGS3090FFG
—
EGS4090FFG
—
100
EGS1100FFG
EGS2100FFG
EGS3100FFG
EGS3100AFG
EGS4100FFG
EGS4100AFG
125
EGS1125FFG
EGS2125FFG
EGS3125FFG
EGS3125AFG
EGS4125FFG
EGS4125AFG
160
—
—
EGS3160FFG
EGS3160AFG
EGS4160FFG
EGS4160AFG
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
2
2
2
Notes
1 16, 32, 63 and 160 A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-19
2.2
2
EG-Frame
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame—70/65
Single-Pole
2
Two-Pole
Four-Pole 3
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed
Magnetic
2
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
15
EGH1015FFG
EGH2015FFG
EGH3015FFG
—
EGH4015FFG
—
2
16
EGH1016FFG
EGH2016FFG
EGH3016FFG
—
EGH4016FFG
—
20
EGH1020FFG
EGH2020FFG
EGH3020FFG
EGH3020AFG
EGH4020FFG
EGH4020AFG
2
25
EGH1025FFG
EGH2025FFG
EGH3025FFG
EGH3025AFG
EGH4025FFG
EGH4025AFG
30
EGH1030FFG
EGH2030FFG
EGH3030FFG
—
EGH4030FFG
—
2
32
EGH1032FFG
EGH2032FFG
EGH3032FFG
EGH3032AFG
EGH4032FFG
EGH4032AFG
2
35
EGH1035FFG
EGH2035FFG
EGH3035FFG
—
EGH4035FFG
—
40
EGH1040FFG
EGH2040FFG
EGH3040FFG
EGH3040AFG
EGH4040FFG
EGH4040AFG
2
45
EGH1045FFG
EGH2045FFG
EGH3045FFG
—
EGH4045FFG
EGH4050AFG
50
EGH1050FFG
EGH2050FFG
EGH3050FFG
EGH3050AFG
EGH4050FFG
—
2
60
EGH1060FFG
EGH2060FFG
EGH3060FFG
—
EGH4060FFG
—
63
EGH1063FFG
EGH2063FFG
EGH3063FFG
EGH3063AFG
EGH4063FFG
EGH4063AFG
2
70
EGH1070FFG
EGH2070FFG
EGH3070FFG
—
EGH4070FFG
—
2
80
EGH1080FFG
EGH2080FFG
EGH3080FFG
EGH3080AFG
EGH4080FFG
EGH4080AFG
90
EGH1090FFG
EGH2090FFG
EGH3090FFG
—
EGH4090FFG
—
100
EGH1100FFG
EGH2100FFG
EGH3100FFG
EGH3100AFG
EGH4100FFG
EGH4100AFG
125
EGH1125FFG
EGH2125FFG
EGH3125FFG
EGH3125AFG
EGH4125FFG
EGH4125AFG
2
2
Notes
1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal are not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100% neutral protection. Neutral is on the LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-20
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame—100/100 Current Limiting (Single-Pole and Two-Pole Unavailable)
EG-Frame
2
2
EG-Frame—100/100
Four-Pole 0% Protected Neutral 3
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable 2
Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
2
Maximum Continuous
Amps at 40 °C 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
15
EGC3015FFG
—
EGC7015FFG
—
16
EGC3016FFG
—
EGC7016FFG
—
2
20
EGC3020FFG
EGC3020AFG
EGC7020FFG
EGC7020AFG
25
EGC3025FFG
EGC3025AFG
EGC7025FFG
EGC7025AFG
30
EGC3030FFG
—
EGC7030FFG
—
32
EGC3032FFG
EGC3032AFG
EGC7032FFG
EGC7032AFG
35
EGC3035FFG
—
EGC7035FFG
—
40
EGC3040FFG
EGC3040AFG
EGC7040FFG
EGC7040AFG
45
EGC3045FFG
—
EGC7045FFG
—
50
EGC3050FFG
EGC3050AFG
EGC7050FFG
EGC7050AFG
60
EGC3060FFG
—
EGC7060FFG
—
63
EGC3063FFG
EGC3063AFG
EGC7063FFG
EGC7063AFG
70
EGC3070FFG
—
EGC7070FFG
—
80
EGC3080FFG
EGC3080AFG
EGC7080FFG
EGC7080AFG
90
EGC3090FFG
—
EGC7090FFG
—
100
EGC3100FFG
EGC3100AFG
EGC7100FFG
EGC7100AFG
125
EGC3125FFG
EGC3125AFG
EGC7125FFG
EGC7125AFG
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Switches 4
2
Catalog
Number
2
EGK3125KSG
EGK7125KSG
2
EGK3160KSG
2
EGK7160KSG
Notes
1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings.
2 Adjustable thermal is not UL listed.
3 Change the fourth digit to 7 for 100%
neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
4 Molded case switches may open above 1250 A.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-21
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
EG Bolt-On Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit and Mounting Hardware)
2
EG-Frame
EG-Frame—18 kAIC at 480 Vac
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number 1
Catalog
Number 2
Catalog
Number 3
15
EGB1015FFB
EGB2015FFB
EGB3015FFB
20
EGB1020FFB
EGB2020FFB
EGB3020FFB
25
EGB1025FFB
EGB2025FFB
EGB3025FFB
2
30
EGB1030FFB
EGB2030FFB
EGB3030FFB
2
35
EGB1035FFB
EGB2035FFB
EGB3035FFB
40
EGB1040FFB
EGB2040FFB
EGB3040FFB
2
45
EGB1045FFB
EGB2045FFB
EGB3045FFB
50
EGB1050FFB
EGB2050FFB
EGB3050FFB
2
60
EGB1060FFB
EGB2060FFB
EGB3060FFB
2
70
EGB1070FFB
EGB2070FFB
EGB3070FFB
80
EGB1080FFB
EGB2080FFB
EGB3080FFB
2
90
EGB1090FFB
EGB2090FFB
EGB3090FFB
100
EGB1100FFB
EGB2100FFB
EGB3100FFB
2
110
EGB1110FFB
EGB2110FFB
EGB3110FFB
125
EGB1125FFB
EGB2125FFB
EGB3125FFB
2
2
2
2
2
EG-Frame
EG-Frame—35 kAIC at 480 Vac
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number 1
Catalog
Number 2
Catalog
Number 3
15
EGS1015FFB
EGS2015FFB
EGS3015FFB
2
20
EGS1020FFB
EGS2020FFB
EGS3020FFB
2
25
EGS1025FFB
EGS2025FFB
EGS3025FFB
30
EGS1030FFB
EGS2030FFB
EGS3030FFB
2
35
EGS1035FFB
EGS2035FFB
EGS3035FFB
40
EGS1040FFB
EGS2040FFB
EGS3040FFB
2
45
EGS1045FFB
EGS2045FFB
EGS3045FFB
2
50
EGS1050FFB
EGS2050FFB
EGS3050FFB
60
EGS1060FFB
EGS2060FFB
EGS3060FFB
2
70
EGS1070FFB
EGS2070FFB
EGS3070FFB
80
EGS1080FFB
EGS2080FFB
EGS3080FFB
2
90
EGS1090FFB
EGS2090FFB
EGS3090FFB
100
EGS1100FFB
EGS2100FFB
EGS3100FFB
110
EGS1110FFB
EGS2110FFB
EGS3110FFB
125
EGS1125FFB
EGS2125FFB
EGS3125FFB
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24.
2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12.
3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-22
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame
2.2
EG-Frame—65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Amps at 40 °C
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Fixed Thermal, Fixed Magnetic
Catalog
Number 1
Catalog
Number 2
Catalog
Number 3
15
EGH1015FFB
EGH2015FFB
EGH3015FFB
20
EGH1020FFB
EGH2020FFB
EGH3020FFB
25
EGH1025FFB
EGH2025FFB
EGH3025FFB
30
EGH1030FFB
EGH2030FFB
EGH3030FFB
35
EGH1035FFB
EGH2035FFB
EGH3035FFB
40
EGH1040FFB
EGH2040FFB
EGH3040FFB
45
EGH1045FFB
EGH2045FFB
EGH3045FFB
50
EGH1050FFB
EGH2050FFB
EGH3050FFB
60
EGH1060FFB
EGH2060FFB
EGH3060FFB
70
EGH1070FFB
EGH2070FFB
EGH3070FFB
80
EGH1080FFB
EGH2080FFB
EGH3080FFB
90
EGH1090FFB
EGH2090FFB
EGH3090FFB
100
EGH1100FFB
EGH2100FFB
EGH3100FFB
110
EGH1110FFB
EGH2110FFB
EGH3110FFB
125
EGH1125FFB
EGH2125FFB
EGH3125FFB
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Load Terminals
Maximum Breaker
Amps
Terminal,
Body
Material
Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire Range
(Package of Three Terminals)
Catalog
Number
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2.5–50
#14–1/0
3TA125EF
60–125
Aluminum
Cu/Al
16–70
#6–3/0
3TA150EF
2
2
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
15–50
2
2
Notes
1 For bulk pack 24, add suffix BP24 and order quantities of 24.
2 For bulk pack 12, add suffix BP12 and order quantities of 12.
3 For bulk pack 8, add suffix BP8 and order quantities of 8.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-23
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
EG-Frame
2
2
2
2
2
2
3T125EF
3TA125EF
3TA150EF
3TA160EFK
EF2RTWK, Two-Pole–Metric
EF3RTWK, Three-Pole–Metric
EF4RTWK, Four-Pole–Metric
EF2RTDK, Two-Pole–Imperial
EF3RTDK, Three-Pole–Imperial
EF4RTDK, Four-Pole–Imperial
2
2
2
Line and Load Terminals
2
Maximum
Breaker
Amps
2
2
2
2
2
2
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire
Range
(Package of
Three Terminals)
Catalog
Number
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
125
Steel
Al
4–6
#12-10
3T125EF 1
125
Steel
Cu
2.5–95
#14-3/0
3T125EF 1
125
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2.5–50
#14-1/0
3TA125EF
160
Aluminum
Cu/Al
16–70
#6-3/0
3TA150EF
160
Aluminum
Cu/Al
35–120
#3-250
3TA160EFK
160
Aluminum
Cu/Al
35–120
#3-250
4TA160EFK 2
EG-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have line and load terminals
as standard equipment.
2
Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely
with screw and washer.
2
Caution: Collar must surround conductor.
2
2
2
Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion. Tighten securely with screw and washer.
Endcap kits are used on the E-Frame breaker line side to connect busbar or similar electrical
connections. Includes hardware.
Notes
1 Standard line and load terminals.
2 Four-pole kit with four terminals.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-24
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Control Wire
Terminal Kit
GCWTK
Multiwire
Connectors
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Control Wire Terminal Kit
Terminal End Covers (Gas Barrier)
The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers
only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity
(one per circuit breaker) when ordering.
Catalog
Number
Control wire terminal kit
5652B38G01
Package of 12—priced individually
Interphase Barriers
Catalog
Number
EIPBK
Package of 12—priced individually
The interphase barrier is available for extended insulation
between circuit breaker poles. Specify quantity when ordering.
Base Mounting Hardware—DIN Rail Mounting
Catalog
Number
DIN rail adapter—single-pole
EF1DIN
DIN rail adapter—two-pole
EGDIN
DIN rail adapter—three- or four-pole
EF34DIN
Metal DIN rail adapter—three-pole
EGGDDIN
Metric base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker
or molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required
separately, order S/N 8703C80G08.
2
2
2
Terminal End Covers
For use with steel or stainless steel standard line and load
terminals only.
Interphase barriers
2.2
Conductor Opening Diameter
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
2
6.35 (0.25)
EEC3K
10.41 (0.41)
EEC4K
2
Multiwire Connectors
Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end
terminals. They are used to distribute the load from the circuit
breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate
distribution terminal blocks.
2
2
2
Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, terminal shield
insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three
mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side
(OFF) end.
2
EG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information
(Package of 3) 1
2
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalog
Number
2
125
3
14–2
3TA125E3K
125
6
14–6
3TA125E6K
2
2
2
Note
1 For four-pole kit, change “3” at beginning of catalog number to “4.”
2
Note: English mounting hardware kit can be supplied separate. Catalog
number is BMHE #6–32 x 3 inches for two-, three- and four-pole. Singlepole mounting hardware metric order 8703C80G11. English hardware
8703C80G12. Both sold in quantities of 100.
2
2
Terminal Shields
The terminal shield is available for line terminal areas in threeand four-pole circuit breakers. Special terminal shields are also
available for use when an electrical (solenoid) operator is
mounted on the circuit breaker. The standard style number by
pole for each terminal shield is for a package of 10 and is priced
per each package. Special terminal shields are packaged
individually.
2
2
2
Terminal Shields—IP30 Protection
2
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
2
3
EFTS3K
4
EFTS4K
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-25
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
2
EG-Frame Accessories
2
2
2
2
2
Reference
Page
Description
SinglePole
Two-Pole
Center
Left
Right
Left
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
Neutral
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Internal Accessories
(Only one internal accessory per pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-109
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)
V4-T2-109
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
V4-T2-109
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-109
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
■
2
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-109
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
Shunt trip—standard
V4-T2-109
—
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
—
2
Undervoltage release mechanism
V4-T2-110
—
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
—
2
2
External Accessories
End cap kit
V4-T2-25
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Control wire terminal kit
V4-T2-25
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Multiwire connectors
V4-T2-25
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-25
●
Terminal shields
V4-T2-25
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Terminal end covers
V4-T2-25
—
—
—
●
●
●
—
—
—
—
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-25
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Non-padlockable handle block
V4-T2-107
■
■
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
2
Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-107
■
■
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-107
—
—
■
❏
—
❏
❏
—
❏
—
2
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-107
—
—
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-107
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Electrical operator
V4-T2-107
—
—
—
●
●
●
—
—
—
—
2
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-418
—
—
—
●
●
●
—
—
—
—
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
2
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-105
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement
SA and SB
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-26
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings
2
Volts DC 1
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
120
Icu
Ics
277
347
Icu
Ics
480
EGB125
1
35
25
25
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
—
—
2, 3, 4
—
25
25
—
—
18
18
18
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
EGE125
2, 3, 4
—
35
35
—
—
25
25
25
18
—
—
—
—
10
10
EGS125
1
100
85
43
35
22
—
—
—
—
—
—
35
35
—
—
2, 3, 4
—
85
43
—
—
40
30
35
22
—
—
—
—
35
35
EGH125
1
200
100
50
65
30
—
—
—
—
—
—
42
42
—
—
2, 3, 4
220–240
690 2
380–415
600Y/ 347
Icu
250 34
125
Ics
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
—
100
50
—
—
70
35
65
25
—
—
—
—
42
42
EGC125 5 3, 4
—
200
200
—
—
100
100
100
35
—
—
—
—
42
42
EGB160 2 3, 4
—
25
25
—
—
18
18
18
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
EGE160 2 3, 4
—
35
35
—
—
25
25
25
18
—
—
—
—
10
10
EGS160 2 3, 4
—
85
43
—
—
40
30
35
22
—
—
—
—
35
35
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Dimensions and Weights
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
2
EG-Frame
Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
1
1.00 (25.4)
5.50 (139.7)
2.99 (75.9)
2
2.00 (50.8)
5.50 (139.7)
2.99 (75.9)
3
3.00 (76.2)
5.50 (139.7)
2.99 (75.9)
4
4.00 (101.6)
5.50 (139.7)
2.99 (75.9)
2
2
2
2
EG-Frame
Front Cover Cutout
Front View Three-Pole
2
Side View
2
CL
Breaker
1.85
(47.0)
0.14 (3.6) R
0.90
(22.9)
1.30 Dia.
(33.0)
0.47 (11.9)
0.94 (23.9)
3.00
(76.2)
2
5.50
(139.7)
3.03
(77.0)
CL
Handle
2
2
2.77
(70.4)
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
2
EG-Frame
Breaker Type
Number of Poles
1
Breaker Type
Number of Poles
3
2
3
4
EGB125
1.5 (0.68)
2.0 (0.91)
3.0 (1.36)
4.9 (1.82)
4
EGB160
3.0 (1.36)
4.9 (1.82)
EGC125
1.5 (0.68)
2.0 (0.91)
3.0 (1.36)
4.9 (1.82)
EGE160
3.0 (1.36)
4.9 (1.82)
EGE125
1.5 (0.68)
2.0 (0.91)
3.0 (1.36)
4.9 (1.82)
EGS160
3.0 (1.36)
4.9 (1.82)
EGH125
1.5 (0.68)
2.0 (0.91)
3.0 (1.36)
4.9 (1.82)
EGS125
1.5 (0.68)
2.0 (0.91)
3.0 (1.36)
4.9 (1.82)
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 IEC only.
3 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
4 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA.
5 Current limiting per UL 489.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
V4-T2-27
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
10.26
(260.6)
2
4.75
(120.6)
2
0.55 (14.0)
2
1.49
1.00 (37.8)
(25.4)
0.50
(12.7)
2
1.50 0.50
(38.1) (12.7)
2
2
4.78
(121.4)
8.59
(218.2)
2
0.90 (22.9)
0.35 (8.9)
2
2
0.09
(2.29)
2
EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module
2
2
0.56
(14.2)
2
2
2
3.01
(76.5)
2.75
(69.9)
0.78
(19.8)
2
2
2.00
(50.8)
0.70 (17.8)
2
2
3-Pole
2.98
(75.7)
1.00
(25.4)
2
1.00
(25.4)
3.00
(76.2)
9.66
(245.4)
4.17
(105.9)
3.61
(91.7)
0.50
1.00 (12.7)
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
2
2
3.20
(81.3)
2
4.17
(105.9)
2
2
2
2.75 0.09
(69.9) (2.3)
2
0.78
(19.8)
2
0.41
(10.4)
2
V4-T2-28
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
3.98
(101.1)
3.17
(80.5)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
2.2
Contents
Description
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-15
2
2
V4-T2-30
V4-T2-31
V4-T2-42
V4-T2-43
V4-T2-45
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
2
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
JG breaker is HACR rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-29
2.2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Series G—JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes)
J G S 3 250 FA G C
2
Frame
2
2
Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
2
2
E
S
H
C
U
X
K
2
2
2
Performance
600
480
415
18
25
25
18
35
40
25
65
70
35
100
100
50
150
150
50
200
200
Molded case switch
Number of Poles
240
65
85
100
200
200
200
2 = Two
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected
9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected
Amperes
050
070
080
090
100
125
150
160
175
200
225
250
2
2
2
Trip
JT
Number of Poles
2 = Two
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% Protected
9 = Four—Neutral 100% Protected
2
2
2
2
2
2
Trip Unit
AA = Adj. adj.
FA = Fixed adj.
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
NN = Frame only (250 A only; no trip unit)
JT 4 100 FA B20
2
2
Terminations/Hardware
Terminals
Mounting Hardware
M = Metric end caps
Metric
E = Imperial end caps
Imperial
G = Line/load standard
Metric
W = Without terminals
Trip Unit
2
2
Rating
Blank = 80% rated
C = 100% rated
F01 = Freeze tested for –70ºF (–57ºC)
F02 = Freeze tested for –22ºF (–30ºC)
J
Amperes
T/M
ETU
080
050
090
100
100
160
110
250
125
150
160
175
200
225
250
Trip Unit
AA = Adj. adj.
FA = Fixed adj.
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
Notes
1 Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features.
2 B21 and B22 available with LSG and LSIG trip units.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-30
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Features (ETU Only) 12
Blank= No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals
and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
2
JG-Frame
JG-Frame
2
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25
Four-Pole 0%2
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic 1
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70
350–700
JGE2070FAG
JGE3070FAG
—
JGE4070FAG
—
90
450–900
JGE2090FAG
JGE3090FAG
—
JGE4090FAG
—
100
500–1000
JGE2100FAG
JGE3100FAG
JGE3100AAG
JGE4100FAG
JGE4100AAG
125
625–1250
JGE2125FAG
JGE3125FAG
JGE3125AAG
JGE4125FAG
JGE4125AAG
150
750–1550
JGE2150FAG
JGE3150FAG
—
JGE4150FAG
—
160
800–1600
—
—
JGE3160AAG
—
JGE4160AAG
175
875–1750
JGE2175FAG
JGE3175FAG
—
JGE4175FAG
—
200
1000–2000
JGE2200FAG
JGE3200FAG
JGE3200AAG
JGE4200FAG
JGE4200AAG
225
1125–2250
JGE2225FAG
JGE3225FAG
—
JGE4225FAG
—
250
1250–2500
JGE2250FAG
JGE3250FAG
JGE3250AAG
JGE4250FAG
JGE4250AAG
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35, Two-Pole
Four-Pole 0%2
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic 1
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70
350–700
JGS2070FAG
JGS3070FAG
—
JGS4070FAG
—
90
450–900
JGS2090FAG
JGS3090FAG
—
JGS4090FAG
—
100
500–1000
JGS2100FAG
JGS3100FAG
JGS3100AAG
JGS4100FAG
JGS4100AAG
125
625–1250
JGS2125FAG
JGS3125FAG
JGS3125AAG
JGS4125FAG
JGS4125AAG
150
750–1550
JGS2150FAG
JGS3150FAG
—
JGS4150FAG
—
160
800–1600
—
—
JGS3160AAG
—
JGS4160AAG
175
875–1750
JGS2175FAG
JGS3175FAG
—
JGS4175FAG
—
200
1000–2000
JGS2200FAG
JGS3200FAG
JGS3200AAG
JGS4200FAG
JGS4200AAG
225
1125–2250
JGS2225FAG
JGS3225FAG
—
JGS4225FAG
—
250
1250–2500
JGS2250FAG
JGS3250FAG
JGS3250AAG
JGS4250FAG
JGS4250AAG
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0.
2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-31
2.2
2
JG-Frame
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65
2
Four-Pole 0%2
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable
Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable
1
Magnetic
Fixed Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Fixed Magnetic 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
2
70
350–700
JGH2070FAG
JGH3070FAG
—
JGH4070FAG
—
90
450–900
JGH2090FAG
JGH3090FAG
—
JGH4090FAG
—
100
500–1000
JGH2100FAG
JGH3100FAG
JGH3100AAG
JGH4100FAG
JGH4100AAG
125
625–1250
JGH2125FAG
JGH3125FAG
JGH3125AAG
JGH4125FAG
JGH4125AAG
150
750–1550
JGH2150FAG
JGH3150FAG
—
JGH4150FAG
—
2
160
800–1600
—
—
JGH3160AAG
—
JGH4160AAG
2
175
875–1750
JGH2175FAG
JGH3175FAG
—
JGH4175FAG
—
200
1000–2000
JGH2200FAG
JGH3200FAG
JGH3200AAG
JGH4200FAG
JGH4200AAG
225
1125–2250
JGH2225FAG
JGH3225FAG
—
JGH4225FAG
—
250
1250–2500
JGH2250FAG
JGH3250FAG
JGH3250AAG
JGH4250FAG
JGH4250AAG
2
2
2
2
Magnetic
Range
Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0.
2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-32
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 100/100, 150/150
JG-Frame
2
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting
2
Four-Pole 0% 2
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
2
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
70
350–700
JGC3070FAG
—
JGC4070FAG
—
80
400–800
—
JGC3080AAG
—
JGC4080AAG
2
90
450–900
JGC3090FAG
—
JGC4090FAG
—
100
500–1000
JGC3100FAG
JGC3100AAG
JGC4100FAG
JGC4100AAG
125
625–1250
JGC3125FAG
JGC3125AAG
JGC4125FAG
JGC4125AAG
150
750–1550
JGC3150FAG
—
JGC4150FAG
—
160
800–1600
—
JGC3160AAG
—
JGC4160AAG
175
875–1750
JGC3175FAG
—
JGC4175FAG
—
200
1000–2000
JGC3200FAG
JGC3200AAG
JGC4200FAG
JGC4200AAG
225
1125–2250
JGC3225FAG
—
JGC4225FAG
—
250
1250–2500
JGC3250FAG
JGC3250AAG
JGC4250FAG
JGC4250AAG
2
2
2
2
2
2
JG-Frame
2
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting
Four-Pole 0% 2
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
2
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
70
350–700
JGU3070FAG
—
JGU4070FAG
—
80
400–800
—
JGU3080AAG
—
JGU4080AAG
2
90
450–900
JGU3090FAG
—
JGU4090FAG
—
100
500–1000
JGU3100FAG
JGU3100AAG
JGU4100FAG
JGU4100AAG
125
625–1250
JGU3125FAG
JGU3125AAG
JGU4125FAG
JGU4125AAG
150
750–1550
JGU3150FAG
—
JGU4150FAG
—
160
800–1600
—
JGU3160AAG
—
JGU4160AAG
175
875–1750
JGU3175FAG
—
JGU4175FAG
—
200
1000–2000
JGU3200FAG
JGU3200AAG
JGU4200FAG
JGU4200AAG
225
1125–2250
JGU3225FAG
—
JGU4225FAG
—
250
1250–2500
JGU3250FAG
JGU3250AAG
JGU4250FAG
JGU4250AAG
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is 0.8 and 1.0.
2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-33
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Two-Pole not available in IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200
2
JG-Frame
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA 200/200, Current Limiting
Four-Pole 2
Three-Pole
2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
2
70
350–700
JGX3070FAG
—
JGX4070FAG
—
80
400–800
—
JGX3080AAG
—
JGX4080AAG
2
90
450–900
JGX3090FAG
—
JGX4090FAG
—
100
500–1000
JGX3100FAG
JGX3100AAG
JGX4100FAG
JGX4100AAG
2
125
625–1250
JGX3125FAG
JGX3125AAG
JGX4125FAG
JGX4125AAG
2
150
750–1550
JGX3150FAG
—
JGX4150FAG
—
160
800–1600
—
JGX3160AAG
—
JGX4160AAG
2
175
875–1750
JGX3175FAG
—
JGX4175FAG
—
200
1000–2000
JGX3200FAG
JGX3200AAG
JGX4200FAG
JGX4200AAG
2
225
1125–2250
JGX3225FAG
—
JGX4225FAG
—
250
1250–2500
JGX3250FAG
JGX3250AAG
JGX4250FAG
JGX4250AAG
2
2
2
Molded Case Switches 3
Catalog
Number
2
JGK3250KSG
2
JGK7250KSG
Notes
1 EC-EN 60947-2 only. Adjustment is
0.8 and 1.0.
2 9 for 0–100% neutral protection. Neutral is on LH side.
3 Molded case switches will trip above
2500 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-34
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
Maximum
Amperes
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole 0%
2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
JGE2250NN
JGE3250NN
JGE4250NN
2
JGS2250NN
JGS3250NN
JGS4250NN
JGH2250NN
JGH3250NN
JGH4250NN
2
JGC4250NN
2
25/25
250
2
40/35
250
2
70/65
250
100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489
250
—
JGC3250NN
150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489
250
—
JGU4250NN
2
JGX3250NN
JGX4250NN
2
JGE3250NNC
—
2
JGS3250NNC
—
JGH3250NNC
—
JGU3250NN
200/200 Current Limiting Per UL 489
250
—
25/25 100% Rated Per UL 489
250
2
—
40/35 100% Rated Per UL 489
250
2
2
—
2
70/65 100% Rated Per UL 489 2
250
—
2
2
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Ampere
Rating
Range
Catalog
Number
Range
Catalog
Number
70
350–700
JT2070FA
JT3070FA
—
—
JT4070FA
—
80
400–800
—
JT3080FA
JT3080AA 3
64–100
—
JT4080AA 3
2
90
450–900
JT2090FA
JT3090FA
—
—
JT4090FA
—
100
500–1000
JT2100FA
JT3100FA
JT3100AA 3
80–100
JT4100FA
JT4100AA 3
125
625–1250
JT2125FA
JT3125FA
JT3125AA 3
100–125
JT4125FA
JT4125AA 3
150
750–1550
JT2150FA
JT3150FA
—
—
JT4150FA
—
160
800–1600
—
—
JT3160AA 3
128–160
—
JT4160AA 3
175
875–1750
JT2175FA
JT3175FA
—
—
JT4175FA
—
200
1000–2000
JT2200FA
JT3200FA
JT3200AA 3
160–200
JT4200FA
JT4200AA 3
225
1125–2250
JT2225FA
JT3225FA
—
—
JT4225FA
—
250
1250–2500
JT2250FA
JT3250FA
JT3250AA 3
200–250
JT4250FA
JT4250AA 3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Standard line and load terminals.
2 Components—100% rated frame.
3 Adjustable thermal trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-35
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
310+ Electronic Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-44.
2
JG 310+ Electronic Trip Units
2
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for LSG
and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50
JT305033
JT305032
JT305035
JT305036
JGFCT050
2
100
JT310033
JT310032
JT310035
JT310036
JGFCT100
160
JT316033
JT316032
JT316035
JT316036
JGFCT160
2
250
JT325033
JT325032
JT325035
JT325036
JGFCT250
2
50
JT405033
JT405032
JT405035
JT405036
—
2
100
JT410033
JT410032
JT410035
JT410036
—
160
JT416033
JT416032
JT416035
JT416036
—
2
250
JT425033
JT425032
JT425035
JT425036
—
2
2
Ampere
Rating
Three-Pole
Four-Pole 23
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
2
Description
Catalog
Number
2
Electronic portable test kit
MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
5108A03H01
2
External neutral sensor (250 A)
JGFCT250
2
External neutral sensor (160 A)
JGFCT160
External neutral sensor (100 A)
JGFCT100
2
External neutral sensor (80 A)
JGFCT050
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication
TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEWR06
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 For use on a three-pole breaker used in a four-wire system if ground fault protection for the
neutral is required.
2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is
not adjustable.
3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-36
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Complete Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-44.
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA—25/25
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50
JGE305033G
JGE305032G
JGE305035G
JGE305036G
JGFCT050
100
JGE310033G
JGE310032G
JGE310035G
JGE310036G
JGFCT100
160
JGE316033G
JGE316032G
JGE316035G
JGE316036G
JGFCT160
250
JGE325033G
JGE325032G
JGE325035G
JGE325036G
JGFCT250
2
50
JGE405033G
JGE405032G
JGE405035G
JGE405036G
—
2
100
JGE410033G
JGE410032G
JGE410035G
JGE410036G
—
160
JGE416033G
JGE416032G
JGE416035G
JGE416036G
—
250
JGE425033G
JGE425032G
JGE425035G
JGE425036G
—
Ampere
Rating
2
2
Three-Pole
2
2
Four-Pole 2
2
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA—40/35
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
50
JGS305033G
JGS305032G
JGS305035G
JGS305036G
JGFCT050
100
JGS310033G
JGS310032G
JGS310035G
JGS310036G
JGFCT100
160
JGS316033G
JGS316032G
JGS316035G
JGS316036G
JGFCT160
250
JGS325033G
JGS325032G
JGS325035G
JGS325036G
JGFCT250
2
50
JGS405033G
JGS405032G
JGS405035G
JGS405036G
—
2
100
JGS410033G
JGS410032G
JGS410035G
JGS410036G
—
160
JGS416033G
JGS416032G
JGS416035G
JGS416036G
—
250
JGS425033G
JGS425032G
JGS425035G
JGS425036G
—
Ampere
Rating
Three-Pole
2
2
Four-Pole 23
2
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA—70/65
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
50
JGH305033G
JGH305032G
JGH305035G
JGH305036G
JGFCT050
2
100
JGH310033G
JGH310032G
JGH310035G
JGH310036G
JGFCT100
160
JGH316033G
JGH316032G
JGH316035G
JGH316036G
JGFCT160
250
JGH325033G
JGH325032G
JGH325035G
JGH325036G
JGFCT250
2
50
JGH405033G
JGH405032G
JGH405035G
JGH405036G
—
2
100
JGH410033G
JGH410032G
JGH410035G
JGH410036G
—
160
JGH416033G
JGH416032G
JGH416035G
JGH416036G
—
250
JGH425033G
JGH425032G
JGH425035G
JGH425036G
—
Ampere
Rating
Three-Pole
2
Four-Pole 2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
V4-T2-37
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
IEC/UL/CSA—100/100, Current Limiting Per UL 489
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50
JGC305033G
JGC305032G
JGC305035G
JGC305036G
JGFCT050
100
JGC310033G
JGC310032G
JGC310035G
JGC310036G
JGFCT100
2
160
JGC316033G
JGC316032G
JGC316035G
JGC316036G
JGFCT160
2
250
JGC335033G
JGC325032G
JGC325035G
JGC325036G
JGFCT250
Four-Pole 2
2
2
2
Ampere
Rating
Three-Pole
2
50
JGC405033G
JGC405032G
JGC405035G
JGC405036G
—
100
JGC410033G
JGC410032G
JGC410035G
JGC410036G
—
2
160
JGC416033G
JGC416032G
JGC416035G
JGC416036G
—
250
JGC435033G
JGC425032G
JGC425035G
JGC425036G
—
2
2
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA—150/150, Current Limiting Per UL 489
Ampere
Rating
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole
2
50
JGU305033G
JGU305032G
JGU305035G
JGU305036G
JGFCT050
2
100
JGU310033G
JGU310032G
JGU310035G
JGU310036G
JGFCT100
160
JGU316033G
JGU316032G
JGU316035G
JGU316036G
JGFCT160
2
250
JGU335033G
JGU325032G
JGU325035G
JGU325036G
JGFCT250
2
50
JGU405033G
JGU405032G
JGU405035G
JGU405036G
—
100
JGU410033G
JGU410032G
JGU410035G
JGU410036G
—
160
JGU416033G
JGU416032G
JGU416035G
JGU416036G
—
250
JGU435033G
JGU425032G
JGU425035G
JGU425036G
—
2
2
2
Four-Pole 23
IEC/UL/CSA—200/200, Current Limiting Per UL 489
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50
JGX305033G
JGX305032G
JGX305035G
JGX305036G
JGFCT050
2
100
JGX310033G
JGX310032G
JGX310035G
JGX310036G
JGFCT100
160
JGX316033G
JGX316032G
JGX316035G
JGX316036G
JGFCT160
2
250
JGX325033G
JGX325032G
JGX325035G
JGX325036G
JGFCT250
2
2
2
Ampere
Rating
Three-Pole
Four-Pole 2
2
50
JGX405033G
JGX405032G
JGX405035G
JGX405036G
—
2
100
JGX410033G
JGX410032G
JGX410035G
JGX410036G
—
160
JGX416033G
JGX416032G
JGX416035G
JGX416036G
—
250
JGX425033G
JGX425032G
JGX425035G
JGX425036G
—
2
2
2
Notes
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2 Neutral protection 4 = 0%, 7 = 100% electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
3 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
2
V4-T2-38
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
JG-Frame
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—25/25
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—70/65
Three-Pole
Three-Pole
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
Magnetic
Range
Catalog
Number
70
350–700
JGE3070FAGC
70
350–700
JGH3070FAGC
90
450–900
JGE3090FAGC
90
450–900
JGH3090FAGC
100
500–1000
JGE3100FAGC
100
500–1000
JGH3100FAGC
125
625–1250
JGE3125FAGC
125
625–1250
JGH3125FAGC
150
750–1550
JGE3150FAGC
150
750–1550
JGH3150FAGC
160
800–1600
—
160
800–1600
—
175
875–1750
JGE3175FAGC
175
875–1750
JGH3175FAGC
200
1000–2000
JGE3200FAGC
200
1000–2000
JGH3200FAGC
225
1125–2250
JGE3225FAGC
225
1125–2250
JGH3225FAGC
250
1250–2500
JGE3250FAGC
250
1250–2500
JGH3250FAGC
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Catalog
Number
70
350–700
JGS3070FAGC
90
450–900
JGS3090FAGC
100
500–1000
JGS3100FAGC
125
625–1250
JGS3125FAGC
150
750–1550
JGS3150FAGC
160
800–1600
—
175
875–1750
JGS3175FAGC
200
1000–2000
JGS3200FAGC
225
1125–2250
JGS3225FAGC
250
1250–2500
JGS3250FAGC
2
2
Three-Pole
Magnetic
Range
2
2
JG-Frame—IEC/CE/UL/CSA—40/35
Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-39
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
JG 100% Rated 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breaker
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-44.
2
IEC/UL/CSA—25/25
2
2
2
2
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50
JGE305033GC
JGE305032GC
JGE305035GC
JGE305036GC
JGFCT050
100
JGE310033GC
JGE310032GC
JGE310035GC
JGE310036GC
JGFCT100
160
JGE316033GC
JGE316032GC
JGE316035GC
JGE316036GC
JGFCT160
250
JGE325033GC
JGE325032GC
JGE325035GC
JGE325036GC
JGFCT250
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50
JGS305033GC
JGS305032GC
JGS305035GC
JGS305036GC
JGFCT050
100
JGS310033GC
JGS310032GC
JGS310035GC
JGS310036GC
JGFCT100
160
JGS316033GC
JGS316032GC
JGS316035GC
JGS316036GC
JGFCT160
250
JGS325033GC
JGS325032GC
JGS325035GC
JGS325036GC
JGFCT250
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA—40/35
IEC/UL/CSA—70/65
2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
50
JGH305033GC
JGH305032GC
JGH305035GC
JGH305036GC
JGFCT050
2
100
JGH310033GC
JGH310032GC
JGH310035GC
JGH310036GC
JGFCT100
160
JGH316033GC
JGH316032GC
JGH316035GC
JGH316036GC
JGFCT160
250
JGH325033GC
JGH325032GC
JGH325035GC
JGH325036GC
JGFCT250
2
2
Note
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-40
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
JG-Frame
2
2
2
2
2
2
T250FJ
TA250FJ
Endcap Kit
Control Wire
Terminal Kit
Load and Line Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire Type
AWG Wire
Metric Wire Range/ Number Catalog
Range mm2 of Conductors Number
Rear Fed Terminals
Multiwire Connectors
Base Mounting Hardware
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required
separately, order 66A2546G02.
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
1
250
Stainless steel Cu
25–185
#4–350 (1)
T250FJ
250
Aluminum
10–185
#8–350 (1)
TA250FJ 12
Cu/Al
JG-Frame circuit breakers include aluminum terminals TA250FJ
as standard. When optional stainless steel only terminals are
required, order by catalog number.
Terminal Shields IP30
Location
Number of Poles
Catalog Number
Line or Load
2, 3
FJTS3K
4
FJTS4K
Catalog Number
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
Number of Poles
Metric
Imperial
3
FJIPBK 3
3
FJ3RTWK
FJ3RTDK
4
FJIPBK4 3
4
FJ4RTWK
FJ4RTDK
Endcap kits are used on J250-Frame breaker to connect busbar
or similar electrical connections. Includes hardware.
Control Wire Terminal Kit
Description
Catalog
Number
Package of 14 (priced individually)
FJCWTK
2
2
Multiwire Connectors
Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end
terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker
to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution
terminal blocks.
JG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information
(Package of 3)
250
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
#4–350 kcmil
Catalog
Number
TA250JGRF
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalog
Number
250
3
14–2
3TA250FJ3
250
6
14–6
3TA250FJ6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3TA250JGRF
Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker
from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase
barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending
on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates
a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning
with a TA indicates one terminal.
2
2
For use with aluminum or copper terminals only.
Maximum
Amperes
2
2
Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware,
insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace
three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load
side (OFF) end.
Rear Fed Terminals
2
2
Interphase Barriers
Endcap Kits
2
Notes
1 Individually packed.
2 Standard line and load.
3 Individually priced.
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-41
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
2
JG-Frame Accessories
2
Description
2
Internal Accessories
(Only one internal accessory per pole)
2
2
Reference
Page
Two- and Three-Pole
Left
Four-Pole
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
Neutral
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-109
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
V4-T2-109
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-109
—
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
2
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-109
—
—
■
—
—
■
Shunt trip—standard
V4-T2-109
■
—
—
■
—
—
—
2
Undervoltage release mechanism
V4-T2-110
■
—
—
■
—
—
—
2
External Accessories
End cap kit
V4-T2-41
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Control wire terminal kit
V4-T2-41
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rear fed terminals
V4-T2-41
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Multiwire connectors
V4-T2-41
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-41
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-41
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Padlockable handle block
V4-T2-107
—
■
—
—
■
—
—
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-107
❏
—
❏
❏
—
❏
—
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-107
❏
—
❏
❏
—
❏
—
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-107
●
●
●
—
—
—
—
Electrical operator
V4-T2-107
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-107
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-418
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Earth leakage/ground fault protector
V4-T2-92
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Drawout cassette
V4-T2-115
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Digitrip 310+ test kit
V4-T2-36
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Ammeter/cause of trip display
V4-T2-106
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Cause of trip LED module
V4-T2-106
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-105
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Marine/naval application, UL 489 supplement SA and SB
1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
Note
1
Contact Eaton.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-42
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Ratings
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC 1
2
250 23
2
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
JGE250
2, 3, 4
65
65
25
25
25
18
12
6
10
JGS250
2, 3, 4
85
85
40
40
35
18
12
6
22
JGH250
2, 3, 4
100
100
70
70
65
25
14
7
22
JGC250 4
3, 4
200
200
100
100
100
35
16
12
42
JGU250 4
3, 4
200
200
150
150
150
50
18
14
50
JGX250 4
3, 4
200
200
200
200
200
50
18
14
50
220–240
Icu
690 2
380–415
Ics
Icu
Ics
480
600
Icu
Ics
2
2
2
2
2
JG 310+ Specifications
Description
Specification
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip RMS 310+
2
2
Breaker Type
Frame designation
JG
Frames available
50 A, 100 A, 160 A 250 A
Continuous current range (A)
20–250A
Ground fault pickup (A)
10–250A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
35, 65, 100, 150, 200
100% rated
Yes
2
2
2
2
Protection
Ordering options
LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode)
No
Interchangeable trip unit
Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 5
Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 5
Yes
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 5
Yes
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)
LSI, LSIG
Cause of trip indication
Yes
Thru-cover accessories
Yes
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
4 Current limiting per UL 489.
5 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-43
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
JG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
2
310+ Settings
JG Frame
50 A
100 A
160 A
250 A
A
20
40
63
100
2
B
20
45
80
125
C
25
50
90
150
2
D
30
63
100
160
E
32
70
110
175
2
F
40
80
125
200
2
G
45
90
150
225
H (= In)
50
100
160
250
Position 1
2
2
2
2
Position 2
4
4
4
4
Position 3
7
7
7
7
Position 4
10
10
10
10
2
Position 5
12
12
12
12
2
Position 6
15
15
15
15
Position 7
20
20
20
20
Position 8
24
24
24
24
Position 1
2x
2x
2x
2x
Position 2
3x
3x
3x
3x
Position 3
4x
4x
4x
4x
Position 4
5x
5x
5x
5x
2
Position 5
6x
6x
6x
6x
Position 6
7x
7x
7x
7x
2
Position 7
8x
8x
8x
8x
Position 8
10x
10x
10x
10x
Position 9
14x
14x
14x
14x
tsd
(LS, LSG)
Fixed
67 at10x
67 at10x
67 at10x
67 at10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG)
Position 1
Inst
Inst
Inst
Inst
Position 2
120
120
120
120
Position 3
300
300
300
300
Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 1
10
20
32
50
Position 2
15
30
48
75
Position 3
20
40
64
100
2
Position 4
30
60
96
150
2
Position 5
40
80
128
200
Position 6
50
100
160
250
Position 1
Inst
Inst
Inst
Inst
Position 2
120
120
120
120
Position 3
300
300
300
300
2
2
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
2
2
2
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG)
Ir
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting 1
N/A
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes) 2
N/A
Notes
1 Not available for JG. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode not available for JG frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG, and RG.
2
2
V4-T2-44
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Dimensions and Weights
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
JG-Frame
2
Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2, 3
4.13 (104.9)
7.00 (177.8)
3.57 (90.7)
4
5.34 (135.6)
7.00 (177.8)
3.57 (90.7)
2
2
JG-Frame
2
Front View Three-Pole
Front Cover Cutout
Side View
2
CL
0.63 (16.0)
Breaker
3.06
(77.7)
2
3.95
(100.3)
0.19 (4.8) R
0.28 (7.1)
0.50
(12.7)
1.25 (31.8)
2.05 (52.1)
CL
Handle
4.00
(101.6)
2
7.00
(177.8)
2
1.06 (27.0)
4.13
(104.9)
2
3.44
(87.4)
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
2
JG-Frame
Breaker Type
Number of Poles
2, 3
4
JGC
6.00 (2.70)
8.00 (3.60)
JGE
6.00 (2.70)
8.00 (3.60)
JGH
6.00 (2.70)
8.00 (3.60)
JGS
6.00 (2.70)
8.00 (3.60)
JGU
6.00 (2.70)
8.00 (3.60)
JGX
6.00 (2.70)
8.00 (3.60)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-45
2.2
2
4-Pole
5.50 (139.7)
3-Pole
4.13 (104.9)
0.69
2.06
1.38 (17.5)
(52.3)
(35.1)
2
2
2
Series G
JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
3.92
(99.6)
5.50
(139.7)
1.25
(31.8)
3.57
(90.7)
3.92
(99.6)
5.50
(139.7)
2
0.63
(16.0)
1.88
(47.8)
R 0.19
(4.8)
11.25
(285.8)
6.97
(177.0)
4.93
(125.2)
0.28
(7.1)
7.00
(177.8)
2
2.05
(52.1)
11.25
(285.8)
1.06
(26.9)
0.50
(139.7)
2
2
RESET
2
TEST
3.37
(85.6)
4.25
(108.0)
2
2
3.31
(84.1)
2
3.69
(93.7)
3.57
(90.7)
3.81
(96.8)
4.78
(121.4)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-46
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.05
(52.1)
4.09
(103.9)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
2.2
Contents
Description
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-48
V4-T2-49
V4-T2-60
V4-T2-61
V4-T2-63
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
LG breaker is HACR rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-47
2.2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Series G—LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes)
L G S 3 600 FA G C
2
Frame
2
Rating
Blank = 80% rated
C = 100% rated (for LGE, LGS and LGH only)
L
2
Standard/Application
G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA
2
2
E
S
H
C
U
X
K
2
2
2
Performance
600
480
415
18
35
35
25
50
50
35
65
70
50
100
100
65
150
150
65
200
200
Molded case switch
Number of Poles
240
65
85
100
200
200
200
3 = Three
4 = Four—Neutral 0% protected
6 = Four—Neutral 60% protected
7 = Four—Neutral 100% protected
8 = Four—Neutral 0–60% protected
9 = Four—Neutral 0–100 protected
Amperes
250
300
350
400
500
600
630
Trip Unit
AA = Adj. adj.
FA = Fixed adj.
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
38 = 310+ electronic ALSI
39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG
NN = Frame only (630 A only; no trip unit)
2
2
2
2
Trip Unit
LT 3 600 FA B20
2
2
Trip
LT
Number of Poles
3 = Three
4 = Four—neutral 0% protected
8 = Four—neutral 0/60% protected
9 = Four—neutral 0/100% protected
2
2
2
2
2
Terminations/Hardware
Terminals
Mounting Hardware
M = Metric end caps
Metric
E = Imperial end caps
Imperial
G = Line/load standard
Metric
W = Without terminals
Amperes
250
300
350
400
500
600
630
Trip Unit
AA = Adj. adj., thermal-magnetic
FA = Fixed adj., thermal-magnetic
KS = Molded case switch
33 = 310+ electronic LS
32 = 310+ electronic LSI
35 = 310+ electronic LSG
36 = 310+ electronic LSIG
38 = 310+ electronic ALSI
39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG
Notes
1 Bxx features cannot be combined with other Bxx features.
2 B21 and B22 available with LSG and LSIG trip units.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-48
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Features (ETU Only) 12
Blank= No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG = Zone selective interlocking
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Product Selection
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)
LG-Frame
Three-Pole 2
LG-Frame
2
Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGE3250FAG
LGE3250AAG
LGE4250FAG
LGE4250AAG
300
LGE3300FAG
—
LGE4300FAG
—
320
—
LGE3320AAG
—
LGE4320AAG
350
LGE3350FAG
—
LGE4350FAG
—
400
LGE3400FAG
LGE3400AAG
LGE4400FAG
LGE4400AAG
500
LGE3500FAG
LGE3500AAG
LGE4500FAG
LGE4500AAG
600
LGE3600FAG
—
LGE4600FAG
—
630 4
—
LGE3630AAG
—
LGE4630AAG
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)
IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
Three-Pole 2
LG-Frame
2
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)
IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
2
Four-Pole (0%) 3
2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
250
LGS3250FAG
LGS3250AAG
LGS4250FAG
LGS4250AAG
300
LGS3300FAG
—
LGS4300FAG
—
2
320
—
LGS3320AAG
—
LGS4320AAG
350
LGS3350FAG
—
LGS4350FAG
—
400
LGS3400FAG
LGS3400AAG
LGS4400FAG
LGS4400AAG
500
LGS3500FAG
LGS3500AAG
LGS4500FAG
LGS4500AAG
600
LGS3600FAG
—
LGS4600FAG
—
630 4
—
LGS3630AAG
—
LGS4630AAG
2
2
2
2
2
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA)
IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 1
Three-Pole 2
2
Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGH3250FAG
LGH3250AAG
LGH4250FAG
LGH4250AAG
300
LGH3300FAG
—
LGH4300FAG
—
320
—
LGH3320AAG
—
LGH4320AAG
350
LGH3350FAG
—
LGH4350FAG
—
400
LGH3400FAG
LGH3400AAG
LGH4400FAG
LGH4400AAG
500
LGH3500FAG
LGH3500AAG
LGH4500FAG
LGH4500AAG
LGH3600FAG
—
LGH4600FAG
—
—
LGH3630AAG
—
LGH4630AAG
600
630
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side.
4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
V4-T2-49
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)
2
LG-Frame
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489
IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
2
Three-Pole 2
Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGC3250FAG
LGC3250AAG
LGC4250FAG
LGC4250AAG
2
300
LGC3300FAG
—
LGC4300FAG
—
320
—
LGC3320AAG
—
LGC4320AAG
2
350
LGC3350FAG
—
LGC4350FAG
—
400
LGC3400FAG
LGC3400AAG
LGC4400FAG
LGC4400AAG
500
LGC3500FAG
LGC3500AAG
LGC4500FAG
LGC4500AAG
600
LGC3600FAG
—
LGC4600FAG
—
—
LGC3630AAG
—
LGC4630AAG
2
2
2
2
630
4
2
2
LG-Frame
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489
IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
Three-Pole 2
2
Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGU3250FAG
LGU3250AAG
LGU4250FAG
LGU4250AAG
2
300
LGU3300FAG
—
LGU4300FAG
—
320
—
LGU3320AAG
—
LGU4320AAG
2
350
LGU3350FAG
—
LGU4350FAG
—
400
LGU3400FAG
LGU3400AAG
LGU4400FAG
LGU4400AAG
2
500
LGU3500FAG
LGU3500AAG
LGU4500FAG
LGU4500AAG
2
600
LGU3600FAG
—
LGU4600FAG
—
630 4
—
LGU3630AAG
—
LGU4630AAG
2
2
2
2
LG-Frame
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes UL, CSA), Current Limiting Per UL 489
IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1
Three-Pole 2
2
Four-Pole (0%) 3
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 45
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGX3250FAG
LGX3250AAG
LGX4250FAG
LGX4250AAG
2
300
LGX3300FAG
—
LGX4300FAG
—
320
—
LGX3320AAG
—
LGX4320AAG
2
350
LGX3350FAG
—
LGX4350FAG
—
400
LGX3400FAG
LGX3400AAG
LGX4400FAG
LGX4400AAG
2
500
LGX3500FAG
LGX3500AAG
LGX4500FAG
LGX4500AAG
2
600
LGX3600FAG
—
LGX4600FAG
—
630 4
—
LGX3630AAG
—
LGX4630AAG
2
2
2
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
3 Neutral protection is indicated by the fourth character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%. Neutral is on LH side.
4 320/630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
5 Adjustable thermal units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
2
2
V4-T2-50
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Molded Case Switches 1
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
400
32
LGK3400KSG
4
LGK4400KSG
630 3
32
LGK3630KSG
4
LGK4630KSG
2
2
2
2
2
Frame—IC Rating at 415/480 Volts
Maximum
Amperes 3
2
Three-Pole 2
Four-Pole 0%
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
LGE3630NN
LGE4630NN
LGE3630NNWC
—
LGS3630NN
LGS4630NN
LGS3630NNWC
—
LGH3630NN
LGH4630NN
LGH3630NNWC
—
2
LGC4630NN
2
2
35/35
630 3
2
2
50/50
630 3
2
2
70/53
630 3
100/100 Current Limiting Per UL 489
630
LGC3630NN
2
150/150 Current Limiting Per UL 489
630
LGU3630NN
LGU4630NN
2
200/200 Current Limiting
630
LGX3630NN
LGX4630NN
2
2
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
Three-Pole
2
Four-Pole (0%)
2
5
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 4
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic 4
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LT3250FA
LT3250AA
LT4250FA
LT4250AA
300
LT3300FA
—
LT4300FA
—
320
—
LT3320AA
—
LT4320AA
350
LT3350FA
—
LT4350FA
—
400
LT3400FA
LT3400AA
LT4400FA
LT4400AA
500
LT3500FA
LT3500AA
LT4500FA
LT4500AA
600
LT3600FA
—
LT4600FA
—
630
—
LT3630AA
—
LT4630AA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Molded case switches will trip above 6300 amperes.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
3 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for the LG.
4 Adjustable thermal, adjustable magnetic trip units are typically used in IEC markets and are not UL or CSA listed.
5 Neutral protection is indicated by the third character: 4 = 0%, 7 = 100%, 8 = adjustable 0–60% and 9 = 0–100%.
6 100% rated frame.
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-51
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.
2
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Ampere
Rating
2
Three-Pole
2
250
LT325033
LT325032
LT325035
LT325036
LGFCT250
400
LT340033
LT340032
LT340035
LT340036
LGFCT400
2
600
LT360033
LT360032
LT360035
LT360036
LGFCT600
630 2
LT363033
LT363032
LT363035
LT363036
LGFCT600
2
Four-Pole 34
250
LT425033
LT425032
LT425035
LT425036
—
2
400
LT440033
LT440032
LT440035
LT440036
—
2
600
LT460033
LT460032
LT460035
LT460036
—
630 2
LT463033
LT463032
LT463035
LT463036
—
2
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
2
Description
Catalog
Number
Electronic portable test kit
MTST230V
2
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
5108A03H01
External neutral sensor (630 A)
LGFCT630
2
External neutral sensor (600 A)
LGFCT600
2
External neutral sensor (400 A)
LGFCT400
External neutral sensor (250 A)
LGFCT250
2
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication
TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEW
2
Remote-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEWR06
2
2
Notes
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
3 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
4 Four-pole LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-52
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
IC Rating at 415/480 V
Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and
Mounting Hardware) 1
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.
2
IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
2
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGE325033G
LGE325032G
LGE325035G
LGE325036G
LGFCT250
400
LGE340033G
LGE340032G
LGE340035G
LGE340036G
LGFCT400
600
LGE360033G
LGE360032G
LGE360035G
LGE360036G
LGFCT600
630 4
LGE363033G
LGE363032G
LGE363035G
LGE363036G
LGFCT600
250
LGE425033G
LGE425032G
LGE425035G
LGE425036G
—
400
LGE440033G
LGE440032G
LGE440035G
LGE440036G
—
600
LGE460033G
LGE460032G
LGE460035G
LGE460036G
—
630 4
LGE463033G
LGE463032G
LGE463035G
LGE463036G
—
Ampere
Rating
2
2
2
Three-Pole 3
2
2
2
Four-Pole 5
2
2
2
IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
250
LGS325033G
LGS325032G
LGS325035G
LGS325036G
LGFCT250
400
LGS340033G
LGS340032G
LGS340035G
LGS340036G
LGFCT400
600
LGS360033G
LGS360032G
LGS360035G
LGS360036G
LGFCT600
630 4
LGS363033G
LGS363032G
LGS363035G
LGS363036G
LGFCT600
2
250
LGS425033G
LGS425032G
LGS425035G
LGS425036G
—
400
LGS440033G
LGS440032G
LGS440035G
LGS440036G
—
2
600
LGS460033G
LGS460032G
LGS460035G
LGS460036G
—
630 4
LGS463033G
LGS463032G
LGS463035G
LGS463036G
—
Ampere
Rating
Three-Pole 3
2
2
Four-Pole 56
2
2
IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGH325033G
LGH325032G
LGH325035G
LGH325036G
LGFCT250
400
LGH340033G
LGH340032G
LGH340035G
LGH340036G
LGFCT400
600
LGH360033G
LGH360032G
LGH360035G
LGH360036G
LGFCT600
LGH363033G
LGH363032G
LGH363035G
LGH363036G
LGFCT600
2
250
LGH425033G
LGH425032G
LGH425035G
LGH425036G
—
2
400
LGH440033G
LGH440032G
LGH440035G
LGH440036G
—
600
LGH460033G
LGH460032G
LGH460035G
LGH460036G
—
630 4
LGH463033G
LGH463032G
LGH463035G
LGH463036G
—
Ampere
Rating
2
2
Three-Pole 3
630 4
Four-Pole
2
56
2
2
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
4 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
5 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
6 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
V4-T2-53
2.2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
IC Rating at 415/480 V
Complete LG Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and
Mounting Hardware) 1
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.
IC Rating: 100 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
Ampere
Rating
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole 3
2
250
LGC325033G
LGC325032G
LGC325035G
LGC325036G
LGFCT250
2
400
LGC340033G
LGC340032G
LGC340035G
LGC340036G
LGFCT400
600
LGC360033G
LGC360032G
LGC360035G
LGC360036G
LGFCT600
630 4
LGC363033G
LGC363032G
LGC363035G
LGC363036G
LGFCT600
2
Four-Pole 56
2
250
LGC425033G
LGC425032G
LGC425035G
LGC425036G
—
400
LGC440033G
LGC440032G
LGC440035G
LGC440036G
—
2
600
LGC460033G
LGC460032G
LGC460035G
LGC460036G
—
630 4
LGC463033G
LGC463032G
LGC463035G
LGC463036G
—
2
IC Rating: 150 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
2
2
2
Ampere
Rating
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole 3
250
LGU325033G
LGU325032G
LGU325035G
LGU325036G
LGFCT250
2
400
LGU340033G
LGU340032G
LGU340035G
LGU340036G
LGFCT400
600
LGU360033G
LGU360032G
LGU360035G
LGU360036G
LGFCT600
2
630 4
LGU363033G
LGU363032G
LGU363035G
LGU363036G
LGFCT600
250
LGU425033G
LGU425032G
LGU425035G
LGU425036G
—
400
LGU440033G
LGU440032G
LGU440035G
LGU440036G
—
600
LGU460033G
LGU460032G
LGU460035G
LGU460036G
—
630 4
LGU463033G
LGU463032G
LGU463035G
LGU463036G
—
2
2
2
2
2
Four-Pole 5
IC Rating: 200 kAIC at 415 Vac and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
Ampere
Rating
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Three-Pole 3
2
250
LGX325033G
LGX325032G
LGX325035G
LGX325036G
LGFCT250
400
LGX340033G
LGX340032G
LGX340035G
LGX340036G
LGFCT400
2
600
LGX360033G
LGX360032G
LGX360035G
LGX360036G
LGFCT600
630 4
LGX363033G
LGX363032G
LGX363035G
LGX363036G
LGFCT600
2
Four-Pole 5
250
LGX425033G
LGX425032G
LGX425035G
LGX425036G
—
2
400
LGX440033G
LGX440032G
LGX440035G
LGX440036G
—
600
LGX460033G
LGX460032G
LGX460035G
LGX460036G
—
2
630 4
LGX463033G
LGX463032G
LGX463035G
LGX463036G
—
2
2
2
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
4 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
5 Neutral protection: 4= 0%, 6 = 60%, 7 = 100%. Electronic trip unit neutral protection is not adjustable.
6 Four-pole breakers with LSG and LSIG trip units are only available with 0% neutral protection.
V4-T2-54
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
LG 100% Rated Circuit Breaker—Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
2
Complete Breaker (Includes Frame, Trip Unit, Standard Terminals and Mounting Hardware)
LG-Frame
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes
UL, CSA) IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and
480 Vac 1
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes
UL, CSA) IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415, 65
kAIC at 480 Vac 1
Three-Pole 2
Three-Pole 2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Ampere Rating
Catalog Number
Ampere Rating
Catalog Number
250
LGE3250FAGC
250
LGH3250FAGC
300
LGE3300FAGC
300
LGH3300FAGC
320
—
320
—
350
LGE3350FAGC
350
LGH3350FAGC
400
LGE3400FAGC
400
LGH3400FAGC
500
LGE3500FAGC
500
LGH3500FAGC
600
LGE3600FAGC
600
LGH3600FAGC
630 4
—
630 4
—
LG-Frame—630 Amperes (600 Amperes
UL, CSA) IC Rating: 50 kAIC at 415 and
480 Vac 1
250
LGS3250FAGC
300
LGS3300FAGC
320
—
350
LGS3350FAGC
400
LGS3400FAGC
500
LGS3500FAGC
600
630
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Replace suffix “G” with “W” for no line and load terminals.
2 For two-pole applications, use two outer poles.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
LGS3600FAGC
4
2
2
Fixed Thermal,
Adjustable Magnetic
Catalog Number
2
2
Three-Pole 2
Ampere Rating
2
2
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-55
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
LG 100% Rated Electronic Breaker Per UL 489
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.
2
IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
2
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
250
LGE325033GC
LGE325032GC
LGE325035GC
LGE325036GC
LGFCT250
400
LGE340033GC
LGE340032GC
LGE340035GC
LGE340036GC
LGFCT400
2
600
LGE360033GC
LGE360032GC
LGE360035GC
LGE360036GC
LGFCT600
630 2
LGE363033GC
LGE363032GC
LGE363035GC
LGE363036GC
LGFCT600
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGS325033GC
LGS325032GC
LGS325035GC
LGS325036GC
LGFCT250
2
400
LGS340033GC
LGS340032GC
LGS340035GC
LGS340036GC
LGFCT400
600
LGS360033GC
LGS360032GC
LGS360035GC
LGS360036GC
LGFCT600
2
630 2
LGS363033GC
LGS363032GC
LGS363035GC
LGS363036GC
LGFCT600
2
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
2
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
250
LGH325033GC
LGH325032GC
LGH325035GC
LGH325036GC
LGFCT250
400
LGH340033GC
LGH340032GC
LGH340035GC
LGH340036GC
LGFCT400
2
600
LGH360033GC
LGH360032GC
LGH360035GC
LGH360036GC
LGFCT600
630 2
LGH363033GC
LGH363032GC
LGH363035GC
LGH363036GC
LGFCT600
2
2
Notes
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
2 630 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA listed rating for the LG.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-56
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-62.
Series G LG circuit breakers
are available with the Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance
System™ integrated into the
electronic trip units helping to
improve safety by providing a
LG with
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System
simple and reliable method to
reduce fault clearing time.
The Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System unit
utilizes a separate analog trip
circuit that provides faster
2
interruption times than the
standard (digital)
“instantaneous” protection.
Work locations downstream
of a circuit breaker with an
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System unit can
have a significantly lower
incident energy level,
reducing arc flash potential to
the system.
Ampere
Rating
ALSI
ALSIG
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
2
2
LG Electronic Breaker with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
2
IEC/UL/CSA 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
2
2
2
250
LGE325038G
LGE365039G
LGFCT250
400
LGE340038G
LGE340039G
LGFCT400
600
LGE360038G
LGE360039G
LGFCT600
630
LGE363038G
LGE363039G
LGFCT600
2
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA 50 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
250
LGS325038G
LGS365039G
LGFCT250
400
LGS340038G
LGS340039G
LGFCT400
600
LGS360038G
LGS360039G
LGFCT600
630
LGS363038G
LGS363039G
LGFCT600
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA 70 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
250
LGH325038G
LGH365039G
LGFCT250
400
LGH340038G
LGH340039G
LGFCT400
600
LGH360038G
LGH360039G
LGFCT600
630
LGH363038G
LGH363039G
LGFCT600
2
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA 100 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
250
LGC325038G
LGC365039G
LGFCT250
400
LGC340038G
LGC340039G
LGFCT400
600
LGC360038G
LGC360039G
LGFCT600
630
LGC363038G
LGC363039G
LGFCT600
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA 150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
250
LGU325038G
LGU365039G
LGFCT250
400
LGU340038G
LGU340039G
LGFCT400
600
LGU360038G
LGU360039G
LGFCT600
630
LGU363038G
LGU363039G
LGFCT600
2
2
2
IEC/UL/CSA 200 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac, Current Limiting Per UL 489
250
LGX325038G
LGX365039G
LGFCT250
400
LGX340038G
LGX340039G
LGFCT400
600
LGX360038G
LGX360039G
LGFCT600
630
LGX363038G
LGX363039G
LGFCT600
2
2
2
2
LG Electronic Trip Units with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
Ampere
Rating
ALSI
Catalog
Number
ALSIG
Catalog
Number
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 1
Catalog
Number
250
LT325038
LT325039
LGFCT250
400
LT340038
LT340039
LGFCT400
600
LT360038
LT360039
LGFCT600
630
LT363038
LT363039
LGFCT600
2
2
2
2
Note
1 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is required.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
V4-T2-57
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Line and Load Terminals
2
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
2
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG
Wire Range/
Number of
Conductors
Number of
Terminals
Included
Metric
Wire Range
(mm2)
Catalog
Number
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
500–750 (1)
240–380 (1)
3
3TA631LK 1
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
500–750 (1)
240–380 (1)
4
4TA631LK 1
400
Copper
Cu
500–750 (1)
240–380 (1)
3
3T631LK 1
400
Copper
Cu
500–750 (1)
240–380 (1)
4
4T631LK 1
630
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2–500 (2)
35–240 (2)
1
TA632L
2
630
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2–500 (2)
35–240 (2)
3
3TA632LK 12
630
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2–500 (2)
35–240 (2)
4
4TA632LK 12
2
630
Copper
Cu
2–500 (2)
35–240 (2)
3
3T632LK 1
630
Copper
Cu
2–500 (2)
35–240 (2)
4
4T632LK 1
2
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3–500 (1)
35–240 (1)
1
TA350LK 2
400
Copper
Cu
3–500 (1)
35–240 (1)
1
T350LK
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Base Mounting Hardware
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch. (Included with breaker.) If required
separately, order 66A4560G03.
Interphase Barrier
Terminal Covers
Rear Fed Terminals
Catalog
Number
Description
Three-pole terminal cover
3
LTS3K
Four-pole terminal cover 3
LTS4K
End Cap Kits (MIO Metric Nuts)
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
3
L3RTWK
4
L4RTWK
Control Wire Terminal Kit
Description
Terminal
Body Type
Catalog
Number
2
Three-pole kit
Aluminum
3TA632LKW
Four-pole kit
Aluminum
4TA632LKW
2
Three-pole kit
Copper
3T632LKW
Four-pole kit
Copper
4T632LKW
2
Terminal Spreaders
2
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
2
3
LGTEW3
4
LGTEW4
2
Terminal Extensions
2
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
2
3
LGTES3
4
LGTES4
2
Handle Extension
2
Description
Catalog
Number
Handle extension
HEXLG
2
V4-T2-58
Package of 2
Catalog
Number
Interphase barrier
IPB3
Maximum
Amperes
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Catalog
Number
400
2–500 kcmil
TA350LKRF
400
2–500 kcmil
3TA350LKRF
630
2–500 (2) kcmil
TA632LKRF
630
2–500 (2) kcmil
3TA632LKRF
Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker
from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase
barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending
on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates
a kit with three terminals in each kit. Catalog number beginning
with a TA indicates one terminal.
Multiwire Connectors
Field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end
terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker
to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution
terminal blocks.
Multiwire lug kits include terminal shield, mounting hardware,
insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace
three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load
side (OFF) end.
LG-Frame Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information
(Package of 3)
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalog
Number
600
6
14–1/0
3TA600L6K
Notes
1 Includes LTS3K (three-pole) or LTS4K (four-pole) terminal covers.
2 Standard terminal included with complete breaker.
3 Included in TA63IL, T63IL, TA632L kits listed above.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Terminals and Terminal Cover for the LG Breaker—Includes LTS3K (Three-Pole) or LTS4K (Four-Pole) Terminal Covers
2
Note: Extended terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.0 mm) to breaker length.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-59
2.2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories
Base Mounting Hardware
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or molded case switch.
(Included with breaker.) If required separately, order 66A4560G03.
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
2
LG-Frame Accessories
2
Description
2
Reference
Page
Three-Pole
Left
Four-Pole
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-109
■
■
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
V4-T2-109
■
■
2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-109
■
■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-109
■
Shunt trip—standard
V4-T2-109
■
■
Undervoltage release mechanism
V4-T2-110
■
■
2
Neu.
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
■
2
External Accessories
2
End cap kit
V4-T2-58
●
●
Handle extension
V4-T2-58
●
●
Terminal cover
V4-T2-58
●
●
Rear fed terminals
V4-T2-58
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Multiwire connectors
V4-T2-58
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Padlockable handle block
V4-T2-107
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-107
❏
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-107
❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-107
●
●
2
Electrical operator
V4-T2-107
●
2
Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-107
Rear connecting studs
Handle mechanisms
2
■
■
❏
❏
❏
❏
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
V4-T2-107
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
V4-T2-418
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Earth leakage/ground fault protector
V4-T2-92
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Drawout cassette
V4-T2-115
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Digitrip 310+ test kit
V4-T2-52
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Ammeter/cause of trip display
V4-T2-106
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Cause of trip LED module
V4-T2-106
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
2
❏
❏
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
2
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-105
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB
1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
Note
Contact Eaton.
1
2
2
V4-T2-60
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Volts DC 1
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Number
of Poles
240–240
Icu
380–415
Ics
Icu
480
600
690
Ics
Icu
250
Ics
Icu
Ics
LGE630
3, 4
65
65
35
35
35
18
12
6
22
22
LGS630
3, 4
85
85
50
50
50
25
20
10
22
22
LGH630
3, 4
100
100
70
70
65
35
25
13
42
42
LGC630 4
3, 4
200
200
100
100
100
50
30
15
42
42
LGU630 4
3, 4
200
200
150
150
150
65
35
18
50
50
200
200
200
200
65
35
18
50
50
LGX630
4
3, 4
200
5
2
23
2
2
2
2
2
LG 310+ Specifications
Description
Specification
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip RMS 310+
2
2
Breaker Type
Frame designation
LG
Frames available
250 A, 400 A, 600 A
Continuous current range (A)
100–600 A
Ground fault pickup (A)
50–600 A
2
2
2
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
35, 65, 100, 150, 200
100% rated
Yes
2
Ordering options
LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode)
Yes
2
Protection
Interchangeable trip unit
Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 5
Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 5
Yes
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 5
Yes
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)
LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Cause of trip indication
Yes
Thru-cover accessories
Yes
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits.
3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at–kA.
4 Current limiting per UL 489.
5 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-61
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
LG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
2
310+ Settings
LG Frame
250 A
400 A
600 A
A
100
160
250
2
B
125
200
300
C
150
225
315
2
D
160
250
350
E
175
300
400
2
F
200
315
450
2
G
225
350
500
H (= In)
250
400
600
Position 1
2
2
2
Position 2
4
4
4
Position 3
7
7
7
Position 4
10
10
10
2
Position 5
12
12
12
2
Position 6
15
15
15
Position 7
20
20
20
Position 8
24
24
24
Position 1
2x
2x
2x
Position 2
3x
3x
3x
Position 3
4x
4x
4x
Position 4
5x
5x
5x
2
Position 5
6x
6x
6x
Position 6
7x
7x
7x
2
Position 7
8x
8x
8x
Position 8
10x
10x
10x
Position 9
12x
12x
12x
tsd
(LS, LSG)
Fixed
67 at10x
67 at10x
67 at10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) 1
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1
Inst
Inst
Inst
Position 2
120
120
120
Position 3
300
300
300
Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1
50
80
120
Position 2
75
120
180
Position 3
100
160
240
2
Position 4
150
240
360
2
Position 5
200
320
480
Position 6
250
400
600
Position 1
Inst
Inst
Inst
Position 2
120
120
120
300
300
2
2
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
2
2
2
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Ir
Position 3
300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
(ALSI, ALSIG)
Yes
2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x, 2.5x, 4x, 6x,
7x, 8x, 10x, 7x, 8x, 10x, 7x, 8x, 10x,
12x
12x
12x
2
Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In) 2
(ALSI, ALSIG)
Fixed
2.5x
2
Notes
1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.
2
2
2
V4-T2-62
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Dimensions and Weights
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
LG-Frame
Number of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2, 3
5.48 (139.2)
10.13 (257.3)
4.09 (103.9)
4
7.22 (183.4)
10.13 (257.3)
4.09 (103.9)
2
2
2
LG-Frame
Note: TA63IL, T63IL, T632L, TA632L terminals add 1.19 inches (30.2 mm) to line or load side of LG. LTS3K or
LTS4K terminal covers add 2.13 inches (54.1 mm) to line or load side of LG.
2.43 (61.7)
R 0.25
(6.4)
CL
2
2
4.06
(103.1)
Breaker
3.16
(80.3)
5.58
(141.7)
2.00
(50.8)
2
10.13
(257.3)
2
1.92
(48.8)
2.69
(68.3)
5.38
(136.7)
5.48
(139.2)
2
2
Three-Pole
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
LG-Frame
Breaker Type
Two- and Three-Pole
Four-Pole
LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC, LGU, LGX
16 (7.3)
20 (9.1)
2
2
Notes
1 DC rating apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuits.
3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at–kA.
4 Three-poles in series. 750 Vdc ratings available (four-pole in series, not UL listed). Contact Eaton.
5 IEC rating is 300 kA at 240 Vac.
6 Current limiting per UL 489.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-63
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
4.31
(109.5)
5.16
(131.1)
3.44
(87.4)
1.72
(43.7)
2
2
2
2
2
4.06
(103.1)
3.98
(101.1)
0.86
(21.8)
5.58
(141.7)
5.58
(141.7)
4.73
(120.1)
3.44
(87.4)
1.72
(43.7)
4.73
(120.1)
2
2
8.44
(214.4)
8.44
(214.4)
10.13
(257.3)
2
2
2
15.38
(390.7)
13.69
(347.7)
13.68
(347.5)
15.38
(390.7)
2
2
3-Pole
5.48 (139.2)
2
4-Pole
7.22 (183.4)
2
2
4-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
2.74 (69.6)
3.97
(100.8)
4.30
(109.2)
4.55
(115.6)
5.43
(137.9)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-64
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
4-Pole
7.22 (183.4)
3-Pole
5.48 (139.2)
4-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
2.74 (69.6)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
NG-Frame (1200 Ampere)
2.2
Contents
Description
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection Guide and Ordering
Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
2
2
2
V4-T2-66
2
V4-T2-67
V4-T2-70
V4-T2-71
V4-T2-73
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
2
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
●
●
All Eaton NG-Frame circuit
breakers are suitable for
reverse feed use
All NG-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-65
2.2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
NG Circuit Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
NG H 3 080 39 ZG E C
2
Rating
Frame
NG
2
2
Blank = 80% rated
C
= 100% rated
Performance
at 480 Vac
S = 50 kAIC
H = 65 kAIC
C = 100 kAIC
U = 150 kAIC 1
K = Molded
case switch
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Amperes
080 = 800
120 = 1200
Poles
3 = Three
4 = Four; neutral 2
0% protected
7 = Four; neutral 2
100% protected
9 = Four; neutral 2
0/60/100% adjustable
protection
Trip Unit
33 =
32 =
35 =
36 =
38 =
39 =
KS =
310+ Electronic LS
310+ Electronic LSI
310+ Electronic LSG
310+ Electronic LSIG
310+ Electronic ALSI with maintenance mode
310+ Electronic ALSIG with maintenance mode
Molded case switch
Notes
1 800 A only.
2 Neutral inn left pole on GN; right pole on NG.
3 Breakers do not ship with lugs.
Trip units are factory installable only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-66
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Terminations 3
M = Metric tapped line/load
conductors
E = Imperial tapped line/load
conductors
Feature
Blank
B20
B21
B22
ZG
=
=
=
=
=
No feature
High load alarm
Ground fault alarm, with trip
Ground fault alarm, no trip
Zone selective interlocking
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 50 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72.
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 12
Number
of Poles
LS
800
3
NGS308033E
NGS308032E
NGS308035E
NGS308036E
NGS308038E
NGS308039E
NGFCT120
4
NGS408033E
NGS408032E
NGS408035E 4
NGS408036E 4
NGS408038E
NGS408039E 4
—
45
NGS708033E
NGS708032E
—
—
NGS708038E
—
—
46
NGS908033E
NGS908032E
—
—
NGS908038E
—
—
3
NGS312033E
NGS312032E
NGS312035E
NGS312036E
NGS312038E
NGS312039E
NGFCT120
1200 6
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit with Imperial Tapped Conductors
4
LSI
LSG
LSIG
ALSI
ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 3
NGS412033E
NGS412032E
NGS412035E 4
NGS412036E 4
—
NGS412039E 4
—
5
NGS712033E
NGS712032E
—
—
NGS712038E
—
—
46
NGS912033E
NGS912032E
—
—
NGS912038E
—
—
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type NGS Standard Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 50 kA Icu at 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72.
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 12
Number
of Poles
LS
800
3
NGS308033M
NGS308032M
NGS308035M
NGS308036M
NGS308038M
NGS308039M
NGFCT120
4
NGS408033M
NGS408032M
NGS408035M 4
NGS408036M 4
NGS408038M
NGS408039M 4
—
45
NGS708033M
NGS708032M
—
—
NGS708038M
—
—
6
NGS908033M
NGS908032M
—
—
NGS908038M
—
—
NGS312033M
NGS312032M
NGS312035M
NGS312036M
NGS312038M
NGS312039M
NGFCT120
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit with Metric Tapped Conductors
4
1200
3
4
LSI
LSG
LSIG
ALSI
ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 3
NGS412033M
NGS412032M
NGS412035M 4
NGS412036M 4
—
NGS412039M 4
—
5
NGS712033M
NGS712032M
—
—
NGS712038M
—
—
46
NGS912033M
NGS912032M
—
—
NGS912038M
—
—
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Switches 89
2
Ue Maximum 690 Vac
Ampere
Rating
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
2
NGK4080KSE
2
800
MCS with Imperial line and load terminals
NGK3080KSE
MCS with Imperial line and load terminals
1200
MCS with Imperial line and load terminals
NGK3120KSE
MCS with Imperial line and load terminals
NGK4120KSE
1250
MCS with Imperial line and load terminals
NGK3125KSE
MCS with Imperial line and load terminals
NGK43125KSE
Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 °C or 50 °C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 °C labeling.
3 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pole; GN, neutral in left pole.
5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four).
7 Non-UL listed NG 1250 with 1250 ampere trip unit is also available.
8 For AC use only. Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes.
9 For two-pole applications, use outer poles of three-pole molded case switch.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-67
2.2
2
2
2
2
2
Series G
Type NGH High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 65 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 12
Number
of Poles
LS
LSI
LSG
800
3
NGH308033E
NGH308032E
NGH308035E
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
1200
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit
LSIG
NGH308036E
ALSI
ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 3
NGH308038E
NGH308039E
NGFCT120
—
—
4
NGH408033E
NGH408032E
NGH408035E
NGH408038E
NGH408039E 4
45
NGH708033E
NGH708032E
—
—
NGH708038E
—
46
NGH908033E
NGH908032E
—
—
NGH908038E
—
—
3
NGH312033E
NGH312032E
NGH312035E
NGH312036E
NGH312038E
NGH312039E
NGFCT120
4
NGH408036E
4
4
NGH412033E
NGH412032E
NGH412035E 4
NGH412036E 4
—
NGH412039E 4
—
45
NGH712033E
NGH712032E
—
—
NGH712038E
—
—
46
NGH912033E
NGH912032E
—
—
NGH912038E
—
—
ALSI
ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 3
2
2
2
2
2
Type NGC Very High Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA lcu at 480 Vac or 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-72.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 12
Number
of Poles
LS
800
3
NGC308033E
NGC308032E
NGC308035E
NGC308036E
NGC308038E
NGC308039E
NGFCT120
4
NGC408033E
NGC408032E
NGC408035E 4
NGC408036E 4
NGC408038E
NGC408039E 4
—
45
NGC708033E
NGC708032E
—
—
NGC708038E
—
—
46
NGC908033E
NGC908032E
—
—
NGC908038E
—
—
3
NGC312033E
NGC312032E
NGC312035E
NGC312036E
NGC312038E
NGC312039E
NGFCT120
4
NGC412033E
NGC412032E
NGC412035E 4
NGC412036E 4
—
NGC412039E 4
—
45
NGC712033E
NGC712032E
—
—
NGC712038E
—
—
46
NGC912033E
NGC912032E
—
—
NGC912038E
—
—
2
2
1200
2
2
2
2
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip Electronic Trip Unit
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 NG MCCBs are suitable for 40 °C or 50 °C applications. Order suffix V3 to eliminate standard 40 °C labeling.
3 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
4 Neutral 0% protected. NG, neutral in right pole; GN, neutral in left pole.
5 Neutral 100% protected (denoted by 7 in digit four); no neutral protection available with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Neutral 0%/60%/100% adjustable protection (denoted by 9 in digit four).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-68
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Line and Load Terminals
N-Frame circuit breakers do not include terminals as standard. When copper or Cu/Al terminals are required, order by catalog number.
2
Line and Load Terminals
2
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Body Material
Wire Type
AWG Wire
(Number of
Conductors)
AWG Wire
Catalog
Number 1
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Metric
Catalog
Number 1
2
2
Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals
700
Aluminum
Cu/Al
1–500 (2)
TA700NB1
50–240
TA700NB1M
1000
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–400 (3)
TA1000NB1
95–185
TA1000NB1M
1200
Aluminum
Cu/Al
4/0–500 (4)
TA1200NB1
120–240
TA1200NB1M
1200
Aluminum
Cu/Al
500–750 (3)
TA1201NB1
300–400
TA1201NB1M
2/0–500 (2)
T700NB1
70–240
T700NB1M
2
2
2
Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals
700
Copper
Cu
1000
Copper
Cu
3/0–500 (3)
T1000NB1
95–240
T1000NB1M
1200
Copper
Cu
3/0–400 (4)
T1200NB3
95–185
T1200NB3M
2
2
2
Conductor Extension Kit
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Description
Catalog
Number
Conductor Extension Kit
Electronic portable test kit
MTST230V
Description
Catalog
Number
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
5108A03H01
Three-pole both ends Metric
5104A24G04
External neutral sensor (1200 A) 2
NGFCT120
Three-pole both ends English
5104A24G02
External neutral sensor (800 A) 2
NGFCT120
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication
TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEWR06
Base Mounting Hardware
Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or
molded case switch.
Base Mounting Hardware 3
Number
of Poles
Description
Catalog
Number
Three- and four-pole
Imperial hardware:
0.3125–18 x 1.25
pan-head steel screws and lock washers
BMH5
Three- and four-pole
Metric hardware: M8 pan-head steel screws BMH5M
and lock washers
Terminal Shield
Terminal Shield
4
Description
Three-pole terminal shield
NTS3K
2
2
2
Keeper Nut
Not required on NG-Frame. Terminals are threaded.
2
Handle Extension
Included with breaker. Additional handle extensions are
available.
2
2
Handle Extension
Description
Catalog
Number
2
Single handle extension
HEX5
2
Interphase Barriers
The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance
between circuit breaker poles for special termination
applications. Barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that
are installed in the molded slots between the terminals.
(Field installation only.)
2
2
2
2
Interphase Barriers
Catalog
Number
2
Description
Catalog
Number
2
Interphase barriers 134
IPB5
2
Notes
1 Single terminals individually packed.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
3 Metric hardware included with breaker.
4 Included as standard on 100% rated 800/1200 A breakers.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-69
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
NG-Frame Accessories
Reference
Page
Description
Three-Pole
Left
Four-Pole
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
Neu.
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-109
●
■
●
■
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
V4-T2-109
●
■
●
■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-109
●
■
●
■
2
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-109
●
■
●
■
2
Shunt trip—standard
V4-T2-109
■
■
Undervoltage release mechanism
V4-T2-110
■
■
2
External Accessories
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-69
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-69
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Non-padlockable handle block
V4-T2-107
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-107
❏
❏
❏
❏
2
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-107
❏
❏
❏
❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-107
●
●
●
2
Electrical operator
V4-T2-107
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-114
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rear connecting studs
V4-T2-107
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-418
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Drawout cassette
V4-T2-115
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Handle extension
V4-T2-69
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Ammeter/cause of trip display
V4-T2-106
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Cause of trip LED module
V4-T2-106
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Digitrip 310+ test kit
V4-T2-106
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-105
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Marine/Naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB
1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
2
2
2
■
■
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
Note
Contact Eaton.
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-70
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
2
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
220–240
380–415
690
Number
of Poles
240 (UL)
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
480
600
Icu
Ics
2, 3, 4
65
85
85
50
50
50
25
20
10
NGH
2, 3, 4
100
100
100
70
50
65
35
25
13
NGC
2, 3, 4
200
200
100
100
50
100
65
35
18
NGS
1
2
2
2
2
NG-Frame Digitrip Specifications
2
NG 310+ Specifications
Description
Specification
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip RMS 310+
2
2
Breaker Type
Frame designation
NG
Frames available
800 A, 1200 A
Continuous current range (A)
320–1200A
Ground fault pickup (A)
160–1200A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
35, 65, 100, 150
100% rated
Yes
2
2
2
2
Protection
Ordering options
LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode)
Yes
Interchangeable trip unit
No
High load alarm (suffix B20) 2
Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 2
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix
B22) 2
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)
2
2
2
Yes
2
Yes
LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Cause of trip indication
Yes
Thru-cover accessories
No
2
2
Notes
1 1600 amperes is not a UL or CSA listed rating. 1200 amperes is the maximum UL and CSA rating for NG.
2 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-71
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
NG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
2
310+ Settings
RG Frame
800 A
1200 A
A
320
500
2
B
400
600
C
450
630
2
D
500
700
E
600
800
2
F
630
900
2
G
700
1000
H (= In)
800
1200
Position 1
2
2
Position 2
4
4
Position 3
6
7
Position 4
8
10
2
Position 5
10
12
2
Position 6
12
15
Position 7
14
20
Position 8
14
24
Position 1
2x
2x
Position 2
3x
3x
Position 3
4x
4x
Position 4
5x
5x
2
Position 5
6x
6x
Position 6
7x
7x
2
Position 7
8x
8x
Position 8
9x
9x
Position 9
9x
9x
tsd
(LS, LSG)
Fixed
67 at10x
67 at10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1
Position 1
Inst
Inst
Position 2
120
120
Position 3
300
300
Position 1
160
240
Position 2
240
360
Position 3
320
480
2
Position 4
480
720
2
Position 5
640
960
Position 6
800
1200
Position 1
Inst
Inst
Position 2
120
120
Position 3
300
300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
(ALSI, ALSIG)
Yes
2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x,
8x, 10x, 18x
2.5x, 4x, 6x, 7x,
8x, 10x, 12x
Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In)
(ALSI, ALSIG) 2
Fixed
2.5x
2.5x
2
2
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
2
2
2
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Ir
Notes
1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.
2
2
V4-T2-72
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
NG-Frame
2
Number of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
3
8.25 (209.6)
16.00 (406.4)
5.50 (139.7)
4
11.13 (282.6)
16.00 (406.4)
5.50 (139.7)
2
2
2
NG-Frame
Front View Three-Pole
Front Cover Cutout
2
Side View
3.44
(87.4)
2
BREAKER
2
9.25
(235.0)
R .25
(6.4)
2
1.91
(48.5)
16.00
(406.4)
2
3.68
1.50 (93.5)
(38.1)
2
2
3.19
(81.0)
6.38
(162.1)
8.25
(209.6)
2
5.50
(139.7)
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
2
NG-Frame
2
Complete Breaker
Breaker Type
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
NGS, NGH, NGC
45 (20.4)
58 (26.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-73
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Contents
Description
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
2
Product Description
●
2
2
2
2
●
Eaton’s RG-Frame circuit
breakers are available as
frame (which includes trip
unit), rating plug and
terminals
All R-Frame circuit breakers
are suitable for reverse
feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-74
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Page
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-75
V4-T2-76
V4-T2-81
V4-T2-82
V4-T2-84
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Catalog Number Selection
2
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac
2
RG Circuit Breaker With 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
2
RG H 3 250 39 ZG E C
2
Performance
at 480 Vac
H = 65 kAIC
C = 100 kAIC
K = Molded
case switch
2
Rating
Frame
RG
Blank = 80% rated
C
= 100% rated (except 2500 A)
Amperes
160 = 1600
200 = 2000
250 = 2500
Poles
3 = Three
4 = Four
Trip Unit
33 =
32 =
35 =
36 =
38 =
39 =
KS =
2
Terminations
310+ Electronic LS
310+ Electronic LSI
310+ Electronic LSG
310+ Electronic LSIG
310+ Electronic LSI w/ Maintenance Mode
310+ Electronic LSIG w/ Maintenance Mode
Molded case switch
2
M = Metric tapped line/load
conductors
E = Imperial tapped line/load
conductors
W = No terminals
2
2
Feature
Blank
B20
B21
B22
ZG
=
=
=
=
=
2
No feature
High load alarm
Ground fault alarm, with trip
Ground fault alarm, no trip
Zone selective interlocking
2
2
2
RG 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
2
RT 3 250 39 ZG
Type
Trip Unit
Poles
3 = Three
2
Feature
RT
Amperes
160 = 1600
200 = 2000
250 = 2500
33
32
35
36
38
Blank
B20
B21
B22
ZG
=
=
=
=
=
310+ Electronic LS
310+ Electronic LSI
310+ Electronic LSG
310+ Electronic LSIG
310+ Electronic LSI
w/ Maintenance Mode
39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG
w/ Maintenance Mode
=
=
=
=
=
2
No feature
High load alarm
Ground fault alarm, with trip
Ground fault alarm, no trip
Zone selective interlocking
2
2
2
2
RG Circuit Breaker with OPTIM 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit
2
RGH 3 16 T92 W
Type
RGH 65K
RGC 100K
Poles
3 = Three
4 = Four
Amperes
16 = 1600
20 = 2000
25 = 2500
Trip Function
Digitrip 610
T61 = LI
T62 = LSI
T63 = LS
T64 = LIG
T65 = LSG
T66 = LSIG
Digitrip 910
T91 = LI
T92 = LSI
T93 = LS
T94 = LIG
T95 = LSG
T96 = LSIG
R =
E =
P =
V3 =
W =
K =
2
Modification Suffix
Ground fault remote
RES trip
100% protection
(new design 310)
RES trip unit
100% prot. neut.
4P RES trip unit
Electronic trip without
ambient temperature
marked on trip unit
w/o terms
Molded case switch
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-75
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Product Selection
2
70 kA at 415 Vac and 65 kA at 480 Vac
2
2
Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles
LS
LSI
LSG 3
LSIG 3
ALSI
ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 4
2
1600 1
3
RGH316033E
RGH316032E
RGH316035E
RGH316036E
RGH316038E
RGH316039E
RGFCT160A
2
2000
3
RGH320033E
RGH320032E
RGH320035E
RGH320036E
RGH320038E
RGH320039E
RGFCT200A
2500
3
RGH325033E
RGH325032E
RGH325035E
RGH325036E
RGH325038E
RGH325039E
RGFCT250A
2
2
2
100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac
2
Type RGH with Digitrip 310+ High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
Number
of Poles
LS
LSI
LSG 35
LSIG 35
ALSI
ALSIG 35
6
RGH416033E
RGH416032E
—
—
RGH416038E
—
2000
46
RGH420033E
RGH420032E
—
—
RGH420038E
—
2500
46
RGH425033E
RGH425032E
—
—
RGH425038E
—
1600
1
4
Notes
1 For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame.
2 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.”
4 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
5 No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.”
RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-76
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
100 kA at Both 415 Vac and 480 Vac
2
Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.
2
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles
LS
LSI
LSG 3
LSIG 3
ALSI
ALSIG
Neutral CT
for LSG and LSIG 4
1600 1
3
RGC316033E
RGC316032E
RGC316035E
RGC316036E
RGC316038E
RGC316039E
RGFCT160A
2000
3
RGC320033E
RGC320032E
RGC320035E
RGC320036E
RGC320038E
RGC320039E
RGFCT200A
2500
3
RGC325033E
RGC325032E
RGC325035E
RGC325036E
RGC325038E
RGC325039E
RGFCT250A
2
2
2
2
Type RGC with Digitrip 310+ Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Maximum 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac, continued
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-83.
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Number
of Poles
LS
LSI
LSG 35
LSIG 35
ALSI
ALSIG 35
1600 1
46
RGC416033E
RGC416032E
—
—
RGC416038E
—
2000
46
RGC420033E
RGC420032E
—
—
RGC420038E
—
2500
46
RGC425033E
RGC425032E
—
—
RGC425038E
—
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit with
Adjustable Rating Plugs—Catalog Number 2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Switches
2
7
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
1600
3
RGK3160KSE
2000
3
RGK3200KSE
1600
4
RGK4160KSE
2000
4
RGK4200KSE
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 For SCR application, use 2000 ampere frame.
2 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
3 Ground fault equipped trip units available with remote indicating panel. Add “R” to catalog number, for example, “RGH316035RW.”
4 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
5 No neutral protection available on four-pole breakers with LSG or LSIG trip units.
6 Unprotected left pole neutral. Add “P” to catalog number for 100% protected left pole neutral, add “E” for 60% protected, for example, “RGH416033PW,” “RGH416033EW.”
7 Molded case switch will trip above 17,500 amperes.
2
2
2
RG MCCBs have English threading on line and load conductors. Use suffix “M” for metric threading.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-77
2.2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs
Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Number
of Poles
Long Delay Pickup
Long Delay Time
Short Time Range
Short Time Delay
Instantaneous
Ground Fault Pickup
Ground Fault Delay
Digitrip RMS
Interchangeable
Rating Plug
(Order as Individual
Component)
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LI
LS
LSI
LIG
LSG
LSIG
Fixed Rating Plug
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x M1 and M2
—
—
0.5–I.0n
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
—
—
—
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x M1 and M2
—
—
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x M1 and M2
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
—
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x M1 and M2
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
RGH316T66WP44
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1250
RP6R16A125
Type RGH with Digitrip 610 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600
3
RGH316T61WP44
RGH316T63WP44
RGH316T62WP44
RGH316T64WP44
RGH316T65WP44
2
2
2
Includes 1600 A rating plug
2000
3
RGH320T61WP49
RGH320T63WP49
RGH320T62WP49
RGH320T64WP49
RGH320T65WP49
RGH320T66WP49
2
2
2
2
2
Includes 2000 A rating plug
2500
3
RGH325T61WP53
RGH325T63WP53
RGH325T62WP53
RGH325T64WP53
RGH325T65WP53
RGH325T66WP53
1600
3
2
RGC316T61WP44
RGC316T63WP44
RGC316T62WP44
RGC316T64WP44
RGC316T65WP44
RGC316T66WP44
Includes 1600 A rating plug
2000
3
RGC320T61WP49
RGC320T63WP49
RGC320T62WP49
RGC320T64WP49
RGC320T65WP49
RGC320T66WP49
2
2
2
2
2
2
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1250
RP6R20A125
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1250
RP6R16A125
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1250
RP6R20A125
1600
RP6R20A160
Type RGC with Digitrip 610 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac
2
2
1600
Includes 2000 A rating plug
2500
3
RGC325T61WP53
RGC325T63WP53
RGC325T62WP53
RGC325T64WP53
RGC325T65WP53
Includes 2500 A rating plug
Notes
1 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
2 Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup.
RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-78
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
RGC325T66WP53
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Type RG with Digitrip 610 and 910, continued
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 610 and 910 Electronic Trip Unit with Rating Plugs
Order as Individual Component—Catalog Number 1
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Number
of Poles
Long Delay Pickup
Long Delay Time
Short Time Range
Short Time Delay
Instantaneous
Ground Fault Pickup
Ground Fault Delay
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S –Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G –Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Digitrip RMS
Interchangeable
Rating Plug
(Order as Individual
Component)
2
Fixed Rating Plug
2
LS
LSI
LIG
LSG
LSIG
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x M1 and M2
—
—
0.5–I.0n
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
—
—
—
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x M1 and M2
—
—
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
—
2–6 x M1 and M2
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
—
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
0.5–1.0 x In
2–24 Seconds
2–6 x Ir
100–500 ms
2–6 x M1 and M2
0.25–1.0 x In 2
100–500 ms
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
RGH316T96WP44
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1250
RP6R16A125
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1250
RP6R20A125
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
2
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
2
1200
RP6R16A120
1250
RP6R16A125
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1250
RP6R20A125
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
2
Type RGH with Digitrip 910 High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 70 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600
3
RGH316T91WP44
RGH316T93WP44
RGH316T92WP44
RGH316T94WP44
RGH316T95WP44
Includes 1600 A rating plug
2000
3
RGH320T91WP49
RGH320T93WP49
RGH320T92WP49
RGH320T94WP49
RGH320T95WP49
RGH320T96WP49
Includes 2000 A rating plug
2500
3
RGH325T91WP53
RGH325T93WP53
RGH325T92WP53
RGH325T94WP53
RGH325T95WP53
RGH325T96WP53
Includes 2500 A rating plug
Type RGC with Digitrip 910 Very High Interrupting Capacity—Ue Max. 690 Vac, 100 kA Icu at 415 Vac
1600
3
RGC316T91WP44
RGC316T93WP44
RGC316T92WP44
RGC316T94WP44
RGC316T95WP44
RGC316T96WP44
Includes 1600 A rating plug
2000
3
RGC320T91WP49
RGC320T93WP49
RGC320T92WP49
RGC320T94WP49
RGC320T95WP49
RGC320T96WP49
Includes 2000 A rating plug
2500
3
2
LI
RGC325T91WP53
RGC325T93WP53
RGC325T92WP53
RGC325T94WP53
Includes 2500 A rating plug
RGC325T95WP53
RGC25T96WP53
Notes
1 Order terminals separately. Mounting hardware not included.
2 Not to exceed 1200 ampere ground fault pickup.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
RG MCCBs have metric threading on line and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if imperial threading is required.
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-79
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Line and Load Terminals
R-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/Al terminals as standard and
copper only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation
is required. Must have terminals for 100% rated and or freeze
testing requirements.
2
2
2
2
2
Base Mounting Hardware
Supplied by customer.
Handle Extension
Included with breaker.
Additional handle extensions
are available.
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Hardware
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
Description
Wire Terminals
1600
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Metric
500–1000 (4)
300–500
TA1600RDM 1
1600
Copper
Cu
Metric
1–600 (4)
50–300
T1600RDM 1
2
2000
Aluminum
Cu/Al
Metric
2–600 (6)
35–300
TA2000RDM 2
2
2000
Copper
—
Metric
—
—
B2016RDM 1
2000
Copper
—
Metric
—
—
B2016RDLM 1
2
2500
Copper
—
Metric
—
—
B2500RDM 1
2
Rear Connectors
RG Rear Connector Exploded View
2
Conductor
(Viewed from Rear
of Circuit Breaker and Cut
Away for Clarity)
2
Conductor
(Viewed from Front
of Circuit Breaker)
Cu Only
Terminal
Catalog Number
T1600RDM 3
(For 1600 A
Frame Only)
2
2
OR
2
Al/Cu
Terminal
Catalog
Number
TA1600RDM 3
(For 1600 A
Frame Only)
2
2
2
2
Rear Connector (Cu)
B2016RDM
B2016RDLM (For 100% Application)
(For 1600 A and 2000 A Frames)
B2500RDM for 2500 A
Securing Hardware
TA2000RD Wire Terminal
2
Note: Order one TA2000RDM kit per three poles. Catalog number
includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or
load side of three-pole breaker.
2
Breaker Line/Load
Conductors
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-80
Single handle
extension
Catalog
Number
HEX6
Wire Seal
The wire seal can be used to
secure the cover on the trip
unit to prevent adjustments
after settings are confirmed.
Wire Seal
Securing
Hardware
2
2
Handle Extension
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Description
Catalog
Number
Wire seal
5108A03H01
Notes
1 Order one per pole—single terminals
individually packed.
2 Order one TA2000RD kit per three poles.
Catalog number includes bus connection,
terminals and hardware for either line
side or load side of three-pole breaker.
3 For use with 2500 A Frame. Do not order
separately unless for replacement
purposes. Included in breaker carton
when 2500 A frame is ordered.
RG MCCBs have metric threading on line
and load conductors. Use RD MCCBs if
imperial threading is required.
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
2
2
RG-Frame Accessories
Reference
Page
Description
Three-Pole
Left
2
Four-Pole
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
Neutral
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-109
■
■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
V4-T2-109
■
■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-109
■
■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-109
■
■
Shunt trip—standard
V4-T2-109
●
●
Undervoltage release mechanism
V4-T2-110
●
●
2
2
2
2
External Accessories
●
●
●
2
●
2
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-80
●
●
●
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-107
❏
❏
❏
❏
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-107
❏
❏
❏
❏
Electrical operator
V4-T2-107
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-418
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Handle extension
V4-T2-80
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Digitrip 310+ test kit
V4-T2-106
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-105
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Marine/naval application, UL 489 Supplement SA and SB
1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
2
2
2
2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
2
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Description
Catalog
Number
Electronic portable test kit
MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
5108A03H01
External neutral sensor (2500 A) 2
RGFCT250A
External neutral sensor (2000 A) 2
RGFCT200A
External neutral sensor (1600 A) 2
RGFCT160A
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication 3
—
Breaker-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEWR06
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Contact Eaton.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. Sold separately.
3 Cause-of-trip indication LEDs integrated in RG 310+ trip units.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-81
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
2
RGH
3, 4
125
RGC
3, 4
200
2
2
2
1
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
240
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
277
480
600
—
65
50
—
100
65
1
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
RGH
3, 4
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
415
690
2
Icu
135
70
25
100
50
13
2
Ics
RGC
Icu
200
100
35
Ics
100
50
18
2
2
3, 4
2
2
RG 310+ Specifications
Description
Specification
2
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip RMS 310+
2
Frame designation
RG
2
Frames available
1600 A, 2000 A, 2500 A
Continuous current range (A)
800–2500 A
2
Ground fault pickup (A)
200–1200 A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
65, 100
2
100% rated
Yes
Breaker Type
2
Protection
Ordering options
LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
2
Arcflash reduction maintenance system (or maintenance mode)
Yes
Interchangeable trip unit
Yes
2
High load alarm (suffix B20) 2
Yes
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 2
Yes
2
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 2
Yes
2
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)
LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Cause of trip indication
Yes
2
Thru-cover accessories
No
2
Notes
1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2
See Page V4-T2-74 for trip unit specifications.
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-82
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
RG 310+ Adjustability Specifications
2
RG Frame
310+ Settings
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
1600 A
2000 A
2500 A
A
800
1000
1600
B
900
1200
1700
C
1000
1400
1800
D
1100
1600
2000
E
1200
1700
2100
F
1400
1800
2200
G
1500
1900
2400
H (= In)
1600
2000
2500
Position 1
2
2
2
Position 2
4
4
4
Position 3
7
7
7
Position 4
10
10
10
Position 5
12
12
12
Position 6
15
15
15
Position 7
20
20
20
Position 8
24
24
24
Position 1
2x
2x
2x
Position 2
3x
3x
2x
Position 3
4x
4x
2x
Position 4
5x
5x
3x
Position 5
6x
6x
4x
Position 6
7x
7x
5x
Position 7
8x
8x
6x
Position 8
8x
8x
6x
Position 9
9x
9x
6x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS, LSG)
Fixed
67 at10x
67 at10x
67 at10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) 1
Position 1
Inst
Inst
Inst
Position 2
120
120
120
Position 3
300
300
300
Position 1
200
200
200
Position 2
400
400
400
Position 3
600
600
600
Position 4
800
800
800
Position 5
1000
1000
1000
Ig = ground fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
2
Ir
Position 6
1200
1200
1200
Position 1
Inst
Inst
Inst
Position 2
120
120
120
Position 3
300
300
300
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
(ALSI, ALSIG)
Yes
2.5x, 4x, 6x,
7x, 8x, 11x
2.5x, 4x, 6x,
7x, 8x, 9x
2.5x, 4x, 6x,
7x
Maintenance Mode (remote) pickup (2.5 x In)
(ALSI, ALSIG) 2
Fixed
2.5x
2.5x
2.5x
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 50 ms for ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode is enabled remotely using a 24 Vdc circuit.
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-83
2.2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
RG-Frame
2
Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2
3
15.50 (393.7)
16.00 (406.4)
9.75 (247.7)
4
20.00 (508.0)
16.00 (406.4)
9.75 (247.7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
Front View 3-Pole
Front Cover Cutout
Side View
CL
Breaker
14.50
(368.3)
2.25 (57.2)
7.25
(184.2)
0.16 R
(4.1)
8.25
(209.6)
7.75
(196.9)
5.10
(129.5)
CL
Handle
9.70
(246.4)
.44 R
(11.2)
16.00
(406.4)
Tee
Connectors
May Be
Rotated 90
15.00
(381.0)
2
2
2
4 Holes
0.44 Dia.
(11.2)
6.57
(166.9)
13.13
(333.5)
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
2
RG-Frame
2
2
Complete Breaker
Breaker
Type
Number of Poles
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
102 (46.3)
135 (61.2)
102 (46.3)
135 (61.2)
135 (61.2)
182 (82.6)
1600 Amperes
2
RGH, RGC
2
RGH, RGC
2
15.50
(393.7)
2000 Amperes
2500 Amperes
RGH, RGC
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-84
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
9.00
(228.6)
6.75
(171.5)
13.00
(330.2)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Motor Circuit 480 Vac, Protectors
2.2
Contents
Description
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
Product Selection Guide and Ordering
Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-86
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Motor Circuit Protectors
(MCP)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-85
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Product Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum 1
2
2
Continuous
Amperes
MCP
Trip
Setting 3
MCP
Catalog
Number
HMCPE003A0C
A
0.69 –0.91
9
2
B
1.1–1.3
15
C
1.6–1.7
21
2
D
2.0–2.2
27
E
2.3–2.5
30
F
2.6– 2.8
33
A
1.5–2.0
21
B
2.6–3.1
35
2
2
3
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes 2
7
2
C
3.7–3.9
49
D
4.8–5.2
63
2
E
5.3–5.7
70
F
5.8–6.1
77
A
3.4–4.5
45
2
B
5.7–6.8
75
C
8.0–9.1
105
2
D
10.4–11.4
135
E
11.5–12.6
150
F
12.7–13.0
165
A
3.9–9.1
90
B
11.5–13.7
150
2
C
16.1–18.3
210
D
20.7–22.9
270
2
E
23.0–25.2
300
F
25.3–26.1
330
2
2
2
2
2
2
15
30
HMCPE007C0C
HMCPE015E0C
HMCPE030H1C
Notes
1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.
2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown.
Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-86
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
EG-Frame—480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum, continued 1
Continuous
Amperes
50
70
100
100
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes 2
2
MCP
Trip
Setting 3
MCP
Catalog
Number
2
HMCPE050K2C
2
A
11.5–15.2
150
B
19.2–22.9
250
C
26.9–30.6
350
D
34.6–38.3
450
E
38.4–42.1
500
F
42.2–43.5
550
A
16.1–30.6
210
B
26.9–32.2
350
C
37.6–42.9
490
D
48.4–53.7
630
E
53.8–59.1
700
F
59.2–60.9
770
A
23.0–30.6
300
B
38.4–46.0
500
C
53.8–61.4
700
D
69.2–76.8
900
E
76.9–84.5
1000
F
84.6–87.0
1100
A
38.4–46.0
500
B
57.6–65.2
750
C
76.9–84.5
1000
D
4
1250
E
4
1375
F
4
1500
2
2
2
HMCPE070M2C
2
2
2
2
HMCPE100R3C
2
2
2
HMCPE100T3C
2
2
2
2
JG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
Continuous
Amperes
250
2
1
MCP
Trip Range
(Amperes)
MCP
Catalog
Number
500–1000
HMCPJ250D5L
625–1250
HMCPJ250F5L
750–1500
HMCPJ250G5L
875–1750
HMCPJ250J5L
1000–2000
HMCPJ250K5L
1125–2250
HMCPJ250L5L
1250–2500
HMCPJ250W5L
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.
2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown.
Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
3 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
4 Settings above 10 x I are for special applications. Where the ampere rating of the disconnecting means cannot be
n
less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-87
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
LG-Frame—600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1
2
Continuous
Amperes
MCP
Trip Range
(Amperes)
MCP
Catalog
Number
2
600
1250–2500
HMCPL600L6G
1500–3000
HMCPL600N6G
2
1750–3500
HMCPL600R6G
2000–4000
HMCPL600X6G
2
2250–4500
HMCPL600Y6G
2500–5000
HMCPL600P6G
3000–6000
HMCPL600M6G
2
2
Notes
1 UL listed for use with Eaton Motor Starters.
2
800 and 1200 ampere, 600 Vac maximum motor circuit protectors are available as Series C HMCP product.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-88
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Contents
Series G Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Description
Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-90
V4-T2-91
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Product Description
●
Eliminates need for
separate overload relay
Application Description
●
●
Can be used with
contactor to eliminate need
for overload relay and still
create manual motor
control
Meets requirement for
motor branch protection,
including:
●
Disconnecting means
●
Branch circuit short
circuit protection
●
Overload protection
Features and Benefits
●
●
●
●
●
●
Phase unbalance
protection
Phase loss protection
Hot trip/cold trip
High load alarm
Pre-detection trip relay
option
Class 10, 15, 20, 30
protection
Standards and Certifications
●
●
●
●
IEC 60947-2
UL 489 100% rated
UL 508
CSA C22.2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-89
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Product Selection
2
JGMP Catalog Numbers
35 kAIC
65 kAIC
Continuous Amperes
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
50
JGMPS050G
JGMPH050G
100
JGMPS100G
JGMPH100G
2
160
JGMPS160G
JGMPH160G
250
JGMPS250G
JGMPH250G
2
2
2
JGMP FLA le Dial Setting
2
Continuous Amperes
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
50
20
20
25
30
32
40
45
50
2
100
40
45
50
63
70
80
90
100
2
160
63
80
90
100
110
125
150
160
250
100
125
150
160
175
200
225
250
D
E
F
G
H
2
2
LGMP Catalog Numbers
50 kAIC
65 kAIC
Continuous Amperes
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
250
LGMPS250G
LGMPH250G
400
LGMPS400G
LGMPH400G
2
600
LGMPS600G
LGMPH600G
630 1
LGMPS630G
LGMPH630G
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
LGMP FLA le Dial Setting
Continuous Amperes
A
B
C
250
100
125
150
160
175
200
225
250
400
160
200
225
250
300
315
350
400
600
250
300
315
350
400
450
500
600
630 1
250
300
315
350
400
500
600
630
Notes
1 630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02.
For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-267.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-90
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
JGMPS and JGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
2
Maximum Rated Current—250 A
2
Breaker Type
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz
IEC 60947-2
220–240 Vac
380–415 Vac
660–690 Vac
JGMPS
JGMPH
I cu
85
100
I cs
85
100
I cu
40
70
I cs
40
70
I cu
12
14
I cs
6
7
240 Vac
85
100
480 Vac
35
65
600 Vac
25
35
Number of poles
3
3
Ampere range
50–250
50 –250
NEMA UL 489
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
LGMPS and LGMPH Rating and Ampere Range
Maximum Rated Current—630 A
2
1
Breaker Type
Breaker Capacity (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz
IEC 60947-2
220–240 Vac
380–415 Vac
660–690 Vac
NEMA UL 489
LGMPS
LGMPH
I cu
85
100
I cs
85
100
I cu
50
70
I cs
50
53
I cu
20
25
I cs
10
13
240 Vac
85
100
480 Vac
50
65
25
35
Number of poles
600 Vac
3
3
Ampere range
250–630 1
250 –630 1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 630 amperes is not a UL listed rating. 600 amperes is the maximum UL or CSA for LG breaker.
2
For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-91
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Contents
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Modules
Description
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Clockwise from Left:
JG, LG, EG MCCBs Shown with
Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module
2
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module
2
Product Description
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Eaton offers three- and fourpole 30 mA ground fault
(earth leakage) protection
modules for Series G E-, Jand L-frame molded case
circuit breakers (MCCBs).
Separate UL listed and IEC
rated devices are available for
each frame.
The modules are bottom
mounted and are available for
each frame circuits up to:
●
●
●
EG: 125 amperes
JG: 150 (UL), 160 (IEC)
or 250 amperes
LG: 400, 600 (UL)
or 630 (IEC) amperes
2
The module is completely self
contained, including a current
sensor, relay and power
supply inside the device.
Current pickup settings are
selectable from 0.03 to 10
amperes for all devices,
except for the UL listed
module, for which settings
are selectable from 0.03 to 30
amperes. Time delays are
also selectable from
Instantaneous to 1.0 second
for pickup settings of 0.10
amperes and above. The
current pickup setting of
0.03 amperes defaults to an
Instantaneous time setting
regardless of the time dial’s
position.
2
2
2
2
2. 100% after trip: alarms
when the breaker
reaches the set pickup
setting value and the
breaker trips.
2
2
2
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
IEC-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
1. 50% pre-trip: alarms
when the earth leakage
current reaches 50% of
the set pickup setting
value.
2
V4-T2-93
V4-T2-94
V4-T2-96
UL-Rated LG-Frame Earth Leakage Module Faceplate
Two alarm contacts are
included with each device,
which can be wired externally
for remote indication. Both of
these are also indicated by an
LED on the front of the
device:
2
Page
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
EG-Frame
JG-Frame
2
EG-Frame Ground Fault Modules,
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac,
50/60 Hz) 1
LG-Frame
LG-Frame Ground Fault Modules,
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
125
3
ELEBN3125G
400
3
ELLBN3400W
125
4
ELEBN4125G
400
4
ELLBN4400W
600
3
ELLBN3600W
600
4
ELLBN4600W
2
2
2
2
EG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules,
IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
LG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules,
IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
125
3
ELEBE3125G
400
3
ELLBE3400W
125
4
ELEBE4125G
400
4
ELLBE4400W
630
3
ELLBE3630W
630
4
ELLBE4630W
JG-Frame Ground Fault Modules,
UL-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 120–480 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
2
150
3
ELJBN3150W
150
4
ELJBN4150W
2
250
3
ELJBN3250W
250
4
ELJBN4250W
2
2
JG-Frame Earth Leakage Modules,
IEC-Rated (Bottom Mounted, 230–415 Vac,
50/60 Hz)
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
2
2
Catalog
Number
160
3
ELJBE3160W
160
4
ELJBE4160W
250
3
ELJBE3250W
250
4
ELJBE4250W
2
2
2
Note
1 Shunt trip and undervoltage release cannot be used in an EG
breaker connected to an earth leakage module.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-93
2.2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Assembled Breaker and Earth Leakage Module
Frame
Height
Width
Depth
Three-Pole
EG
10.25 (260.3)
3.00 (76.2)
2.98 (75.8)
2
JG
11.25 (285.8)
4.13 (104.9)
3.57 (90.7)
LG
15.38 (390.7)
5.48 (139.2)
4.06 (103.1)
2
Four-Pole
EG
10.25 (260.3)
4.00 (101.6)
2.98 (75.8)
JG
11.25 (285.8)
5.50 (139.7)
3.57 (90.7)
LG
15.38 (390.7)
7.23 (183.6)
4.06 (103.1)
2
2
2
EG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
10.26
(260.6)
2
4.75
(120.6)
0.55 (14.0)
2
2
1.49
1.00 (37.8)
(25.4)
0.50
(12.7)
2
3-Pole
2.98
(75.7)
1.00
(25.4)
2
1.50 0.50
(38.1) (12.7)
2
2
8.59
(218.2)
2
4.78
(121.4)
2.00
(50.8)
0.70 (17.8)
0.90 (22.9)
0.35 (8.9)
2
2
0.09
(2.29)
2
3.01
(76.5)
2.75
(69.9)
0.78
(19.8)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-94
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
3.98
(101.1)
3.17
(80.5)
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
2
4-Pole
5.50 (139.7)
3-Pole
4.13 (104.9)
0.69
2.06
1.38 (17.5)
(52.3)
(35.1)
3.92
(99.6)
2
5.50
(139.7)
1.25
(31.8)
3.57
(90.7)
3.92
(99.6)
5.50
(139.7)
1.88
(47.8)
2
6.97
(177.0)
2
4.93
(125.2)
0.28
(7.1)
11.25
(285.8)
2
0.63
(16.0)
R 0.19
(4.8)
7.00
(177.8)
2
2.05
(52.1)
2
11.25
(285.8)
2
1.06
(26.9)
0.50
(139.7)
2
TEST
2
3.37
(85.6)
4.25
(108.0)
RESET
2
2
2.05
(52.1)
4.09
(103.9)
3.57
3.69 (90.7)
(93.7) 3.81
(96.8)
4.78
(121.4)
3.31
(84.1)
2
2
2
LG-Frame With Earth Leakage Module
8.44
(214.4)
3.44
(87.4)
1.72
(43.7)
4.06
(103.1)
3.98
(101.1)
2
2
0.86
(21.8)
5.58
(141.7)
5.58
(141.7)
4.73
(120.1)
2
4.31
(109.5)
5.16
(131.1)
3.44
(87.4)
1.72
(43.7)
2
2
4.73
(120.1)
2
2
8.44
(214.4)
10.13
(257.3)
2
2
15.38
(390.7)
13.69
(347.7)
3-Pole
5.48 (139.2)
4-Pole
7.22 (183.4)
4-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
2.74 (69.6)
2
13.68
(347.5)
15.38
(390.7)
2
3.97
(100.8)
4.30
(109.2)
4.55
(115.6)
5.43
(137.9)
4-Pole
7.22 (183.4)
3-Pole
5.48 (139.2)
2
4-Pole
2.75 (69.9)
3-Pole
2.74 (69.6)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
V4-T2-95
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Contents
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Modules
Description
2
Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-97
V4-T2-98
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
2
2
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
2
Product Overview
Product Description
Features and Benefits
Standards and Certifications
Power demand continues
to grow in new and existing
facilities. To meet increased
demand, larger utility
supplies, spot networks and
large facility transformers
are installed. The increased
capacity of the electrical
source results in increased
fault currents in excess
of 100 kA short-circuit
protection. Eaton
manufactures non-fused
current limiting modules with
interrupting capacities up to
200 kA at 600 Vac or 70 kA at
690 Vac. Unlike fused current
limiters with a one-time use,
a current limiter module
provides an automatic reset
of the module after a shortcircuit event. Resetting the
molded-case circuit breaker is
the only action required to
restore critical power to the
system; there is no time
wasted with sourcing the
correct replacement fuses
or module to bring system
back online.
The current limiting breaker
modules use a unique contact
design to enhance the
system protection similar to
that of the circuit breaker.
When high short-circuit
current is flowing through the
contacts of these modules,
the design results in very high
interrupting capacities and
improved current limiting
characteristics.
Superior system protection:
●
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
●
●
●
Application Description
High-performance breakers
are most commonly applied
when very high fault levels
are available and with
applications where the
current limiting capability is
used upstream of the final
load to limit current. Typical
loads include lighting, power
distribution, and motor
control applications.
●
●
●
Auto reset improves
system uptime and
eliminates the need for
finding replacement parts
No fuses to replace,
reducing the overall cost of
ownership and the waste
created by fuses
Overloads, by using inverse
time current tripping
characteristics of the
molded-case circuit
breaker
Low-level short circuits, by
using instantaneous and/or
short-time delay tripping
characteristics of the
molded-case circuit
breaker
High-level short circuits, by
using ultra-high-speed,
blow-apart contacts of the
current limiting module in
series with the circuit
breaker contacts
Let-through currents, by
improved opening speed of
the contacts, the resultant
rapid rise of arc voltage
introduces impedance into
the system
2
2
2
V4-T2-96
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
●
●
IEC 60947-2
UL 489
CSA C22.2
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
2
2
Series G High Performance Family Offering
Type
Product
EGC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only
Amperes
480 Vac
(UL)
600 Vac
(UL)
15–125
100
35 1
1
415 Vac (IEC)
Ics
Icu
Ics
100
100
—
—
With limiter
15–100
150
100
150
150
—
—
JG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only
70–250
200
50
200
200
18
14
JG 3P electronic
With limiter
70–225
200
200
200
150
70
18
Breaker only
20–250
200
50
200
200
18
14
With limiter
100–250
200
200
200
150
70
18
LG 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only
250–600
200
65
200
200
35
18
LG3P electronic
100–600
200
65
200
200
35
18
Breaker only
2
690 Vac (IEC)
Icu
2
2
2
2
2
2
EG-Frame
EG IC Rating—150 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac
2
UL Listed
(NEMA/IEC Rated)
Base Molded Case
Circuit Breaker
Breaker with
Line Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Breaker with
Load Side Mounted
Current Limiter
Line and Load
Terminations Included 2
Interphase Barrier
Included for Limiter
EGC3015FFG
EGC3015FFGQ01
EGC3015FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3016FFG
EGC3016FFGQ01
EGC3016FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3020FFG
EGC3020FFGQ01
EGC3020FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3025FFG
EGC3025FFGQ01
EGC3025FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3030FFG
EGC3030FFGQ01
EGC3030FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3032FFG
EGC3032FFGQ01
EGC3032FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3035FFG
EGC3035FFGQ01
EGC3035FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3040FFG
EGC3040FFGQ01
EGC3040FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3045FFG
EGC3045FFGQ01
EGC3045FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3050FFG
EGC3050FFGQ01
EGC3050FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3060FFG
EGC3060FFGQ01
EGC3060FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3063FFG
EGC3063FFGQ01
EGC3063FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3070FFG
EGC3070FFGQ01
EGC3070FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3080FFG
EGC3080FFGQ01
EGC3080FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3090FFG
EGC3090FFGQ01
EGC3090FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
EGC3100FFG
EGC3100FFGQ01
EGC3100FFGQ02
T125EF
EIPBSK
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 600Y/347V.
2 Two interphase barriers included on line end mounted limiter; (2) line end of limiter. Four interphase barriers included on load end mounted limiter; (2) line end of breaker
(2) load end of limiter.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-97
2.2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module
Frame
Height
Width
Depth
Weight in lbs (kg)
EG
9.66 (245.7)
3.00 (76.2)
2.98 (75.8)
2.91 (1.32)
HMCP
9.66 (245.7)
3.00 (76.2)
2.98 (75.8)
4.18 (1.90)
EG-Frame With Current Limiter Module
2
2
0.56
(14.2)
2
2
2
2
2
1.00
(25.4)
3.00
(76.2)
9.66
(245.4)
4.17
(105.9)
3.61
(91.7)
0.50
1.00 (12.7)
(25.4)
1.00
(25.4)
2
3.20
(81.3)
2
4.17
(105.9)
2
2
2
2.75 0.09
(69.9) (2.3)
2
0.78
(19.8)
2
2
0.41
(10.4)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-98
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
JG Frame
JG IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac and 70 kAIC at 690 Vac
Ampere
Rating
Magnetic
Range
UL Listed, IEC Rated
Breaker With Line Side
Mounted Current Limiter 1
UL Listed, IEC Rated
Breaker With Load Side
Mounted Current Limiter 2
IEC Rated Breaker
With Line Side Mounted
Current Limiter 1
IEC Rated Breaker
With Load Side Mounted
Current Limiter 2
Fixed Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic
Adjustable Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic
—
2
2
2
70
350–700
JGH3070FAGQ01
JGH3070FAGQ02
—
90
450–900
JGH3090FAGQ01
JGH3090FAGQ02
—
—
100
500–1000
JGH3100FAGQ01
JGH3100FAGQ02
JGH3100AAGQ01
JGH3100AAGQ02
125
625–1250
JGH3125FAGQ01
JGH3125FAGQ02
JGH3125AAGQ01
JGH3125AAGQ02
150
750–1550
JGH3150FAGQ01
JGH3150FAGQ02
—
—
160
800–1600
—
—
JGH3160AAGQ01
JGH3160AAGQ02
175
875–1750
JGH3175FAGQ01
JGH3175FAGQ02
—
—
200
1000–2000
JGH3200FAGQ01
JGH3200FAGQ02
JGH3200AAGQ01
JGH3200AAGQ02
225
1125–2250
JGH3225FAGQ01
JGH3225FAGQ02
—
—
2
JGH325033GQ02
—
—
2
JGH325032GQ02
—
—
2
JGH325035GQ02
—
—
JGH325036GQ02
—
—
2
2
2
2
Electronic Trip LS
250
—
250
—
250
—
250
—
JGH325033GQ01
Electronic Trip LSI
JGH325032GQ01
2
Electronic Trip LSG
JGH325035GQ01
2
Electronic Trip LSIG
JGH325036GQ01
2
Series G HMCP
Ampere
Rating
Motor Circuit Protector with
Line Side Mounted Current Limiter
Breaker with Load Side
Mounted Current Limiter
250
HMCPJ250D5LQ01
HMCPJ250D5LQ02
250
HMCPJ250F5LQ01
HMCPJ250F5LQ02
250
HMCPJ250G5LQ01
HMCPJ250G5LQ02
250
HMCPJ250J5LQ01
HMCPJ250J5LQ02
250
HMCPJ250K5LQ01
HMCPJ250K5LQ02
250
HMCPJ250L5LQ01
HMCPJ250L5LQ02
2
2
2
2
2
2
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire
Range/ Number
of Conductors
Catalog
Number
Cu/Al
10–185
#8–350 (1)
TA250FJ 3
2
2
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
250
Aluminum
2
Notes
1 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJIPBK.
2 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter.
3 Line and load terminals included with products listed above.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-99
2.2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module
Frame
Height
Width
Depth
Weight in lbs (kg)
JG + limiter
13.06 (331.7)
4.13 (104.9)
3.44 (87.4)
9.87 (4.48)
HMCP
13.06 (331.7)
4.13 (104.9)
3.44 (87.4)
9.87 (4.48)
JG-Frame With Current Limiter Module
2
2
2
4.13
(104.9)
4.12
(104.6)
2
2
2
2
13.06
(331.7)
2
2
4.41
(112.0)
2
2
3.34
(84.8)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-100
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
3.44
(87.4)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Contents
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination
Description
Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-102
V4-T2-103
V4-T2-103
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for Selective Coordination
2
Product Description
2
Eaton’s Electrical Sector
introduces new high-magnetic
withstand molded case circuit
breakers, specifically designed
for critical operations and
selective coordination
requirements. The highmagnetic withstand LHH
and NHH frames continue
the legacy of circuit breaker
innovation for which Eaton
is recognized throughout the
world. The LHH and NHH
breakers are equipped with
125 to 400 ampere trip units
with high-magnetic capability.
This design enables the
breakers to withstand up
to 90 times rated current
before opening under shortcircuit conditions.
The LHH and NHH circuit
breakers incorporate a higher
level of instantaneous pickup,
thus allowing for higher
current levels of selective
coordination. Standard
molded case circuit breakers
typically are furnished with a
magnetic pickup or electronic
instantaneous adjustment or
instantaneous override set at
10 times (10x) the continuous
trip rating.
Features, Benefits and
Functions
Eaton’s new LHH and NHH
molded case circuit breakers
are furnished with a higher
level of magnetic pickup or
electronic instantaneous
settings as indicated in
table on Page V4-T2-103.
These higher levels of
magnetic pickup and
electronic instantaneous
values in turn allow the
system designer to obtain
selective coordination at fault
current levels up to these
higher ratings. Greater values
of selective coordination are
available based on
manufacturer tested
combinations using the LHH
and NHH as line-side
breakers and standard
breakers as load-side devices.
Refer to IA01200002E to
determine the maximum
fault values that selective
coordination achieves. When
the line-side and load-side
molded case circuit breaker
trip ratings are chosen to
coordinate in the overload
range, they also can be
selectively coordinated in
the fault range up to the
values listed in the table on
Page V4-T2-103 or
IA01200002E. For
overcurrents protected
by circuit breakers on the
load-side of the LHH or NHH,
only the effected load-side
circuit breaker will open,
while the line-side LHH and/
or NHH circuit breakers
remain closed, thus providing
continuity of power to the
other critical loads supplied
by the LHH or NHH circuit
breakers.
Benefits of Using the LHH
and NHH Molded Case
Circuit Breakers
Customer expectations and
codes are driving product
development to protect
customers’ critical
operations. NEC® 2005 and
2008 requires circuits with
elevators, emergency
systems, legally required
standby systems, health care
essential systems and critical
operation power systems to
be selectively coordinated.
Simply stated, only the
closest protective device
directly protecting the
circuit having an overcurrent
(overload or fault) condition
should open.
All other overcurrent
protective devices within
these systems shall remain
closed. Similarly, backup
power system designs of
a critical nature that are not
code mandated may also
require overcurrent protective
devices to be selectively
coordinated as much as
practicable to provide a higher
level of uptime.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-101
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Product Selection
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Proven Technology
and Performance
The LHH is based on the
Series G L-Frame circuit
breaker, sharing the same
small footprint and field-fit
accessories as the L-Frame
breaker. The NHH is based
on the Series G N-Frame
circuit breaker and shares
the same footprint and
accessories as the N-Frame
breaker. NHH accessories
must be factory installed.
The LHH incorporates a
thermal-magnetic trip unit
with fixed thermal and
fixed magnetic settings.
The NHH has an OPTIM™
electronic trip unit with
LSI adjustment capabilities.
The instantaneous setting is
adjustable from 1000–4000 A
or may be turned off to
default to the frame override
of 14,000 A. A hand-held
OPTIMizer must be used
with the NHH to adjust
short-time delay and
instantaneous, however,
the long delay pickup is fixed
and cannot be adjusted.
LHH
LHH and NHH Catalog Numbers
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
LSI Electronic
Trip Unit
Ampere
Rating
LHH Frame
NHH Frame
125
LHH3125FFG
—
150
LHH3150FFG
NHH3150T52X15
175
LHH3175FFG
NHH3175T52X15
200
LHH3200FFG
NHH3200T52X15
225
LHH3225FFG
NHH3225T52X15
250
LHH3250FFG
NHH3250T52X15
300
LHH3300FFG
NHH3300T52X15
350
LHH3350FFG
NHH3350T52X15
400
LHH3400FFG
—
The LHH and NHH
breakers are available in
Eaton’s panelboards and
switchboards.
Standards and Certifications
●
●
UL
CSA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-102
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Technical Data and Specifications
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2.2
Dimensions
Three-pole
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125–400 ampere LHH
150–350 ampere NHH
Trip units:
LHH—thermal-magnetic
NHH—LSI electronic trip unit
No rating plugs required
Factory-sealed breakers
LHH uses same internal and external accessories
as standard Series G L-Frame circuit breaker
NHH uses same internal and external accessories
as standard Series G N-Frame circuit breaker
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Dimensions
2
Description
Height
Width
5.48 (139.2)
4.09 (103.9)
12.36 (5.6)
16.00 (406.4)
8.25 (209.5)
5.50 (139.7)
46.80 (21.2)
R 0.25
(6.4)
CL
4.06
(103.1)
Breaker
3.16
(80.3)
5.58
(141.7)
400
350
2
2
10.13
(257.3)
2
1.92
(48.8)
2.69
(68.3)
5.48
(139.2)
5.38
(136.7)
2
Three-Pole
2
N-Frame
NEMA UL 489
240 Vac
100
100
480 Vac
65
65
600 Vac
35
35
250 Vac
42
—
220 Vac
100
100
415 Vac
70
70
690 Vac
25
25
125/250 Vdc
22
—
Number of poles
3
3
Ampere range
125–400 A
150–350 A
Front Cover Cutout
3.44
(87.4)
CL
R 0.25
Breaker
(6.4)
1.91
(48.5)
1.50
(38.1)
IEC 60947-2
6.38
(162.1)
3.68
(93.5)
3.19
(81.0)
2
2
2.43 (61.7)
Breaker Type
Max. rated current (amperes)
2
10.13 (257.3)
NHH
Short-Circuit Current Ratings (kA rms) AC 50–60 Hz
NHH
2
LHH
2.00
(50.8)
LHH
Weight in
Lbs (kg)
L-Frame
LHH and NHH Electrical Characteristics
Description
Depth
Front View Three-Pole
Side View
2
2
2
9.25
(235.0)
16.00
(406.4)
2
2
8.25
(209.6)
5.50
(139.7)
2
2
2
Continuous Current Ratings
Continuous
Current
Rating (Ir)
Magnetic
Trip Point
Continuous
Current
Multiplier
Instantaneous
Trip Point
Continuous
Current
Multiplier
Short Delay
Pickup
125 A
2500 A
20x
—
—
—
150 A
2500 A
16x
14,000 A
93x
225–1200 A
175 A
4000 A
22x
14,000 A
80x
260–1400 A
200 A
4000 A
20x
14,000 A
70x
300–1600 A
225 A
6000 A
26x
14,000 A
62x
338–1800 A
250 A
6000 A
24x
14,000 A
56x
375–2000 A
300 A
6000 A
20x
14,000 A
47x
450–2400 A
350 A
6000 A
17x
14,000 A
40x
525–2800 A
400 A
6000 A
15x
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-103
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Contents
2
Description
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Page
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories and Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-106
V4-T2-107
V4-T2-109
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
Special Features and Accessories
Eaton’s molded case circuit
breakers are designed to
provide circuit protection for
low voltage distribution
systems. They are described
by NEMA as, “... a device for
closing and interrupting a
circuit between separable
contacts under both normal
and abnormal conditions,”
and furthermore as, “... a
breaker assembled as an
integral unit in a supporting
and enclosing housing of
insulating material.” The
National Electrical Code
(NEC) describes them as, “A
device designed to open and
close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to
open the circuit automatically
on a predetermined overload
of current, without injury to
itself when properly applied
within its rating.”
So designed, Eaton circuit
breakers protect conductors
against overloads and
conductors and connected
apparatus, such as motors
and motor starters, against
short circuits.
In low voltage distribution
systems, there are many
varied applications of molded
case circuit breakers.
Eaton offers the most
comprehensive family of
molded case circuit breakers
in the industry.
This section of circuit
breakers includes:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thermal-magnetic trip
breakers
Electronic rms trip
breakers
Molded case switches
Motor circuit protectors
Current limiting breakers
Special application
breakers
Modified Breakers
Eaton breakers can be ordered
with internal accessories
installed. These modified
breakers will be subject to an
addition charge.
Special Calibration
Special non-UL listed
calibrations are available for
certain ambient temperatures
other than 40 °C and for
frequencies other than
50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced
interrupting ratings will apply
for 400 Hz applications.
●
Add suffix H01 to
breaker catalog number
for 400 Hz rating
50 ºC Calibration
Note: Breakers equipped with
electronic trip units can operate
reliably in ambient temperatures
of 50 °C. Add suffix “V3” to NG
MCCBs to remove standard
40 °C labeling.
Add suffix “V” to catalog
number for complete thermal
magnetic breaker when
ordering listed ampere ratings
for breakers to be used in
50 ºC ambients. 50 ºC
ambient MCCBs are not
UL listed.
Contact Eaton for availability.
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-104
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Calibrations and Treatment
Frame
Description
EG JG LG NG RG
Special
calibration
■
■
■
■
■
Moisturefungus
treatment
■
■
■
■
■
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Standards and Certifications
Moisture-Fungus Treatment
All Eaton circuit breaker cases
are molded from glasspolyester, which does not
support the growth of fungus.
Any parts that are susceptible
to the growth of fungus will
require special treatment.
Order by description.
●
Add suffix J01 to breaker
catalog number
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers
The circuit breakers may be
ordered with freeze testing.
This option uses special
lubrication and mechanical
operation is verified at –40 °C.
●
Add suffix F01 to catalog
number –57 °F, F02 –30 °F
Marine Applications
E- to R-Framed circuit
breakers can be supplied to
meet the following marine
specifications:
●
U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46;
ABS—American Bureau of
Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV;
and Lloyds
These specifications
generally require molded
case circuit breakers to be
supplied with 50 °C ambient,
and plug-in adapter kits.
When plug-in adapter kits are
used, no terminals need be
supplied (switchboard
applications).
Circuit breakers can also be
supplied to meet UL 489
Supplement SA (Marine use)
and UL 489 Supplement SB
(Naval Use).
UL 489 Supplement SA
applies to vessels over 65 feet
(19.8m) in length.
Molded case circuit breakers
are designed to conform with
the following standards:
Requirements include 40 °C
ambient calibration, special
labeling, and no use of
aluminum conductors or
terminals. (No 50 °C.)
●
●
Add suffix H08
●
Or you can choose to add
50ºC ambient but then there
is no “UL” mark.
●
Add suffix VH08
UL 489 Supplement SB
requires partial 50 °C ambient
calibration, vibration testing,
special nameplating and no
use of aluminum conductors
or terminals. Eaton chooses
to always fully calibrate to 50
°C ambient. (“Naval” labeled
per UL but no “UL” mark due
to 50 °C label.)
●
●
●
●
Add suffix VH09
●
Certified Test Reports
Eaton breakers can be
ordered with certified test
reports at the time of order
entry. Test report documents
the thermal and magnetic or
electronic tripping
characteristics of the
individual breaker. Breaker
and test report must be
ordered together. Add suffix
12 to breaker catalog number
and enter separate line item
on order for certified test
report.
●
●
●
●
●
Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., Standard UL 489,
molded case circuit
breakers and circuit
breaker enclosures
National Electrical
Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) Standards
Publication No. AB1-1993,
molded case circuit
breakers
Australian Standard AS
2184, molded case circuit
breakers
British Standards Institution
Standard BS 4752: Part 1,
switchgear and control
gear Part 1: circuit breakers
Canadian Standards
Association (CSA) Standard
C22.2 No. 5, service
entrance and branch circuit
breakers
International
Electrotechnical
Commission
Recommendations IEC
60947-2, circuit breakers
Japanese T-Mark Standard
molded case circuit
breakers
South African Bureau of
Standards, Standard SABS
156, Standard Specification
for molded case circuit
breakers
Swiss Electro-Technical
Association Standard SEV
157-1, safety regulations
for circuit breakers
Union Technique de
l’Electricite Standard NF C
63-120, low voltage
switchgear and control gear
circuit breaker
requirements
Verband Deutscher
Elektrotechniker
(Association of German
Electrical Engineers)
Standard VDE 0660, low
voltage switchgear and
control gear, circuit
breakers
Conformance with these
standards satisfies most local
and international codes,
assuming user acceptability
and simplified application.
Molded case circuit breakers
equal or exceed Federal
Specification Classification
W-C-375b requirements for
the particular class associated
with the circuit breaker frame
being considered.
Open breakers do not have
service entrance ratings.
Service entrance rating is part
of the enclosure.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-105
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Internal Accessories
2
Alarm Lockout
The alarm switches operate
when the circuit breaker is
tripped by a short circuit or
overcurrent, but also when it
is tripped by a shunt trip or
undervoltage release.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Auxiliary Switches
Auxiliary switches are used
for signaling and control
purposes. The various
functions of the auxiliary
switches (changeover) are
shown on Page V4-T2-108.
2
Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Shunt Trips
The shunt trip is used for
remote tripping.
The coil of the shunt trip is
rated only for short-time
operation.
It is not permissible with
the circuit breaker open to
apply a continuous opening
command to the shunt trip in
order to prevent the breaker
from closing. This means
that interlocking circuits with
continuous commands
may not be set up with
shunt trips.
Undervoltage Releases
The circuit breaker cannot be
closed until the undervoltage
release is energized. If the
release is not energized, the
circuit breaker can only
perform an idle switching
operation.
2
2
2
2
Frequent idle switching
actions should be avoided as
they shorten the endurance
of the circuit breaker.
2
2
2
Cause of Trip Display/Remote
Mount Cause of Trip Display
The Cause of Trip Display
can be field-installed on any
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit.
The device provides breaker
information through an LCD
screen, such as cause of
trip, phrase current, ground
current and low loads.
The display is ideal for
troubleshooting common
trips such as ground
fault, long delay, and
instantaneous/short delay.
The DIGIVIEW version will
provide a local display at the
breaker without additional
wiring by connecting directly
onto the trip unit. The
DIGIVIEWR06 version has a
6 foot cable that allows users
to mount the display on the
outside of an enclosure door
and connect to the trip unit
that is contained inside the
enclosure.
The DIGIVIEWR06 is NEMA
3R rated.
Cause of Trip Display/
Remote Mount Cause of
Trip Display
2
Catalog
Number
2
DIGIVIEW
DIGIVIEWR06
2
Cause of Trip LED Module
The Cause of Trip LED
Module can be field-installed
on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip
unit. The device provides a
cause of trip indication via
LED. The Cause of Trip LED
Module connects directly
onto the trip unit. When the
breaker trips, the module
indicates the cause of trip
(long delay, short delay,
instantaneous and ground)
via LED indication. The
module is reset after the
breaker is reset.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Cause of Trip LED Module
Catalog
Number
2
TRIP-LED
2
2
V4-T2-106
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Electronic Portable Test Kit
The electronic portable test
kit provides a means to
complete field tests using
secondary injection on all
310+ trip units. The same
test kit is also capable of
secondary injection testing on
Magnum and Series NRX low
voltage power circuit
breakers' 520 and 1150
trip units.
Electronic Portable Test Kit
Catalog
Number
MTST230V
Wire Seal
The wire seal can be used to
secure the cover of the trip
unit to prevent adjustments
after settings are confirmed.
Wire Seal
Catalog
Number
5108A03H01
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
External Accessories and Test Kit
2
External Accessories
Description
Fit
Type
Non-padlockable handle block
Field
Padlockable handle block
Field
Padlockable handle block
off-only
Field
Padlockable handle lock hasp
Field
Padlockable handle lock hasp
off-only
2
Frame
2
EG
JG
LG
NG
RG
EFHB
—
—
LKD4
—
EFPHB
—
—
—
—
EFPHBOFF
FJPHBOFF
LBHPOFF
—
—
EFPLK
FJPHL
LPHL
PLK5
HLK6
Field
EFPHLOFF
FJPHLOFF
LPHLOFF
PLK55OFF
HLK6OFF
2
Kirk key interlock kit 12
Field
—
KYKJG
KYKLG
KYK4
KYK6
Castell key interlock kit 23
Field
—
CTKJG
CTKLG
CTK4
CTK6
2
Slide bar interlock 4
Field
EFSBI
FJSBI
LGSBI
SBK5
—
Walking beam interlock 4
Three-pole
EG3WBI
JG3WBI
LG3WBI
WBL5
WBL6
Four-pole
EG4WBI
JG4WBI
LG4WBI
WBL5
—
120 Vac
MOPEG240C
MOPJG120C
MOPLG120C
EOP5T07
EOP6T08K
240 Vac
MOPEG240C
MOPJG240C
MOPLG240C
EOP5T11
EOP6T11K
24 Vdc
MOPEG48D
MOPJG24D
MOPLG24D
EOP5T21
—
48 Vdc
MOPEG48D
—
—
EOP5T22
EOP6T21K
125 Vdc
MOPEG120C
MOPJG120C
MOPLG120C
EOP5T26
—
220 Vdc
—
MOPJG240C
MOPLG240C
—
—
Electrical operator 5
Plug-in adapters
Rear connecting studs 6
Wohner busbar adapter
250 Vdc
—
MOPJG240C
MOPLG240C
—
—
Three-pole
PAD3E
PAD3J
PAD3L
PAD53
—
Four-pole
PAD4E
PAD4J
PAD4L
—
—
Field
EFRCSDL
FJRCSDL
LRCS3WK (3P)
—
—
EFRCSDS
FJRCSDS
LRCS4WK (4P)
—
—
EFRCSWL
FJRCSWL
—
—
—
EFRCSWS
FJRCSWS
—
—
—
Field top
EG-BUS-T
JG-BUS-TB
LG-BUS-TB
—
—
Field bottom
EG-BUS-B
JG-BUS-TB
LG-BUS-TB
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Series G MCCB Frames EG, JG, and LG to mount to the SASY 60 mm Wohner Classic System
●
●
UL file # E197132
No line side wiring required
●
●
Compact design
Up to 630 A MCCB
●
●
UL508 tested and certified
Reverse feed possible
using Wohner system with
Eaton breakers
2
2
2
Wohner Busbar
Adapter
2
Wohner Busbar Adapters
Breaker Frame
Busbar Adapter
Connection Point
EG
EG-BUS-T
Top
EG
EG-BUS-B
Bottom
JG
JG-BUS-TB
Top or bottom
LG
LG-BUS-TB
Top or bottom
2
2
2
Notes
1 Provision only.
2 See Page V4-T2-316 for bolt projection dimensions.
3 Castell bolt mounting hole must be 10 mm.
4 Requires two breakers.
5 Contact Eaton for availability of operators for EG- and NG-Frames before December 2004.
6 D = Imperial threads UL, W = metric threads IEC, L = long studs, S = short studs.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-107
2.2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2
Accessory Configurations for EG–RG Circuit Breakers
2
Internal Accessory Configurations
2
2
2
2
¬
2
2
2
¬
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨
2
¡
¡
¡
¡
2
2
2
2
¨
≠
¬ = For N and R-Frame Circuit Breakers Only
2
2
2
Contact Making by the Auxiliary and Alarm Switches as a
Function of the Switching Position of the Circuit Breaker
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-108
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Accessories
2
Field Fit Kit Catalog Numbers
2
Alarm Lockout
2
Frame
Description
Make/Break
2 Make/2 Break
Description
EG, JG and LG
NG
RG 1
Left
—
A1L5LPK
—
Right
ALM1M1BEPK 2
A1L5RPK
A1L6RPK
Pole Location
Left
—
A2L5LPK
—
Right
ALM2M2BEPK 3
A2L5RPK
A2L6RPK
Pole Location
For Use in Frame
Contact Type
Catalog Number
Make/Break
Right
EG
Silver
ALM1M1BEPK
2 Make/ 2 Break
Right
EG
Silver
ALM2M2BEPK
Make/Break
Right
JG and LG
Silver
ALM1M1BJPK
2 Make/ 2 Break
Right
JG and LG
Silver
ALM2M2BJPK
Make/Break
Right
EG
Gold
ALM1M1BEEPK
2 Make/ 2 Break
Right
EG
Gold
ALM2M2BEEPK
Make/Break
Right
JG and LG
Gold
ALM1M1BEJPK
2 Make/ 2 Break
Right
JG and LG
Gold
ALM2M2BEJPK
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Auxiliary Switch
Frame
2
Description
Pole Location
EG, JG and LG
NG
RG 1
1A, 1B
Left
—
A1X5PK
—
Right
AUX1A1BPK
A1X5PK
—
2A, 2B
Left
—
A2X5PK
—
Right
AUX2A2BPK
A2X5PK
A2X6RPK
Left
—
A3X5LPK
—
Right
—
A3X5RPK
—
Left
—
—
—
Right
—
—
A4X6RPK
2
Pole Location
For Use in Frame
Contact Type
Catalog Number
2
3A, 3B
4A, 4B
Description
1A, 1B
Right
EG/JG/LG
Silver
AUX1A1BPK
2A, 2B
Right
EG/JG/LG
Silver
AUX2A2BPK
1A, 1B
Right
EG/JG/LG
Gold
AUX1E1BPK
2A, 2B
Right
EG/JG/LG
Gold
AUX2E2BPK
NG
RG 1
AA115LPK
—
AA115RPK
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout
2
Frame
Description
Pole Location
EG, JG and LG
—
Left
—
4
Right
AUXALRMEPK
Description
Pole Location
For Use in Frame
Contact Type
Catalog Number
1A/1B & 1M/1B
Right
EG
Silver
AUXALRMEPK
1A/1B & 1M/1B
Right
JG and LG
Silver
AUXALRMJPK
1A/1B & 1M/1B
Right
EG
Gold
AUXALRMEEPK
1A/1B & 1M/1B
Right
JG and LG
Gold
AUXALRMEJPK
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
2 Part number for JG and LG is ALM1M1BJPK.
3 Part number for JG and LG is ALM2M2BJPK.
4 Part number for JG and LG is AUXALRMJPK.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
V4-T2-109
2.2
2
Shunt Trip—Standard
2
ST
2
EG, JG and LG 2
NG
48–60 Vac
Left
SNT4860CPK
SNT5LP05K
—
Right
—
—
SNT6P05K
Left
SNT120CPK
SNT5LP11K
—
Right
—
—
SNT6P11K
Left
SNT480CPK 3
—
—
Right
—
—
—
220–250 Vdc or 380–440 Vac
—
SNT5LP14K
SNT6P14K
480–600 Vac
—
SNT5LP18K
SNT6P18K
Left
SNT012CPK
—
—
Right
—
—
—
24 Vac/dc
2
48–60 Vdc
2
110–125 Vdc
2
250 Vdc
RG 1
Left
SNT024CPK
SNT5LP03K
—
Right
—
—
SNT6P03K
Left
SNT4860CPK
SNT5LP23K
—
Right
—
—
SNT6P23K
Left
SNT125DPK
SNT5LP26K
—
Right
—
—
SNT6P26K
Left
SNT250DPK
—
—
Right
—
—
—
Shunt Trip—Low Energy
Frame
Description
Pole
Location
EG, JG and LG
NG
RG 2
—
Left
—
LST5LPK
—
Right
—
—
LST6RPK
RG 2
2
2
Pole
Location
12 Vdc
2
Frame
Description
380–600 Vac
2
2
Shunt Trip—Standard
110–240 Vac
2
2
Series G
a
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Frame
Description
Pole
Location
EG, JG and LG 1
NG
2
110–127 Vac
Left
UVR120APK
UVH5LP08K
—
Right
—
—
UVH6RP08K
2
208–240 Vac
Left
UVR240APK
UVH5LP11K
—
Right
—
—
UVH6RP11K
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
24 Vdc
24 Vac
48–60 Vdc
48–60 Vac
120 Vdc
220–250 Vdc
380–500 Vac
525–600 Vac
2
12 Vdc
2
12 Vac
2
2
2
Left
UVR024DPK
UVH5LP21K 4
—
Right
—
—
UVH6RP21K 4
4
Left
UVR024APK
UVH5LP21K
Right
—
—
—
Left
UVR048DPK
UVH5LP23K
—
Right
—
—
UVH6RP23K
UVH6RP21K 4
Left
UVR048APK
UVH5LP05K
—
Right
—
—
UVH6RP05K
Left
UVR125DPK
UVH5LP26K
—
Right
—
—
UVH6RP26K
Left
UVR250DPK
UVH5LP28K
—
Right
—
—
UVH6RP28K
Left
UVR480APK
UVH5LP29K
—
Right
—
—
UVH6RP29K
—
Left
UVR600APK
—
Right
—
—
—
Left
—
UVH5LP20K
—
UVH6RP20K
Right
—
—
Left
—
UVH5LP02K
—
Right
—
—
UVH6RP02K
Notes
1 LH cavity not available for EG frame with earth leakage module.
2 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each of shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
3 380–600 Vdc, 50/60 Hz.
4 24 Vdc only use UVH5LP03K (NG) UVH6RP03K (RG) for 24 Vac.
V4-T2-110
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Note: Gold-plated contacts are
well suited for switching low
voltages and currents. Lead wires
on accessories containing goldplated contacts are marked with a
yellow stripe.
2
2
2
Series G Gold Contact Accessory Switch Electrical Ratings
Max. Voltage (Ue)
Frequency
Max. Current (ln)
Dielectric Withstand
Voltage (Ul)
125 V
50/60 Hz
0.1 A
2200 V
30 V
DC
0.25 A
2200 V
5V
DC
5 mA
2200 V
2
2
2
2
2
Series G Silver Contact Accessory Switch Electrical Ratings
Dielectric Withstand
Voltage (Ul)
Max. Voltage (Ue)
Frequency
Max. Current (ln)
600 V
50/60 Hz
2A
2200 V
125/250 V
50/60 Hz
5A
2200 V
125 V
DC
1A
2200 V
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-111
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Contents
Series G Motor Operators
Description
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Motor Operators
2
Product Description
2
2
2
2
Eaton’s motor operator
mechanism enables local and
remote ON, OFF and reset
switching of a circuit breaker.
The motor operator is
mounted on the circuit
breaker cover within
the dimensions of the
circuit breaker.
The robust motor operators
offer various voltages to
maximize customer flexibility.
Standard load transfer
switching can be
accomplished through the
use of two circuit breakers
fitted with motor operators
and a mechanical interlock.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-112
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Page
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-113
V4-T2-113
V4-T2-113
V4-T2-114
V4-T2-115
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Features, Benefits and Functions
The motor operator provides
special features for ease of
customer use and status
indication.
●
●
●
The motor operator allows
the circuit breaker to be
opened, closed or reset
remotely
The motor operator
contains a motor
connected to a cam drive
mechanism. The cam
drives a slide mechanism
to operate the circuit
breaker handle
Internal limit switches and
relays are used to control
motor operation to prevent
overdriving the circuit
breaker handle and motor
overload conditions
2.2
Product Selection
●
●
●
●
A key is provided to
manually operate the
circuit breaker
A special pull-out locking
mechanism provides a
method for padlocking the
circuit breaker handle in
the OFF position
The locking device will
accept three padlock
shackles with a maximum
diameter of 1/4-inch
(6.4 mm) each
The cover provides visual
status of the circuit
breaker: ON, OFF or
TRIPPED. A PUSH-TO-TRIP
button allows the user to
manually trip the breaker
Motor Operators
Frame
Voltage
Frequency
Inrush Current Catalog Number
Series G E-Frame
100–240 Vac
50/60 Hz
1A
MOPEG240C
100–220 Vdc
DC
1A
MOPEG240C
24/48 Vdc
DC
3A
MOPEG48D
Series C F-Frame
Series G J-Frame
Series G L-Frame
Manual Operating Key
2
208–240 Vac
50/60 Hz
1A
MOPFD240C
110–127 Vac
50/60 Hz
1A
MOPFD120C
220–250 Vdc
DC
1A
MOPFD240C
110–125 Vdc
DC
1A
MOPFD120C
24 Vdc
DC
3A
MOPFD24D
208–240 Vac
50/60 Hz
1A
MOPJG240C
110–127 Vac
50/60 Hz
1A
MOPJG120C
220–250 Vdc
DC
1A
MOPJG240C
110–125 Vdc
DC
1A
MOPJG120C
24 Vdc
DC
3A
MOPJG24D
208–240 Vac
50/60 Hz
2A
MOPLG240C
110–127 Vac
50/60 Hz
2A
MOPLG120C
220–250 Vdc
DC
2A
MOPLG240C
110–125 Vdc
DC
2A
MOPLG120C
24 Vdc
DC
6A
MOPLG24D
Turn the Key
(clockwise only)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Circuit Breaker
Status Indication
Window
2
2
2
PUSH-TO-TRIP Button
2
2
2
Standards and Certifications
2
The motor operators are UL
and CSA listed, and CE
marked.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-113
2.2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
Contents
LG Breaker with Plug-In Block
Description
2
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module. . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks
Drawout Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Plug-In Blocks
2
Product Description
2
2
2
2
2
2
Plug-in adapters simplify
installation and front removal
of circuit breakers. Plug-ins
are available for rear
connection applications on
three- and four-pole circuit
breakers. Trip on drawout
interlock kits are included.
Stabs for EG, JG and LG plugins rotate 90 ° for flexible
installation. Use terminal
shields for IP30 protection.
Product Selection
Plug-In Blocks
Breaker
Frame
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
EG-, JG- and LG-Frame Plug-In Blocks
EG
3
PAD3E
EG
4
PAD4E
JG
3
PAD3J
JG
4
PAD4J
LG
3
PAD3L
LG
4
PAD4L
Trip-On Drawout Interlock Kit 1
2
2
2
EG
3, 4
PIILEG
JG
3, 4
PIILJG
LG
3, 4
PIILLG
Terminal Shields IP30
2
EG
3
EFTS3K
EG
4
EFTS4K
2
JG
3
FJTS3K
JG
4
FJTS4K
2
LG
3
LTS3K
2
LG
4
LTS4K
Position Switch
2
EG
3, 4
PADILE
JG
3, 4
PADILJ
2
LG
3, 4
PADILL
Note
1 Included with plug-in block. Trips the breaker when breaker is removed from plug-in block.
2
2
2
V4-T2-114
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Page
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-115
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series G
2.2
Contents
Drawout Cassettes
Description
Page
EG-Frame (15–125 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JG-Frame (63–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG-Frame (250–630 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NG-Frame (320–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RG-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protector Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
30 mA Ground Fault (Earth Leakage) Module . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . .
High Instantaneous Circuit Breaker for
Selective Coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawout Cassette
V4-T2-15
V4-T2-29
V4-T2-47
V4-T2-65
V4-T2-74
V4-T2-85
V4-T2-89
V4-T2-92
V4-T2-96
V4-T2-101
V4-T2-104
V4-T2-112
V4-T2-114
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Drawout Cassette
Product Description
Features
The drawout cassette is
available for use with JG, LG
and NG, three- and four-pole
breakers. The cassettes
consist of two separate
components: the movable
mechanism, which attaches
to the breaker, and the
stationary mechanism, which
houses in the cassette. For
the JG, LG and NG drawout
cassettes, all necessary parts
for installation are included in
the one catalog number.
Features of the drawout
cassettes for the JG, LG and
NG include:
●
●
Trip on drawout—breaker
will trip if it is in the ON
position when withdrawn
from the cassette
Secondary terminal block—
the drawout cassettes
include a secondary
terminal block for easier
access when wiring low
voltage accessories,
including shunts and
undervoltage releases
The drawout mechanism has
three primary positions:
●
●
●
2
Product Selection
Connected—the breaker is
fully connected to the
primary stabs and
secondary contacts
Disconnected—both the
primary stabs and the
secondary contacts are
disconnected
Withdraw—the breaker
can be removed from the
cassette
JG Drawout Cassette
LG Drawout Cassette
JG, LG and NG Drawout Cassettes
2
Breaker Frame
Number
of Poles
Catalog
Number
2
JG
3
JG3DOM
2
4
JG4DOM
2
3
LG3DOM
2
4
LG4DOM
3
NG3DOM
4
NG4DOM
LG
NG
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-115
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Contents
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family
Description
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Learn
Online
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Page
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
Drawings
Online
Product Overview
Eaton’s molded case circuit
breakers are designed to
provide circuit protection for
low voltage distribution
systems. They are described
by NEMA as, “... a device for
closing and interrupting a
circuit between separable
contacts under both normal
and abnormal conditions,”
and furthermore as, “... a
breaker assembled as an
integral unit in a supporting
and enclosing housing of
insulating material.” The
National Electrical Code
(NEC) describes them as, “A
device designed to open and
close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to
open the circuit automatically
on a predetermined overload
of current, without injury to
itself when properly applied
within its rating.”
So designed, Eaton circuit
breakers protect conductors
against overloads and
conductors and connected
apparatus, such as motors
and motor starters, against
short circuits.
In low voltage distribution
systems, there are many
varied applications of molded
case circuit breakers.
Eaton offers the most
comprehensive family of
molded case circuit breakers
in the industry.
This section of circuit breakers
includes:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thermal-magnetic trip
breakers
Electronic rms trip
breakers
Molded case switches
Motor circuit protectors
Current limiting breakers
Special application
breakers
Modified Breakers
Eaton breakers can be ordered
with internal accessories
installed. These modified
breakers will be subject to an
addition charge.
Special Calibration
Special non-UL-listed
calibrations are available for
certain ambient temperatures
other than 40 °C and for
frequencies other than 50/60
Hz or DC. Reduced
interrupting ratings will apply
for 400 Hz applications.
50 °C Calibration
Add suffix V to catalog
Number for complete
breaker, listed above, when
ordering listed ampere ratings
for breakers to be used in 50
°C ambients. (No price
adder.) (No UL label.)
Moisture-Fungus Treatment
All circuit breaker cases are
molded from glass-polyester
which does not support the
growth of fungus. Any parts
which are susceptible to the
growth of fungus will require
special treatment.
Freeze-Tested Circuit
Breakers
The circuit breakers may be
ordered with freeze testing.
This option uses special
lubrication and mechanical
operation is verified at –40 °C.
Marine Applications
E- to R-Framed circuit
breakers can be supplied to
meet the following marine
specifications:
●
U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46;
ABS—American Bureau of
Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV;
Lloyds; and ABS/NVR
2
2
These specifications
generally require molded
case circuit breakers to be
supplied with 50 °C ambient,
and plug-in adapter kits.
When plug-in adapter kits are
used, no terminals need be
supplied (switchboard
applications).
Circuit breakers can also be
supplied to meet UL 489
Supplement SA (Marine use)
and UL 489 Supplement SB
(Naval Use).
UL 489 Supplement SA
applies to vessels over 65 feet
(19.8 m) in length.
Requirements include 40 °C
ambient calibration, special
labeling, and no use of
aluminum conductors or
terminals. (No 50 °C.)
●
Or you can choose to add 50
°C ambient but then there is
no “UL” mark.
●
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Suffix VH08
UL 489 Supplement SB
requires partial 50 °C ambient
calibration, vibration testing,
special nameplating and no
use of aluminum conductors
or terminals. Eaton chooses
to always fully calibrate to 50
°C ambient. (“Naval” labeled
per UL, and UL now allows
50 °C label here.)
●
V4-T2-116
Suffix H08
Suffix VH09
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Standards and Certifications
Certified Test Reports
Eaton breakers can be
ordered with certified test
reports at the time of order
entry. Test report documents
the thermal and magnetic or
electronic tripping
characteristics of the
individual breaker. Breaker
and test report must be
ordered together. Add suffix
12 to breaker catalog number
and enter separate line item
on order for certified test
report.
Molded case circuit breakers
are designed to conform with
the following standards:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., Standard UL 489,
molded case circuit
breakers and circuit
breaker enclosures
National Electrical
Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) Standards
Publication No. AB1-1993,
molded case circuit
breakers
Australian Standard AS
2184, molded case circuit
breakers
British Standards Institution
Standard BS 4752: Part 1,
switchgear and control
gear Part 1: circuit breakers
Canadian Standards
Association (CSA) Standard
C22.2 No. 5, service
entrance and branch circuit
breakers
International
Electrotechnical
Commission
Recommendations IEC
60947-2, circuit breakers
●
●
●
●
●
Japanese T-Mark Standard
molded case circuit
breakers
South African Bureau of
Standards, Standard SABS
156, Standard Specification
for molded case circuit
breakers
Swiss Electro-Technical
Association Standard SEV
157-1, safety regulations
for circuit breakers
Union Technique de
l’Electricite Standard NF C
63-120, low voltage
switchgear and control gear
circuit breaker
requirements
Verband Deutscher
Elektrotechniker
(Association of German
Electrical Engineers)
Standard VDE 0660, low
voltage switchgear and
control gear, circuit
breakers
Conformance with these
standards satisfies most local
and international codes,
assuming user acceptability
and simplified application.
Molded case circuit breakers
equal or exceed Federal
Specification Classification
W-C-375b requirements for
the particular class associated
with the circuit breaker frame
being considered.
Open breakers do not have
service entrance ratings.
Service entrance rating is part
of the enclosure.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-117
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Quick Reference
Industrial Circuit Breakers
G-Frame
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles
AC
GHB
15–100
1
2
GHB
15–100
2, 3
2
GHB
15–100
GHB
15–100
2
HGHB
15–30
1
277
125
N.I.T.U.
12c, 13a, 13b
65
—
—
25
—
—
GHBS
15–30
1, 2
480Y/277
—
—
—
65
65
—
14
—
—
2
GBHS
15–20
1, 2
600Y/347
—
N.I.T.U.
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
GDB
15–50
2
480
125/250
N.I.T.U.
—
—
—
—
—
14
2
GDB
15–100
3
480
250
N.I.T.U.
—
—
—
—
—
14
2
GD
15–50
2
480
125/250
N.I.T.U.
13b
—
—
65
—
GD
15–100
3
480
250
N.I.T.U.
13b
—
—
65
2
GHC
15–100
1
120
125
N.I.T.U.
12c, 13a
65
—
—
GHC
15–100
2, 3
240
125/250
N.I.T.U.
13b
—
—
65
2
GHC
15–100
1
277
125
N.I.T.U.
12c, 13a
—
—
—
14
2
GHC
15–100
2, 3
480Y/277
125/250
N.I.T.U.
13b
—
—
—
HGHC
15–30
1
277
125
N.I.T.U.
—
65
—
—
2
2
2
2
Volts
AC (kA)
DC
Type
of Trip 1
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
120
120/240
240
120
125
N.I.T.U.
11a
65
—
—
—
—
—
240
125/250
N.I.T.U.
11a10b, 11b
—
—
65
—
—
—
1
277
125
N.I.T.U.
12b, 14b
—
—
—
14
—
—
2, 3
480Y/277
125/250
N.I.T.U.
15b
—
—
—
14
14
—
DC (kA) 2
Notes
1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-118
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
250
Page
Number
14
—
V4-T2-126
—
14
V4-T2-126
14
—
V4-T2-126
—
14
V4-T2-126
14
—
V4-T2-126
—
—
V4-T1-34
—
—
V4-T1-34
—
—
10
V4-T2-124
—
—
10
V4-T2-124
14
—
—
10
V4-T2-123
—
22
—
—
10
V4-T2-123
—
—
—
14
—
V4-T2-131
—
—
—
1
V4-T2-131
—
—
14
—
V4-T2-131
14
14
—
—
14
V4-T2-131
25
—
—
14
—
V4-T2-131
277
480
600
125
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
F-Frame
2
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles
AC
DC
EDB
100–225
2, 3
240
EDS
100–225
2, 3
240
ED
15–225
2, 3
240
EDH
100–225
2, 3
240
125
EDC
100–225
2, 3
240
125
EHD
15–100
1
277
125
N.I.T.U.
13a
—
—
—
14
—
—
EHD
15–100
2, 3
480
250
N.I.T.U.
13b
—
—
18
—
14
—
FDB
15–150
2, 3
600
250
N.I.T.U.
18a
—
—
18
—
14
14
—
—
18
—
14
—
—
—
35
—
Volts
Type
of Trip 1
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
AC (kA)
120
120/240
240
277
480
600
125
250
Page
Number
125
N.I.T.U.
—
—
—
22
—
—
—
10
—
V4-T2-135
125
N.I.T.U.
—
—
—
42
—
—
—
10
—
V4-T2-135
125
N.I.T.U.
12b
—
—
65
—
—
—
10
—
V4-T2-135
N.I.T.U.
14b
—
—
100
—
—
—
10
—
V4-T2-135
N.I.T.U.
1
—
—
200
—
—
—
10
—
V4-T2-135
10
—
V4-T2-135
—
10
V4-T2-135
—
10
V4-T2-135
14
—
10
V4-T2-135
—
10
—
V4-T2-135
FDB
15–150
4
600
250
N.I.T.U.
3
FD
15–150
1
277
125
N.I.T.U.
13a
DC (kA)
2
FD
15–225
2, 3
600
250
N.I.T.U.
22a
—
—
65
—
35
18
—
10
V4-T2-135
FD
15–225
4
600
250
N.I.T.U.
3
—
—
65
—
35
18
—
10
V4-T2-135
FDE
15–225
3
600
—
N.I.T.U.
—
—
—
65
—
35
18
—
—
V4-T2-135
HFD
15–150
1
277
125
N.I.T.U.
13a
—
—
—
65
—
—
10
—
V4-T2-135
HFD
15–225
2,3
600
250
N.I.T.U.
22a
—
—
100
—
65
25
—
22
V4-T2-135
HFD
15–225
4
600
250
N.I.T.U.
3
—
—
100
—
65
25
—
22
V4-T2-135
—
—
—
100
—
65
25
—
—
V4-T2-135
HFDE
15–225
3
600
—
N.I.T.U.
4
15–225
2, 3
600
250
N.I.T.U.
24a
—
—
200
—
100
35
—
22
V4-T2-135
FDC 4
15–225
4
600
250
N.I.T.U.
3
—
—
200
—
100
35
—
22
V4-T2-135
FDCE 45
15–225
3
600
—
N.I.T.U.
—
—
—
200
—
100
25
—
—
V4-T2-135
FDC
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
3 Not defined in W-C-375b.
4 Current limiting.
5 Check with Eaton for availability.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-119
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
J-Frame
2
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
JDB
70–250
2, 3
2
JD
70–250
2, 3, 4
HJD
70–250
2, 3, 4
2
JDC 3
70–250
2, 3, 4
2
2
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts
No. of
Poles
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
DC
Type
of
Trip 1
600
250
N.I.T.U.
22a
—
600
250
I.T.U.
22a
—
600
250
I.T.U.
22a
—
600
250
I.T.U.
22a
—
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
AC (kA)
120
120/240
240
277
480
600
125
250
Page
Number
AC
DC (kA) 2
AC (kA)
120
240
277
480
600
125
250
Page
Number
—
65
—
35
18
—
10
V4-T2-156
—
65
—
35
18
—
10
V4-T2-155
—
100
—
65
25
—
22
V4-T2-155
—
200
—
100
35
—
22
V4-T2-155
120/240
K-Frame
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles
AC
DC
Type
of
Trip 1
2
DK
250–400
2, 3
240
250
N.I.T.U.
14b
—
—
65
—
—
—
—
10
V4-T2-167
KDB
100–400
2, 3
600
250
N.I.T.U.
23a
—
—
65
—
35
25
—
10
V4-T2-167
2
KD
100–400
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
65
—
35
25
—
10
V4-T2-164, V4-T2-165,
V4-T2-169, V4-T2-172
2
CKD
100–400
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
65
—
35
25
—
—
V4-T2-166, V4-T2-175,
V4-T2-177
2
HKD
100–400
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
100
—
65
35
—
22
V4-T2-164, V4-T2-165,
V4-T2-169, V4-T2-172
2
CHKD
100–400
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
100
—
65
35
—
—
V4-T2-166, V4-T2-175,
V4-T2-177
KDC 3
100–400
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
200
—
100
65
—
22
V4-T2-164, V4-T2-165,
V4-T2-169, V4-T2-172
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
AC (kA)
DC
Type
of
Trip 1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts
DC (kA) 2
L-Frame
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
LDB
300–600
2, 3
600
250
N.I.T.U.
23a
—
—
65
—
35
25
—
22
V4-T2-190
LD
300–600
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
65
—
35
25
—
22
V4-T2-188, V4-T2-189,
V4-T2-194
Volts
No. of
Poles
AC
120
DC (kA) 2
120/240
240
277
480
600
125
250
Page
Number
CLD
300–600
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
65
—
35
25
—
—
V4-T2-190, V4-T2-200
HLD
300–600
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
100
—
65
35
—
25
V4-T2-188, V4-T2-189,
V4-T2-194
2
CHLD
300–600
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
100
—
65
35
—
—
V4-T2-190, V4-T2-200
LDC 3
300–600
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
200
—
100
50
—
30
2
V4-T2-188, V4-T2-189,
V4-T2-196
CLDC 3
300–600
2, 3, 4
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
200
—
100
50
—
30
V4-T2-190, V4-T2-202
Federal
Specification
W-C-375b
AC (kA)
120
120/240
240
277
480
600
125
250
Page
Number
23a
—
—
65
—
50
25
—
22
V4-T2-213, V4-T2-215
2
2
M-Frame
2
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
No. of
Poles
AC
DC
Type
of
Trip 1
MDL
300–800
2, 3
600
250
I.T.U.
2
2
2
2
2
UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts
DC (kA) 2
CMDL
300–800
2, 3
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
65
—
50
25
—
—
V4-T2-215
HMDL
300–800
2, 3
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
100
—
65
35
—
25
V4-T2-213, V4-T2-215
CHMDL
300–800
2, 3
600
250
I.T.U.
23a
—
—
100
—
65
35
—
—
V4-T2-215
Notes
1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.
3 Current limiting.
V4-T2-120
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family
2.3
Contents
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-122
V4-T2-122
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
●
●
●
●
All two- and three-pole
circuit breakers are of the
common trip type. On all
three-phase delta (240 V)
Grounded B phase
applications, refer to Eaton
Single-pole circuit
breakers, 15 and 20
amperes. Switching duty
rated (SWD) for
fluorescent lighting
applications
All G-Frame circuit
breakers are suitable for
reverse feed use
HACR rated
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-121
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit Breaker/Frame
GD 3 100 K
2
2
Circuit Breaker Type
GD
HGHB
GDB
HGHC
GHB
GHBGFEP
GHC
GHCGFEP
GHQ
2
2
2
2
2
2
Suffix
Number of Poles
1 = 1 pole
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
Trip Amperes
035
040
045
050
060
015
020
024
030
K
D
C
V
070
080
090
100
= Molded case switch
= Ring type terminals
= Steel collars
= 122 °F (50 °C)
J01= Fungus proofed
R01= Shock tested
F01= Freeze tester
HID= High intensity discharge 1
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
120
240
277
480
480Y/277
125
250 23
GDB
2, 3
—
—
—
14
—
—
10
2
GD
2
—
65
—
14
—
—
10
GD
3
—
65
—
22
—
—
10
2
GHQ
—
65
—
14
—
—
—
—
2
GHB
1
65
—
14
—
—
14
—
GHB
2, 3
—
65
—
—
14
14
—
2
HGHB
1
65
—
25
—
—
14
—
GHC
1
65
—
14
—
—
14
—
GHC
2, 3
—
65
—
—
14
14
—
HGHC
1
65
—
25
—
—
14
—
2
2
2
2
Volts DC
Terminal Types
For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below.
2
Terminal Types
2
Standard
Circuit Breaker Amperes
Terminal Type Material
Screw Head Type
Wire Type
AWG Wire Range
Metric Wire Range (mm2) 4
2
15–20
Clamp (plated steel)
Slotted
Cu/Al
14–10
2.5–4
25–100
Pressure (aluminum body)
Slotted
Cu/Al
10–1/0
4–50
2
Optional—GD Only
Pressure (steel body)
Slotted
Cu
14–3
—
2
2
2
15–100
Notes
1 HID suffix only applies to the GHB and GHC single-pole, 15–20 A circuit breakers.
2 Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.
3 Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
4 Not UL listed sizes.
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-122
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Contents
Typical G-Frame Circuit Breaker
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (15–100 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
●
●
Standards and Certifications
Cable in, cable out
Includes mounting
hardware and BMHE
●
UL/CSA
2
2
2
Product Selection
2
Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Includes Line and Load Terminals
Includes Binding
Head Screws and Clamps
10–32 x 0.312
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15
GD2015
GD3015
GD3015D
20
GD2020
GD3020
GD3020D
25
GD2025
GD3025
GD3025D
30
GD2030
GD3030
GD3030D
35
GD2035
GD3035
GD3035D
40
GD2040
GD3040
GD3040D
45
GD2045
GD3045
GD3045D
50
GD2050
GD3050
GD3050D
60
—
GD3060
GD3060D
70
—
GD3070
GD3070D
80
—
GD3080
GD3080D
90
—
GD3090
GD3090D
100
—
GD3100
GD3100D
14 kAIC at 480 Vac
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
22 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-123
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type GDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC at 480 Vac
Includes Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15
GDB2015
GDB3015
20
GDB2020
GDB3020
25
GDB2025
GDB3025
30
GDB2030
GDB3030
2
35
GDB2035
GDB3035
40
GDB2040
GDB3040
2
45
GDB2045
GDB3045
50
GDB2050
GDB3050
2
60
—
GDB3060
2
70
—
GDB3070
80
—
GDB3080
90
—
GDB3090
100
—
GDB3100
2
2
2
2
2
Type GD Molded Case Switches
2
Type GD Molded Case Switches—Three-Pole
2
2
2
2
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog Number
(Includes Line and Load Terminals)
60
GD3060K
60
GD3060KC 1
100
GD3100K
100
GD3100KD 2
2
Notes
1 Includes line and load steel terminals.
2 Includes binding head screws and clamps 10–32 x 0.312.
2
Molded case switches may open above 1300 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-124
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Dimensions
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
GD-Frame, Three-Pole
Front View
2
Side View
2
2
2
2
2
4.88
(123.8)
2
Off
2
2
2
3.00
(76.2)
2
2.63
(66.7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-125
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Contents
Typical GHB
Description
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Types GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)
2
Standards and Certifications
2
2
2
These breakers meet the
requirements of Federal
Specification W-C-375b as
follows:
●
Type GHB, 120 and 240 V:
●
Single-pole: Class 11a
●
Two-, three-pole:
Classes 10b, 11b, 12b,
14b, 15b
●
UL/CSA
●
Type GHB, 277 and
480Y/277V:
●
Single-pole:
Classes 12c, 13a
●
Two-, three-pole:
Class 13b
●
Type HGHB 277V
●
Type GHQ 277V
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-126
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Product Selection
Typical GHB
2
2
Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1
277/480 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum 2
277/480 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
2
277/480 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum 3
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15
GHB1015 45
GHB2015 4
GHB3015 4
20
GHB1020 45
GHB2020 4
GHB3020 4
25
GHB1025
GHB2025
GHB3025
30
GHB1030
GHB2030
GHB3030
35
GHB1035
GHB2035
GHB3035
40
GHB1040
GHB2040
GHB3040
45
GHB1045
GHB2045
GHB3045
50
GHB1050
GHB2050
GHB3050
60
GHB1060
GHB2060
GHB3060
70
GHB1070
GHB2070
GHB3070
80
GHB1080
GHB2080
GHB3080
90
GHB1090
GHB2090
GHB3090
100
GHB1100
GHB2100
GHB3100
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Single-Pole
15
HGHB1015 6
20
HGHB1020 6
25
HGHB1025
30
HGHB1030
2
Catalog
Number
2
2
2
Notes
1 480Y/277 V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for three-phase delta (480 V).
2 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only.
3 Use two outside poles.
4 Uses 0.190 (4.83) –32 screw type clamp terminals.
5 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
6 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-127
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
GDB-Frame, Three-Pole
Front View
2
Side View
2
2
2
2
4.00
(101.6)
2
2
2
2
3.00
(76.2)
Max.
2
2.63
(66.7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-128
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Contents
Single-Phase (requires two poles)
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
●
●
Standards and Certifications
15–60 amperes, 277 V,
50/60 Hz
Operational voltage
240 V to 305 V
These circuit breakers meet
the requirements of UL 489
and UL 1053.
2
2
2
2
Product Selection
2
Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 mA Industrial Ground
Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2
Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles)
277 Vac, 30 mA
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
2
Catalog
Number
15
GHBGFEP1015
20
GHBGFEP1020
30
GHBGFEP1030
40
GHBGFEP1040
50
GHBGFEP1050
60
GHBGFEP1060
2
2
2
2
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
GHBGFEP
1
14,000
2
277 Vac (50/60 Hz)
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-129
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
GHB-Frame, Three-Pole
Front View
2
Side View
2
2
2
2
4.00
(101.6)
2
2
2
2
3.00
(76.2)
2.63
(66.7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-130
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Contents
Typical GHC
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Types GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
●
●
●
●
●
15–100 amperes
120, 240, 277, 480Y/277V,
50/60 Hz, 125, 125/250 Vdc
Single-, two- and
three-pole
Cable in, cable out
Does not include mounting
hardware
Standards and Certifications
These breakers meet the
requirements of Federal
Specification W-C-37b as
follows:
●
2
2
Type GHC, 277 and 480Y/
277V:
●
Single-pole:
Classes 12c, 13a
●
Two-, three-pole:
Class 13b
●
UL/CSA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-131
2.3
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
277 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum 1
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum 2
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
15
GHC1015 34
GHC2015 3
GHC3015 3
20
GHC1020 34
GHC2020 3
GHC3020 3
2
25
GHC1025
GHC2025
GHC3025
30
GHC1030
GHC2030
GHC3030
2
35
GHC1035
GHC2035
GHC3035
2
40
GHC1040
GHC2040
GHC3040
45
GHC1045
GHC2045
GHC3045
2
50
GHC1050
GHC2050
GHC3050
60
GHC1060
GHC2060
GHC3060
2
70
GHC1070
GHC2070
GHC3070
80
GHC1080
GHC2080
GHC3080
90
GHC1090
GHC2090
GHC3090
100
GHC1100
GHC2100
GHC3100
2
2
2
2
2
Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc Maximum
2
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Single-Pole
2
15
HGHC1015 5
2
20
HGHC1020 5
25
HGHC1025
2
30
HGHC1030
2
2
2
Catalog
Number
Notes
1 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only.
2 Use two outside poles.
3 Uses 0.190–32 screw type clamp terminals.
4 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
5 15 and 20 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-132
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Contents
Single-Phase (requires two-pole spaces)
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type GHCGFEP Cable-In/Cable-Out 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors (15–100 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
●
●
Standards and Certifications
15–60 amperes, 277 V,
50/60 Hz
Operational voltage
240–305 V
These circuit breakers meet
the requirements of UL 489
and UL 1053.
2
2
2
Product Selection
2
Type GHCGFEP 30 mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit
Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
2
2
Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 277V, 30 mA
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
2
15
GHCGFEP1015
20
GHCGFEP1020
2
30
GHCGFEP1030
40
GHCGFEP1040
50
GHCGFEP1050
60
GHCGFEP1060
2
2
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
GHCGFEP
1
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)
2
277 Vac (50/60 Hz)
2
14,000
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-133
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Contents
Special Purpose Circuit Breakers
Description
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Special Purpose GHC Circuit Breakers (15–100 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
2
2
Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eaton’s Type GHC circuit
breakers have binding head
screw-type terminals on line
and load side. These circuit
breakers with screw-type
terminals (0.190–32) will be
marked “Special purpose
breaker not for general use.”
To order this special breaker,
use the catalog number from
the tables on this page.
Product Selection
Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
277 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum 1
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
25
GHC1025D
GHC2025D
GHC3025D
30
GHC1030D
GHC2030D
GHC3030D
35
GHC1035D
GHC2035D
GHC3035D
40
GHC1040D
GHC2040D
GHC3040D
2
45
GHC1045D
GHC2045D
GHC3045D
50
GHC1050D
GHC2050D
GHC3050D
2
60
GHC1060D
GHC2060D
GHC3060D
70
GHC1070D
GHC2070D
GHC3070D
2
80
GHC1080D
GHC2080D
GHC3080D
2
90
GHC1090D
GHC2090D
GHC3090D
100
GHC1100D
GHC2100D
GHC3100D
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications
2
277 Vac Maximum
2
2
Type
Cable-in
2
Bolt-on
2
2
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Single-Pole
15
GHC1015HID
20
GHC1020HID
15
GHB1015HID
20
GHB1020HID
Note
1 Use two outside poles.
2
V4-T2-134
Catalog
Number
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical F-Frame Breaker
F-Frame Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit
2.3
Contents
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-136
V4-T2-138
V4-T2-149
V4-T2-150
V4-T2-152
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
●
●
●
All Eaton’s F-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
All circuit breakers 10
through 30 amperes are
suitable for HID (high
intensity discharge) use
All F-Frame circuit breakers
are suitable for reverse
feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-135
2.3
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
2
FDC 3 100 L
2
Circuit Breaker
Type
EHD
FDB
FD
HFD
FDC
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Number of
Poles
1 = 1 pole
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
4 = 4 poles
Trip Amperes
010
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
125
150
175 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)
200 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)
225 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only)
2
Suffix
E = 100% protected (four-pole only) neutral pole
EH = 50% protected (four-pole only)
K = High magnetic molded case switch
L = Line and load terminals
S = Stainless steel terminals
V = 50 °C calibration
W = Without terminals
Y = Line terminals only
Z = Aluminum terminals (≤100 amperes)
EDC 3 200 L
2
2
Circuit Breaker
Type
EDB
EDS
ED
EDH
EDC
2
2
2
Number of
Poles
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
Trip
Amperes
100
125
150
175
200
225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-136
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Suffix
L = Line and load terminals
W = Without terminals
Y = Line terminals only
Z = Aluminum terminals (100 amperes)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 210+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
2
2
HFDE 3 225 22 L
Performance at
480 Vac
FDE = 35 kAIC
HFDE = 65 kAIC
FDCE = 100 kAIC
Number of
Poles
3 = 3 poles
Trip Units
100
150
225
Trip Unit
21 = 210+ LI
22 = 210+ LSI
2
Features
W
= Without terminals
L
= Line and load terminals
Blank = Load side terminals only
2
2
2
2
FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
HFDE 3 225 32 ZG W
Performance at
480 Vac
FDE = 35 kAIC
HFDE = 65 kAIC
FDCE = 100 kAIC
Number of
Poles
3 = 3 poles
Trip Units
080
160
225
Trip Unit
32 = 310+ LSI
33 = 310+ LS
35 = 310+ LSG
36 = 310+ LSIG
Trip Unit Features
ZG
= Zone
selective
interlocking
Blank = No option
2
2
Features
W
= Without terminals
L
= Line and load terminals
Blank = Load side terminals only
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-137
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
Type ED Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
2
65 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15
ED2015
ED3015
2
20
ED2020
ED3020
25
ED2025
ED3025
2
30
ED2030
ED3030
35
ED2035
ED3035
2
40
ED2040
ED3040
2
50
ED2050
ED3050
60
ED2060
ED3060
2
100
ED2100
ED3100
125
ED2125
ED3125
2
150
ED2150
ED3150
175
ED2175
ED3175
2
200
ED2200
ED3200
225
ED2225
ED3225
2
2
2
2
2
Type EDH Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
2
100 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
15
—
—
2
20
—
—
25
—
—
2
30
—
—
35
—
—
2
40
—
—
50
—
—
2
60
—
—
2
100
EDH2100
EDH3100
125
EDH2125
EDH3125
2
150
EDH2150
EDH3150
175
EDH2175
EDH3175
2
200
EDH2200
EDH3200
225
EDH2225
EDH3225
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-138
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Type EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
2
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
2
200 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15
—
—
20
—
—
25
—
—
30
—
—
35
—
—
40
—
—
50
—
—
60
—
—
100
EDC2100
EDC3100
125
EDC2125
EDC3125
150
EDC2150
EDC3150
175
EDC2175
EDC3175
200
EDC2200
EDC3200
225
EDC2225
EDC3225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type EDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
2
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
2
22 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
100
EDB2100
EDB3100
110
EDB2110
EDB3110
125
EDB2125
EDB3125
150
EDB2150
EDB3150
175
EDB2175
EDB3175
200
EDB2200
EDB3200
225
EDB2225
EDB3225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-139
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type EDS Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
2
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
2
42 kAIC at 240 Vac
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
100
EDS2100
EDS3100
110
EDS2110
EDS3110
2
125
EDS2125
EDS3125
150
EDS2150
EDS3150
2
175
EDS2175
EDS3175
2
200
EDS2200
EDS3200
225
EDS2225
EDS3225
2
2
2
2
Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
2
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC at 277 Vac
14 kAIC at 480 Vac
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
10 1
EHD1010
EHD2010
EHD3010
2
15
EHD1015 2
EHD2015
EHD3015
20
EHD1020 2
EHD2020
EHD3020
2
25
EHD1025
EHD2025
EHD3025
30
EHD1030
EHD2030
EHD3030
2
35
EHD1035
EHD2035
EHD3035
2
40
EHD1040
EHD2040
EHD3040
45
EHD1045
EHD2045
EHD3045
2
50
EHD1050
EHD2050
EHD3050
60
EHD1060
EHD2060
EHD3060
2
70
EHD1070
EHD2070
EHD3070
80
EHD1080
EHD2080
EHD3080
90
EHD1090
EHD2090
EHD3090
100
EHD1100
EHD2100
EHD3100
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.
2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-140
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Type FDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
2
14 kAIC at 600 Vac
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
10 1
FDB2010
FDB3010
FDB4010
15
FDB2015
FDB3015
FDB4015
20
FDB2020
FDB3020
FDB4020
25
FDB2025
FDB3025
FDB4025
30
FDB2030
FDB3030
FDB4030
35
FDB2035
FDB3035
FDB4035
40
FDB2040
FDB3040
FDB4040
45
FDB2045
FDB3045
FDB4045
50
FDB2050
FDB3050
FDB4050
60
FDB2060
FDB3060
FDB4060
70
FDB2070
FDB3070
FDB4070
80
FDB2080
FDB3080
FDB4080
90
FDB2090
FDB3090
FDB4090
100
FDB2100
FDB3100
FDB4100
110
FDB2110
FDB3110
FDB4110
125
FDB2125
FDB3125
FDB4125
150
FDB2150
FDB3150
FDB4150
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.
2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-141
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
2
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
35 kAIC at 277 Vac
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
10 1
FD1010
—
—
—
15
FD1015 2
FD2015
FD3015
FD4015
20
FD1020 2
FD2020
FD3020
FD4020
2
25
FD1025
FD2025
FD3025
FD4025
2
30
FD1030
FD2030
FD3030
FD4030
35
FD1035
FD2035
FD3035
FD4035
2
40
FD1040
FD2040
FD3040
FD4040
45
FD1045
FD2045
FD3045
FD4045
2
50
FD1050
FD2050
FD3050
FD4050
60
FD1060
FD2060
FD3060
FD4060
2
70
FD1070
FD2070
FD3070
FD4070
2
80
FD1080
FD2080
FD3080
FD4080
90
FD1090
FD2090
FD3090
FD4090
2
100
FD1100
FD2100
FD3100
FD4100
110
FD1110
FD2110
FD3110
FD4110
2
125
FD1125
FD2125
FD3125
FD4125
2
150
FD1150
FD2150
FD3150
FD4150
175
—
FD2175
FD3175
FD4175
2
200
—
FD2200
FD3200
FD4200
225
—
FD2225
FD3225
FD4225
2
Notes
1 Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.
2 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-142
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Type HFD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
65 kAIC at 277 Vac
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15
HFD1015 1
HFD2015
HFD3015
HFD4015
20
HFD1020
1
HFD2020
HFD3020
HFD4020
25
HFD1025
HFD2025
HFD3025
HFD4025
30
HFD1030
HFD2030
HFD3030
HFD4030
35
HFD1035
HFD2035
HFD3035
HFD4035
40
HFD1040
HFD2040
HFD3040
HFD4040
45
HFD1045
HFD2045
HFD3045
HFD4045
50
HFD1050
HFD2050
HFD3050
HFD4050
60
HFD1060
HFD2060
HFD3060
HFD4060
70
HFD1070
HFD2070
HFD3070
HFD4070
80
HFD1080
HFD2080
HFD3080
HFD4080
90
HFD1090
HFD2090
HFD3090
HFD4090
100
HFD1100
HFD2100
HFD3100
HFD4100
110
HFD1110
HFD2110
HFD3110
HFD4110
125
HFD1125
HFD2125
HFD3125
HFD4125
150
HFD1150
HFD2150
HFD3150
HFD4150
175
—
HFD2175
HFD3175
HFD4175
200
—
HFD2200
HFD3200
HFD4200
225
—
HFD2225
HFD3225
HFD4225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Note
1 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 240.83(d).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-143
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
(Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
15
FDC2015
FDC3015
FDC4015
20
FDC2020
FDC3020
FDC4020
25
FDC2025
FDC3025
FDC4025
2
30
FDC2030
FDC3030
FDC4030
2
35
FDC2035
FDC3035
FDC4035
40
FDC2040
FDC3040
FDC4040
2
45
FDC2045
FDC3045
FDC4045
50
FDC2050
FDC3050
FDC4050
2
60
FDC2060
FDC3060
FDC4060
70
FDC2070
FDC3070
FDC4070
2
80
FDC2080
FDC3080
FDC4080
2
90
FDC2090
FDC3090
FDC4090
100
FDC2100
FDC3100
FDC4100
2
110
FDC2110
FDC3110
FDC4110
125
FDC2125
FDC3125
FDC4125
2
150
FDC215
FDC3150
FDC4150
2
175
FDC2175
FDC3175
FDC4175
200
FDC2200
FDC3200
FDC4200
225
FDC2225
FDC3225
FDC4225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-144
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Types FDE, HFDE and FDCE 310+ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-151.
2
2
Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay Ramp
Independently
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup and Delay
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short Delay
and Ground Fault Protection
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Ground Fault Protection
Catalog Number
2
Neutral
CT for LSG
and LSIG
2
Catalog Number
2
35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac
2
80
FDE308033
FDE308032
FDE308035
FDE308036
CTF080
160
FDE316033
FDE316032
FDE316035
FDE316036
CTF160
225
FDE322533
FDE322532
FDE322535
FDE322536
CTF225
2
2
65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
80
HFDE308033
HFDE308032
HFDE308035
HFDE308036
CTF080
160
HFDE316033
HFDE316032
HFDE316035
HFDE316036
CTF160
225
HFDE322533
HFDE322532
HFDE322535
HFDE322536
CTF225
2
2
100 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
80
FDCE308033
FDCE308032
FDCE308035
FDCE308036
CTF080
160
FDCE316033
FDCE316032
FDCE316035
FDCE316036
CTF160
225
FDCE322533
FDCE322532
FDCE322535
FDCE322536
CTF225
Types FDE, HFDE, and FDCE 210+ Electronic Circuit Breakers
with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Digitrip RMS 210+ Trip Unit Only
Maximum
Ampere Rating
100
2
FDE 310+ Electronic Breaker with Zone Selective
Interlocking
Ampere
Rating
LSI w/ZSI
LSIG w/ZSI
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Standard
Optional
LI
Adjustable
Instantaneous
LSI
Adjustable Short Time Pickup
and Delay
35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac
80
FDE308032ZG
FDE308036ZG
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
160
FDE316032ZG
FDE316036ZG
225
FDE322532ZG
FDE322536ZG
35 kAIC at 480 Vac / 18 kAIC at 600 Vac
2
2
2
2
2
2
65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
FDE310021
FDE310022
150
FDE315021
1
225
FDE322521
FDE322522
65 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
80
HFDE308032ZG
HFDE308036ZG
160
HFDE316032ZG
HFDE316036ZG
225
HFDE322532ZG
HFDE322536ZG
2
2
100 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
100
HFDE310021
HFDE310022
150
HFDE315021
1
225
HFDE322521
HFDE322522
80
FDCE308032ZG
FDCE308036ZG
160
FDCE316032ZG
FDCE316036ZG
225
FDCE322532ZG
FDCE322536ZG
2
2
100 kAIC at 480 Vac / 25 kAIC at 600 Vac 2
Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings
2
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Frame
Ratings
2
210+ Trip Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
225
100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225
Circuit
Breaker
Type
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
160
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
80
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80
Frame
Ratings
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
225
100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
150
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
100
40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
100
FDCE310021
FDCE310022
150
FDCE315021
1
225
FDCE322521
FDCE322522
2
2
Notes
1 For 210+ trip unit, 150 A not available with LSI trip unit; entire range is covered by 100 A and
225 A frames.
2 Contact the product line for availability.
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-145
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Series C
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case
switches are used as
compact switches in
applications requiring high
current switching capabilities.
Molded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the
high instantaneous automatic
type. Molded case switches
are listed in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489.
Molded Case Switches
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side
Terminals Only
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Two-Pole
2
100
EHD2100K
FD2100K
HFD2100K
2
150
—
FD2150K
HFD2150K
225
—
FD2225K
HFD2225K
2
Three-Pole
100
EHD3100K
FD3100K
HFD3100K
2
150
—
FD3150K
HFD3150K
225
—
FD3225K
HFD3225K
HFD4100K
2
Four-Pole
2
100
—
FD4100K
150
—
FD4150K
HFD4150K
225
—
FD4225K
HFD4225K
2
2
Note
Molded case switches will open above 1800 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-146
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Line and Load Terminals
Line and load terminals provide
wire connecting capabilities for
specific ranges of continuous
current ratings and wire types.
Except as noted, terminals
comply with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards UL
486A and UL 486B. Unless
otherwise specified, F-Frame
circuit breakers are factory
equipped with load
terminals only.
2
Ordering Information
F-Frame circuit breakers and
molded case switches have
load terminals only as
standard equipment. When
standard line-end terminals
(same as standard load-end
terminals) are required, add
Suffix L to the circuit breaker
catalog number. When nonstandard or optional line and/
or load terminals are required,
order by style number.
Specify if factory installation
is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Package of Three
Terminals
2
Wire Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
2
Steel
Cu/AI
14–10
2.5–4
3T20FB 2
2
100
Steel
Cu/AI
14–1/0
2.5–50
3T100FB
225
Aluminum
Cu/AI
4–4/0
25–95
3TA225FD
Cu/AI
14–4
2.5–25
3TA50FB 2
Terminal Body
Material
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
20 (EHD)
2
2
Optional Pressure Terminals
50
Aluminum
100
Aluminum
Cu/AI
14–1/0
2.5–50
3TA100FD
200
Stainless steel
Cu
4–4/0
25–95
3T150FB
225
Copper
Cu
4–4/0
25–95
3T225FD
225
Aluminum
Cu/AI
6–300 kcmil
16–150
3TA225FDK 3
2
2
2
Notes
1 Use on FDE, HFDE and FDCE electronic trip only.
2 Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.
3 Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately 3 inches (76.2) to breaker height. Available for use on three-pole breaker only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-147
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Line and Load Terminals
2
Collar
2
Collar
Nut
Screw
2
2
2
2
Clip
Conductor
Washer
Conductor
Conductor
Screw
Wire Clamp
Extrusion
3T20FB
3T100FB, 3T150FB
3TA225FD
Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown.
Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of
conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer.
Caution: Collar must surround conductor.
Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar.
Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around
bottom of collar.
2
2
2
Collar
2
Conductor
Collar
2
2
2
2
Washer
Conductor
Screw
Washer
Screw
3TA50FB
3TA100FD
3TA225FDK (Up to 150 mm2)
Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely
with screw and washer.
Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a screw
and lockwasher.
Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely
with screw and washer. Terminal shield must be used with
this collar.
Note: For 185 mm2, use 3TA225FDK1.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-148
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
2
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
2
FD Frame Accessories
Description
Reference
Page
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Center
Left
Left
Right
1
Center
Four-Pole
Right
Left
Center
Right
Neutral
2
Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole)
■
Alarm lockout switch (make only)
V4-T2-275
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-275
■
❏
❏
■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)
V4-T2-275
■
❏
❏
■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
V4-T2-277
■
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-277
■
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-279
■
❏
❏
■
Shunt trip—standard
V4-T2-281
■
■
■
■
Shunt trip—low energy
V4-T2-285
■
■
■
■
Undervoltage release mechanism
V4-T2-287
■
■
■
■
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
■
V4-T2-308
Keeper nut
V4-T2-308
●
2
2
2
2
External Accessories
End cap kit
2
2
Control wire terminal kit
V4-T2-309
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Multiwire connectors
V4-T2-310
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rear fed terminals
V4-T2-310
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-310
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Terminal shields
V4-T2-312
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Terminal end covers
V4-T2-313
●
●
●
2
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
●
●
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-313
Non-padlockable handle block
V4-T2-314
■
■
Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-314
■
■
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-315
Cylinder lock
V4-T2-315
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-316
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-317
●
●
●
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-317
●
●
●
Electrical (solenoid and motor) operators
V4-T2-318
Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-319
●
■
■
■
■
❏
■
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
2
■
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rear connecting studs
V4-T2-321
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Panelboard connecting straps
V4-T2-322
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-430
●
●
●
LFD current limiter
V4-T2-324
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
■
❏
2
2
2
2
2
2
IQ Energy Sentinel
V4-T2-324
Cause of trip display
V4-T2-325
●
●
Remote mount cause of trip display
V4-T2-325
●
●
Cause of trip LED
V4-T2-325
●
●
2
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-116
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Marine/naval application
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
2
2
2
2
2
Note
Internal accessories are listed with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for factory installation.
They are not listed with UL for field installation.
1
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
V4-T2-149
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
2
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
277
480
600
125
250 23
2
EDB
2, 3
22
—
—
—
10
—
EDS
2, 3
42
—
—
—
10
—
2
ED
2, 3
65
—
—
—
10
—
EDH
2, 3
100
—
—
—
10
—
2
EDC
2, 3
200
—
—
—
10
—
2
EHD
Volts DC 1
1
—
4
—
—
10
—
2, 3
18
—
14
—
—
10
FDB
2, 3, 4
18
—
14
14
—
10
2
FD
1
—
35
—
—
10
—
2, 3, 4
65
—
35
18
—
10
2
FDE 4
3
65
—
35
18
—
—
HFD
1
—
65
—
—
10
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2, 3, 4
100
—
65
25
—
22
HFDE 4
3
100
—
65
25
—
—
FDC 5
2, 3, 4
200
—
100
35
—
22
FDCE 456
3
200
—
100
25
—
—
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings (P1)
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit Breaker
Type
Volts DC 1
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Number
of Poles
220, 240
380, 415
440
500
125
250 23
EDB
2, 3
22
—
—
—
10
—
EDS
2, 3
42
—
—
—
10
—
ED
2, 3
65
—
—
—
10
—
EDH
2, 3
100
—
—
—
10
—
EDC
2, 3
200
—
—
—
10
—
2
EHD
2
FDB
2, 3, 4
18
14
14
14
—
10
FD
1
35
—
—
—
10
—
1
—
14
—
—
10
—
2, 3
18
—
14
—
—
10
2
2, 3, 4
65
35
35
18
—
10
HFD
1
65
—
—
—
10
—
2
2, 3, 4
100
65
65
25
—
22
FDC
2, 3, 4
200
100
100
35
—
22
2
210+ and 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
2
Description
210+
310+
Catalog
number
Electronic portable test kit
■
■
MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
■
■
5108A03H01
2
External neutral sensor (80 A) 7
■
CTF080
2
External neutral sensor (160 A) 7
■
CTF160
External neutral sensor (225 A) 7
■
CTF225
2
2
Compact external neutral sensor (80
■
CTFD080
Compact external neutral sensor (160 A) 7
■
CTFD160
2
Compact external neutral sensor (225 A) 7
■
CTFD225
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication
■
TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module
■
DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module
■
DIGIVIEWR06
2
2
A) 7
Notes
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2 Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
4 Electronics available on three-pole only, no DC rating for FDE, HFDE, FDCE.
5 Current limiting.
6 Check with Eaton for availability.
7 Neutral sensor required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired; sold separately.
2
V4-T2-150
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
FDE 210+ and 310+ Specifications
Description
FDE 310+ Adjustability Specifications
Digitrip RMS 210+
Digitrip RMS 310+
Frame designation
FD
FD
Frames available
100 A, 150 A, 225 A
80 A, 160 A, 225 A
Continuous current range (A)
40–225 A
15–225 A
Ground fault pickup (A)
N/A
16–225 A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
35, 65, 100
35, 65, 100
Breaker type
310+ Settings
80 A
160 A
225 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) Ir
(All 310+)
A
15
60
100
B
20
70
110
C
30
80
125
Protection
Ordering options
LI, LSI
LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™
(or Maintenance Mode)
No
No
Interchangeable trip unit
No
No
High load alarm (suffix B20)
No
No
No
No
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22)
No
No
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)
No
LSI, LSIG
Cause of trip indication
No
Yes
Thru-cover accessories
No
No
Test kit available
Yes
100 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup
(amperes)
(all 210+)
Ii (x In)= Instantaneous pickup
(210+ LI version)
“Isd (x Ir) / tsd = SD profile
(210+ LSI version)
225 A
A
40
70
100
B
50
80
110
C
60
90
125
D
70
100
150
E
80
110
175
F
90
125
200
G (= In)
100
150
225
Ii
100
150
225
J–2x
200
300
450
K–2.5x
250
375
565
L–3x
300
450
675
M–3.5x
350
525
790
N–4x
400
600
900
O–5x
500
750
1125
P–6x
600
900
1350
Q–8x
800
1200
1800
R–10x
1000
1500
2250
S–12x 1
1200
1800
2400
2400
2400
2400
150
100
160
F
60
125
175
G
70
150
200
160
225
2
2
2
Position 2
4
4
4
Position 3
7
7
7
Position 4
10
10
10
Position 5
12
12
12
Position 6
15
15
15
Position 7
20
20
20
Position 8
24
24
24
Position 1
2x
2x
2x
Position 2
3x
3x
3x
Position 3
4x
4x
4x
Position 4
5x
5x
5x
Position 5
6x
6x
6x
Position 6
7x
7x
7x
Position 7
8x
8x
8x
Position 8
10x
10x
10x
Position 9
12x
12x
12x
tsd
(LS, LSG)
Fixed
67
at10x
67
at10x
67
at10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG)
Position 1
Inst
Inst
Inst
Position 2
120
120
120
Position 3
300
300
300
Position 1
16
32
45
Position 2
24
48
67
Position 3
32
64
90
Position 4
48
96
135
Position 5
64
128
180
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
Ir
Fixed instantaneous override (all 210+)
2
150 A
90
50
80
Yes
FD Frame
40
E
H (= In)
FDE 210+ Adjustability Specifications
210+ settings
D
Position 1
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21)
= short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
Ig = gound fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG)
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG)
Position 6
80
160
225
Position 1
Inst
Inst
Inst
Position 2
120
120
120
Position 3
300
300
300
Isd / tsd
100
150
225
J
2x / 150
N/A
2x / 150
K
2x / 300
N/A
2x / 300
L
2x / I2t
N/A
2x / I2t
Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
1
M
4x / Inst
N/A
4x / Inst
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes)
2
N
4x / 150
N/A
4x / 150
O
4x / I2t
N/A
4x / I2t
P
6x / Inst
N/A
6x / Inst
Q
6x / 300
N/A
6x / 300
R
10x / 150
N/A
10x / 150
S
10x / 300
N/A
10x / 300
2
FD Frame
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Not available for FD. Independently adjustable I setting available in LG, NG and
i
RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units.
2 Maintenance Mode not available for FD frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG
and RG.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-151
2.3
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
FD Frame
2
Number of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2
1
1.38 (35.1)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (86.0)
2
2.75 (70.0)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (86.0)
3
4.13 (105.0)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (86.0)
4
5.50 (139.7)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (86.0)
2
2
2
FD Frame, Three-Pole
Side View
Front View
2
2
2
On
Off
2
2
6.00
(152.4)
2
2
2
2
3.38
(85.7)
4.13
(104.9)
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg)
2
FD Frame
2
Breaker Type
1
2
3
4
2
ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC
—
3 (1.4)
4.5 (2.0)
—
2
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
2 (0.9)
3 (1.4)
4.5 (2.0)
6 (2.7)
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
—
—
4.5 (2.0)
—
Number of Poles
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-152
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical J-Frame Breaker
2.3
Contents
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-154
V4-T2-155
V4-T2-158
V4-T2-159
V4-T2-160
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
●
●
●
All Eaton’s J-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
J-Frame circuit breakers are
available as individual
components (frame, trip
unit, terminals), or factory
assembled complete
breakers
J-Frame circuit breakers
with non-interchangeable
trip units are suitable for
reverse feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-153
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit Breaker/Frame
2
JD 3 250 F
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
JDB
JD
HJD
JDC
2
2
Number of
Poles
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
4 = 4 poles
2
2
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
070
090
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
Suffix
C = Non-aluminum terminals
F = Frame only
K = High magnetic molded case switch
V = 50 °C calibration
W = Without terminals
X = Load side terminals only
Y = Line side terminals only
2
2
Trip Unit
JT 3 250 T
2
2
Trip Unit Type
JT = Thermal-magnetic
2
2
2
2
Number
of Poles
2 = 2 poles
3 = 3 poles
4 = 4 poles
Trip Unit Rating/
Plug Ampere Rating
070
090
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-154
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Suffix
T = Trip unit
thermal-magnetic
fixed thermal
adj. magnetic
V = 50 °C calibration
(thermal-magnetic
trip units only)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Product Selection
2
2
Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
For Use with Standard or
High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
See Page
V4-T2-157
for Optional
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70
JD2070
HJD2070
JDC2070
JT2070T
TA250KB 2
90
JD2090
HJD2090
JDC2090
JT2090T
100
JD2100
HJD2100
JDC2100
JT2100T
125
JD2125
HJD2125
JDC2125
JT2125T
150
JD2150
HJD2150
JDC2150
JT2150T
175
JD2175
HJD2175
JDC2175
JT2175T
200
JD2200
HJD2200
JDC2200
JT2200T
225
JD2225
HJD2225
JDC2225
JT2225T
250
JD2250
HJD2250
JDC2250
JT2250T
70
JD3070
HJD3070
JDC3070
JT3070T
90
JD3090
HJD3090
JDC3090
JT3090T
100
JD3100
HJD3100
JDC3100
JT3100T
125
JD3125
HJD3125
JDC3125
JT3125T
150
JD3150
HJD3150
JDC3150
JT3150T
175
JD3175
HJD3175
JDC3175
JT3175T
200
JD3200
HJD3200
JDC3200
JT3200T
225
JD3225
HJD3225
JDC3225
JT3225T
250
JD3250
HJD3250
JDC3250
JT3250T
125
JD4125
HJD4125
JDC4125
JT3125T
150
JD4150
HJD4150
JDC4150
JT3150T
175
JD4175
HJD4175
JDC4175
JT3175T
200
JD4200
HJD4200
JDC4200
JT3200T
225
JD4225
HJD4225
JDC4225
JT3225T
250
JD4250
HJD4250
JDC4250
JT3250T
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only 1
Standard
Terminals Only
2
2
2
2
Two-Pole
2
2
2
2
2
2
Three-Pole
TA250KB 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Four-Pole 34
TA250KB 2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2 Individually packed.
3 Fully rated neutral pole with no protection.
4 Neutral is in right pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-155
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—
Frame Only
2
Standard Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
HJD2250F
JDC2250F
2
2
JD2250F
2
JD3250F
Molded Case Switches
Three-Pole
HJD3250F
2
2
2
Four-Pole
JD4250F
HJD4250F
JDC4250F
Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with NonInterchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Suitable for
Reverse Feed Application
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Complete Circuit Breaker
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Without Line and
Load Terminals
With Standard Line and
Load Terminals Only
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Two-Pole
2
70
JDB2070W
JDB2070
90
JDB2090W
JDB2090
250
100
JDB2100W
JDB2100
125
JDB2125W
JDB2125
2
150
JDB2150W
JDB2150
2
175
JDB2175W
JDB2175
200
JDB2200W
JDB2200
2
225
JDB2225W
JDB2225
250
JDB2250W
JDB2250
2
Three-Pole
70
JDB3070W
JDB3070
2
90
JDB3090W
JDB3090
2
100
JDB3100W
JDB3100
125
JDB3125W
JDB3125
2
150
JDB3150W
JDB3150
175
JDB3175W
JDB3175
2
200
JDB3200W
JDB3200
225
JDB3225W
JDB3225
250
JDB3250W
JDB3250
Suitable for
Reverse Feed Use
See PageV4-T2-157
for Optional Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
JD2250KW
JDB2250KW
TA250KB 1
HJD2250KW
HJDB2250KW
—
250
JD3250KW
JDB3250KW
TA250KB 1
HJD3250KW
HJDB3250KW
—
JD4250KW
JDB4250KW
TA250KB 1
HJD4250KW
HJDB4250KW
—
Four-Pole
Notes
1 Individually packed.
Molded case switches may open above 2500 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-156
Standard
Terminals Only
Three-Pole
250
2
Complete Circuit Breaker Only Without
Line and Load Terminals
Two-Pole
600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc
2
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
JDC3250F
2
2
components and are of the
high instantaneous automatic
type. Molded case switches
are listed in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489.
Two-Pole
2
2
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case
switches are used as
compact switches in
applications requiring high
current switching capabilities.
Molded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals
Eaton’s line and load terminals
provide wire connecting
capabilities for specific ranges
of continuous current ratings
and wire types. All terminals
comply with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards UL
486A and UL 486B and CSA
Standard C22.2 No. 65, or
Electrical Bulletin 1165.
Unless otherwise specified, JFrame circuit breaker line and
load terminals are shipped
separately for field installation.
The bottom of the standard
TA250KB terminal contains a
recess that is positioned over
the J-Frame circuit breaker
terminal conductor.
2
Ordering Information
J-Frame circuit breakers use
Cu/AI terminals as standard.
When optional copper-only
terminals are required, order
by catalog number. Specify if
factory installation is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Collar
2
Collar
2
Nut
Slotted
Screw
T250KB Terminal
2
Slotted
Screw
2
TA250KB Terminal (Standard)
2
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
2
Wire
Type
AWG Wire Range/
No. Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
Cu/AI
4–350 kcmil
25–185
TA250KB
2
Cu
4–350 kcmil
25–185
T250KB
2
2
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
250
Aluminum
Optional Cu Pressure Terminals
250
Stainless Steel
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-157
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
2
2
JD Frame Accessories
2
Description
Reference
Page
Two-, Three-Pole
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-275
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
V4-T2-277
2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
Left
❏
❏
❏
❏
■
■
■
■
V4-T2-277
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-279
❏
❏
❏
❏
Shunt trip—standard
V4-T2-282
■
■
■
■
Shunt trip—low energy
V4-T2-285
■
■
■
■
2
Undervoltage release mechanism
V4-T2-289
■
■
■
■
2
End cap kit
V4-T2-308
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Plug nut
V4-T2-309
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Control wire terminal kit
V4-T2-309
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Multiwire connectors
V4-T2-310
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-311
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Terminal shields
V4-T2-312
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-313
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Non-padlockable handle block
V4-T2-314
■
■
2
Padlockable handle block
V4-T2-314
■
■
2
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-315
❏
❏
Cylinder lock
V4-T2-315
❏
❏
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-316
❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-317
●
●
●
2
Electrical (solenoid) operator
V4-T2-319
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-319
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rear connecting studs
V4-T2-321
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Panelboard connecting straps
V4-T2-322
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-430
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Handle extension
V4-T2-445
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
IQ Energy Sentinel
V4-T2-324
●
●
●
2
Special calibration
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-116
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Marine/naval application
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Center
Four-Pole
Right
2
Left
Center
Right
Neutral
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
External Accessories
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
2
2
V4-T2-158
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
480
600
125
250 12
JDB
2, 3
65
35
18
—
10
JD
2, 3, 4
65
35
18
—
10
HJD
2, 3, 4
100
65
25
—
22
JDC 3
2, 3, 4
200
100
35
—
22
2
Volts DC
2
2
2
2
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
380
415
600
125
250 12
JD
2, 3, 4
65
35
35
—
—
10
Volts DC
HJD
2, 3, 4
100
65
65
—
—
22
JDC
2, 3, 4
200
100
100
—
—
22
2
2
2
Notes
1 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
2 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
3 Current limiting.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-159
2.3
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
JD Frame
Number of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2, 3
4.13 (105.0)
10.00 (254.0)
4.06 (104.1)
2
4
5.50 (139.7)
10.00 (254.0)
4.06 (104.1)
2
JD-Frame, Three-Pole
2
2
Front View
Front View Cutout
2
1.56
(39.7)
0.34 R
(8.7 R)
2
2
3.94
(100.0)
2
2
0.72
(18.2)
0.50 (12.7)
Diameter
3 Megger Holes
if Required
0.19 R
(4.8) R
Side View
4.13
(104.8)
0.78
(19.8)
2.92
(74.2)
CL Breaker
2
2
CL Handle
2
0.88
(22.2)
3.33
(84.5)
ON
10.00
(254.0)
OFF
2.75
(69.9)
1.38
(34.9)
3.50
(88.9)
1.75
(44.5)
2
4.06
(103.2)
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
2
JD Frame
2
Breaker
Type
Complete Breaker
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
2
JDB
11.25 (5.1)
12.50 (5.7)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
JD
11.25 (5.1)
12.50 (5.7)
13.25 (6.0)
9.00 (4.1)
10.00 (4.5)
10.50 (4.8)
2.00 (0.9)
2.00 (0.9)
2.25 (1.0)
2
HJD
11.25 (5.1)
12.50 (5.7)
13.25 (6.0)
9.00 (4.1)
10.00 (4.5)
10.50 (4.8)
2.00 (0.9)
2.00 (0.9)
2.25 (1.0)
JDC
12.25 (5.6)
13.50 (6.1)
14.25 (6.5)
10.00 (4.5)
11.00 (5.0)
11.50 (5.2)
2.00 (0.9)
2.00 (0.9)
2.25 (1.0)
Frame Only
Trip Unit
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-160
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker
2.3
Contents
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-162
V4-T2-164
V4-T2-180
V4-T2-181
V4-T2-184
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
●
●
●
All Eaton K-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
K-Frame circuit breakers are
available as individual
components (frame, trip
unit, terminals), or factory
assembled complete
breakers
K-Frame circuit breakers
with non-interchangeable
trip units are suitable for
reverse feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-161
2.3
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
K-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
2
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frames 1
KD 3 400 F
2
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
DK
KD
KDB
HKD
KDC
2
2
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
2
2
2
2
KT 3 400 F
2
Trip Unit Type
KT = Thermal-magnetic
2
2
2
2
2
2
Suffix
= Copper terminals
= 50% protected neutral pole (four-pole electronic
trip unit circuit breaker only)
F
= Frame only (400 A only)
K
= High-magnetic molded-case switch
V
= 50 ° calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
W
= Without terminals
X
= Load terminals only
Y
= Line side terminals only
Blank = Standard load and line side terminals
C
E
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
2
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
Rating
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
Rating
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
Notes
1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F or HKD3400F.
Ampere rating available with electronic trip unit only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-162
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Suffix
T = Trip unit only
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
K-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 1
2
2
310+ Circuit Breakers 2
KDB 3 400 F T36 ZG W
Performance at
480 Vac
KDB = 35 kAIC
HKDB = 65 kAIC
CKDB = 35 kAIC
100% rated
CHKDB = 65 kAIC
100% rated
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Ampere Rating
125
250
400
T33
T32
T35
T36
T38
T39
=
=
=
=
=
=
Frame Designation
F
2
Feature
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip
ZG
= Zone selective interlocking
2
Terminals
W = No terminals
L = Line and load
2
2
2
Trip Unit
310+ Electronic LS
310+ Electronic LSI
310+ Electronic LSG
310+ Electronic LSIG
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode
310+ Electronic ALSIG with Maintenance Mode
2
2
2
310+ Electronic Trip Units 3
2
KES 3 400 LSIG ZG
Trip Unit Type
KES
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Ampere Rating
125
250
400
2
Trip Unit
LS =
310+ Electronic LS
LSI =
310+ Electronic LSI
LSG=
310+ Electronic LSG 2
LSIG=
310+ Electronic LSIG 2
ALSI=
310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
ALSIG= 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 2
Feature
Blank = No feature
B20 = High load alarm
B21 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 2
B22 = Ground fault alarm, no trip 2
ZG
= Zone selective interlocking
2
2
2
2
2
2
K-Frame with OPTIM Trip Unit Technology
2
2
OPTIM Circuit Breakers
KD 3 125 T5 7 W
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
KD
HKD
KDC
CKD
CHKD
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
125
250
400
Trip Model
T5 = Model 550
T10 = Model 1050
2
Trip Type
2 = LSI
6 = LSIG
7 = LSIA
2
Suffix
W = Without terminals
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Cannot combine ‘B2X’ suffixes with ‘B2X’ suffixes.
2 Not available in four-pole configurations.
3 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F, HKD3400F, etc.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-163
2.3
2
2
Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
2
2
2
Series C
Product Selection
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Standard Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only 1
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals 1
For Use with Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
See Page V4-T2-179 for
Optional Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Standard Terminals Only
Two-Pole
100
KD2100
HKD2100
KDC2100
KT2100T
TA300K 2
125
KD2125
HKD2125
KDC2125
KT2125T
TA300K 2
150
KD2150
HKD2150
KDC2150
KT2150T
TA300K 2
175
KD2175
HKD2175
KDC2175
KT2175T
TA300K 2
2
200
KD2200
HKD2200
KDC2200
KT2200T
TA300K 2
2
225
KD2225
HKD2225
KDC2225
KT2225T
TA300K 2
250
KD2250
HKD2250
KDC2250
KT2250T
TA350K 2
2
300
KD2300
HKD2300
KDC2300
KT2300T
TA350K 2
350
KD2350
HKD2350
KDC2350
KT2350T
TA350K 2
2
400
KD2400
HKD2400
KDC2400
KT2400T
2TA400K 3
2
2
Three-Pole
2
100
KD3100
HKD3100
KDC3100
KT3100T
TA300K 2
2
125
KD3125
HKD3125
KDC3125
KT3125T
TA300K 2
150
KD3150
HKD3150
KDC3150
KT3150T
TA300K 2
2
175
KD3175
HKD3175
KDC3175
KT3175T
TA300K 2
200
KD3200
HKD3200
KDC3200
KT3200T
TA300K 2
2
225
KD3225
HKD3225
KDC3225
KT3225T
TA300K 2
250
KD3250
HKD3250
KDC3250
KT3250T
TA350K 2
2
300
KD3300
HKD3300
KDC3300
KT3300T
TA350K 2
2
350
KD3350
HKD3350
KDC3350
KT3350T
TA350K 2
400
KD3400
HKD3400
KDC3400
KT3400T
3TA400K 3
2
Four-Pole
100
KD4100
HKD4100
KDC4100
KT3100T
TA300K 2
2
125
KD4125
HKD4125
KDC4125
KT3125T
TA300K 2
2
175
KD4175
HKD4175
KDC4175
KT3175T
TA300K 2
200
KD4200
HKD4200
KDC4200
KT3200T
TA300K 2
2
225
KD4225
HKD4225
KDC4225
KT3225T
TA300K 2
250
KD4250
HKD4250
KDC4250
KT3250T
TA350K 2
2
300
KD4300
HKD4300
KDC4300
KT3300T
TA350K 2
350
KD4350
HKD4350
KDC4350
KT3350T
TA350K 2
400
KD4400
HKD4400
KDC4400
KT3400T
4TA400K 3
2
2
2
Notes
1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2 Individually packed.
3 2TA400K, 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
2
2
2
V4-T2-164
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only
2
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
HKD2400F
KDC2400F
HKD3400F
KDC3400F
2
HKD4400F
KDC4400F
2
2
2
2
Two-Pole
KD2400F
2
Three-Pole
KD3400F
Four-Pole
KD4400F
Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units
Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.
Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
Max.
Cont.
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
35 kAIC at
480 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Ultra High
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting
600 Vac
Rated
100 kAIC
at 480 Vac
Standard
Options
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalog Number
2
2
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Catalog Number Information
125
KD3400F
HKD3400F
KDC3400F
KES3125LS
KES3125LSI
KES3125LSG
KES3125LSIG
LGFCT125
250
KD3400F
HKD3400F
KDC3400F
KES3250LS
KES3250LSI
KES3250LSG
KES3250LSIG
LGFCT250
400
KD3400F
HKD3400F
KDC3400F
KES3400LS
KES3400LSI
KES3400LSG
KES3400LSIG
LGFCT400
See Page
V4-T2-179
Max.
Cont.
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
35 kAIC at
480 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
2
2
2
2
Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Ultra High
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting
600 Vac
Rated
100 kAIC
at 480 Vac
2
2
Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Four-Pole 45
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
2
Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
Standard
Options
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalog Number
2
2
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Catalog Number Information
125
KD4400F
HKD4400F
KDC4400F
KES4125LS
KES4125LSI
—
—
—
250
KD4400F
HKD4400F
KDC4400F
KES4250LS
KES4250LSI
—
—
—
400
KD4400F
HKD4400F
KDC4400F
KES4400LS
KES4400LSI
—
—
—
See Page
V4-T2-179
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.
4 Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use corresponding three-pole trip unit if protected neutral pole is not required.
5 Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard. For 50% rated protection on neutral pole, add Suffix E to four-pole trip unit catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-165
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type KDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.
2
2
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Adjustable Short Time
Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short
Delay and Ground Fault
Short Time Pickup and
Protection
Delay
LSG
LSIG
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Number
of Poles
2
125
3
KDB3125FT33W
KDB3125FT32W
KDB3125FT35W
KDB3125FT36W
LGFCT125
250
3
KDB3250FT33W
KDB3250FT32W
KDB3250FT35W
KDB3250FT36W
LGFCT250
2
400
3
KDB3400FT33W
KDB3400FT32W
KDB3400FT35W
KDB3400FT36W
LGFCT400
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Terminal
Information
See Page
V4-T2-180
Type HKDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
2
2
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Neutral CT for
Ground Fault Protection
LSG and LSIG 23
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Adjustable Short Time
Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short
Delay and Ground Fault
Short Time Pickup and
Protection
Delay
LSG
LSIG
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Number
of Poles
125
3
HKDB3125FT33W
HKDB3125FT32W
HKDB3125FT35W
HKDB3125FT36W
LGFCT125
250
3
HKDB3250FT33W
HKDB3250FT32W
HKDB3250FT35W
HKDB3250FT36W
LGFCT250
400
3
HKDB3400FT33W
HKDB3400FT32W
HKDB3400FT35W
HKDB3400FT36W
LGFCT400
Independently Adjustable
Neutral CT for
Short Time Pickup and
LSG and LSIG 23
Ground Fault Protection
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
Terminal
Information
See Page
V4-T2-180
2
2
2
2
100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units.
100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers—Three-Pole
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Standard
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
High
Interrupting
Capacity
35 kAIC at
480 Vac
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Options
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with
I2t Short
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup and
Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalog Number
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23
Catalog Number
125
CKD3400F
CHKD3400F
KES3125LS
KES3125LSI
KES3125LSG
KES3125LSIG
LGFCT125
250
CKD3400F
CHKD3400F
KES3250LS
KES3250LSI
KES3250LSG
KES3250LSIG
LGFCT250
400
CKD3400F
CHKD3400F
KES3400LS
KES3400LSI
KES3400LSG
KES3400LSIG
LGFCT400
Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.
2
2
2
V4-T2-166
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Terminal
Information
See Page
V4-T2-179
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Suitable for reverse feed application.
2
2
Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
240 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker
Complete Circuit Breaker
2
Without Line and
Load Terminals
With Line
Terminals Only
With Standard Line and
Load Terminals Only
Without Line and
Load Terminals
With Standard Line
and Load Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
100
—
—
—
KDB2100W
KDB2100
125
—
—
—
KDB2125W
KDB2125
150
—
—
—
KDB2150W
KDB2150
175
—
—
—
KDB2175W
KDB2175
200
—
—
—
KDB2200W
KDB2200
225
—
—
—
KDB2225W
KDB2225
250
DK2250W
DK2250Y
DK2250
KDB2250W
KDB2250
300
DK2300W
DK2300Y
DK2300
KDB2300W
KDB2300
350
DK2350W
DK2350Y
DK2350
KDB2350W
KDB2350
400
DK2400W
DK2400Y
DK2400
KDB2400W
KDB2400
2
100
—
—
—
KDB3100W
KDB3100
2
125
—
—
—
KDB3125W
KDB3125
150
—
—
—
KDB3150W
KDB3150
175
—
—
—
KDB3175W
KDB3175
200
—
—
—
KDB3200W
KDB3200
225
—
—
—
KDB3225W
KDB3225
250
DK3250W
DK3250Y
DK3250
KDB3250W
KDB3250
300
DK3300W
DK3300Y
DK3300
KDB3300W
KDB3300
350
DK3350W
DK3350Y
DK3350
KDB3350W
KDB3350
400
DK3400W
DK3400Y
DK3400
KDB3400W
KDB3400
2
2
Two-Pole
2
2
2
2
2
Three-Pole
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-167
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Three-Pole
2
240 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Standard Line and
Load Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Standard Line and
Load Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Standard Line and
Load Terminals. Suitable for
Reverse Feed Use
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
DK2400K
KD2400K
KDB2400K
—
HKD2400K
HKDB2400K
DK3400K
KD3400K
KDB3400K
—
HKD3400K
HKDB3400K
—
KD4400K
KDB4400K
—
HKD4400K
HKDB4400K
Two-Pole
2
2
components and are of the
high instantaneous automatic
type. Molded case switches
are listed in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489.
Molded Case Switches
400
2
Series C
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case
switches are used as
compact switches in
applications requiring high
current switching capabilities.
Molded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
400
Four-Pole
400
Note
Molded case switches may open above 4000 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-168
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
2
2
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
KD3125T57W
70
ORPK125A70
90
ORPK125A90
100
ORPK125A100
110
ORPK125A110
125
ORPK125A125
125
ORPK025A125
150
ORPK025A150
175
ORPK025A175
200
ORPK025A200
225
ORPK025A225
250
ORPK025A250
200
ORPK40A200
225
ORPK40A225
250
ORPK40A250
300
ORPK40A300
350
ORPK40A350
400
ORPK40A400
Fixed Rating Plug
250
400
KD3125T52W
KD3250T52W
KD3400T52W
KD3125T56W
KD3250T56W
KD3400T56W
KD3250T57W
KD3400T57W
2
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-169
2.3
2
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
HKD3125T57W
70
ORPK125A70
2
90
ORPK125A90
2
100
ORPK125A100
110
ORPK125A110
125
ORPK125A125
125
ORPK025A125
150
ORPK025A150
175
ORPK025A175
200
ORPK025A200
225
ORPK025A225
250
ORPK025A250
200
ORPK40A200
225
ORPK40A225
2
250
ORPK40A250
300
ORPK40A300
2
350
ORPK40A350
400
ORPK40A400
2
2
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
HKD3125T52W
HKD3250T52W
HKD3125T56W
HKD3250T56W
HKD3250T57W
2
2
2
2
2
2
Fixed Rating Plug
400
HKD3400T52W
HKD3400T56W
HKD3400T57W
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-170
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
2
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPK125A70
90
ORPK125A90
100
ORPK125A100
110
ORPK125A110
125
ORPK125A125
125
ORPK025A125
150
ORPK025A150
175
ORPK025A175
200
ORPK025A200
225
ORPK025A225
250
ORPK025A250
200
ORPK40A200
225
ORPK40A225
250
ORPK40A250
300
ORPK40A300
350
ORPK40A350
400
ORPK40A400
2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
400
KDC3125T52W
KDC3250T52W
KDC3400T52W
KDC3125T56W
KDC3250T56W
KDC3400T56W
KDC3125T57W
KDC3250T57W
KDC3400T57W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-171
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
2
2
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 1050 2
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPK125A70
2
90
ORPK125A90
2
100
ORPK125A100
110
ORPK125A110
125
ORPK125A125
125
ORPK025A125
150
ORPK025A150
175
ORPK025A175
2
200
ORPK025A200
2
225
ORPK025A225
250
ORPK025A250
200
ORPK40A200
225
ORPK40A22
250
ORPK40A250
300
ORPK40A300
350
ORPK40A350
400
ORPK40A400
2
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
KD3125T106W
KD3250T106W
KD3125T107W
KD3250T107W
2
2
400
KD3400T106W
KD3400T107W
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-172
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
2
OPTIM 1050 2
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPK125A70
90
ORPK125A90
100
ORPK125A100
110
ORPK125A110
125
ORPK125A125
125
ORPK025A125
150
ORPK025A150
175
ORPK025A175
200
ORPK025A200
225
ORPK025A225
250
ORPK025A250
200
ORPK40A200
225
ORPK40A225
250
ORPK40A250
300
ORPK40A300
350
ORPK40A350
400
ORPK40A400
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
400
HKD3125T106W
HKD3250T106W
HKD3400T106W
HKD3125T107W
HKD3250T107W
HKD3400T107W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-173
2.3
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 1050 2
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPK125A70
2
90
ORPK125A90
2
100
ORPK125A100
110
ORPK125A110
125
ORPK125A125
125
ORPK025A125
150
ORPK025A150
175
ORPK025A175
200
ORPK025A200
225
ORPK025A225
250
ORPK025A250
200
ORPK40A200
225
ORPK40A225
2
250
ORPK40A250
300
ORPK40A300
2
350
ORPK40A350
400
ORPK40A400
2
2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
KDC3125T106W
KDC3250T106W
KDC3125T107W
KDC3250T107W
2
2
2
2
2
2
400
KDC3400T106W
KDC3400T107W
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-174
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
2
2
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
CKD3125T57W
70
ORPK125A70
90
ORPK125A90
100
ORPK125A100
110
ORPK125A110
125
ORPK125A125
125
ORPK025A125
150
ORPK025A150
175
ORPK025A175
200
ORPK025A200
225
ORPK025A225
Fixed Rating Plug
250
400
CKD3125T52W
CKD3250T52W
CKD3400T52W
CKD3125T56W
CKD3250T56W
CKD3400T56W
CKD3250T57W
CKD3400T57W
2
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
2
250
ORPK025A250
200
ORPK40A200
225
ORPK40A225
250
ORPK40A250
300
ORPK40A300
350
ORPK40A350
400
ORPK40A400
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number
(refer to Page V4-T2-293).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-175
2.3
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
CHKD3125T57W
70
ORPK125A70
2
90
ORPK125A90
2
100
ORPK125A100
110
ORPK125A110
125
ORPK125A125
125
ORPK025A125
150
ORPK025A150
175
ORPK025A175
200
ORPK025A200
225
ORPK025A225
250
ORPK025A250
200
ORPK40A200
225
ORPK40A225
2
250
ORPK40A250
300
ORPK40A300
2
350
ORPK40A350
400
ORPK40A400
2
2
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
CHKD3125T52W
CHKD3250T52W
CHKD3125T56W
CHKD3250T56W
CHKD3250T57W
2
2
2
2
2
2
Fixed Rating Plug
400
CHKD3400T52W
CHKD3400T56W
CHKD3400T57W
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-176
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
2
2
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
OPTIM 1050 2
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
250
400
CKD3125T106W
CKD3250T106W
CKD3400T106W
CKD3125T107W
70
ORPK125A70
90
ORPK125A90
100
ORPK125A100
110
ORPK125A110
125
ORPK125A125
CKD3250T107W
125
ORPK025A125
150
ORPK025A150
175
ORPK025A175
200
ORPK025A200
225
ORPK025A225
CKD3400T107W
250
ORPK025A250
200
ORPK40A200
225
ORPK40A225
250
ORPK40A250
300
ORPK40A300
350
ORPK40A350
400
ORPK40A400
2
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-177
2.3
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 1050 2
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPK125A70
2
90
ORPK125A90
2
100
ORPK125A100
110
ORPK125A110
125
ORPK125A125
125
ORPK025A125
150
ORPK025A150
175
ORPK025A175
200
ORPK025A200
225
ORPK025A225
250
ORPK025A250
200
ORPK40A200
225
ORPK40A225
2
250
ORPK40A250
300
ORPK40A300
2
350
ORPK40A350
400
ORPK40A400
2
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
CHKD3125T106W
CHKD3250T106W
CHKD3125T107W
CHKD3250T107W
2
2
2
2
2
2
400
CHKD3400T106W
CHKD3400T107W
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-178
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Guide
Line and Load Terminals
Eaton’s line and load
terminals provide wire
connecting capabilities for
specific ranges of continuous
current ratings and wire
types. All terminals comply
with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards
2
UL 486A and UL 486B and
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65,
or Electrical Bulletin 1165.
Unless otherwise specified,
K-Frame circuit breaker line
and load terminals are
shipped separately for field
installation.
Ordering Information
K-Frame circuit breakers use
Cu/AI terminals as standard.
When optional copper or Cu/
AI terminals are required,
order by catalog number.
Specify if factory installation
is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Tab is 1/4 x.032
TA401K
TA400K, T400K
TA350K, T350K
TA300K, T300K
T400KCW, TA400KCW,
TA401KCW
TA402K, T402K
2
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Terminal
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range/No.
Conductors
Terminals with
Control Wire Termination
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
225
Aluminum
Cu/AI
3–350 (1)
35–185
TA300K 1
—
400
Aluminum
Cu/AI
250–500 (1)
120–240
TA350K 1
—
400
Aluminum
Cu/AI
3/0–250 (2)
95–120
2TA400K 23
2TA400KCW 23
400
Aluminum
Cu/AI
3/0–250 (2)
95–120
3TA400K 24
3TA400KCW 24
400
Aluminum
Cu/AI
3/0–250 (2)
95–120
4TA400K 56
4TA400KCW 56
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
Copper
Cu
3–350 (1)
35–185
T300K1
—
400
Copper
Cu
250–500 (1)
120–240
T350K 1
—
400
400
400
Copper
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
3/0–250 (2)
2/0–250 (2)
or
2/0–500 (1)
500–750 (1)
95–120
2T400K
3
Copper
Cu
500–750 (1)
3T400KCW 24
4T400K 5
4T400KCW 56
70–120
2TA401K 23
2TA401KCW 23
70–240
3TA401K 24
3TA401KCW 24
70–240
4TA401K 56
4TA401KCW 56
300–400
2TA402K 23
—
24
—
4TA402K 56
—
2T402K 23
—
3T402K 24
—
4T402K 56
—
—
2
2
2
2
23
3T400K 4
3TA402K
400
2T400KCW
2
2
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
225
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Individually packed.
2 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
3 Two-pole kit.
4 Three-pole kit.
5 Four-pole kit.
6 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers.
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-179
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories
and the number of poles in the circuit breaker.
2
2
2
KD Frame Accessories
Reference
Page
Description
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-276
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)
V4-T2-276
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
V4-T2-278
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-278
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B)
V4-T2-278
Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-279
Shunt trip—standard 2
V4-T2-282
Shunt trip—low energy 2
V4-T2-285
2
2
Three-Pole
Left
Right
Left
■
■
❏
❏
■
■
■
❏
■
■
■
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Center
Four-Pole
Right
Left
❏
❏
■
■
■
❏
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
❏
■
■
■
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Center
Right
Neutral
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
2
2
Two-Pole 1
Undervoltage release mechanism 2
V4-T2-290
PowerNet or zone interlock kit (OPTIM 550)
V4-T2-293
■
■
■
■
■
❏
■
2
External Accessories
End cap kit
V4-T2-308
2
Keeper nut
V4-T2-308
Control wire terminal kit
V4-T2-309
2
Terminal adapter
V4-T2-309
Multiwire connectors
V4-T2-310
●
●
●
●
●
2
Rear fed terminals
V4-T2-310
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-311
2
Terminal shields
V4-T2-313
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-313
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
V4-T2-314
●
●
●
■
●
●
●
2
Padlockable handle block
V4-T2-314
●
●
●
■
■
●
●
●
Non-padlockable handle block
●
●
●
■
2
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-315
2
Key Interlock kit
V4-T2-316
❏
V4-T2-317
2
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-317
Electrical (solenoid) operator
V4-T2-318
2
Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-319
Rear connecting studs
V4-T2-321
2
Panelboard connecting straps
V4-T2-322
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-430
2
Handle extension
V4-T2-445
IQ Energy Sentinel
V4-T2-324
2
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit
V4-T2-324
❏
❏
❏
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
❏
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
❏
❏
❏
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
❏
V4-T2-315
■
❏
❏
❏
Cylinder lock
2
Breaker interface module (BIM)
V4-T2-325
Digitrip OPTIMizer
V4-T2-325
2
Auxiliary power module
V4-T2-325
2
2
2
2
❏
■
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
OPTIM System Components Three Poles
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
Notes
Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on KES or OPTIM trip units. Standard internal accessories cannot be mounted in right pole on any K-Frame OPTIM trip unites. Special OPTIM
ground fault and zone interlock accessories are available for field installation in the right pole of K-Frame 550 OPTIM trip units. Factory installed 2a/2b and bell/aux are available for factory
installation. K-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 1050 trip units include aux-bell alarm in the right pole.
1
2
V4-T2-180
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
KD Frame Accessories, continued
Reference
Page
Description
2
Two-Pole 1
Three-Pole
Left
Right
Left
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
Neutral
2
2
Four-Pole
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-116
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Marine/naval application
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
2
2
2
● Accessory available/modification available
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Description
2
Catalog Number
2
2
Electronic portable test kit
MTST230V
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
5108A03H01
External neutral sensor, 400 A
LGFCT400 3
External neutral sensor, 250 A
LGFCT250 3
External neutral sensor, 125 A
LGFCT125
3
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication
TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEWR06 4
2
2
2
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
277
480
600
250 56
DK
2, 3
65
—
—
—
10
KDB
2, 3, 4
65
—
35
25
10
2
Volts DC
KD
2, 3, 4
65
—
35
25
10
HKD, HKDB
2, 3, 4
100
—
65
35
22
KDC 7
2, 3, 4
200
—
100
65
22
CKD
3
65
—
35
25
—
CHKD
3
100
—
65
35
—
2
2
2
2
2
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
380
415
440
500
600
250 56
DK
2, 3
65
—
—
—
—
—
10
KDB
2, 3, 4
65
40
40
—
—
—
10
KD
2, 3, 4
65
40
40
—
—
—
10
Volts DC
HKD, HKDB
2, 3, 4
100
65
65
—
—
—
22
KDC
2, 3, 4
200
100
100
—
—
—
22
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2 MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac.
3 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers.
4 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.
5 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker.
6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
7 Current limiting.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-181
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
310+ Specifications
Trip Unit Type
310+ Adjustability Specifications
Digitrip RMS 310+
2
Breaker Type
2
Frame
K
Frames available
125 A, 250 A, 400 A
2
Continuous current range (A)
55–400 A
Ground fault pickup (A)
2
2
K-Frame
310+ Settings
125A
250 A
400 A
A (=Ir)
55
100
160
B (=Ir)
60
125
200
50–400 A
C (=Ir)
70
150
225
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
35, 65, 100
D (=Ir)
80
160
250
100% rated
Yes
E (=Ir)
90
175
300
F (=Ir)
100
200
315
G (=Ir)
110
225
350
Ir = continuous current or
long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
Protection
2
Ordering options
LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG
2
Interchangeable trip unit
Yes
High load alarm, trip (suffix B20) 1
Yes
2
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1
LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
2
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22)
Ir \ In
H (=Ir=In)
125
250
400
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
7
7
7
7
LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
10
10
10
10
Zone selective interlock (suffix ZG) 1
LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
12
12
12
12
Cause of trip indication
Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW)
15
15
15
15
Thru-cover accessories
No
20
20
20
20
24
24
24
24
Position 1
2
2x
2x
Position 2
3
3x
3x
Position 3
4
4x
4x
Position 4
5
5x
5x
2
Position 5
6
6x
6x
Position 6
7
7x
7x
2
Position 7
8
8x
8x
2
Position 8
10
10x
10x
Position 9
12
12x
12x
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS and LSG)
Fixed
67 @10x
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1
Inst
Position 2
120
2
2
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
2
2
2
2
2
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
2
2
2
2
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
2
2
2
Position 3
300
Position 1
25
50
80
Position 2
37.5
75
120
Position 3
50
100
160
Position 4
75
150
240
Position 5
100
200
320
Position 6
125
250
400
Position 1
Inst
Position 2
120
Position 3
300
625
1000
Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
2
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes)
(310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)
Fixed
312
Notes
1 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2 Not available for KD. Independently adjustable I setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and
i
ALSIG trip units.
2
2
2
V4-T2-182
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Specifications
2
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip OPTIM 550
Digitrip OPTIM 1050
rms sensing
Yes
Yes
2
Frame
K
K
Ampere range
125–400 A
125–400 A
2
Interrupting rating at 480 volts
35, 65, 100 (kA)
35, 65, 100 (kA)
2
Ordering options
LSI, LSI(A), LSIG
LSI(A), LSIG
Fixed rated plug (In)
Yes
Yes
2
Overtemperature trip
Yes
Yes
2
2
Breaker Type
Protection
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable rating plug (In)
No
No
Long delay pickup
0.4–1.0 x (In)
0.4–1.0 x (In)
Long delay time I2t
2–24 seconds
2–24 seconds
Long delay time I4t
1–5 seconds
1–5 seconds
2
Long delay thermal memory
Yes
Yes
High load alarm
0.5–1.0 x Ir
0.5–1.0 x Ir
2
Short delay pickup
150–800% x (Ir)
150–800% x (Ir)
2
Short delay time I2t
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Short delay time flat
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short delay time zone selective interlocking
Yes
1
2
Yes
2
2
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous pickup
200–800% x (In)
200–800% x (In)
Discriminator
Yes
Yes
Instantaneous override
Yes
Yes
2
Ground fault alarm
20–100% x (Is)
20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault pickup
20–100% x (Is)
20–100% x (Is)
2
Ground fault delay I2t
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Ground fault delay flat
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground fault zone selective interlocking
Yes
Ground fault thermal memory
Yes
1
2
Yes
2
2
Yes
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs
Yes
Yes
Cause of trip LEDs
Yes
Yes
Magnitude of trip information
Yes
2
Yes
1
Remote signal contact—ground alarm
Yes
Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact
Optional
Included
2
Digital display
Yes 2
Yes 2
2
Current
Yes
Yes
Power and energy
No
Yes
Power quality—harmonics
No
Yes
Power factor
No
Yes
2
Yes 3
Yes
2
OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet
OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet
2
Yes
System Monitoring
2
Communications
PowerNet
Testing
Testing method
2
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
2
2
Notes
Zone interlock kit.
2 By OPTIMizer/BIM.
3 Eaton’s PowerNet kit.
1
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-183
2.3
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
KD Frame
2
Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2
2, 3
5.50 (149.7)
10.13 (257.3)
4.10 (104.1)
4
7.22 (183.4)
10.13 (257.3)
4.10 (104.1)
2
KD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
2
2
4.31
(109.6)
5.49
(139.4)
Front Cover Cutout
2
0.34 R
(8.7 R)
2
3.75
(95.3)
2
2
Side View
Front View
CL Handle
0.83
(21.0)
0.19 R
(4.8 R)
2
1.64
(41.7)
ON
1.25
(31.8)
10.13
(257.2)
1.31
(33.3)
2
OFF
2.63
(66.7)
2.39
(60.7)
4.78
(121.5)
2
2
2
2
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)
KD Frame
Complete Breaker
Trip Unit 1
Frame Only
Breaker
Type
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
DK
10.0 (4.5)
11.5 (5.2)
—
—
—
—
2
KDB
10.0 (4.5)
11.5 (5.2)
—
—
—
—
KD
10.0 (4.5)
11.5 (5.2)
7.5 (3.4)
8.5 (3.9)
1.5 (0.7)
1.5 (0.7)
2
HKD, HKDB
10.0 (4.5)
11.5 (5.2)
7.5 (3.4)
8.5 (3.9)
1.5 (0.7)
1.5 (0.7)
KDC
10.0 (4.5)
11.5 (5.2)
7.5 (3.4)
8.5 (3.9)
1.5 (0.7)
1.5 (0.7)
2
2
2
Note
1 Weights shown are for thermal-magnetic trip units. Three-pole electronic trip units weigh 2.5 lbs (1.1 kg).
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-184
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Contents
Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-186
V4-T2-188
V4-T2-204
V4-T2-206
V4-T2-210
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes)
Product Description
●
●
●
All Eaton L-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
L-Frame circuit breakers are
available as individual
components (frame, trip
unit, terminals), or factory
assembled complete
breakers
L-Frame circuit breakers
with non-interchangeable
trip units are suitable for
reverse feed use
2
Standards and Certifications
●
CE marked
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-185
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
LD-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1
2
LD 3 600 F
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
LDB
LD
HLD
LDC
CLD
CHLD
CLDC
2
2
2
2
2
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
LT 3 400 T
2
Trip Unit Type
LT = Thermal-magnetic
2
2
2
2
Suffix
C = Copper terminals
F = Frame only (600 A only)
K = High magnetic molded case switch
V = 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
W = Without terminals
X = Load side terminals only
Y = Line side terminals only
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
2
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
Rating
300
350
400
450
500
600
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Trip Unit Rating/Plug
Ampere Rating
300
350
400
450
500
600
Suffix
T = Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal
adjustable magnetic
V = 50 °C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
Note
1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-186
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
LD-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
2
310+ Circuit Breakers
2
LDB 3 600 F T36 B22ZG W
Performance at 480 Vac
LDB
= 35 kAIC
HLDB = 65 kAIC
LDCB = 100 kAIC
CLDB = 35 kAIC, 100% rated
CHLDB = 65 kAIC, 100% rated
CLDCB = 100 kAIC, 100% rated
2
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Terminals
W = No terminals
Amperes
600
Designation
T33
T32
T35
T36
T38
T39
=
=
=
=
=
=
Trip Unit
310+ Electronic LS
310+ Electronic LSI
310+ Electronic LSG 1
310+ Electronic LSIG 1
310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1
Blank =
B20 =
B21 =
B22 =
ZG =
Features
No feature
High load alarm
Ground fault alarm, with trip 1
Ground fault alarm, no trip 1
Zone selective interlocking
F
2
2
2
2
2
2
310+ Electronic Trip Units 2
2
LES 3 600 LSIG B22ZG
2
Trip Unit Type
LES
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Amperes
600
LS
=
LSI =
LSG =
LSIG =
ALSI =
ALSIG =
Trip Unit
310+ Electronic LS
310+ Electronic LSI
310+ Electronic LSG 1
310+ Electronic LSIG 1
310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1
Blank =
B20 =
B21 =
B22 =
ZG =
Features
No feature
High load alarm
Ground fault alarm, with trip 1
Ground fault alarm, no trip 1
Zone selective interlocking
2
2
OPTIM Circuit Breakers
2
LD 3 125 T5 7 W
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
2
2
LD-Frame with OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Technology
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
LD
HLD
LDC
CLD
CHLD
CLDC
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere Rating
125 (Available on Model 1050 only)
250 (Available on Model 1050 only)
400
600
2
Trip Type
2 = LSI (550 only)
6 = LSIG
7 = LSIA
2
Suffix
W = Without terminals
2
2
Trip Model
T5 = Model 550
T10 = Model 1050
2
2
Notes
1 Not available in four-pole configurations.
2 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-187
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Product Selection
2
Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Standard Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting of
Frame, Trip Unit and
Terminals
Factory Assembled
Factory Assembled Circuit
Circuit Consisting of Frame, Consisting of Frame,
Trip Unit and Terminals
Trip Unit and Terminals
For Use with Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
See Page V4-T2-203 for
Optional Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300
LD2300
HLD2300
LDC2300
LT2300T
TA602LD 2
2
350
LD2350
HLD2350
LDC2350
LT2350T
TA602LD 2
400
LD2400
HLD2400
LDC2400
LT2400T
TA602LD 2
2
450
LD2450
HLD2450
LDC2450
LT2450T
TA602LD 2
500
LD2500
HLD2500
LDC2500
LT2500T
TA602LD 2
2
600
LD2600
HLD2600
LDC2600
LT2600T
2TA603LDK 3
2
300
LD3300
HLD3300
LDC3300
LT3300T
TA602LD 2
2
350
LD3350
HLD3350
LDC3350
LT3350T
TA602LD 2
400
LD3400
HLD3400
LDC3400
LT3400T
TA602LD 2
2
450
LD3450
HLD3450
LDC3450
LT3450T
TA602LD 2
500
LD3500
HLD3500
LDC3500
LT3500T
TA602LD 2
2
600
LD3600
HLD3600
LDC3600
LT3600T
3TA603LDK 3
2
300
LD4300
HLD4300
LDC4300
LT4300T
TA602LD 2
2
350
LD4350
HLD4350
LDC4350
LT4350T
TA602LD 2
400
LD4400
HLD4400
LDC4400
LT4400T
TA602LD 2
2
450
LD4450
HLD4450
LDC4450
LT4450T
TA602LD 2
500
LD4500
HLD4500
LDC4500
LT4500T
TA602LD 2
600
LD4600
HLD4600
LDC4600
LT4600T
4TA603LDK 3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C 1
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
Standard Terminals Only
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
4
Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Frame Only
Standard Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Two-Pole
HLD2600F
LDC2600F
2
Three-Pole
HLD3600F
LDC3600F
HLD4600F
LDC4600F
2
2
2
2
2
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
LD2600F
LD3600F
Four-Pole
LD4600F
Notes
1 Magnetic trip range 5–10 times continuous ampere rating.
2 Individually packed.
3 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
4 Neutral is in right pole.
2
2
V4-T2-188
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.
2
Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units
2
Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
35 kAIC at
480 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Ultra High
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting
600 Vac Rated
100 kAIC at
480 Vac
Catalog Number
Standard
LS
Optional
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Adjustable
Short Time
Pickup with I2t
Short Delay
Ramp
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with
I2t Short Delay
and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Ground Fault
Protection
LES3600LSI
LES3600LSG
LES3600LSIG
Catalog Number
2
2
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Catalog Number Information
Three-Pole
600
LD3600F
HLD3600F
LDC3600F
LES3600LS
LGFCT600
See Page
V4-T2-180
Four-Pole 4
600
LD4600F
HLD4600F
LDC4600F
LES4600LS
LES4600LSI
—
—
—
See Page
V4-T2-180
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I2t Short
Delay Ramp
Adjustable Short Time
Independently Adjustable Pickup with I2t Short
Delay and Ground Fault
Short Time Pickup and
Protection
Delay
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Number
of Poles
600
3
LDB3600FT33W
LDB3600FT32W
LDB3600FT35W
LDB3600FT36W
600
3
HLDB3600FT33W
HLDB3600FT32W
HLDB3600FT35W
HLDB3600FT36W
600
3
LDCB3600FT33W
LDCB3600FT32W
LDCB3600FT35W
LDCB3600FT36W
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Neutral CT for
Ground Fault Protection
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Catalog Number Information
LGFCT600
See Page
V4-T2-180
100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and
terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.
100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with 310+ Interchangeable Trip Units
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac
Rated 35 kAIC at
480 Vac
Optional
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Ultra High
Interrupting
High Interrupting Capacity Current
Capacity 600 Vac Limiting 600 Vac
Rated 65 kAIC at Rated 100 kAIC
480 Vac
at 480 Vac
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with
Adjustable Short Independently
Time Pickup with Adjustable Short I2t Short Delay
2
Time Pickup and and Ground Fault
I t Short Delay
Protection
Ramp
Delay
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Ground Fault
Neutral CT for
Protection
LSG and LSIG 23 Terminal
Catalog Number Information
CHLD3600F
LES3600LS
LES3600LSIG
Catalog Number
Three-Pole
600
CLD3600F
CLDC3600F
LES3600LSI
LES3600LSG
LGFCT600
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only
Standard
LS
2
2
LSIG
Catalog Number
2
2
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1
LSG
2
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Less Terminals
Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Optional
LSI
2
2
Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-182.
Standard
LS
2
See Page
V4-T2-180
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units.
4 Neutral is in right pole.
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-189
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1
2
600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker
Without Line and
Load Terminals
With Standard Line and
Load Terminals Only
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300
LDB2300W
LDB2300
2
350
LDB2350W
LDB2350
400
LDB2400W
LDB2400
2
450
LDB2450W
LDB2450
2
500
LDB2500W
LDB2500
600
LDB2600W
LDB2600
2
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case
switches are used as
compact switches in
applications requiring high
current switching capabilities.
Molded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the
high instantaneous automatic
type. Molded case switches
are listed in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489.
Two-Pole
Molded Case Switches
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Standard Terminals Only
Circuit Breaker Only
without Line and Load
Terminals
See Page V4-T2-203 for
Optional Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Three-Pole
300
LDB3300W
LDB3300
600
LD2600WK
2TA603LDK
2
350
LDB3350W
LDB3350
600
LDB2600WK 1
2TA603LDK
400
LDB3400W
LDB3400
600
HLD2600WK
2TA603LDK
2
450
LDB3450W
LDB3450
Three-Pole
2
500
LDB3500W
LDB3500
600
LD3600WK
3TA603LDK
600
LDB3600W
LDB3600
600
LDB3600WK 1
3TA603LDK
2
600
HLD3600WK
3TA603LDK
2
600
LD4600WK
4TA603LDK
2
600
LDB4600WK 1
4TA603LDK
600
HLD4600WK
4TA603LDK
2
Notes
1 Factory sealed—suitable for reverse feed application.
2
Molded case switch will trip above 6000 amperes.
Two-Pole
Four-Pole
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-190
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
2
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
2
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
LD3125T57W
—
ORPL125A070
—
ORPL125A090
—
ORPL125A100
—
ORPL125A110
—
ORPL125A125
—
ORPL025A125
—
ORPL025A150
—
ORPL025A175
—
ORPL025A200
—
ORPL025A225
—
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
250
ORPL40A250
300
ORPL40A300
350
ORPL40A350
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
Fixed Rating Plug
2
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
400
600
LD3125T52W
LD3250T52W
LD3400T52W
LD3600T52W
LD3125T56W
LD3250T56W
LD3400T56W
LD3600T56W
LD3250T57W
LD3400T57W
LD3600T57W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-191
2.3
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
2
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
70
ORPL125A070
2
90
ORPL125A090
2
100
ORPL125A100
110
ORPL125A110
2
125
250
HLD3125T52W
HLD3250T52W
HLD3125T56W
HLD3250T56W
HLD3125T57W
HLD3250T57W
2
2
2
125
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL025A125
150
ORPL025A150
175
ORPL025A175
200
ORPL025A200
225
ORPL025A225
250
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
2
250
ORPL40A250
300
ORPL40A300
2
350
ORPL40A350
2
2
400
600
HLD3400T52W
HLD3600T52W
HLD3400T56W
HLD3600T56W
HLD3400T57W
HLD3600T57W
2
2
2
2
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-192
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
2
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
—
ORPL125A070
—
ORPL125A090
—
ORPL125A100
—
ORPL125A110
—
ORPL125A125
—
ORPL025A125
—
ORPL025A150
—
ORPL025A175
—
ORPL025A200
—
ORPL025A225
—
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
250
ORPL40A250
300
ORPL40A300
350
ORPL40A350
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
400
600
LDC3125T52W
LDC3250T52W
LDC3400T52W
LDC3600T52W
LDC3125T56W
LDC3250T56W
LDC3400T56W
LDC3600T56W
LDC3125T57W
LDC3250T57W
LDC3400T57W
LDC3600T57W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-193
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
2
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPL125A070
90
ORPL125A090
2
100
ORPL125A100
2
110
ORPL125A110
125
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL025A125
150
ORPL025A150
175
ORPL025A175
200
ORPL025A200
225
ORPL025A225
250
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
2
225
ORPL40A225
250
ORPL40A250
2
300
ORPL40A300
350
ORPL40A350
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
2
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
2
600
ORPL60A600
2
2
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
LD3125T106W
LD3250T106W
LD3125T107W
LD3250T107W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
400
600
LD3400T106W
LD3600T106W
LD3400T107W
LD3600T107W
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-194
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
2
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPL125A070
90
ORPL125A090
100
ORPL125A100
110
ORPL125A110
125
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL025A125
150
ORPL025A150
175
ORPL025A175
200
ORPL025A200
225
ORPL025A225
250
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
250
ORPL40A250
300
ORPL40A300
350
ORPL40A350
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
400
600
HLD3125T106W
HLD3250T106W
HLD3400T106W
HLD3600T106W
HLD3125T107W
HLD3250T107W
HLD3400T107W
HLD3600T107W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-195
2.3
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPL125A070
2
90
ORPL125A090
2
100
ORPL125A100
110
ORPL125A110
125
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL025A125
150
ORPL025A150
175
ORPL025A175
200
ORPL025A200
225
ORPL025A225
250
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
2
250
ORPL40A250
300
ORPL40A300
2
350
ORPL40A350
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
2
2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
LDC3125T106W
LDC3250T106W
LDC3125T107W
LDC3250T107W
2
2
2
2
2
400
600
LDC3400T106W
LDC3600T106W
LDC3400T107W
LDC3600T107W
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-196
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
2
2
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
2
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
CLD3125T57W
70
ORPL125A070
90
ORPL125A090
100
ORPL125A100
110
ORPL125A110
125
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL025A125
150
ORPL025A150
175
ORPL025A175
200
ORPL025A200
225
ORPL025A225
250
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
250
ORPL40A250
300
ORPL40A300
350
ORPL40A350
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
Fixed Rating Plug
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
400
600
CLD3125T52W
CLD3250T52W
CLD3400T52W
CLD3600T52W
CLD3125T56W
CLD3250T56W
CLD3400T56W
CLD3600T56W
CLD3250T57W
CLD3400T57W
CLD3600T57W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-197
2.3
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
CHLD3125T57W
70
ORPL125A070
2
90
ORPL125A090
2
100
ORPL125A100
110
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL025A125
150
ORPL025A150
175
ORPL025A175
200
ORPL025A200
225
ORPL025A225
250
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
2
250
ORPL40A250
350
ORPL40A350
2
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
2
2
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
CHLD3125T52W
CHLD3250T52W
CHLD3125T56W
CHLD3250T56W
CHLD3250T57W
2
2
2
2
2
400
600
CHLD3400T52W
CHLD3600T52W
CHLD3400T56W
CHLD3600T56W
CHLD3400T57W
CHLD3600T57W
2
2
2
2
Fixed Rating Plug
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-198
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPL125A070
90
ORPL125A090
100
ORPL125A100
110
ORPL125A110
125
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL025A125
150
ORPL025A150
175
ORPL025A175
200
ORPL025A200
225
ORPL025A225
250
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
250
ORPL40A250
300
ORPL40A300
350
ORPL40A350
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
400
600
CLDC3125T52W
CLDC3250T52W
CLDC3400T52W
CLDC3600T52W
CLDC3125T56W
CLDC3250T56W
CLDC3400T56W
CLDC3600T56W
CLDC3125T57W
CLDC3250T57W
CLDC3400T57W
CLDC3600T57W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-199
2.3
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPL125A070
2
90
ORPL125A090
2
100
ORPL125A100
110
ORPL125A110
125
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL025A125
150
ORPL025A150
175
ORPL025A175
200
ORPL025A200
225
ORPL025A225
250
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
2
250
ORPL40A250
300
ORPL40A300
2
350
ORPL40A350
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
2
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
CLD3125T106W
CLD3250T106W
CLD3125T107W
CLD3250T107W
2
2
2
2
2
400
600
CLD3400T106W
CLD3600T106W
CLD3400T107W
CLD3600T107W
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-200
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
L
S
I
G
A
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
2
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPL125A070
90
ORPL125A090
100
ORPL125A100
110
ORPL125A110
125
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL025A125
150
ORPL025A150
175
ORPL025A175
200
ORPL025A200
225
ORPL025A225
250
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
250
ORPL40A250
300
ORPL40A300
350
ORPL40A350
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
2
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
400
600
CHLD3125T106W
CHLD3250T106W
CHLD3400T106W
CHLD3600T106W
CHLD3125T107W
CHLD3250T107W
CHLD3400T107W
CHLD3600T107W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-201
2.3
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug, continued
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
70
ORPL125A070
2
90
ORPL125A090
2
100
ORPL125A100
110
ORPL125A110
2
2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
125
250
CLDC3125T106W
CLDC3250T106W
CLDC3125T107W
CLDC3250T107W
2
2
2
125
ORPL125A125
125
ORPL025A125
150
ORPL025A150
175
ORPL025A175
200
ORPL025A200
225
ORPL025A225
250
ORPL025A250
200
ORPL40A200
225
ORPL40A225
2
250
ORPL40A250
300
ORPL40A300
2
350
ORPL40A350
2
2
400
600
CLDC3400T106W
CLDC3600T106W
CLDC3400T107W
CLDC3600T107W
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-202
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
400
ORPL40A400
300
ORPL60A300
350
ORPL60A350
400
ORPL60A400
500
ORPL60A500
600
ORPL60A600
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Line and Load Terminals
Eaton’s line and load
terminals provide wire
connecting capabilities for
specific ranges of continuous
current ratings and wire
types. All terminals comply
with Underwriters
Laboratories Standards UL
486A and UL 486B and CSA
Standard C22.2 No. 65M.
Unless otherwise specified,
2
L-Frame circuit breaker line
and load terminals are
shipped separately for field
installation.
The wire connecting terminal
is secured with two panhead, slotted screws and
lockwashers that can be
checked for the correct
torque loading or retightened
from the front of the circuit
breaker before installation of
the conductors. (Applies to all
styles.) The circuit breaker
line/load terminal conductors
are positioned in the
conducting holes in the wire
connecting terminal and are
secured with recessed socket
screws that are tightened to
the correct torque loading
from the front of the circuit
breaker.
Ordering Information
L-Frame circuit breakers use
Cu/AI terminals as standard.
When optional copper
terminals are required, order
by catalog Number. Specify if
factory installation is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Terminals
2
TA401LD or TA603LD
Terminal (Step-Type
Terminal Requires
Terminal Cover and
Warning Label.
See Inset.)
Pan-Head Screws
and Lockwashers
TA450LD or TA602LD or
T602LD Terminal
2
Pan-Head Screws and
Lockwashers (Installed
before Cable Clamping
Screws)
2
2
Terminal Cover
2
2
2
2
Warning Label
2
Retainer
2
Screws
Circuit Breaker
Line Terminal Cover
2
2
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Terminals with
Control Wire Termination
Terminal
AWG Wire
Range/Number
of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Poles
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
2
2
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
2
400
Aluminum
Cu/AI
4/0–600 (1)
120–300
Two-pole kit 1
2TA401LDK
—
400
Aluminum
Cu/AI
4/0–600 (1)
120–300
Three-pole kit 1
3TA401LDK
—
400
Aluminum
Cu/AI
4/0–600 (1)
120–300
Four-pole kit 1
4TA401LDK
—
450
Aluminum
Cu/AI
4–4/0 (2)
25–95
2
TA450LD
—
500
Aluminum
Cu/AI
3/0–350 (2)
95–150
2
TA602LD
TA602LDCW
600
Aluminum
Cu/AI
400–500 (2)
185–240
Two-pole kit 1
2TA603LDK
2TA603LDKCW
600
Aluminum
Cu/AI
400–500 (2)
185–240
Three-pole kit 1
3TA603LDK
3TA603LDKCW
600
Aluminum
Cu/AI
400–500 (2)
185–240
Four-pole kit 1
4TA603LDK
4TA603LDKCW
2
120–250
2
T602LD
T602LDCW
2
2
2
2
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
600
Copper
Cu
250–350 (2)
2
Notes
1 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
2 Individually packed.
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-203
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
2
2
LD Frame Accessories
Reference
Page
Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Left
Right
Left
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-276
■
■
■
■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)
V4-T2-276
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
V4-T2-278
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-278
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B)
V4-T2-278
■
■
■
■
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-280
■
■
■
■
2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-280
■
■
■
■
Shunt trip—standard 4
V4-T2-282
■
■
■
■
Shunt trip—low energy 4
V4-T2-285
■
■
■
■
Undervoltage release mechanism 4
V4-T2-291
■
■
■
■
2
Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550)
V4-T2-293
2
End cap kit
V4-T2-308
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Control wire terminal kit
V4-T2-309
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-311
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Terminal shields
V4-T2-313
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-313
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Non-padlockable handle block
V4-T2-314
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-315
❏
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-316
❏
2
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-317
●
●
●
2
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-317
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Electrical (motor) operator
V4-T2-318
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-320
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rear connecting studs
V4-T2-321
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Panelboard connecting straps
V4-T2-322
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-430
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Handle extension
V4-T2-445
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit
V4-T2-324
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Description
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Center
Center
Right
Neutral 2
3
■
External Accessories
■
■
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
Notes
Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2 Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations.
3 OPTIM model 1050 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories.
4 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units. Standard non-tripping internal accessories can be mounted in the left or right poles of LES and 550 OPTIM trip units.
1
2
2
2
V4-T2-204
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
LD Frame Accessories, continued
Description
Reference
Page
Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole
Left
Center
Right
2
Four-Pole
Left
Center
Right
Neutral
2
OPTIM System Components Three Poles
Ground fault alarm unit
V4-T2-324
Potential transformer module
V4-T2-324
Breaker interface module (BIM)
V4-T2-325
Digitrip OPTIMizer
V4-T2-325
Auxiliary power module
V4-T2-325
2
2
2
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special calibration
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-116
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Marine/naval application
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
2
2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
2
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Description
Catalog Number
Electronic portable test kit
MTST230V 3
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
5108A03H01
External neutral sensor
LGFCT600 4
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication
TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEWR06
2
2
2
2
2
5
Notes
1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2 Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations.
3 MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac.
4 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers.
5 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-205
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
2
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
277
480
600
125
250 23
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA rms Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts DC
LDB
2, 3
65
—
35
25
—
22
LD
2, 3, 4
65
—
35
25
—
22
CLD 4
2, 3, 4
65
—
35
25
—
—
2
HLD, HLDB
2, 3, 4
100
—
65
35
—
25
CHLD 4
2, 3, 4
100
—
65
35
—
—
2
LDC, LDCB 5
2, 3, 4
200
—
100
50
—
30
CLDC 45
2, 3, 4
200
—
100
50
—
—
2
2
2
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
1
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
Volts DC
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
240
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
Icu
Ics
LDB
2, 3
85
85
45
45
20
10
20
10
2
LD
2, 3, 4
85
85
45
45
20
10
20
10
4
2, 3, 4
85
85
45
45
20
10
—
—
2
HLD, HLDB
2, 3, 4
100
100
70
70
25
13
20
10
2
CHLD 4
2, 3, 4
100
100
70
70
25
13
—
—
LDC, LDCB
2, 3, 4
200
100
100
75
35
18
20
10
CLDC 4
2, 3, 4
200
100
100
75
35
18
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
CLD
415
250 23
690
Notes
1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2 L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum.
3 Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
4 100% rated breakers.
5 Current limiting.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-206
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
310+ Specifications
Description
Trip Unit Type
310+ Adjustability Specifications
Digitrip RMS 310+
Breaker Type
Frame designation
LD Frame
Specification
310+ settings
600 A
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
LD
Frames available
600 A
Continuous current range (A)
250–600 A
Ground fault pickup (A)
120–600 A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
35, 65, 100
100% rated
Description
Specification
Yes
Protection
Ordering options
LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
250
B
300
C
315
D
350
E
400
F
450
G
500
H (= In)
600
2
2
4
4
2
2
Ir
A
2
2
2
2
2
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
(or Maintenance Mode)
Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG
Interchangeable trip unit
Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 1
Yes
7
7
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1
LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
10
10
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 1
LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
12
12
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)
LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
15
15
Cause of trip indication
Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW)
20
20
Thru-cover accessories
No
24
24
Position 1
2x
Position 2
3x
Position 3
4x
Position 4
5x
Position 5
6x
Position 6
7x
Position 7
8x
Position 8
8x
Position 9
8x
tsd
(LS and LSG)
Fixed
67 @10x
2
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1
Inst
Position 2
120
2
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
= short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Position 3
300
Position 1
120
Position 2
180
Position 3
240
Position 4
360
Position 5
480
Position 6
600
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1
Inst
Position 2
120
Position 3
300
2
Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
2
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes)
(310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)
Fixed
1500
2
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2 Not available for LD. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI and
ALSIG trip units.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-207
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM Specifications
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip OPTIM 550
Digitrip OPTIM 1050
2
rms sensing
Yes
Yes
2
Frame
L
L
2
Ampere range
200–600 A
200–600 A
Interrupting rating at 480 volts
35, 65, 100 (kA)
35, 65, 100 (kA)
2
Protection
LSI, LSI(A), LSIG
LSI(A), LSIG
2
Breaker Type
Ordering options
Fixed rated plug (In)
Yes
Yes
2
Overtemperature trip
Yes
Yes
2
Adjustable rating plug (In)
No
No
Long delay pickup
0.4–1.0 x (In)
0.4–1.0 x (In)
2
Long delay time I2t
2–24 seconds
2–24 seconds
2
Long delay time I4t
1–5 seconds
1–5 seconds
Long delay thermal memory
Yes
Yes
High load alarm
0.5–1.0 x Ir
0.5–1.0 x Ir
Long Delay Protection (L)
2
Short Delay Protection (S)
2
Short delay pickup
150–800% x (Ir)
150–800% x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Short delay time flat
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Short delay time zone selective interlocking
Yes 1
Yes
200–800% x (In)
200–800% x (In)
2
2
2
2
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous pickup
Discriminator
Yes
Yes
Instantaneous override
Yes
Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
2
Ground fault alarm
20–100% x (Is)
20–100% x (Is)
2
Ground fault pickup
20–100% x (Is)
20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault delay I2t
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
2
Ground fault delay flat
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking
Yes 1
Yes
2
Ground fault thermal memory
Yes
Yes
2
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
2
2
Note
Zone interlock kit.
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-208
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Digitrip OPTIM Specifications, continued
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip OPTIM 550
Digitrip OPTIM 1050
Status LEDs
Yes
Yes
Cause of trip LEDs
Yes
Yes
Magnitude of trip information
Yes
Yes
Remote signal contact—ground alarm
Yes 1
Yes
Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact
Optional
Included
Digital display
Yes 2
Yes 2
Current
Yes
Yes
2
2
System Diagnostics
2
2
2
System Monitoring
Power and energy
No
Yes
Power quality—harmonics
No
Yes
Power factor
No
Yes
Yes 3
Yes
OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet
OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet
2
2
2
2
Communications
PowerNet
2
Testing
Testing method
2
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
2
2
Notes
1 Zone interlock kit.
2 By OPTIMizer/BIM.
3 Eaton’s PowerNet kit.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-209
2.3
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
LD Frame
2
Number of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2, 3
8.25 (209.6)
10.75 (273.1)
4.06 (103.1)
2
4
11.00 (279.4)
10.75 (273.1)
4.06 (103.1)
2
LD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
2
Side View
2
3.81
(96.8)
CL Handle
2
CL Breaker
3.44
(87.3)
1.72
(43.7)
2
2
Front View
Front Cover Cutout
2
3.28
(83.3)
0.25 (6.4) R
2
1.33
(33.7)2.29
(58.2)
10.75
(273.1)
1.50
(38.1)
3.64
(92.5)
2
8.21
(208.6)
0.19 R
(4.8) R
7.28
(184.9)
2
2
8.25
(209.6)
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)
2
LD Frame
2
Breaker
Type
2
LD, HLD, LDC
18 (8.2)
20 (9.1)
25 (11.3)
14 (6.4)
15 (6.8)
20 (9.1)
3 (1.4)
4 (1.8)
5 (2.3)
LDB
18 (8.2)
20 (9.1)
25 (11.3)
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
Complete Breaker
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Frame Only
Four-Pole
Two-Pole
Trip Unit
Three-Pole
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-210
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Four-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Contents
Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-212
V4-T2-213
V4-T2-218
V4-T2-219
V4-T2-221
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes)
Product Description
●
●
●
All Eaton M-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
MDL-Frame circuit
breakers are available as
individual components
(frame, trip unit, terminals),
or factory assembled
complete breakers
MDLB, HMDLB-Frame
circuit breakers with noninterchangeable trip units
are suitable for reverse
feed use
2
Standards and Certifications
●
CE marked
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-211
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
MDL Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology
Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1
2
MDL 3 800 F
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
MDL, MDLB
HMDL, HMDLB
2
2
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
2
2
Trip Unit Type
MT
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
2
2
2
2
Suffix
Frame only (800 A only)
High magnetic molded case switch
50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
Without terminals
Load side terminals only
Line side terminals only
Trip Unit Rating/
Plug Ampere Rating
500
300 1
600
350 1
700
400
800
450
T
V
Suffix
= Thermal-magnetic
= 50 °C (thermal-magnetic trip units only)
MDL Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
310+ Circuit Breaker
2
2
=
=
=
=
=
=
MT 3 800 T
2
2
F
K
V
W
X
Y
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
2
2
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere Rating
500
300 1
600
350 1
700
400
800
450
MDLB 3 800 F T36 B21 W
Performance at 480 Vac
MDLB = 50 kAIC
HMDLB = 65 kAIC
CMDLB = 50 kAIC, 100% rated
CHMDLB = 65 kAIC, 100% rated
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Terminals
W = No terminals
Amperes
800
2
2
Designation
F
T33
T32
T35
T36
T38
T39
=
=
=
=
=
=
Trip Unit
310+ Electronic LS
310+ Electronic LSI
310+ Electronic LSG
310+ Electronic LSIG
310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode
Blank =
B20 =
B21 =
B22 =
ZG =
Features
No feature
High load alarm
Ground fault alarm, with trip
Ground fault alarm, no trip
Zone selective interlocking
Blank =
B20 =
B21 =
B22 =
ZG =
Features
No feature
High load alarm
Ground fault alarm, with trip
Ground fault alarm, no trip
Zone selective interlocking
2
2
310+ Electronic Trip Unit 1
MES 3 800 ALSIG B21
2
2
2
Trip Unit Type
MES
2
2
2
2
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Amperes
800
LS
=
LSI =
LSG =
LSIG =
ALSI =
ALSIG =
Trip Unit
310+ Electronic LS
310+ Electronic LSI
310+ Electronic LSG
310+ Electronic LSIG
310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode
310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode
Note
1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., MDL3800F, HMDL3800F, etc.
V4-T2-212
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
2
Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
For Use with Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
2
2
Standard
Terminals
Only 1
2
Frame Only
Magnetic Trip Range
is 5–10 Up Through
600 A; 4–8 on 700 and
800 A x Continuous
Ampere Rating
See Page
V4-T2-217 for
Optional Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
HMDL2300
HMDL2800F
MT2300T
TA700MA1
HMDL2350
MT2350T
TA700MA1
2
MDL2400
HMDL2400
MT2400T
TA700MA1
MDL2450
HMDL2450
MT2450T
TA700MA1
500
MDL2500
HMDL2500
MT2500T
TA700MA1
600
MDL2600
HMDL2600
MT2600T
TA700MA1
700
MDL2700
HMDL2700
MT2700T
TA700MA1
800
MDL2800
HMDL2800
MT2800T
TA800MA2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals
Frame Only
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300
MDL2300
MDL2800F
350
MDL2350
400
450
2
2
2
2
2
Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
For Use with Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
2
Frame Only
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals
Frame Only
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
MDL3800F
HMDL3300
HMDL3800F
MT3300T
TA700MA1
HMDL3350
MT3400T
TA700MA1
HMDL3400
MT3400T
TA700MA1
MDL3450
HMDL3450
MT3450T
TA700MA1
500
MDL3500
HMDL3500
MT3500T
TA700MA1
600
MDL3600
HMDL3600
MT3600T
TA700MA1
700
MDL3700
HMDL3700
MT3700T
TA700MA1
800
MDL3800
HMDL3800
MT3800T
TA800MA2
Factory Assembled
Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit
and Terminals
Catalog
Number
300
MDL3300
350
MDL3350
400
MDL3400
450
2
Standard
Terminals
Only 1
Magnetic Trip Range
is 5–10 Up Through
600 A; 4–8 on 700 and
800 A x Continuous
Ampere Rating
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
See Page
V4-T2-217 for
Optional Terminals
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Note
1 Two terminals are required per pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-213
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Two-Pole 1
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Standard Terminals Only 2
Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
See Page V4-T2-217 for
Optional Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300
MDLB2300
HMDLB2300
TA700MA1
2
350
MDLB2350
HMDLB2350
TA700MA1
400
MDLB2400
HMDLB2400
TA700MA1
2
450
MDLB2450
HMDLB2450
TA700MA1
500
MDLB2500
HMDLB2500
TA700MA1
2
600
MDLB2600
HMDLB2600
TA700MA1
2
700
MDLB2700
HMDLB2700
TA700MA1
800
MDLB2800
HMDLB2800
TA800MA2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units—Three-Pole 1
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
Standard Terminals Only 2
Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting
of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals
See Page V4-T2-217 for
Optional Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
300
MDLB3300
HMDLB3300
TA700MA1
2
350
MDLB3350
HMDLB3350
TA700MA1
400
MDLB3400
HMDLB3400
TA700MA1
2
450
MDLB3450
HMDLB3450
TA700MA1
500
MDLB3500
HMDLB3500
TA700MA1
2
600
MDLB3600
HMDLB3600
TA700MA1
700
MDLB3700
HMDLB3700
TA700MA1
2
800
MDLB3800
HMDLB3800
TA800MA2
2
Notes
1 Factory sealed for reverse feed application.
2 Two terminals are required per pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-214
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as Individual Components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals.
See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-220.
2
2
Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Standard
LS
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac
Rated 50 kAIC at
480 Vac
High Interrupting
Capacity 600 Vac Adjustable Short
Rated 65 kAIC at Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay Ramp
480 Vac
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog Number
800
MDL3800F
HMDL3800F
MES3800LS
Optional
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Delay
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Ground Fault
Protection
2
2
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23
Catalog Number
MES3800LSI
MES3800LSG
MES3800LSIG
Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units
LGFCT600
Terminal
Information
See Page
V4-T2-218
LS
LSI
LSG
Adjustable Short Time Pickup Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and Delay
with I2t Short Delay Ramp
Adjustable Short Time Pickup Independently Adjustable
with I2t Short Delay and
Short Time Pickup and Ground Neutral CT for
Ground Fault Protection
Fault Protection
LSG and LSIG 23
Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
MDLB3800FT33W
MDLB3800FT32W
HMDLB3800FT33W
HMDLB3800FT32W
LGFCT600
2
HMDLB3800FT35W
HMDLB3800FT36W
LGFCT600
2
100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units—Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
800
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
50 kAIC at
480 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC at
480 Vac
Options
LSI
Independently
Adjustable Short
Adjustable Short
2
Time Pickup with I t Time Pickup and
Short Delay Ramp Delay
LSG
LSIG
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup with I2t
Short Delay and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Time Pickup and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalog Number
CMDL3800F
CHMDL3800F
MES3800LS
MES3800LSI
MES3800LSG
MES3800LSIG
2
2
2
2
Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1
Standard
LS
2
MDLB3800FT36W
100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at the 75 °C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and
terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T2-220.
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
MDLB3800FT35W
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
2
2
LSIG
Catalog Number
800
2
2
4
Factory-Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
2
2
Neutral CT for
LSG and LSIG 23
Catalog Number
Terminal
Information
LGFCT600
See Page V4-T2-218
2
2
2
Notes
1 For AC use only.
2 Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired.
3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units or breakers.
4 Factory sealed, suitable for reverse feed application. CMDLB and CHMDLB are also available.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-215
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Series C
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s molded case
switches are used as
compact switches in
applications requiring high
current switching capabilities.
Molded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the
high instantaneous automatic
type. Molded case switches
are listed in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489.
Molded Case Switches
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker Only without
Line and Load Terminals
Catalog
Number
Two-Pole
800
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
MDL2800WK
MDLB2800WK 1
HMDL2800WK
Three-Pole
800
MDL3800WK
MDLB3800WK 1
HMDL3800WK
Notes
1 MDLB and HMDLB are suitable for reverse feed applications.
Molded case switch may trip above 6000 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-216
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Line and Load Terminals
M-Frame circuit breakers use
Cu/AI terminals as standard.
When optional copper or Cu/
AI terminals are required,
order by catalog number.
Specify if factory installation
is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
TA700MA1
TA800MA2
TA801MA
2
2
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire
Range/No.
Conductors
Terminal
Terminals with Control
Wire Termination
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
TA700MA1CWT
2
2
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
700
Aluminum
Cu/AI
1–500 kcmil (2)
TA700MA1
800 std.
Aluminum
Cu/AI
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
TA800MA2
TA800MA2CWT
800
Aluminum
Cu/AI
500–750 kcmil (2)
TA801MA
TA801MACWT
2
2
2
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
600
Copper
Cu
2/0–500 kcmil (2)
T600MA1
—
800
Copper
Cu
3/0–300 kcmil (3)
T800MA1
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-217
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the
circuit breaker.
2
2
MD Frame Accessories
Two-Pole 1
Three-Pole
Reference
Page
Left
Right
Left
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-276
■
■
■
■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)
V4-T2-276
■
■
■
■
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
V4-T2-278
■
■
■
■
2
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-278
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B)
V4-T2-278
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-280
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-280
■
■
■
■
2
Shunt trip—standard 2
V4-T2-283
■
■
■
■
2
Shunt trip—low energy 2
V4-T2-285
■
■
■
■
Undervoltage release mechanism 2
V4-T2-291
■
■
■
■
Rear fed terminals
V4-T2-310
●
●
●
2
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-311
●
2
Terminal shields
V4-T2-313
●
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-313
●
Non-padlockable handle block
V4-T2-314
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-315
❏
❏
2
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-316
❏
❏
2
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-317
●
●
●
●
●
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-317
●
●
●
●
●
Electrical (motor) operator
V4-T2-318
●
●
●
●
●
Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-320
●
●
●
●
●
2
Rear connecting studs
V4-T2-321
●
●
●
●
●
2
Panelboard connecting straps
V4-T2-322
●
●
●
●
●
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-430
●
●
●
●
●
Handle extension
V4-T2-445
●
●
●
●
●
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit
V4-T2-324
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Description
Center
Right
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
External Accessories
●
●
■
❏
❏
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
2
Special calibration
—
●
●
●
●
●
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-116
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
Marine/naval application
—
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
2
2
2
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
Notes
Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole.
2 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units.
1
2
2
V4-T2-218
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories
Description
Catalog Number
Electronic portable test kit
MTST230V 1
Trip unit tamper protection wire seal
5108A03H01
External neutral sensor
LGFCT600 2
Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication
TRIP-LED
Breaker-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEW
Remote-mount ammeter module
DIGIVIEWR06 3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
240
480
600
250
MDL, MDLB
2, 3
65
50
25
22
CMDL
2, 3
65
50
25
—
2
Volts DC 56
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
HMDL, HMDLB
2, 3
100
65
35
25
CHMDL
2, 3
100
65
35
—
2
2
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 4
2
Interrupting Capacity rms (kA Symmetrical Amperes) I CU ≠ I CS
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
415
690
MDL, MDLB
2, 3
65/65
50/50
20/10
20/10
CMDL
2, 3
65/65
50/50
20/10
—
HMDL, HMDLB
2, 3
100/100
70/50
25/13
20/10
CHMDL
2, 3
100/100
70/50
25/13
—
Volts DC 56
2
250
2
2
2
Notes
1 MTST230V applies to 100–230 Vac.
2 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers.
3 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated.
4 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
5 Two-pole or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated.
6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds at 22 kA.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-219
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
310+ Specifications
Description
310+ Adjustability Specifications
MDL Frame
Specification
Specification
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip RMS 310+
Description
310+ settings
Breaker Type
Frame designation
MDL
Frames available
800 A
Continuous current range (A)
Ground fault pickup (A)
Ir = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes)
(All 310+)
320–800 A
160–800 A
Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kAIC)
100% rated
50, 65
Yes
800 A
Ir
A
320
B
400
C
450
D
500
E
600
F
630
2
Protection
2
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
(or Maintenance Mode)
Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG
2
Interchangeable trip unit
Yes
High load alarm (suffix B20) 1
Yes
7
7
2
Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B21) 1
LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
10
10
Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B22) 1
LSG, LSIG, ALSIG
12
12
Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG)
LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
15
15
Cause of trip indication
Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW)
20
20
Thru-cover accessories
No
24
24
Position 1
2x
Position 2
3x
2
Position 3
4x
2
Position 4
5x
Position 5
6x
2
Position 6
7x
Position 7
8x
2
Position 8
8x
2
2
Ordering options
2
LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG
tr = long delay time (seconds)
(All 310+)
Isd (x Ir) = short delay pickup
(All 310+)
G
700
H (= In)
800
2
2
4
4
Position 9
8x
2
tsd = short delay time I2t (milliseconds)
(LS and LSG)
Fixed
67 @10x
2
tsd = short delay time flat (milliseconds)
(LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG)
Position 1
Inst
Position 2
120
Position 3
300
Position 1
160
Position 2
240
Position 3
320
Position 4
480
Position 5
640
2
Ig (x In) = ground fault pickup (amperes)
(310+ w/ ground fault)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Position 6
800
tg = ground fault delay time (milliseconds)
(LSG, LSIG, ALSIG)
Position 1
Inst
Position 2
120
Position 3
300
Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting
2
Maintenance Mode pickup (2.5 x In) (amperes)
(310+ with Maintenance Mode—ALSI and ALSIG)
Fixed
2000
Notes
1 B2x suffixes cannot be combined with B2x suffixes.
2 Not available for MDL. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI
and ALSIG trip units.
2
2
2
V4-T2-220
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Dimensions and Weights
2
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
MD Frame
Number of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2, 3
8.25 (209.6)
16.00 (406.4)
4.06 (103.1)
2
2
MDL-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
Drilling Plan
Front View
2
Side View
2
3.44
(87.3)
1.72
(43.7)
2
2
R 0.25
(6.4)
CL Breaker
2
R 0.19
(4.8)
CL Handle
1.33
(33.7)
1.50
(38.1)
2
16.00
(406.4)
3.28
(83.3)
2
2
0.97
(24.6)
2
3.64
(92.5)
7.28
(184.9)
2
4.06
(103.2)
8.25
(209.6)
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg)
2
MD Frame
2
Trip Unit 1
Complete Breaker
Frame Only
Breaker Type
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Two-Pole
MDL, HMDL (T/M T.U.)
26.5 (12.0)
29.0 (13.2)
24.5 (11.1)
26.0 (11.8)
2.5 (1.1)
3.0 (1.4)
MDL, HMDL (Elec. T.U.)
—
30.0 (13.6)
—
26.0 (11.8)
—
4.0 (1.8)
Three-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
2
2
Note
1 Thermal-magnetic only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-221
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical N-Frame Breaker
Contents
Description
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes)
2
Product Description
●
2
2
●
All Eaton N-Frame circuit
breakers are suitable for
reverse feed use
All N-Frame circuit
breakers are HACR rated
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-222
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-223
V4-T2-224
V4-T2-232
V4-T2-233
V4-T2-236
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Catalog Number Selection
2
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
2
Circuit Breaker/Frame
ND 3 12 T3 2 W
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
ND
HND
NDC
NDU
CND
CHND
CNDC
Number
of Poles
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
800 = 800 amperes
12 = 1200 amperes
T3
T5
T7
T10
Trip Model
= Model 310
= Model 550
= Model 750
= Model 1050
2
Trip Type
2 = LSI
3 = LS
5 = LSG
6 = LSIG
7 = LSIA
E
EH
K
W
X
Y
=
=
=
=
=
=
2
Suffix
100% R.P. protected (four-pole)
50% R.P. protected (four-pole)
High magnetic molded case switch
Without terminals
Load only terminals
Line only terminals
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-223
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Product Selection
2
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
2
2
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 550 2
Fixed
Rating Plug
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
ND3800T57W
400
ORPN80A400
450
ORPN80A450
500
ORPN80A500
2
550
ORPN80A550
2
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
2
700
ORPN12A700
800
ORPN12A800
2
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
400
ORPN80A400
450
ORPN80A450
2
500
ORPN80A500
2
550
ORPN80A550
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
700
ORPN12A700
2
800
ORPN12A800
2
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
2
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
ND3800T52W
ND3800T56W
2
2
2
2
1200
ND312T52W
ND312T56W
ND312T57W
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
HND3800T52W
HND3800T56W
HND3800T57W
2
2
2
2
1200
HND312T52W
HND312T56W
HND312T57W
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-224
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
Fixed
Rating Plug
2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
2
400
ORPN80A400
450
ORPN80A450
500
ORPN80A500
550
ORPN80A550
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
700
ORPN12A700
800
ORPN12A800
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
NDC3800T57W
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
1200
NDC3800T52W
NDC312T52W
NDC3800T56W
NDC312T56W
NDC312T57W
2
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-225
2.3
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
2
2
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed
Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
400
ORPN80A400
2
450
ORPN80A450
2
500
ORPN80A500
550
ORPN80A550
2
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
2
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
2
700
ORPN12A700
2
800
ORPN12A800
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
400
ORPN80A400
450
ORPN80A450
500
ORPN80A500
2
550
ORPN80A550
600
ORPN80A600
2
700
ORPN80A700
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
700
ORPN12A700
800
ORPN12A800
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
400
ORPN80A400
2
450
ORPN80A450
2
500
ORPN80A500
550
ORPN80A550
2
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
2
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
700
ORPN12A700
2
800
ORPN12A800
1000
ORPN12A100
2
1200
ORPN12A120
2
2
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
1200
ND3800T106W
ND312T106W
ND3800T107W
ND312T107W
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
HND3800T106W
HND3800T107W
2
2
1200
HND312T106W
HND312T107W
2
2
2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
1200
NDC3800T106W
NDC312T106W
NDC3800T107W
NDC312T107W
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
V4-T2-226
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals.
2
2
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
2
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
Fixed
Rating Plug
2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
2
400
ORPN80A400
450
ORPN80A450
500
ORPN80A500
550
ORPN80A550
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
700
ORPN12A700
800
ORPN12A800
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
2
400
ORPN80A400
450
ORPN80A450
2
500
ORPN80A500
550
ORPN80A550
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
700
ORPN12A700
800
ORPN12A800
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
OPTIM 550 2
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
CND3800T57W
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
1200 3
CND3800T52W
CND312T52W
CND3800T56W
CND312T56W
CND312T57W
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
1200 3
CHND3800T52W
CHND312T52W
CHND3800T56W
CHND312T56W
CHND3800T57W
CHND312T57W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-227
2.3
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 550 2
Fixed
Rating Plug
LSI
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
CNDC3800T57W
400
ORPN80A400
2
450
ORPN80A450
2
500
ORPN80A500
550
ORPN80A550
2
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
2
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
2
700
ORPN12A700
2
800
ORPN12A800
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
2
2
2
2
2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
1200 3
CNDC3800T52W
CNDC312T52W
CNDC3800T56W
CNDC312T56W
CNDC312T57W
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number.
3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-228
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L
S
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
2
Fixed
Rating Plug
2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
2
400
ORPN80A400
450
ORPN80A450
500
ORPN80A500
550
ORPN80A550
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
700
ORPN12A700
800
ORPN12A800
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
2
400
ORPN80A400
450
ORPN80A450
2
550
ORPN80A550
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
700
ORPN12A700
800
ORPN12A800
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
1200
CND3800T106W
CND312T106W
CND3800T107W
CND312T107W
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
1200
CHND3800T106W
CHND312T106W
CHND3800T107W
CHND312T107W
2
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-229
2.3
2
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
L
S
I
G
A
2
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs, continued
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) 1
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
OPTIM 1050 23
LSIG
LSIA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed
Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
400
ORPN80A400
2
450
ORPN80A450
2
500
ORPN80A500
550
ORPN80A550
2
600
ORPN80A600
700
ORPN80A700
2
800
ORPN80A800
600
ORPN12A600
2
700
ORPN12A700
2
800
ORPN12A800
1000
ORPN12A100
1200
ORPN12A120
2
2
2
2
Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
800
1200
CNDC3800T106W
CNDC3800T107W
CNDC312T106W 4
CNDC312T107W
Type ND Molded Case Switches
Type ND High Instantaneous (K)
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Three-Pole
Four-Pole 5
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
800
ND3800WK
ND4800WK
2
1200
2
2
HND3800WK
HND4800WK
ND312WK
ND412WK
HND312WK
HND412WK
2
Notes
1 Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
2 One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard.
3 Factory sealed.
4 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate.
5 Neutral is in right pole.
2
Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes.
For UL listed, series tested molded case switch application data, refer to Eaton.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-230
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Line and Load Terminals—Ordering Information
N-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by catalog
number. Specify if factory installation is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
TA1201NB1
T700NB1
2
T1000NB1
2
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum Breaker
Amperes
Terminal Body
Material
Wire
Type
AWG Wire Range/
No. Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
2
2
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
700
Aluminum
Cu/AI
1–500 kcmil (2)
50–240
TA700NB1
1000
Aluminum
Cu/AI
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
95–185
TA1000NB1 1
2
2
1
1200
Aluminum
Cu/AI
4/0–500 kcmil (4)
120–240
TA1200NB1
1200
Aluminum
Cu/AI
500–750 kcmil (3)
300–400
TA1201NB1 2
2
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
700
Copper
Cu
2/0–500 kcmil (2)
70–240
T700NB1
1000
Copper
Cu
3/0–500 kcmil (3)
95–240
T1000NB1
1200
Copper
Cu
3/0–400 kcmil (4)
95–185
T1200NB3
2
2
Notes
1 Terminal rating is AL9CU.
2 Terminal rating is AL7CU.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-231
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the
circuit breaker.
2
2
ND Frame Accessories
2
Description
Reference
Page
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
1
2
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-276
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)
V4-T2-276
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B)
2
Three-Pole
Left
Four-Pole
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
V4-T2-278
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-278
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B)
V4-T2-278
■
■
■
■
2
Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-280
■
■
■
■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B) and alarm switch combination
V4-T2-280
■
■
■
■
2
Shunt trip—standard
V4-T2-284
■
■
Shunt trip—low energy
V4-T2-285
■
■
2
Undervoltage release mechanism
V4-T2-292
■
Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550)
V4-T2-293
Neutral
■
■
2
External Accessories
2
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-311
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Interphase barriers
V4-T2-313
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Terminal shield
V4-T2-313
■
■
■
Non-padlockable handle block
V4-T2-314
2
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-315
❏
❏
❏
❏
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-316
❏
❏
❏
❏
2
Sliding bar interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-317
●
●
●
2
Walking beam interlock—requires two breakers
V4-T2-317
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Electrical (motor) operator
V4-T2-319
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Plug-in adapters
V4-T2-320
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rear connecting studs
V4-T2-321
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Panelboard connecting straps
V4-T2-322
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-430
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Handle extension
V4-T2-445
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit
V4-T2-325
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
OPTIM System Components Three Poles
■
■
2
Ground fault alarm unit
V4-T2-324
Potential transformer module
V4-T2-324
2
Breaker interface module (BIM)
V4-T2-325
Digitrip OPTIMizer
V4-T2-325
2
Auxiliary power module
V4-T2-325
2
Special calibration
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-116
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Marine/naval application
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
2
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
❏ May be mounted on left or right pole—not both
● Accessory available/modification available
Note
OPTIM 550 and 1050 are factory sealed and do not have the right pole available for accessories.
1
V4-T2-232
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Technical Data and Specifications
2
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
277
480
600
ND
2, 3, 4
65
—
50
25
CND 2
2, 3, 4
65
—
50
25
HND
2, 3, 4
100
—
65
35
CHND 2
2, 3, 4
100
—
65
35
NDC
2, 3, 4
200
—
100
65
2, 3, 4
200
—
100
65
CNDC 2
NDU
3
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
3
300
4
—
150
75
2
2
2
2
2
5
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 1
Circuit
Breaker
Type
2
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
415
690
2
Icu
2, 3, 4
85
50
20
2
Ics
2, 3, 4
85
50
10
2
Icu
2, 3, 4
85
50
20
Ics
2, 3, 4
85
50
10
2
2, 3, 4
100
70
25
2, 3, 4
100
50
13
2
Icu
2, 3, 4
100
70
25
2
Ics
2, 3, 4
100
50
13
2
Icu
2, 3, 4
200
100
35
2
Ics
2, 3, 4
100
50
18
2
Icu
2, 3, 4
200
100
35
Ics
2, 3, 4
100
50
18
2
ND
CND 2
2
HND
Icu
Ics
CHND
2
NDC
CNDC 2
2
Notes
1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2 100% rated breakers.
3 800 amperes maximum rating.
4 Successfully tested at 300 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 200 kAIC at 240 Vac.
5 Successfully tested at 75 kAIC, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kAIC at 600 Vac.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-233
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame Digitrip
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip OPTIM 550
Digitrip OPTIM 1050
2
rms sensing
Yes
Yes
2
Frame
N
N
2
Ampere range
400–1200 A
400–1200 A
Interrupting rating at 480 volts
50, 65, 100 (kA)
50, 65, 100 (kA)
2
Protection
LSI, LSIG, LSI(A)
LSI(A), LISG
2
Breaker Type
Ordering options
Fixed rated plug (In)
Yes
Yes
2
Overtemperature trip
Yes
Yes
2
Adjustable rating plug (In)
No
No
Long delay pickup
0.4–1.0 x (In)
0.4–1.0 x (In)
2
Long delay time I2t
2–24 seconds
2–24 seconds
Long delay time I4t
1–5 seconds
1–5 seconds
Long delay thermal memory
Yes
Yes
2
High load alarm
No
0.5–1.0 x Ir
2
Short delay pickup
150–800% x (Ir)
150–800% x (Ir)
Short delay time I2t
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
2
Short delay time flat
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
2
Short delay time zone selective interlocking
Yes
Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
200–800% x (In)
200–800% x (In)
2
2
2
Long Delay Protection (L)
Short Delay Protection (S)
Instantaneous pickup
Discriminator
Yes
Yes
Instantaneous override
Yes
Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
2
Ground fault alarm
20–100% x (Is)
20–100% x (Is)
2
Ground fault pickup
20–100% x (Is)
20–100% x (Is)
Ground fault delay I2t
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
2
Ground fault delay flat
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking
Yes 1
Yes
2
Ground fault thermal memory
Yes
Yes
2
Status LEDs
Yes
Yes
2
Cause of trip LEDs
Yes
Yes
Magnitude of trip information
Yes
Yes
2
Remote signal contact—ground alarm
Yes 1
Yes
Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact
Optional
Included
2
2
2
2
System Diagnostics
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
Note
Zone interlock kit.
1
2
2
2
V4-T2-234
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
N-Frame Digitrip, continued
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip OPTIM 550
Digitrip OPTIM 1050
Yes 1
Yes 1
2
2
System Monitoring
Digital display
Current
Yes
Yes
Power and energy
No
Yes
Power quality—harmonics
No
Yes
Power factor
No
Yes
No 2
Yes
OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
2
2
2
Communications
Eaton PowerNet
2
Testing
Testing method
2
2
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting
2
2
Notes
1 By OPTIMizer/BIM.
2 Eaton’s PowerNet kit.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-235
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
2
2
2
2
ND Frame
Number of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
2, 3
4
8.25 (209.6)
16.00 (406.4)
5.50 (139.7)
11.13 (282.6)
16.00 (406.4)
5.50 (139.7)
ND-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole
Front View
2
2
3.44
(87.3)
2
2
2
2
2
1.72
(43.6)
1.91
(48.4)
0.25 R
(6.4 R)
CL Handle
2
CL Handle
16.00
(406.4)
0.19 R
(4.8 R)
3.68
(93.2)
OFF/O
3.19
(80.9)
6.38
(161.9)
8.25
(209.6)
2
2
2
2
ON/I
1.50
(38.1)
2
2
Side View
Front Cover Cutout
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
ND Frame
Complete Breaker
Breaker Type
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
ND, HND, NDC, NDU
37 (16.8)
45 (20.4)
58 (26.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-236
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
5.50
(139.7)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Typical R-Frame Breaker
2.3
Contents
Description
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-238
V4-T2-239
V4-T2-251
V4-T2-252
V4-T2-255
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes)
2
Product Description
2
●
●
Eaton R-Frame circuit
breakers are available as
frame (which includes trip
unit), rating plug and
terminals
All R-Frame circuit breakers
are suitable for reverse
feed use
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-237
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit Breaker/Frame
2
2
2
2
RD 3 16 T53 W
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
RD
RDC
CRD 2
CRDC 2
2
2
2
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Circuit Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
16 = 1600 amperes
20 = 2000 amperes
25 = 2500 amperes
T53
T65
T86
T96
T106
T107
Trip Type 1
= Digitrip RMS 510 LS
= Digitrip RMS 610 LSG
= Digitrip RMS 810 LSIG
= Digitrip RMS 910 LSIG
= Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIG
= Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIA
Notes
1 For complete list of available trip types, refer to Pages V4-T2-239 to V4-T2-248.
2 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-238
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
W
P
R
K
=
=
=
=
Suffix
Without terminals
100% protected neutral pole
Ground fault remote (310 only)
Molded case switch
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Product Selection
2
Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
2
Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
L
S
I
G
Digitrip Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LI
LS
LSI
LIG
LSG
2
LSIG
Catalog Number
Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating Plug
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2000
2500
RD316T51W
RD320T51W
RD325T51W
RD316T53W
RD320T53W
RD325T53W
RD316T52W
RD320T52W
RD325T52W
RD316T54W
RD320T54W
RD325T54W
RD316T55W
RD320T55W
RD325T55W
RD316T56W
RD320T56W
RD325T56W
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2000
2500
RDC316T51W
RDC320T51W
RDC325T51W
RDC316T53W
RDC320T53W
RDC325T53W
RDC316T52W
RDC320T52W
RDC325T52W
RDC316T54W
RDC320T54W
RDC325T54W
RDC316T55W
RDC320T55W
RDC325T55W
2
RDC316T56W
RDC320T56W
RDC325T56W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-239
2.3
2
2
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity.
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
L
S
I
G
Digitrip Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating Plug
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
2
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2
2000
RP6R20A200
2
2
2
LI
LS
LSI
LIG
LSG
LSIG
Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
CRD316T51W
CRD316T53W
CRD316T52W
CRD316T54W
CRD316T55W
CRD316T56W
2
2
2000 1
CRD320T51W
CRD320T53W
CRD320T52W
CRD320T54W
CRD320T55W
CRD320T56W
2
2
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
—
CRDC316T53W
CRDC316T52W
CRDC316T54W
CRDC316T55W
CRDC316T56W
2
2
2
Catalog Number
2000 1
CRDC320T51W
CRDC320T53W
CRDC320T52W
CRDC320T54W
CRDC320T55W
Note
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-240
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
CRDC320T56W
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
2
Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
L
S
I
G
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LI
LS
2
Digitrip Rating Plug Only
LSI
LIG
LSG
LSIG
Catalog Number
2
Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating Plug
Catalog Number
2
800
RP6R16A080
2
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
2
800
RP6R16A080
2
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2000
2500
RD316T61W
RD320T61W
RD325T61W
RD316T63W
RD320T63W
RD325T63W
RD316T62W
RD320T62W
RD325T62W
RD316T64W
RD320T64W
RD325T64W
RD316T65W
RD320T65W
RD325T65W
RD316T66W
RD320T66W
RD325T66W
2
2
2
2
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2000
2500
RDC316T61W
RDC320T61W
RDC325T61W
RDC316T63W
RDC320T63W
RDC325T63W
RDC316T62W
RDC320T62W
RDC325T62W
RDC316T64W
RDC320T64W
RDC325T64W
RDC316T65W
RDC320T65W
RDC325T65W
RDC316T66W
RDC320T66W
RDC325T66W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-241
2.3
2
2
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity.
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
L
S
I
G
Digitrip Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating Plug
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
2
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2
2000
RP6R20A200
2
2
2
LI
LS
LSI
LIG
LSG
LSIG
Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
CRD316T61W
CRD316T63W
CRD316T62W
CRD316T64W
CRD316T65W
CRD316T66W
2
2
2000 1
CRD320T61W
CRD320T63W
CRD320T62W
CRD320T64W
CRD320T65W
CRD320T66W
2
2
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
CRDC316T61W
CRDC316T63W
CRDC316T62W
CRDC316T64W
CRDC316T65W
CRDC316T66W
2
2
2
Catalog Number
2000 1
CRDC320T61W
CRDC320T63W
CRDC320T62W
CRDC320T64W
CRDC320T65W
Note
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-242
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
CRDC320T66W
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
2
Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
L
S
I
G
Digitrip Rating Plug Only
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LI
LS
LSI
LIG
LSG
LSIG
Catalog Number
2000
2500
RD316T81W
RD320T81W
RD325T81W
RD316T83W
RD320T83W
RD325T83W
RD316T82W
RD320T82W
RD325T82W
RD316T84W
RD320T84W
RD325T84W
RD316T85W
RD320T85W
RD325T85W
RD316T86W
RD320T86W
RD325T86W
Fixed
Rating Plug
Catalog Number
2
800
RP6R16A080
2
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
2
800
RP6R16A080
2
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2000
2500
RDC316T81W
RDC320T81W
RDC325T81W
RDC316T83W
RDC320T83W
RDC325T83W
RDC316T82W
RDC320T82W
RDC325T82W
RDC316T84W
RDC320T84W
RDC325T84W
RDC316T85W
RDC320T85W
RDC325T85W
RDC316T86W
RDC320T86W
RDC325T86W
2
Rated
Current
(In)
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-243
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity.
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
L
S
I
G
Digitrip Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LI
LS
LSI
LIG
LSG
LSIG
Catalog Number
1600
CRD316T81W
CRD316T83W
CRD316T82W
CRD316T84W
CRD316T85W
CRD316T86W
2000 1
CRD320T81W
CRD320T83W
CRD320T82W
CRD320T84W
CRD320T85W
CRD320T86W
2
2
2
Fixed
Rating Plug
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
2
2
Rated
Current
(In)
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
CRDC316T81W
CRDC316T83W
CRDC316T82W
CRDC316T84W
CRDC316T85W
CRDC316T86W
2
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
2
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2
2000
RP6R20A200
2
2
2000 1
CRDC320T81W
CRDC320T83W
CRDC320T82W
CRDC320T84W
CRDC320T85W
Note
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-244
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
CRDC320T86W
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
2
Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
L
S
I
G
Digitrip Rating Plug Only
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LI
LS
LSI
LIG
LSG
LSIG
Catalog Number
Fixed
Rating Plug
2000
2500
RD316T91W
RD320T91W
RD325T91W
RD316T93W
RD320T93W
RD325T93W
RD316T92W
RD320T92W
RD325T92W
RD316T94W
RD320T94W
RD325T94W
RD316T95W
RD320T95W
RD325T95W
RD316T96W
RD320T96W
RD325T96W
Catalog Number
2
800
RP6R16A080
2
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
2500
RDC316T91W
RDC320T91W
RDC325T91W
RDC316T93W
RDC320T93W
RDC325T93W
RDC316T92W
RDC320T92W
RDC325T92W
RDC316T94W
RDC320T94W
RDC325T94W
RDC316T95W
RDC320T95W
RDC325T95W
RDC316T96W
RDC320T96W
RDC325T96W
2
2
2
2
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
2
800
RP6R16A080
2
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2
Rated
Current
(In)
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2
2000
RP6R20A200
1600
RP6R25A160
2000
RP6R25A200
2500
RP6R25A250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-245
2.3
2
2
2
Series C
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers
The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 °C wire is applied at 75 °C ampacity.
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
L
S
I
G
Digitrip Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I 2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Rated
Current
(In)
Fixed
Rating Plug
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1600
RP6R16A160
1000
RP6R20A100
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2000
RP6R20A200
800
RP6R16A080
1000
RP6R16A100
1000
RP6R16A100
1200
RP6R16A120
1000
RP6R20A100
2
1200
RP6R20A120
1600
RP6R20A160
2
2000
RP6R20A200
2
2
2
LI
LS
LSI
LIG
LSG
LSIG
Catalog Number
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
CRD316T91W
CRD316T93W
CRD316T92W
CRD316T94W
CRD316T95W
CRD316T96W
2
2
2000 1
CRD320T91W
CRD320T93W
CRD320T92W
CRD320T94W
CRD320T95W
CRD320T96W
2
2
2
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
CRDC316T91W
CRDC316T93W
CRDC316T92W
CRDC316T94W
CRDC316T95W
CRDC316T96W
2
2
2
Catalog Number
2000 1
CRDC320T91W
CRDC320T93W
CRDC320T92W
CRDC320T94W
CRDC320T95W
Note
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-246
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
CRDC320T96W
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
2
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
L
S
I
G
A
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
2
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LSIA 1050
LSIG 1050
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Fixed
Rating Plug
2
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
800
ORPR16A080
1000
ORPR16A100
1200
ORPR16A120
1600
ORPR16A160
1000
ORPR20A100
1200
ORPR20A120
1600
ORPR20A160
2000
ORPR20A200
1600
ORPR25A160
2000
ORPR25A200
2500
ORPR25A250
2
800
ORPR16A080
1000
ORPR16A100
2
1200
ORPR16A120
1600
ORPR16A160
1000
ORPR20A100
1200
ORPR20A120
1600
ORPR20A160
2000
ORPR20A200
1600
ORPR25A160
2000
ORPR25A200
2500
ORPR25A250
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2000
2500
RD316T107W
RD320T107W
RD325T107W
RD316T106W
RD320T106W
RD325T106W
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2000
2500
RDC316T107W
RDC320T107W
RDC325T107W
RDC316T106W
RDC320T106W
RDC325T106W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-247
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug.
2
2
100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
2
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
L
S
I
G
A
Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
LSIA 1050
LSIG 1050
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Fixed
Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalog
Number
800
ORPR16A080
1000
ORPR16A100
1200
ORPR16A120
1600
ORPR16A160
1000
ORPR20A100
2
1200
ORPR20A120
1600
ORPR20A160
2
2000
ORPR20A200
800
ORPR16A080
2
1000
ORPR16A100
1200
ORPR16A120
2
1600
ORPR16A160
1000
ORPR20A100
2
1200
ORPR20A120
2
1600
ORPR20A160
2000
ORPR20A200
2
2
Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
CRD316T107W
CRD316T106W
2
2
2
2
2000 1
CRD320T107W
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kAIC at 480 Vac
1600
2000 1
CRDC316T107W
2
2
Type RD—High Instantaneous (K)
2
2
2
2
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
at 40 °C
CRDC316T106W
CRDC320T107W
Molded Case Switches
Refer to Eaton for UL listed,
series tested Molded Case
Switch application data.
2
CRD320T106W
CRDC320T106W
Complete without Terminals
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1600
RD316WK
RD416WK
2000
RD320WK
RD420WK
Notes
1 Includes B2016RDL rear connectors.
Molded case switch may trip above 17,500 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-248
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
2
Line and Load Terminals
Line and load terminals
provide wire connecting
capabilities for specific
ranges of continuous current
ratings and wire types. All
terminals comply with
Underwriters Laboratories
Standards UL 486A and UL
486B and CSA C22.2 No.
65M. Unless otherwise
specified, R-Frame circuit
breaker line load terminals are
shipped separately for field
installation.
2
Ordering Information
R-Frame circuit breakers have
Cu/AI terminals as standard
and Cu only terminals as an
option. Specify if factory
installation is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Body
Material
Wire
Type
Hardware
AWG/kcmil
Wire Range/
No. Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
2
2
Wire Terminals
2
1600
Aluminum
Cu/AI
English
500–1000 (4)
300–500
TA1600RD
1600
Copper
Cu
English
1–600 (4)
50–300
T1600RD
2000
Aluminum
Cu/AI
English
2–600 (6)
35–300
TA2000RD 1
2
—
English
—
—
B2016RD
2
Rear Connectors
2000
Copper
2
2000
Copper
—
English
—
—
B2016RDL
2500
Copper
—
English
—
—
B2500RD 3
2
2
Notes
1 Catalog Number includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker.
2 For use with 100% rated 1600 A and 2000 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when
100% rated device is ordered.
3 For use with 2500 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 2500 A breaker is ordered.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-249
2.3
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Mounting Hardware
Breaker Line/Load
Conductors
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
TA2000RD
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-250
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Accessories
2
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
2
RD Frame Accessories
2
Description
Reference
Page
Three-Pole
Left
2
Four-Pole
Center
Right
Left
Center
Right
Neu.
Alarm lockout (Make/Break)
V4-T2-276
■
■
Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break)
V4-T2-276
■
■
Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B)
V4-T2-276
■
■
Auxiliary switch (4A, 4B)
V4-T2-276
■
■
Shunt trip—standard
V4-T2-284
■
■
Shunt trip—low energy
V4-T2-285
■
■
Undervoltage release mechanism
V4-T2-292
■
■
Accessory terminal block 2
V4-T2-293
■
2
2
2
■
External Accessories
Base mounting hardware
V4-T2-311
Padlockable handle lock hasp
V4-T2-314
Key interlock kit
V4-T2-316
Walking beam interlock
V4-T2-317
Electrical (motor) operator
●
2
2
Internal Accessories 1
2
2
2
●
■
■
■
■
2
V4-T2-319
■
■
■
■
2
Handle mechanisms
V4-T2-430
■
■
■
■
Handle extension 3
V4-T2-445
■
2
■
2
OPTIM System Components
Breaker interface module (BIM)
V4-T2-325
●
●
●
Digitrip OPTIMizer
V4-T2-325
●
●
●
Auxiliary power module
V4-T2-325
●
●
●
Special calibration
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Moisture fungus treatment
V4-T2-116
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze-tested circuit breakers
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Marine/naval application
—
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Legend
■ Applicable in indicated pole position
● Accessory available/modification available
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
2 Mounts outside breaker.
3 Included with breaker.
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-251
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Technical Data and Specifications
UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings
1
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
277
480
600
RD
3, 4
125
—
65
50
50
CRD 2
3
125
—
65
RDC
3, 4
200
—
100
65
CRDC 2
3
200
—
100
65
2
2
2
2
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type
1
Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
Number
of Poles
Volts AC (50/60 Hz)
240
415
690
Icu
3, 4
135
70
25
Ics
3, 4
100
50
13
RD
2
RDC
Icu
3, 4
200
100
35
2
Ics
3, 4
100
50
18
2
2
Notes
1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
2 100% rated breakers.
See Page V4-T2-253 for Trip Unit Specifications.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-252
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Specifications
2
2
R-Frame Digitrip
Trip Unit Type
Digitrip
RMS 510
Digitrip
RMS 610
Digitrip
RMS 810
Digitrip
RMS 910
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050
2
rms sensing
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Frame
R
R
R
R
R
Ampere range
800–2500 A
800–2500 A
800–2500 A
800–2500 A
800–2500 A
2
Interrupting rating at 480 volts
65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
65, 100 (kA)
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LSI(A), LISG
2
2
Breaker Type
2
Protection
Ordering options
Fixed rated plug (In)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Overtemperature trip
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Adjustable rating plug (In)
No
No
No
No
No
Long delay pickup
0.5–1.0 x (In)
0.5–1.0 x (In)
0.5–1.0 x (In)
0.5 –1.0 x (In)
0.4–1.0 x (In)
2
Long delay time I2t
2–24 seconds
2–24 seconds
2–24 seconds
2–24 seconds
2–24 seconds
Long delay time I4t
No
No
No
No
1–5 Seconds
Long Delay Protection (L)
2
2
Long delay thermal memory
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
High load alarm
No
0.85 x Ir
0.85 x Ir
0.85 x Ir
0.5-1.0 x Ir
Short delay pickup
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
200–600%
S1 and S2 x (Ir)
150-800% x (Ir) 12
2
Short delay time I2t
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Short delay time flat
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
2
Short delay time zone selective interlocking
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
200–600%
M1and M2 x (In)
200–600%
M1and M2 x (In)
200–600%
M1and M2 x (In)
200–600%
M1and M2 x (In)
200–800% x (In) 2
2
2
2
Short Delay Protection (S)
2
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous pickup
Discriminator
Yes 3
Yes 3
Yes 3
Yes 3
Yes
Instantaneous override
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
2
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground fault alarm 4
No
No
No
No
25–100% x (In)
Ground fault pickup 4
25–100% x (Is)
25-100% x (Is)
25–100% x (Is)
25–100% x (Is)
25–100% x (In)
Ground fault delay I2t
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Ground fault delay flat
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
100 –500 ms
100–500 ms
100–500 ms
Ground fault zone selective interlocking
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ground fault thermal memory
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
2
2
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In
2
2
2
Notes
1 Except 2500 ampere frame is 200–600%.
2 Varies by frame.
3 LS/LSG only.
4 Not to exceed 1200 amperes.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-253
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
R-Frame Digitrip, continued
2
Trip Unit Type
2
Digitrip
RMS 510
Digitrip
RMS 610
Digitrip
RMS 810
Digitrip
RMS 910
Digitrip
OPTIM 1050
Yes
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cause of trip LEDs
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Magnitude of trip information
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Remote signal contacts
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Digital display
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes 1
2
System Monitoring
Current
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Voltage
No
No
No
Yes
No
2
Power and energy
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Power quality—harmonics
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
2
Power factor
No
No
Yes (over
Eaton PowerNet only)
Yes
Yes
2
Communications
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Testing
Integral
Integral
Integral
Integral
OPTIMizer, BIM,
PowerNet
2
Eaton PowerNet
Testing method
2
Legend
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
Is = Sensor Rating
In = Rating Plug
Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In
2
Note
1 By OPTIMizer/BIM.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-254
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Dimensions and Weights
2
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
RD Frame
Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
3
15.50 (393.7)
16.00 (406.4)
9.75 (247.7)
4
20.00 (508.0)
16.00 (406.4)
9.75 (247.7)
2
2
2
RD-Frame, Three-Pole, 1600 and 2000 Amperes
2
Front View
7.25
(184.2)
14.50
(368.3)
11.13 (0.4) Dia.
(4 Holes) Use 4,
0.38 (Mil) Dia. Bolts
for Mounting Breaker
15.50
(393.7)
2
Side View
2
9.00
(228.6)
2
C
L Breaker
5.09
(129.4)
9.69
(246.1)
7.75
(196.9)
2
C
L Handle
16.00
(406.4)
15.00
(381.0)
2
Push
To
Trip
6.65
(166.7)
12.91
(327.8)
2
0.16
(4.0)
R Typ.
2
2
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg)
2
RD Frame
2
Complete Breaker
Breaker Type
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
102 (46.3)
135 (61.2)
2
2
2
1600 Amperes
RD, CRD 1, RDC, CRDC 1
2000 Amperes
RD, RDC
102 (46.3)
135 (61.2)
CRD, CRDC
130 (59.0)
175 (79.4)
135 (61.2)
182 (82.6)
2
2500 Amperes
RD, RDC
2
2
Note
1 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-255
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Contents
Motor Circuit Protectors
Description
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP)
2
Product Description
Standards and Certifications
Designated as Eaton’s Types
GMCP and HMCP, the
instantaneous-only motor
circuit protector (MCP) is
available in ratings from 3 A
to 1200 A for motor starter
sizes 0 through 8.
The MCP is designed to
comply with the applicable
requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories Standard UL
489, Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2
No. 5.1, and International
Electrotechnical Commission
Recommendations
IEC 157-1.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
An innovative design of
internal components allows
higher MCP-starter
combination interrupting
ratings. The MCP is marked
to permit proper electrical
application within the
assigned equipment ratings.
2
2
2
2
The MCP is a recognized
component (UL File E7819)
and complies with the
applicable requirements of
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489. It is also
designed to comply with the
applicable requirements of
Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2
No. 5.1, International
Electrotechnical Commission
Recommendations IEC 157-1,
and nameplates bear the CE
marking.
2
2
Note: Interrupting ratings are
dependent on starter it is used
with.
2
2
V4-T2-256
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-257
V4-T2-258
V4-T2-259
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Catalog Number Selection
2
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
2
Motor Circuit Protector
HMCP 003 A0 C
Motor Circuit
Protective Type
HMCP = Three-pole
HM2P = Two-pole 1
HMCPS = Three-pole
Continuous Ampere
Rating
003
007
015
025
030
050
A0 =
C0 =
E0 =
D0 =
H1 =
G2 =
K2 =
J2 =
M2 =
L3 =
R3 =
T4 =
U4 =
A5 =
C5 =
D5 =
F5 =
G5 =
J5 =
K5 =
L5 =
W5 =
N5 =
R5 =
X5 =
Y5 =
L6 =
X6 =
Y6 =
X7 =
Y8 =
070
100
150
250
400
600
800
1200
Magnetic Trip Range/
NEMA Starter Size
9–30/0
21–70/0
45–150/0
40–60/0
90–300/1
80–120/2
50–500/2
115–170/2
210–700/2
160–240/3
300–1000/3
450–1500/4
750–2500/4
350–700/5
450–900/5
500–1000/5
625–1250/5
750–1500/5
875–1750/5
1000–2000/5
1125–2250/5
1250–2500/5
1500–3000/5
1750–3500/5
2000–4000/5
2250–4500/5
1800–6000/6 (electronic)
500–2500/6 (electronic)
1000–4000/6 (electronic)
1600–6400/7 (electronic)
2400–9600/8 (electronic)
2
2
Suffix
Non-aluminum terminals
Without terminals
Load terminals only
Line terminals only
Stainless steel terminals
(150A frame only)
No Suffix: Standard terminals on line and load
C =
W=
X =
Y =
S =
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Motor Circuit Protector
GMCP 003 A0 C
Motor Circuit
Protective Device
GMCP = Three-pole
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
003
007
015
030
050
060
063
Magnetic Trip
Range/NEMA
Starter Size
A0 = 15–30/0
C0 = 35–70/0
E0 = 75–150/0
H1 = 150–300/1
K2 = 250–500/2
J2 = 300–600/2
M2 = 320–630/2
2
2
Suffix
C = Non-aluminum terminals
2
2
2
2
Note
1 On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-257
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Product Selection
2
G-Frame
2
480 Vac Maximum, 600Y/347 Vac
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam Setting
Motor Full Load
Current Amperes (FLA) 1
MCP
Trip Setting
MCP
Catalog Number
0
3
A
1.1–1.2
15
GMCP003A0C
B
1.3–1.5
18
C
1.6–1.7
21
2
D
1.8–1.9
24
2
E
2.0–2.2
27
F
2.3–2.5
30
A
2.6–3.1
35
B
3.2–3.6
42
C
3.7–3.9
49
D
4.3–4.7
56
E
4.8–5.2
63
F
5.3–5.7
70
A
5.7–6.8
75
2
B
6.9–7.9
90
C
8.0–9.1
105
2
D
9.2–10.3
120
E
10.4–11.4
135
2
F
11.5–12.6
150
A
11.5–13.7
150
B
13.8–16.0
180
C
16.1–18.3
210
D
18.4–20.6
240
E
20.7–22.9
270
2
2
2
0
7
2
2
2
2
0
1
15
30
2
2
F
23.0–25.2
300
A
19.3–22.9
250
2
B
23.0–26.8
300
C
26.9–30.6
350
2
D
30.7–34.5
400
E
34.6–38.3
450
F
38.4–42.1
500
A
23.1–27.5
300
B
27.7–32.2
360
2
C
32.3–36.7
420
D
36.9–41.4
480
2
E
41.5–46.0
540
F
46.2–50.5
600
A
24.2–32.1
320
2
B
29.1–34.8
380
D
38.8–46.4
500
2
E
43.6–48.9
570
F
48.5–53.7
630
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
50
60
63
GMCP007C0C
GMCP015E0C
GMCP030H1C
GMCP050K2C
GMCP060J2C
GMCP063M2C
Notes
1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used.
All GMCP 3–63A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire. Refer to Page V4-T2-122 under Optional Terminal Types.
UL recognized and CSA approved.
V4-T2-258
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Accessories
2
Modifications for GMCP
Internal accessories must be factory installed.
2
2
Internal Accessories 1
Electrical Ratings
Type Accessory
Volts
Frequency
Amperes
Contact
Arrangement
Shunt trip 2
120
50/60 Hz
1.1
—
S5
Shunt trip 2
240
50/60 Hz
2.1
—
S6
1373D62G19
Auxiliary switch 3
240
50/60 Hz
6.0
1A/1B
A3
1288C74G03
Auxiliary switch 3
240
50/60 Hz
6.0
2A/2B
A6
1288C73G03
Alarm switch
3
Auxiliary switch/alarm switch combination 3
Factory
Suffix
Style
Number
2
1373D62G18
2
240
50/60 Hz
6.0
Make/Break
B3
1288C75G03
240
50/60 Hz
6.0
1A/1B Make/Break
B13
1288C76G09
Number Units
in Package
Style
Number
2
Lock dog (non-padlockable)
1
1294C01H01
Mounting hardware
1
624B375G23
DIN rail adapter 4
10
1225C79G02
2
2
2
Modifications for HMCP
See Internal Accessories starting on Page V4-T2-273.
2
Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames
2
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—GMCP-Frame
Rating Type
S01 Blue Handle
S01 Red Handle
2
2
External Mounted Accessories
Description
2
GMCP-Frame
2
Description
NEMA
IP
Catalog
Number
S01 blue handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
GMHMVD12B / 68C6039G05
4/4X
65
GMHMVD12BX / 68C6039G07
2
S01 red handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
GMHMVD12R / 68C6039G06
4/4X
65
GMHMVD12RX / 68C6039G08
2
2
2
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
2
G Direct 5
Black Handle
2
Yellow Handle
With Shroud
Without Shroud
With Shroud
Without Shroud
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
GMCP
HRGMC1S
HRGMC10
HRGMC3S
HRGMC30
2
Notes
1 Only one accessory may be installed in GMCP.
2 LH only.
3 RH only.
4 For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN50022.
5 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.
2
2
2
No UVR available on GMCP.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-259
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
F-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
0
3
A
2
B
2
2
MCP
Trip
Setting
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number
HMCP070M2C
2
MCP
Catalog
Number
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
0.69–0.91
9
HMCP003A0C
2
70
A
16.1–21.4
210
0.92–1.0
12
B
21.5 –26.8
280
C
1.1–1.2
15
C
26.9 –32.2
350
D
1.3–1.5
18
D
32.3–37.5
420
2
E
1.6–1.7
21
E
37.6–42.9
490
F
1.8–1.9
24
F
43.0–48.3
560
2
G
2.0–2.2
27
G
48.4–53.7
630
H
2.3–2.5
30
H
53.8–59.1
700
A
1.5–2.0
21
A
23.0–30.6
300
2
B
2.1–2.5
28
B
30.7–38.3
400
C
2.6–3.1
35
C
38.4–46.0
500
2
D
3.2–3.6
42
D
46.1–53.7
600
E
3.7–3.9
49
E
53.8 –61.4
700
2
F
4.3–4.7
56
F
61.5 –69.1
800
2
G
4.8–5.2
63
G
69.2–76.8
900
H
5.3–5.7
70
H
76.9–84.5
1000
A
3.4–4.5
45
A
34.6–46.0
450
B
4.6–5.6
60
B
46.1–57.5
600
C
5.7–6.8
75
C
57.6–69.1
750
D
6.9–7.9
90
D
69.2–80.6
900
2
E
8.0–9.1
105
D
69.2–80.6
900
2
F
9.2–10.3
120
E
80.7–92.2
1050
G
10.4–11.4
135
F
92.3–103.7
1200
H
11.5 –12.6
150
G
103.8–115.2
1350
A
6.9–9.1
90
2
B
9.2–11.4
120
C
11.5–13.7
2
D
2
E
2
2
2
2
0
0
7
15
2
2
4
100
150
H
115.3–126.7
1500
57.0 –75.0
750
150
B
76.0–95.0
1000
13.8–16.0
180
C
96.0–114.0
1250
16.1–18.3
210
D
115.0–130.7
1500
F
18.4–20.6
240
E
3
1750
G
20.7–22.9
270
F
3
2000
H
23.0–25.2
300
G
3
2250
A
11.5–15.2
150
H
3
2500
B
15.3–19.1
200
C
19.2–22.9
250
2
D
23.0–26.8
300
E
26.9–30.6
350
2
F
30.7–4.5
400
G
34.6–38.3
450
H
38.4–42.1
500
2
2
2
30
HMCP015E0C
3
A
2
1
HMCP007C0C
50
HMCP030H1C
Cam
Setting
4
150
HMCP050K2C
HMCP150T4C
HMCP150U4C
Notes
1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3 Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the
ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load
ampere rating.
HMCP 3–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCP 150A come with
line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB.
2
2
2
V4-T2-260
HMCP100R3C
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
2
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
MCP
Trip
Setting 1
MCP
Catalog
Number
25
A
40
HMCP025D0C
B
43
D
49
E
52
F
55
G
58
H
60
A
80
B
87
C
93
D
98
E
103
F
109
G
115
H
120
A
115
B
122
C
130
D
139
E
145
F
153
G
160
H
170
50
70
100
A
160
B
174
C
185
D
196
E
207
F
218
G
229
H
240
2
2
2
2
2
HMCP050G2C
2
2
2
2
2
HMCP070J2C
2
2
2
2
2
HMCP100L3C
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
2
HMCP 25–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-261
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
2
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
2
0
3
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
Cam
Setting
Motor Full
Load Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number
A
23.0–30.6
300
HMCPS100R3C
B
30.7–38.3
400
15
C
38.4–46.0
500
18
D
46.1–53.7
600
1.6–1.7
21
E
53.8–61.4
700
2
F
1.8–1.9
24
F
61.5–69.1
800
2
G
2.0–2.2
27
G
69.2–76.8
900
H
2.3–2.5
30
H
76.9–84.5
1000
A
1.5–2.0
21
A
34.6–46.0
450
B
2.1–2.5
28
B
46.1–57.5
600
C
2.6–3.1
35
C
57.6–69.1
750
D
3.2–3.6
42
D
69.2–80.6
900
2
E
3.7–3.9
49
E
80.7–92.2
1050
2
F
4.3–4.7
56
F
92.3–103.7
1200
G
4.8–5.2
63
G
103.8–115.2
1350
H
5.3–5.7
70
H
115.3–126.7
1500
A
3.4–4.5
45
A
57.0–75.0
750
2
B
4.6–5.6
60
B
76.0–95.0
1000
C
5.7–6.8
75
C
96.0–114.0
1250
2
D
6.9–7.9
90
D
115.0–130.7
1500
2
E
8.0–9.1
105
E
3
1750
F
9.2–10.3
120
F
3
2000
2
G
10.4–11.4
135
G
3
2250
H
11.5–12.6
150
H
3
2500
A
6.9–9.1
90
B
9.2–11.4
120
C
11.5–13.7
150
2
D
13.8–16.0
180
E
16.1–18.3
210
2
F
18.4–20.6
240
G
20.7–22.9
270
H
23.0–25.2
300
A
11.5–15.2
150
B
15.3–19.1
200
2
C
19.2–22.9
250
D
23.0–26.8
300
2
E
26.9–30.6
350
F
30.7–34.5
400
G
34.6–38.3
450
H
38.4–42.1
500
Cam
Setting
Motor Full
Load Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
A
2
B
2
2
0
7
2
2
2
0
1
15
30
2
2
2
2
50
2
2
2
MCP
Catalog
Number
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
0.69–0.91
9
HMCPS003A0C
3
100
0.92–1.0
12
C
1.1–1.2
D
1.3–1.5
E
HMCPS007C0C
HMCPS015E0C
HMCPS030H1C
4
4
150
150
HMCPS150U4C
Notes
1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3 Settings above 130A are for special applications. NEC Article 430.110(a) requires the
ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load
ampere rating.
HMCP 25–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB.
HMCPS 3–100 A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 150A come
with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB.
HMCPS050K2C
2
2
2
V4-T2-262
HMCPS150T4C
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
J-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
2
MCP
Catalog
Number 3
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
27.0–30.7
350
HMCP250A5C
5
250
A
67.4–75.3
B
30.8–33.8
400
B
75.4–83.8
980
C
33.9–36.9
440
C
83.9–92.3
1090
D
37.0–40.3
480
D
92.4–100.7
1200
E
40.4–43.8
525
E
100.8–109.2
1310
F
43.9–46.9
570
F
109.3–117.6
1420
G
47.0–50.7
610
G
117.7–126.1
1530
H
47.0–50.7
660
H
126.2–134.6
1640
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
4
250
A
5
5
5
5
5
250
250
250
250
250
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
MCP
Trip
Setting
I
47.0–50.7
700
A
34.7–38.8
450
B
38.9–43.4
C
43.5–47.6
D
2
MCP
Catalog
Number 3
875
HMCP250J5C
I
134.7–142.8
1750
A
77.0–86.6
1000
505
B
86.6–96.1
1125
565
C
96.2–105.7
1250
47.7–52.2
620
D
105.8–115.3
1375
E
52.3–56.5
680
E
115.4–124.9
1500
F
56.6–60.7
735
F
125.0–134.6
1625
G
60.8–64.9
790
G
134.7–144.2
1750
H
65.0–69.2
845
H
144.3–153.8
1875
I
69.3–73.5
900
I
153.9–163.3
2000
A
38.5–43.4
500
A
86.6–97.3
1125
B
43.5–48.0
565
B
97.4–108.4
1265
C
48.1–53.0
625
C
108.5–118.8
1410
D
53.1–57.6
690
D
118.9–129.9
1545
E
57.7–62.3
750
E
130.0–140.7
1690
F
62.4–67.3
810
F
140.8–151.5
1830
G
67.4–71.9
875
G
151.6–162.3
1970
H
72.0–76.9
935
H
162.4–173.0
2110
I
77.0–81.6
1000
I
173.1–183.6
2250
A
48.1–53.8
625
A
96.2–108.0
1250
B
53.9–59.9
700
B
108.1–119.9
1405
C
60.0–66.1
780
C
120.0–132.3
1560
D
66.2–72.3
860
D
132.4–144.2
1720
E
72.4–78.4
940
E
144.3–156.1
1875
HMCP250C5C
HMCP250D5C
HMCP250F5C
5
5
5
250
250
250
F
78.5–83.8
1020
F
156.2–168.0
2030
G
83.9–89.9
1090
G
168.1–179.9
2185
H
90.0–96.1
1170
H
180.0–192.3
2340
I
96.2–102.0
1250
I
192.4–204.0
2500
A
57.7–64.6
750
B
64.7–71.9
840
C
72.0–79.2
935
D
79.3–86.5
1030
E
86.6–93.8
1125
F
93.9–101.1
1220
G
101.2–108.4
1315
H
108.5–115.3
1410
I
115.4–122.4
1500
HMCP250G5C
2
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
2
2
2
2
2
HMCP250K5C
2
2
2
2
2
2
HMCP250L5C
2
2
2
2
2
HMCP250W5C
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate
cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place
of HMCP.
All HMCP and HM2P 250A come with line and load steel body terminals, T250KB. (With suffix
“C,” without “C” comes with TA250KB.)
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-263
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
K-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
2
2
2
MCP
Catalog
Number 3
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
27.0–30.7
350
HMCP400A5C
5
400
A
30.8–33.8
400
B
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
4
400
A
B
2
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
MCP
Trip
Setting
MCP
Trip
Setting
2
MCP
Catalog
Number 3
77.0–86.5
1000
HMCP400K5C
86.6–96.1
1125
C
33.9–36.9
440
D
37.0–40.3
480
2
E
40.4–43.8
525
E
115.4–124.9
1500
F
43.9–46.9
570
F
125.0–134.6
1625
2
G
47.0–50.7
610
G
134.7–144.2
1750
H
50.8–53.8
660
H
144.3–153.8
1875
2
I
53.9–57.2
700
I
153.9–163.3
2000
A
38.5–43.4
500
A
86.6–97.3
1125
B
43.5–48.0
565
B
97.4–108.4
1265
C
48.1–53.0
626
C
108.5–118.8
1410
D
53.1–57.6
690
D
118.9–129.9
1545
2
E
57.7–62.3
750
E
130.0–140.7
1690
2
F
62.4–67.3
810
F
140.8–151.5
1830
G
67.4–71.9
875
G
151.6–162.3
1970
H
72.0–76.9
935
H
162.4–173.0
2110
I
77.0–81.6
1000
I
173.1–183.6
2250
A
48.1–53.8
625
A
96.2–108.0
1250
B
53.9–59.9
700
B
108.1–119.9
1405
2
C
60.0–66.1
780
C
120.0–132.3
1560
2
D
66.2–72.3
860
D
132.4–144.2
1720
E
72.4–78.4
940
E
144.3–156.1
1875
2
F
78.5–83.8
1020
F
156.2–168.0
2030
G
83.9–89.9
1090
G
168.1–179.9
2185
2
H
90.0–96.1
1170
H
180.0–192.3
2340
I
96.2–102.0
1250
I
192.4–204.0
2500
A
57.7–64.6
750
A
115.4–129.9
1500
2
B
64.7–71.9
840
B
130.0–144.2
1690
C
72.0–79.2
935
C
144.3–158.4
1875
2
D
79.3–86.5
1030
D
158.5–173.0
2060
E
86.6–93.8
1125
E
173.1–187.6
2250
2
F
93.9–101.1
1220
F
187.7–201.9
2440
2
G
101.2–108.4
1315
G
202.0–216.1
2625
H
108.5–115.3
1410
H
216.2–230.7
2810
I
115.4–122.4
1500
I
230.8–244.9
3000
A
67.4–75.3
875
B
75.4–83.8
980
C
83.9–92.3
1090
2
D
92.4–100.7
1200
2
E
100.8–109.2
1310
F
109.3–117.6
1420
2
G
117.7–126.1
1530
H
126.2–134.6
1640
2
I
134.7–142.8
1750
2
2
5
5
400
400
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
400
400
400
2
V4-T2-264
HMCP400A5C
HMCP400D5C
HMCP400F5C
HMCP400G5C
HMCP400J5C
5
5
5
400
400
400
C
96.2–105.7
1250
D
105.8–115.3
1375
HMCP400L5C
HMCP400W5C
HMCP400N5C
Notes
1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place
of HMCP.
All HMCP and HM2P 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers
with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
L-Frame
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum, continued
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
5
400
A
5
5
400
400
2
600 Vac Maximum
4
2
2
MCP
Catalog
Number 3
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
Cam
Setting
Motor
Full Load
Current
Amperes
(FLA) 1
134.7–151.5
1750
HMCP400R5C
6
600
A
138.5–184.5
1800
B
151.6–168.4
1970
B
184.6–230.7
2400
C
168.5–185.3
2190
C
230.8–276.8
3000
D
185.4–201.9
2410
D
276.9–323.0
3600
E
202.0–218.8
2625
E
323.1–369.1
4200
F
218.9–235.7
2845
F
369.2–415.3
4800
G
235.8–252.6
3065
G
415.4–461.4
5400
H
252.7–269.2
3285
H
461.5–507.7
6000
A
38.5–46.1
500
B
46.2–61.4
600
MCP
Trip
Setting
MCP
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
Number
HMCP600L6W
I
269.3–285.7
3500
A
153.9–173.0
2000
B
173.1–192.3
2250
C
61.5–76.8
800
C
192.4–211.5
2500
D
76.9–96.1
1000
D
211.6–230.7
2750
E
96.2–115.3
1250
E
230.8–249.9
3000
F
115.4–153.7
1500
F
250.0–269.2
3250
G
153.8–192.2
2000
G
269.3–288.4
3500
H
288.5–307.6
3750
I
307.7–326.9
4000
A
173.1–194.5
2250
B
194.6–216.1
2530
C
216.2–237.6
2810
D
237.7–259.5
3090
E
259.6–281.1
F
6
600
HMCP400X5C
H
192.3–230.7
2500
A
76.9–96.1
1000
B
96.2–115.3
1250
C
115.4–153.7
1500
D
153.8–192.2
2000
E
192.3–230.7
2500
F
230.8–269.1
3000
3375
G
269.2–307.6
3500
281.2–302.6
3655
H
307.7–346.1
4000
G
302.7–324.1
3935
H
324.2–346.1
4215
I
346.2–368.1
4500
6
HMCP400Y5C
600
2
2
2
2
2
2
HMCP600X6W
2
2
2
2
2
HMCP600Y6W
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam
settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HM2P in place
of HMCP.
4 Equipped with electronic trip device.
All HMCP and HM2P 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. Catalog numbers
with suffix “C” as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K.
All HMCP 600 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-217.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-265
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
N-Frame
2
600 Vac Maximum
2
NEMA
Starter
Size
Cont.
Amps
7
800
1
Cam
Setting
Motor Full
Load Current
Amperes (FLA) 2
MCP
Trip
Setting
MCP
Catalog
Number
HMCP800X7W
A
123.1–184.5
1600
B
184.6–246.1
2400
C
246.2–307.6
3200
D
307.7–369.1
4000
2
E
369.2–430.7
4800
2
F
430.8–492.2
5600
G
492.3–553.7
6400
A
184.6–276.8
2400
B
276.9–369.1
3600
2
C
369.2–461.4
4800
2
D
461.5–553.7
6000
E
553.8–646.1
7200
F
646.2–738.4
8400
G
738.5–830.7
9600
2
2
2
8
1200
2
2
2
2
2
HMCP12Y8W
Notes
1 Equipped with electronic trip device.
2 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The
corresponding trip setting is at 13X the
minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13X
setting is required for an intermediate
FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or
MCP ratings should be used.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-266
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Contents
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Description
Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-268
V4-T2-268
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Product Description
Motor protection circuit
breakers (MPCBs) provide
UL 489 branch circuit
protection, UL 508 and
CSA C22.2 No. 14 motor
protection, and meet IEC
60947-2 and 50947-4
requirements. Typical branch
motor loads are protected by
three-component starters,
consisting of breaker,
contactor and overload
relay, or fuse, contactor and
overload relay. The MPCB
application-specific protection
eliminates the need for motor
overload relay found in the
traditional three-component
starter assembly. The branch
motor load protection is
simplified to an MPCB and
contactor, reducing both
space requirements and
heat generation in customer
panels. Protection is provided
by application-specific
electronic trip units.
The electronic trip unit
provides typical motor
overload relay functionality
and short-circuit protection
against potential phase-tophase or phase-to-ground
faults.
●
●
●
●
Disconnecting means
Branch circuit short-circuit
protection
Overload protection
●
Class 5, 10, 15 and 20
Phase unbalance
protection
●
FDMP breaker trips
when there is a 40%
difference between any
phase compared to the
calculated three-phase
average
●
●
Phase loss protection
●
Active when the
maximum phase current
is greater than 50% of
FLA setting
●
Breaker will trip when
minimum phase current
is 25% or less than the
maximum phase current
●
Time delay of 1 or
2 seconds before
breaker trips
Thermal memory to
prevent immediate restart
after overload trip to allow
motor to cool down
The MPCB is based on
the Series C F-Frame.
Accessories for standard
Series C breakers apply to the
MPCB. Unlike Motor Circuit
Protectors (MCPs), MPCBs
are UL 489 listed with 35 kA
and 65 kA interruption
ratings.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-267
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Product Selection
2
FDMP and HFDMP
2
2
2
2
2
Continuous Amperes
35 kA Without Phase Unbalance,
Class 10 Motor Protection Only
35 kA With Phase
Unbalance and Adjustable
Motor Class Protection
65 kA Without Phase Unbalance,
Class 10 Motor Protection Only
65 kA With Phase
Unbalance and Adjustable
Motor Class Protection
80
FDMP3080L
FDMP3080JL
HFDMP3080L
HFDMP3080JL
100
FDMP3100L
FDMP3100JL
HFDMP3100L
HFDMP3100JL
160
FDMP3160L
FDMP3160JL
HFDMP3160L
HFDMP3160JL
205
FDMP3205L
FDMP3205JL
HFDMP3205L
HFDMP3205JL
FLA le Dial Setting
Continuous Amperes
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
2
80
40
50
60
70
80
—
—
—
100
80
—
90
—
100
—
—
—
2
160
100
115
130
145
160
—
—
—
205
160
170
180
195
205
—
—
—
2
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Specifications
2
2
Feature
FDMP
HFDMP
Interruption rating at 240 V
65 kA
100 kA
Interruption rating at 480 V
35 kA
65 kA
Interruption rating at 600 V
18 kA
25 kA
Icu/Ics at 240 V
65 kA/33 kA 1
100 kA/50 kA 1
Icu/Ics at 415 V
35 kA/18 kA 1
65 kA/33 kA 1
100% rated
No
No
2
FLA range (A)
40–205
40–205
Motor class protection
5, 10, 15, 20
5, 10, 15, 20
2
Phase unbalance protection (current)—active for phase current
>0.5 FLA setting
t40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds
t40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds
2
Phase loss protection (current)—active for phase current
>0.5 FLA setting
Min. phase d0.25 max. phase for 1 second
Min. phase d0.25 max. phase for 1 second
2
Thermal memory protection
Yes
Yes
High load indicator
—
—
2
Pre-detection relays
—
—
Factory installed
Factory installed
Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR
Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR
2
2
2
Internal accessories
2
Notes
1 IEC ratings available only on FWMP and HFWMP.
2
For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T2-89.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-268
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Contents
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment
Description
Page
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB). . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4)
Product Description
Eaton’s Type ELC current
limiter attachment for the
MCP is designed to provide
increased interrupting
capacity. The combination
may be used for the
application up to 200,000 A
symmetrical at 600 Vac,
making the MCP suitable for
use in network distribution
systems or other applications
where unusually high fault
currents are available. The
current limiter connects to
the load end of the MCP and
is provided with terminals
suitable for copper or
aluminum conductors.
(See table at right.)
Product Selection
Limiters are coordinated with
the MCP so that normal fault
currents are interrupted
automatically by the MCP
without any damage to the
limiter. Only the rare very
high fault is opened by
the limiter. Faults that are
interrupted by the limiter
also magnetically trip the
MCP, opening all three
poles, preventing singlephase operation.
Each of the three poles of the
Type ELC limiter is equipped
with an indicator that extends
when a fault is interrupted by
the limiter.
Type ELC Current
Limiter Attachment
2
ELC Current Limiter Attachment
MCP Rating
(Amperes)
Catalog
Number
3
ELC3003R
7
ELC3007R
15
ELC3015R
30
ELC3030R
50
ELC3050R
100
ELC3100R
150
ELC3150R
2
2
2
2
2
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes 1
Wire Range
AWG
Metric
(mm2)
2
50
14–2
2.5–35
2
100
1–4/0
50–95
150
1–4/0
50–95
50
14–2 2
2.5–35
100
—
—
150
—
—
Type ELC Current
Limiter Maximum Amperes
Standard Aluminum Terminals
Non-Standard Terminals (Steel)
Notes
1 Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in
UL 486A or UL 486B.
2 Optional on special order for copper cable only.
All HMCP 800 A and 1200 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T2-217.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-269
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Contents
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Description
2
Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-271
V4-T2-272
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module
2
Product Overview
Product Description
Features and Benefits
Standards and Certifications
Power demand continues to
grow in new and existing
facilities. To meet increased
demand, larger utility
supplies, spot networks and
large facility transformers are
installed. The increased
capacity of the electrical
source results in increased
fault currents in excess of
100 kA short-circuit
protection. Eaton
manufactures non-fused
current limiting modules with
interrupting capacities up to
200 kA at 600 Vac. Unlike
fused current limiters with a
one-time use, a current
limiter module provides an
automatic reset of the
module after a short-circuit
event. Resetting the moldedcase circuit breaker is the
only action required to restore
critical power to the system;
there is no time wasted
with sourcing the correct
replacement fuses or
module to bring the system
back online.
The current limiting breaker
modules use a unique contact
design to enhance the
system protection similar to
that of the circuit breaker.
When high short-circuit
current is flowing through the
contacts of these modules,
the design results in very high
interrupting capacities and
improved current limiting
characteristics.
Superior system protection:
●
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-270
●
●
●
Application Description
High-performance breakers
are most commonly applied
when very high fault levels
are available and with
applications where the
current limiting capability is
used upstream of the final
load to limit current. Typical
loads include lighting, power
distribution, and motor
control applications.
●
●
●
Auto reset improves
system uptime and
eliminates the need for
finding replacement parts
No fuses to replace,
reducing the overall cost of
ownership and the waste
created by fuses
Overloads, by using inverse
time current tripping
characteristics of the
molded-case circuit
breaker
Low-level short circuits, by
using instantaneous and/or
short-time delay tripping
characteristics of the
molded-case circuit
breaker
High-level short circuits, by
using ultra-high-speed,
blow-apart contacts of the
current limiting module in
series with the circuit
breaker contacts
Let-through currents, by
improved opening speed of
the contacts, the resultant
rapid rise of arc voltage
introduces impedance into
the system
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
●
UL 489
CSA C22.2
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
2
2
Series C High Performance Ratings
Type
Product
Amperes
480 Vac (UL)
600 Vac (UL)
FDC 3P thermal-magnetic
Breaker only
15–225
100
35
With limiter
40–200
200
200
2
2
2
FD Frame
FD IC Rating—200 kAIC at 600 Vac 1
Ampere
Rating
Breaker with Line Side
Mounted Current Limiter 2
2
Breaker with Load Side
Mounted Current Limiter 3
2
Thermal-Magnetic
40
FDC3040Q01
FDC3040Q02
45
FDC3045Q01
FDC3045Q02
50
FDC3050Q01
FDC3050Q02
60
FDC3060Q01
FDC3060Q02
70
FDC3070Q01
FDC3070Q02
80
FDC3080Q01
FDC3080Q02
90
FDC3090Q01
FDC3090Q02
100
FDC3100Q01
FDC3100Q02
110
FDC3110Q01
FDC3110Q02
125
FDC3125Q01
FDC3125Q02
150
FDC3150Q01
FDC3150Q02
175
FDC3175Q01
FDC3175Q02
200
FDC3200Q01
FDC3200Q02
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Limiter Terminals
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Body Material
Wire Type
Metric Wire
Range mm2
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Catalog
Number
Cu/Al
10–185
#8–350 (1)
TA250FJ 4
2
2
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
250
Aluminum
2
Breaker Load Terminals (For Line Mounted Limiters Only)
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Body Material
Wire Type
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Package of
Three Terminals
Catalog Number
2
2
2
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
100
Steel
Cu/AI
14–1/0
2.5–50
3T100FB
225
Aluminum
Cu/AI
4–4/0
25–95
3TA225FD
2
2
Notes
1 Line and load terminal included.
2 Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJ1PBK.
3 Four interphase barriers provided, (2) line end of breaker, (2) load end of limiter.
4 Load side breaker terminations included for units configured with line mounted limiters.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-271
2.3
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module
Frame
Height
Width
Depth
Weight in lbs (kg)
FD + limiter
12.06 (306.3)
4.13 (104.9)
3.39 (86.1)
8.50 (3.86)
2
2
FD-Frame With Current Limiter Module
2
2
4.13
(104.9)
4.12
(104.6)
2
2
2
2
12.06
(306.3)
2
2
2
3.34
(84.8)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-272
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
3.96
(100.5)
3.39
(86.1)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Contents
Series C Internal Accessories
Description
Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module. . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-275
V4-T2-294
V4-T2-304
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Internal Accessories
2
Product Overview
Alarm Switch
For remote indication of
automatic trip operation.
Does not function with
manual switching; however,
it will operate when either a
shunt trip or undervoltage
release is operated. A
“make” contact closes and a
“break” contact opens when
the alarm/lockout switch
operates. The switch
automatically resets when
the circuit breaker is reset.
Auxiliary Switch
The auxiliary switch provides
circuit breaker contact status
information by monitoring the
position of the molded cross
bar that contains the moving
contact arms. The auxiliary
switch is used for remote
indication and interlock
system verification, and
consists of one or two SPDT
switches housed in a plug-in
module. Each SPDT switch
has one “a” and one “b”
contact. When the circuit
breaker contacts are open,
the “a” contact is open and
the “b” contact is closed.
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm
Switch Combination
Each catalog number listed in
tables on Pages V4-T2-278
and V4-T2-279 includes one
auxiliary switch and one alarm
switch. In an auxiliary switch
ASL switch combination, the
auxiliary switch is always
mounted on the side of the
plug-in module next to the
center pole of the circuit
breaker.
Shunt Trip
The shunt trip provides
remote controlled tripping of
the circuit breaker. The shunt
trip consists of an intermittent
rated solenoid with a tripping
plunger and a cutoff switch
assembled to a plug-in
module. When required
for ground fault protection
applications, certain AC rated
shunt trips, as noted in the
electrical rating table, are
suitable for operation at
55 percent of rated voltage.
Select shunt trip catalog
number for the voltage within
the indicated voltage range.
Shunt trip coils are designed
to be applied at specific AC or
DC voltages within the voltage
range shown. Electrical ratings
are also shown on applicable
circuit breaker accessory
nameplates.
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Low energy shunt trip
devices are designed to
operate from low energy
output signals from dedicated
current sensors typically
applied in ground fault
protection schemes.
However, with a proper
control voltage source, they
may be applied in place of
conventional trip devices for
special applications. Flux
paths surrounding permanent
magnets used in the shunt
trip assembly hold a charged
spring poised in readiness to
operate the circuit breaker
trip mechanism.
When a 100 microfarad
capacitor charged to 28 Vdc
is discharged through the
shunt trip coil, the resultant
flux opposes the permanent
magnet flux field, which
releases the stored energy
in the spring to trip the
circuit breaker. As the circuit
breaker resets, the shunt
trip reset arm is actuated by
the circuit breaker handle,
resetting the shunt trip. The
plug-in module is mounted
in retaining slots in the
top of the trip unit. Coil is
intermittent-rated only.
Cutoff provisions required
in control circuit.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-273
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Undervoltage Release
Mechanism
The undervoltage release
mechanism monitors a
voltage (typically a line
voltage) and trips the circuit
breaker when the voltage
falls to between 70 and 35
percent of the solenoid coil
rating.
The undervoltage release
mechanism consists of a
continuous rated solenoid
with a plunger and tripping
lever mounted in a plug-in
module. The tab on the
tripping lever resets the
undervoltage release
mechanism when normal
voltage has been restored
and the circuit breaker handle
is moved to the reset (or OFF)
position. With less than
pickup voltage applied to the
undervoltage release
mechanism, the circuit
breaker contacts will not
touch when a closing
operation is attempted.
Accessory Terminal Block
(R-Frame)
(For fixed-mounted
configuration.)
Internal accessory wiring
leads are normally supplied
with pigtail leads (18 AWG)
that exit from the right side of
the circuit breaker. Where
specified, fixed-mounted
accessory terminal blocks are
available. A maximum of one
24-point terminal block can be
installed on the right side of
the circuit breaker for the
internal accessories.
PowerNet and Zone Interlock
Kits (OPTIM 550 only) K-, L- and
N-Frames
Eaton’s PowerNet
Communications Kit can be
ordered to add PowerNet
communications to an
existing OPTIM 550 breaker
in the field. An 18-inch (457.2
mm) wiring pigtail is routed to
the rear of the breaker: two
wires for PowerNet and two
wires for 24 Vdc (45 mA
load). It is recommended that
the power supply be an
“isolated high quality” unit.
For convenience in
determining the appropriate
number of terminal block
points required, refer
to Page V4-T2-274.
Note: Undervoltage release
mechanism accessories are not
designed for, and should not be
used as, circuit interlocks.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-274
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Product Selection
2
Alarm Switch
Alarm Switch
Electrical Ratings
Make
2
G-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) 1
Volts
Frequency
2
Amperes
Contact
Arrangement
Factory
Suffix
Catalog
Number 234
6
1 Make/1 Break
B3
1288C75G03
2
B13
1288C76G09
2
2
Alarm Switch
Break
240
50/60 Hz
Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination
240
50/60 Hz
6
1 Make/1 Break and 1A/1B
2
F-Frame Alarm Switch 1
Factory Installation Kit 5
Factory Mounted
2
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
2
Number of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Same Side
Rear 6
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
1
Left 7
B01
B02
B03
B04
A1L1LPK
A1L1LTK
Right
B05
B06
B07
B08
A1L1RPK
A1L1RTK
2
2
1 (Make only)
7
B09
B10
—
B11
A2L1LPK
A2L1LTK
Right
B12
B13
—
B14
A2L1RPK
A2L1RTK
Single-pole
B15 8
—
—
—
—
—
Left
2
2
2
F-Frame HMCP Alarm Switch 1
Factory Installation Kit 5
Factory Mounted
2
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
2
Number of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Same Side
Rear 6
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
1
Left 7
B01
B02
B03
B04
MA1L1LPK
MA1L1LTK
Right
B05
B06
B07
B08
MA1L1RPK
MA1L1RTK
2
B09
B10
—
B11
MA2L1LPK
MA2L1LTK
B12
B13
—
B14
MA2L1RPK
MA2L1RTK
2
Left
7
Right
2
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Alarm Switch
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 9
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Number of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
1
2
Terminal Block Pigtail Leads
2
Terminal Block
Same Side
Rear 7
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left j
B01
B02
B03
B04
A1L2LPK
A1L2LTK
Right
B05
B06
B07
B08
A1L2RPK
A1L2RTK 6
Notes
1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for
factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed; however, this is not
recommended for FDE breakers. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads,18 AWG (16–0.010).
3 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.
4 Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker.
5 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation.
6 Standard pigtail lead exit location.
7 Standard mounting location.
8 Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker.
9 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
j Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-275
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
Series C
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Alarm Switch
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
B03
B04
A1L3LPK
A1L3LTK
B07
B08
A1L3RPK
A1L3RTK
B10
—
B11
A2L3LPK
A2L3LTK
B13
—
B14
A2L3RPK
A2L3RTK
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
1
Left 3
B01
B02
Right 4
B05
B06
Left 3
B09
Right 4
B12
2
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Alarm Switch
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
2
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
B03
B04
A1L4LPK
A1L4LTK
B07
B08
A1L4RPK
A1L4RTK
B10
—
B11
A2L4LPK
A2L4LTK
B13
—
B14
A2L4RPK
A2L4RTK
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Left 3
B01
B02
Right
B05
B06
Left 3
B09
Right
B12
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Alarm Switch
2
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1M and 1B)
2
1
2
2
2
Suffix
Number
Same Side
2
2
Terminal Block
Opposite Side
1
2
Pigtail Leads
Rear 2
2
2
Terminal Block
Same Side
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
2
Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1M and 1B)
2
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
2
2
Factory Mounted
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1M and 1B)
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 5
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Terminal Block
Catalog
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Left
B01
B02
B03
B04
A1L5LPK
A1L5LTK
B05
B06
B07
B08
A1L5RPK
A1L5RTK
Left
B09
B10
—
B11
A2L5LPK
A2L5LTK
B12
B13
—
B14
A2L5RPK
A2L5RTK
3
R-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only)
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 5
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Pigtail Leads
Catalog
Number 6
2
1
B05
A1L6RPK
2
B12
A2L6RPK
2
Catalog
Number
Same Side
Suffix
Number 6
2
Suffix
Number
Opposite Side
Number of Contacts
(Make and Break)
2
Terminal Block
Rear 2
Right 3
Right
2
2
Pigtail Leads
Same Side
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location.
3 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
4 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
6 A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
2
2
2
V4-T2-276
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Auxiliary Switch
Auxiliary Switch
2
G-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only)
Electrical Ratings
a
b
Volts
Frequency
Amperes
Contact
Arrangement
Factory
Suffix
Catalog
Number 12
240
50/60 Hz
6
1a/1b
A3
1288C74G03
240
50/60 Hz
6
2a/2b
A6
1288C73G03
2
2
2
2
F-Frame and HMCP (F) Auxiliary Switch
Factory Installation Kit 4
Factory Mounted
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Number of
Contacts
A and B
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Rear 3
Suffix
Number
Opposite Side
Suffix
Number
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1
Left 5
A01
A02
A03
A04
A1X1PK
A1X1LTK
A15 7
A16 7
A17 7
—
E1X1PK
—
A05
A06
A07
A08
A1X1PK
A1X1RTK 8
A18 7
A19 7
A20 7
—
—
—
A09
A10
—
A11
A2X1LPK
A2X1LTK
Left 5
A21 7
A22 7
—
—
E2X1LPK
—
Right or Neutral 6
A12
A13
—
A14
A2X1RPK
A2X1RTK 8
Right or Neutral 6
A23 7
A24 7
—
—
E2X1RPK
—
Left 5
Right or Neutral
6
Right or Neutral 6
2
Left
5
Factory Mounted
Right
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Same Side
Suffix
Number
2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
A30
A31
A32
—
—
—
2
A33
A34
A35
—
—
—
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Factory Installation Kit j
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
1
2
2
Opposite Side
Suffix
Number
2
2
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch
Number of
Contacts
A and B
2
Rear
Suffix
Number
Trip Unit Type 210+
1
2
2
Trip Unit Type 310+
Right
2
Same Side
Suffix
Number
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
1
2
Factory Installation Kit 4
Connection Type and Location
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
2
2
F-Frame with Electronic Trip Unit Auxiliary Switch 9
Number of
Contacts
A and B
2
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Rear 3
Suffix
Number
Opposite Side
Suffix
Number
2
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Same Side
Suffix
Number
2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
2
Left
A01
A02
A03
A04
A1X2PK
A1X2LTK
Right k
A05
A06
A07
A08
A1X2PK
A1X2RTK 4
Left
A09
A10
—
A11
A2X2PK
A2X2LTK
Right k
A12
A13
—
A14
A2X2PK
A2X2RTK 4
Notes
1 Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010).
2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker.
3 Standard pigtail lead exit location.
4 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation.
5 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
6 Not for use on F-Frame with electronic trip unit.
7 125 volts (max.), 50/60 Hz switch for use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum.
8 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
9 Only for use on three-pole F-Frame breakers with electronic trip unit. Installation auxiliary switch for FD electronic breakers on right pole must be performed at
breaker factory.
j Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation or interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
k Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-277
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch
2
2
2
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Same Side
Suffix
Number
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
A01
A02
A03
A04
A1X3PK
A1X3LTK
Right 23
A05
A06
A07
A08
A1X3PK
A1X3RTK 4
Left
A09
A10
—
A11
A2X3PK
A2X3LTK
Right 23
A12
A13
—
A14
A2X3PK
A2X3RTK 4
—
2
3
Right
A21
A22
—
—
1482D28G10 67
Left
A18
—
—
A15
A3X3LPK
A3X3LTK
Right 3
A17
—
—
A16
A3X3RPK
A3X3RTK 4
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Factory Installation Kit 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Number of
Contacts
A and B
1
2
3
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Rear 2
Suffix
Number
Opposite Side
Suffix
Number
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
A1X4LTK
Left
A01
A02
A03
A04
A1X4PK
Right 2
A05
A06
A07
A08
A1X4PK
A1X4RTK 4
Left
A09
A10
—
A11
A2X4PK
A2X4LTK
Right 2
A12
A13
—
A14
A2X4PK
A2X4RTK 4
Left
A18
—
—
A15
A3X4PK
A3X4LTK
Right 2
A17
—
—
A16
A3X4PK
A3X4RTK 4
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch
2
2
Opposite Side
Suffix
Number
Left
2
2
Rear 2
Suffix
Number
1
2
2
Factory Installation Kit 1
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
2
2
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Number of
Contacts
A and B
2
2
Factory Mounted
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Factory Installation Kit 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Number of
Contacts
A and B
1
2
3
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Rear 2
Suffix
Number
Opposite Side
Suffix
Number
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left
A01
A02
A03
A04
A1X5PK
A1X5LTK
Right 2
A05
A06
A07
A08
A1X5PK
A1X5RTK 4
Left
A09
A10
—
A11
A2X5PK
A2X5LTK
Right 2
A12
A13
—
A14
A2X5PK
A2X5RTK 4
Left
A18
—
—
A15
A3X5LPK
A3X5LTK
Right 2
A17
—
—
A16
A3X5RPK
A3X5RTK 4
R-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only)
2
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 1
2
Number of
Contacts
A and B
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Pigtail Leads
Suffix
Number 5
Catalog
Number 5
2
A12
A2X6RPK
4
A19
A4X6RPK
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
5 A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of 2a/2b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
6 This option is not field installable.
7 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option.
V4-T2-278
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Auxiliary Switch and
Alarm Switch
Combination
a
b
2
F-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 1
Factory Mounted
Factory Installation Kit 2
2
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
2
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Same Side
Rear 3
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left 3
C01
C02
C03
AAL1LPK
AAL1LTK
Right
C04
C05
C06
AAL1RPK
AAL1RTK 4
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
2
2
2
Factory Installation Kit 2
2
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
2
F-Frame HMCP Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Factory Mounted
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
3
2
Same Side
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Same Side
Rear
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left 4
C01
C02
C03
MAAL1LPK
MAAL1LTK
Right
C04
C05
C06
MAAL1RPK
MAAL1RPK
2
2
2
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Field Installation Kits 5
Connection Type and Location
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1A and 1B)
(1M–1B)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Same Side
Rear 6
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1
Left
C01
C02
—
C03
AAL2LPK
AAL2LTK
Right 4
C04
C05
—
C06
AAL2RPK
AAL2RTK 4
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Field Mounted
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Same Side
Rear 6
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
1
Left
C01
C02
Right 67
C04
C05
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads
Right
C07
C08
Terminal Block
2
2
2
Field Installation Kits 5
Connection Type and Location
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1A and 1B)
(1M–1B)
2
2
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Factory Mounted
2
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
2
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
—
C03
AAL3LPK
AAL3LTK
—
C06
AAL3RPK 8
2
—
—
1482D28G09
AAL3RTK
9j
—
Notes
1 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination options (Cxx) are not available on FDE 310+ with LSG or LSIG trip units due to exit wire limitations. To obtain both
features, order a left mounting alarm switch (B01-B04 or B09-B11), and right mounting auxiliary switch (A30-A32).
2 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation.
3 Standard mounting location.
4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers
5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E64983.
6 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
7 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
8 Will not install on OPTIM Trip (RH).
9 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option.
j This option is not field installable.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-279
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
C03
AA114LPK
AA114LTK
C06
AA114RPK
AA114RTK 3
C12
AA214LPK
AA214LTK
—
C13
AA214RPK
AA214RTK 3
—
—
—
AA314LPK
—
—
—
—
AA314RPK
—
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
1A, 1B and
1 Make/1 Break
Left
C01
C02
—
Right 2
C04
C05
—
2A, 2B and
1 Make/1 Break
Left
C07
C08
—
Right 2
C10
C11
3A, 3B and
1 Make/1 Break
Left
C14
Right 2
C15
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
2
2
Factory Mounted
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
2
1A, 1B and
1 Make/1 Break
Left
2
2A, 2B and
1 Make/1 Break
2
2
2
2
C01
C02
—
C03
AA115LPK
AA115LTK
2
C04
C05
—
C06
AA115RPK
AA115RTK 3
Left
C07
C08
—
C12
AA215LPK
AA215LTK
Right 2
C10
C11
—
C13
AA215RPK
AA215RTK 3
Right
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 Not for use on four-pole circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-280
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Shunt Trip
Shunt Trip
2
2
G-Frame Shunt Trip (LH Three-Pole Only)
Electrical Ratings
ST
a
Catalog
Number
2
2
Volts
Frequency
Amperes
Suffix
Number
120
50/60 Hz
1.1
S1
1373D62G01
240
50/60 Hz
2.1
S2
1373D62G02
12
DC
2.8
S3
1373D62G15
24
DC
5.7
S4
1373D62G16
24
60 Hz
—
S7
1373D62G20
2
2
2
F-Frame and HMCP (F) Shunt Trip
2
Factory Installation Kit 1
Factory Mounted
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads 2
Terminal Block Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Same Side
Rear 3
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
12–24 Vac or Vdc
S01
S02
S03
S04
SNT1LP03K
SNT1LT03K
48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4
S05
S06
S07
S08
SNT1LP08K
SNT1LT08K
208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc
S09
S10
S11
S12
SNT1LP12K
SNT1LT12K
415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
S13
S14
S15
S16
SNT1LP18K
SNT1LT18K
S18
S19
S20
SNT1RP03K
SNT1RT03K 6
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
2
2
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 5
12–24 Vac or Vdc
S17
2
48–127 Vac or 48–60 Vdc 4
S21
S22
S23
S24
SNT1RP08K
SNT1RT08K 6
208–380 Vac or 110–127 Vdc
S25
S26
S27
S28
SNT1RP12K
SNT1RT12K 6
415–600 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
S29
S30
S31
S32
SNT1RP18K
SNT1RT18K 6
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation.
2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
3 Standard pigtail lead exit location.
4 120 Vac marked suitable for ground fault protection devices.
5 Standard mounting location.
6 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
2
2
2
G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed.
Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-281
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
2
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 1
2
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
2
12–24 Vac or Vdc
S41
S42
S43
S44
SNT2P04K
SNT2T04K
2
48–60 Vac or Vdc
S49
S50
S51
S52
SNT2P06K
SNT2T06K
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3
S09
S10
S11
S12
SNT2P11K
SNT2T11K
2
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
S13
S14
S15
S16
SNT2P14K
SNT2T14K
480–600 Vac
S17
S18
S19
S20
SNT2P18K
SNT2T18K
2
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings
12–24 Vac or Vdc
S45
S46
S47
S48
SNT2P04K
SNT2T04K 4
2
48–60 Vac or Vdc
S53
S54
S55
S56
SNT2P06K
SNT2T06K 4
2
S29
S30
S31
S32
SNT2P11K
SNT2T11K 4
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
S33
S34
S35
S36
SNT2P14K
SNT2T14K 4
480–600 Vac
S37
S38
S39
S40
SNT2P18K
SNT2T18K 4
2
2
110–240 Vac or
110–125 Vdc 3
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip
2
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 1
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
S43
S44
SNT3P04K
SNT3T04K
S51
S52
SNT3P06K
SNT3T06K
S10
S11
S12
SNT3P11K
SNT3T11K
S13
S14
S15
S16
SNT3P14K
SNT3T14K
S17
S18
S19
S20
SNT3P18K
SNT3T18K
S45
S46
S47
S48
SNT3P04K
SNT3T04K 4
48–60 Vac or Vdc
S53
S54
S55
S56
SNT3P06K
SNT3T06K 4
2
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3
S29
S30
S31
S32
SNT3P11K
SNT3T11K 4
2
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
S33
S34
S35
S36
SNT3P14K
SNT3T14K 4
480–600 Vac
S37
S38
S39
S40
SNT3P18K
SNT3T18K 4
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
12–24 Vac or Vdc
S41
S42
2
48–60 Vac or Vdc
S49
S50
2
110–240 Vac or 110–125 Vdc 3
S09
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
2
480–600 Vac
2
12–24 Vac or Vdc
2
2
2
2
2
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 56
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element.
4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers.
5 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-282
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Shunt Trip
Factory Mounted
2
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
2
1
Terminal Block
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side
Same Side
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
12–24 Vac or Vdc
S01
S02
S03
S04
SNT4LP03K
SNT4LT03K
48–60 Vac
S05
S06
S07
S08
SNT4LP05K
SNT4LT05K
48–60 Vdc
S85
S86
S87
—
SNT4LP23K
SNT4LT23K
110–240 Vac
S09
S10
S11
S12
SNT4LP11K
SNT4LT11K
110–125 Vdc
S41
S42
S43
S44
SNT4LP26K
SNT4LT26K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
S13
S14
S15
S16
SNT4LP14K
SNT4LT14K
480–600 Vac
S17
S18
S19
S20
SNT4LP18K
SNT4LT18K
12–24 Vac or Vdc
S21
S22
S23
S24
SNT4RP03K
SNT4RT03K
48–60 Vac
S25
S26
S27
S28
SNT4RP05K
SNT4RT05K
48–60 Vdc
S88
S89
S90
—
SNT4RP23K
SNT4RT23K
110–240 Vac
S29
S30
S31
S32
SNT4RP11K
SNT4RT11K
110–125 Vdc
S45
S46
S47
S48
SNT4RP26K
SNT4RT26K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
S33
S34
S35
S36
SNT4RP14K
SNT4RT14K
480–600 Vac
S37
S38
S39
S40
SNT4RP18K
SNT4RT18K
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
2
2
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
Right-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 3
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) three-pole trip units only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-283
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
2
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 1
2
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side
Same Side
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
9–24 Vac or Vdc
S01
S02
S03
S04
SNT5LP03K
SNT5LT03K
48–60 Vac
S05
S06
S07
S08
SNT5LP05K
SNT5LT05K
2
2
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Terminal Block
Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC Ratings 2
3
S09
S10
S11
S12
SNT5LP11K
SNT5LT11K
2
110–125 Vdc
S41
S42
S43
S44
SNT5LP26K
SNT5LT26K
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
S13
S14
S15
S16
SNT5LP14K
SNT5LT14K
2
480–600 Vac
S17
S18
S19
S20
SNT5LP18K
SNT5LT18K
48–60 Vdc
S21
S22
S23
S24
SNT5LP23K
SNT5LT23K
110–240 Vac
2
2
R-Frame Shunt Trip (RH Only)
2
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Pigtail Leads
2
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Suffix
Number 4
Catalog
Number 4
2
24 Vac or Vdc
S21
SNT6P03K
48–60 Vac
S25
SNT6P05K
2
110–240 Vac
S29
SNT6P11K
2
380–440 Vac or 220–250 Vdc
S33
SNT6P14K
480–600 Vac
S37
SNT6P18K
2
48–60 Vdc
S88
SNT6P23K
110–125 Vdc
S45
SNT6P26K
2
2
2
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits.
4 A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-284
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Low Energy Shunt Trip
Ordering Information
2
Select shunt trip catalog
number for the voltage within
the indicated voltage range.
Shunt trip coils are designed
to be applied at specific AC or
DC voltages within the
voltage range shown.
Electrical ratings are also
shown on applicable circuit
breaker accessory
nameplates.
2
Low Energy Shunt Trip
2
2
2
2
2
F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N- and R-Frames and HMCPs Low Energy Shunt Trip 1
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
UV
Mounting
Positions
(Pole)
Same Side Rear
Suffix
Number
3
Suffix
Number
2
2
Terminal Block
Opposite
Side
Same Side Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
2
F-Frame
4
LST1LTK
2
4
Left
NO1
NO2
NO3
NO4
LST1LPK
Right 3
NO5
NO6
NO7
NO8
LST1RPK 4
LST1RTK 4
Left
NO1
NO2
NO3
—
LST2LPK
—
Right 3
NO5
NO6
NO7
—
LST2RPK
—
2
NO1
NO2
NO3
—
LST3LPK
—
2
NO5
NO6
NO7
—
LST3RPK
—
2
2
2
J-Frame
K-Frame
Left 3
Right
56
L- and M-Frames
Left
NO1
NO2
NO3
—
LST4LPK
—
Right
NO5
NO6
NO7
—
LST4RPK
—
2
NO1
NO2
NO3
—
LST5LPK
—
2
NO1
—
—
—
LST6RPK
—
N-Frame
Left 3
R-Frame
Right
2
Notes
1 Cutoff provisions required in control circuit.
2 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
3 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
4 For F-Frame HMCP, add an “M” to beginning of catalog number. Field Installation Kit referenced for factory use only,
not UL listed for field installation.
5 For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only.
6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-285
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Ordering Information
Select handle reset
undervoltage release
mechanism catalog number
for the voltage within the
indicated voltage range.
Undervoltage release
mechanism coils are
designed to be applied at
specific AC or DC voltages
within the voltage range
shown on applicable circuit
breaker accessory
nameplates.
Undervoltage Release
Mechanism
G-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH Three-Pole Only)
Electrical Ratings
Volts (AC Only)
Frequency (Hz)
Amperes
Style Numbers 123
Factory
Suffix
120
50/60
0.05
1373D62G03
T1
2
24
50/60
0.22
1373D62G04
T2
48
50/60
0.11
1373D62G05
T3
2
60
50/60
0.10
1373D62G06
T4
110
50
0.049
1373D62G07
T5
2
208
60
0.026
1373D62G08
T6
2
220
50
0.025
1373D62G09
T7
240
50/60
0.024
1373D62G10
T8
2
380
50
0.015
1373D62G11
T9
415
50
0.013
1373D62G12
T10
2
440
50
0.012
1373D62G13
T11
480
60
0.01
1373D62G14
T12
2
UV
2
Notes
1 Includes 24-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads, 18 AWG (16–0.010).
2 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.
3 Suitable for mounting in left pole only of three-pole breaker.
2
2
G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation
should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-286
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
F-Frame Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP)
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
2
Connection Type and Location
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Rear 1
Opposite Side
Same Side
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
12 Vac
U01
U02
U03
U04
24 Vac
U05
U06
U07
U08
48 Vac
U37
U38
U39
U40
60 Vac
U97
U98
U99
U100
110–127 Vac
U13
U14
U15
U16
208–240 Vac
U17
U18
U19
U20
380–480 Vac
U21
U22
U23
U24
525–600 Vac
U25
U26
U27
U28
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
2
Terminal Block
Same Side
2
2
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings
2
2
2
2
2
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23
12 Vac
U49
U50
U51
U52
24 Vac
U53
U54
U55
U56
48 Vac
U85
U86
U87
U88
60 Vac
U101
U102
U103
U104
110–127 Vac
U61
U62
U63
U64
208–240 Vac
U65
U66
U67
U68
380–480 Vac
U69
U70
U71
U72
525–600 Vac
U73
U74
U75
U76
12 Vdc
U29
U30
U31
U32
24 Vdc
U33
U34
U35
U36
48 Vdc
U37
U38
U39
U40
60 Vdc
U97
U98
U99
U100
110–127 Vdc
U41
U42
U43
U44
220–250 Vdc
U45
U46
U47
U48
2
2
2
2
2
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings
2
2
2
2
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23
12 Vdc
U77
U78
U79
U80
24 Vdc
U81
U82
U83
U84
48 Vdc
U85
U86
U87
U88
60 Vdc
U101
U102
U103
U104
110–127 Vdc
U89
U90
U91
U92
220–250 Vdc
U93
U94
U95
U96
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Standard pigtail lead exit location.
2 Standard mounting location.
3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.
2
F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819.
Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be
done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-287
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
F-Frame Field Mounted Undervoltage Release Mechanism
F-Frame Breaker
2
2
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
2
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings
2
2
2
2
2
F-Frame Breaker HMCP
Factory Installation Kits 1
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
MUVH1LT02K
12 Vac
UVH1LP02K
UVH1LT02K
MUVH1LP02K
24 Vac
UVH1LP03K
UVH1LT03K
MUVH1LP03K
MUVH1LT03K
48 Vac
UVH1LP22K
UVH1LT22K
MUVH1LP22K
MUVH1LT22K
MUVH1LT24K
60 Vac
UVH1LP24K
UVH1LT24K
MUVH1LP24K
110–127 Vac
UVH1LP08K
UVH1LT08K
MUVH1LP08K
MUVH1LT08K
208–240 Vac
UVH1LP11K
UVH1LT11K
MUVH1LP11K
MUVH1LT11K
380–480 Vac
UVH1LP15K
UVH1LT15K
MUVH1LP15K
MUVH1LT15K
525–600 Vac
UVH1LP18K
UVH1LT18K
MUVH1LP18K
MUVH1LT18K
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 23
12 Vac
UVH1RP02K
UVH1RT02K
MUVH1RP02K
MUVH1RT02K
24 Vac
UVH1RP03K
UVH1RT03K
MUVH1RP03K
MUVH1RT03K
2
48 Vac
UVH1RP22K
UVH1RT22K
MUVH1RP22K
MUVH1RT22K
60 Vac
UVH1RP24K
UVH1RT24K
MUVH1RP24K
MUVH1RT24K
2
110–127 Vac
UVH1RP08K
UVH1RT08K
MUVH1RP08K
MUVH1RT08K
2
208–240 Vac
UVH1RP11K
UVH1RT11K
MUVH1RP11K
MUVH1RT11K
380–480 Vac
UVH1RP15K
UVH1RT15K
MUVH1RP15K
MUVH1RT15K
525–600 Vac
UVH1RP18K
UVH1RT18K
MUVH1RP18K
MUVH1RT18K
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings
12 Vdc
UVH1LP20K
UVH1LT20K
MUVH1LP20K
MUVH1LT20K
24 Vdc
UVH1LP21K
UVH1LT21K
MUVH1LP21K
MUVH1LT21K
48 Vdc
UVH1LP22K
UVH1LT22K
MUVH1LP22K
MUVH1LT22K
60 Vdc
UVH1LP24K
UVH1LT24K
MUVH1LP24K
MUVH1LT24K
110–127 Vdc
UVH1LP26K
UVH1LT26K
MUVH1LP26K
MUVH1LT26K
220–250 Vdc
UVH1LP28K
UVH1LT28K
MUVH1LP28K
MUVH1LT28K
MUVH1RT20K
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 23
12 Vdc
UVH1RP20K
UVH1RT20K
MUVH1RP20K
24 Vdc
UVH1RP21K
UVH1RT21K
MUVH1RP21K
MUVH1RT21K
2
48 Vdc
UVH1RP22K
UVH1RT22K
MUVH1RP22K
MUVH1RT22K
2
60 Vdc
UVH1RP22K
UVH1RT22K
MUVH1RP22K
MUVH1RT22K
110–127 Vdc
UVH1RP26K
UVH1RT26K
MUVH1RP26K
MUVH1RT26K
220–250 Vdc
UVH1RP28K
UVH1RT28K
MUVH1RP28K
MUVH1RT28K
2
2
2
Notes
1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation.
2 Standard mounting location.
3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-288
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
J-Frame and HMCP (J) Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Factory Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits
2
2
Terminal
Block 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
2
Field Mounted
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side Same Side
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block 3
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
2
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 4
12 Vac
U05
U06
U07
U08
UVH2LP02K
UVH2LT02K
24 Vac
U09
U10
U11
U12
UVH2LP03K
UVH2LT03K
48–60 Vac
U13
U14
U15
U16
UVH2LP05K
UVH2LT05K
110–127 Vac
U17
U18
U19
U20
UVH2LP08K
UVH2LT08K
208–240 Vac
U21
U22
U23
U24
UVH2LP11K
UVH2LT11K
380–480 Vac
U25
U26
U27
U28
UVH2LP15K
UVH2LT15K
U39
U40
UVH2RP02K
UVH2RT02K
2
2
2
2
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 3
2
12 Vac
U37
U38
24 Vac
U41
U42
U43
U44
UVH2RP03K
UVH2RT03K
48–60 Vac
U45
U46
U47
U48
UVH2RP05K
UVH2RT05K
110–127 Vac
U49
U50
U51
U52
UVH2RP08K
UVH2RT08K
208–240 Vac
U53
U54
U55
U56
UVH2RP11K
UVH2RT11K
380–480 Vac
U57
U58
U59
U60
UVH2RP15K
UVH2RT15K
2
2
2
2
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 4
12 Vdc
T01
T02
T03
T04
UVH2LP20K
UVH2LT20K
24 Vdc
T05
T06
T07
T08
UVH2LP21K
UVH2LT21K
48–60 Vdc
T09
T10
T11
T12
UVH2LP23K
UVH2LT23K
110–127 Vdc
T13
T14
T15
T16
UVH2LP26K
UVH2LT26K
220–250 Vdc
T17
T18
T19
T20
UVH2LP28K
UVH2LT28K
2
2
2
2
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 3
12 Vdc
T21
T22
T23
T24
UVH2RP20K
UVH2RT20K
24 Vdc
T25
T26
T27
T28
UVH2RP21K
UVH2RT21K
48–60 Vdc
T29
T30
T31
T32
UVH2RP23K
UVH2RT23K
110–127 Vdc
T33
T34
T35
T36
UVH2RP26K
UVH2RT26K
220–250 Vdc
T37
T38
T39
T40
UVH2RP28K
UVH2RT28K
2
2
2
Notes
1 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton.
2 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breakers.
4 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-289
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
K-Frame and HMCP (K) Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
2
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 1
2
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side Same Side
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
2
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2
12 Vac
U05
U06
U07
U08
UVH3LP02K
UVH3LT02K
2
24 Vac
U09
U10
U11
U12
UVH3LP03K
UVH3LT03K
48–60 Vac
U13
U14
U15
U16
UVH3LP05K
UVH3LT05K
2
110–127 Vac
U17
U18
U19
U20
UVH3LP08K
UVH3LT08K
2
208–240 Vac
U21
U22
U23
U24
UVH3LP11K
UVH3LT11K
380–480 Vac
U25
U26
U27
U28
UVH3LP15K
UVH3LT15K
UVH3RT02K
2
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 345
12 Vac
U37
U38
U39
U40
UVH3RP02K
2
24 Vac
U41
U42
U43
U44
UVH3RP03K
UVH3RT03K
48–60 Vac
U45
U46
U47
U48
UVH3RP05K
UVH3RT05K
110–127 Vac
U49
U50
U51
U52
UVH3RP08K
UVH3RT08K
2
208–240 Vac
U53
U54
U55
U56
UVH3RP11K
UVH3RT11K
380–480 Vac
U57
U58
U59
U60
UVH3RP15K
UVH3RT15K
2
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2
12 Vdc
T01
T02
T03
T04
UVH3LP20K
UVH3LT20K
2
24 Vdc
T05
T06
T07
T08
UVH3LP21K
UVH3LT21K
2
48–60 Vdc
T09
T10
T11
T12
UVH3LP23K
UVH3LT23K
110–127 Vdc
T13
T14
T15
T16
UVH3LP26K
UVH3LT26K
2
220–250 Vdc
T17
T18
T19
T20
UVH3LP28K
UVH3LT28K
2
12 Vdc
T21
T22
T23
T24
UVH3RP20K
UVH3RT20K
24 Vdc
T25
T26
T27
T28
UVH3RP21K
UVH3RT21K
2
48–60 Vdc
T29
T30
T31
T32
UVH3RP23K
UVH3RT23K
2
110–127 Vdc
T33
T34
T35
T36
UVH3RP26K
UVH3RT26K
220–250 Vdc
T37
T38
T39
T40
UVH3RP28K
UVH3RT28K
2
2
2
2
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 345
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.
5 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-290
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
L-, HMCP (L) and (M)-Frames and Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Factory Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits
2
1
Terminal
Block
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
2
Field Mounted
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side Same Side
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
2
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2
12 Vac
U05
U06
U07
U08
UVH4LP02K
UVH4LT02K
24 Vac
U09
U10
U11
U12
UVH4LP03K
UVH4LT03K
48–60 Vac
U13
U14
U15
U16
UVH4LP05K
UVH4LT05K
110–127 Vac
U17
U18
U19
U20
UVH4LP08K
UVH4LT08K
208–240 Vac
U21
U22
U23
U24
UVH4LP11K
UVH4LT11K
380–480 Vac
U25
U26
U27
U28
UVH4LP15K
UVH4LT15K
2
2
2
2
Right-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 34
2
12 Vac
U37
U38
U39
U40
UVH4RP02K
UVH4RT02K
24 Vac
U41
U42
U43
U44
UVH4RP03K
UVH4RT03K
48–60 Vac
U45
U46
U47
U48
UVH4RP05K
UVH4RT05K
110–127 Vac
U49
U50
U51
U52
UVH4RP08K
UVH4RT08K
208–240 Vac
U53
U54
U55
U56
UVH4RP11K
UVH4RT11K
380–480 Vac
U57
U58
U59
U60
UVH4RP15K
UVH4RT15K
2
2
2
2
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2
12 Vdc
T01
T02
T03
T04
UVH4LP20K
UVH4LT20K
24 Vdc
T05
T06
T07
T08
UVH4LP21K
UVH4LT21K
48–60 Vdc
T09
T10
T11
T12
UVH4LP23K
UVH4LT23K
110–127 Vdc
T13
T14
T15
T16
UVH4LP26K
UVH4LT26K
220–250 Vdc
T17
T18
T19
T20
UVH4LP28K
UVH4LT28K
2
2
2
2
Right-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 34
12 Vdc
T21
T22
T23
T24
UVH4RP20K
UVH4RT20K
24 Vdc
T25
T26
T27
T28
UVH4RP21K
UVH4RT21K
48–60 Vdc
T29
T30
T31
T32
UVH4RP23K
UVH4RT23K
110–127 Vdc
T33
T34
T35
T36
UVH4RP26K
UVH4RT26K
220–250 Vdc
T37
T38
T39
T40
UVH4RP28K
UVH4RT28K
2
2
2
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-291
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame and HMCP (N) Undervoltage Release Mechanism
2
2
2
2
Factory Mounted
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Voltage Rating
(AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz)
Terminal Block
Same Side
Rear 2
Opposite Side Same Side
Pigtail Leads
Terminal Block
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Left-Pole Mounting AC Ratings 2
12 Vac
U05
U06
U07
U08
UVH5LP02K
UVH5LT02K
24 Vac
U09
U10
U11
U12
UVH5LP03K
UVH5LT03K
2
48–60 Vac
U13
U14
U15
U16
UVH5LP05K
UVH5LT05K
2
110–127 Vac
U17
U18
U19
U20
UVH5LP08K
UVH5LT08K
208–240 Vac
U21
U22
U23
U24
UVH5LP11K
UVH5LT11K
2
380–480 Vac
U25
U26
U27
U28
UVH5LP29K
UVH5LT29K
2
12 Vdc
T01
T02
T03
T04
UVH5LP20K
UVH5LT20K
24 Vdc
T05
T06
T07
T08
UVH5LP21K
UVH5LT21K
2
48–60 Vdc
T09
T10
T11
T12
UVH5LP23K
UVH5LT23K
2
110–127 Vdc
T13
T14
T15
T16
UVH5LP26K
UVH5LT26K
220–250 Vdc
T17
T18
T19
T20
UVH5LP28K
UVH5LT28K
2
2
Left-Pole Mounting DC Ratings 2
R-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only)
Factory Mounted
2
Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location
Field Installation Kits 3
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Leads
Pigtail Leads
2
Voltage Rating
(AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Suffix
Number 4
Catalog
Number 4
2
12 Vac
U37
UVH6RP02K
24 Vac
U41
UVH6RP03K
2
48–60 Vac
U45
UVH6RP05K
110–127 Vac
U49
UVH6RP08K
2
208–240 Vac
U53
UVH6RP11K
2
380–500 Vac
U57
UVH6RP29K
12 Vdc
T21
UVH6RP20K
2
24 Vdc
T25
UVH6RP21K
48–60 Vdc
T29
UVH6RP23K
2
110–125 Vdc
T33
UVH6RP26K
220–250 Vdc
T37
UVH6RP28K
2
2
2
Notes
1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E64983.
2 Standard mounting location—leads exit rear of breaker.
3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
4 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-292
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame)
Accessory Terminal
Block (R-Frame)
2
R-Frame Accessory Terminal Block 1
Factory Installed
Field Mounted
2
Suffix
Number
Catalog
Number
2
Q01
TBRDK
2
2
2
Number of Control Wires for Each Internally Mounted Accessory
Number of Contacts
per Single Accessory
Required Number
of Wires
2
Auxiliary switch
2a/2b
4a/4b
6
12
2
Alarm (Signal)/
Lockout switch
1m/1b
2m/2b
6
12
Shunt trip
N/A
2
2
Low energy shunt
N/A
2
Undervoltage release mechanism
N/A
2
Type of Accessory
2
2
2
PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only)
K-, L- and N-Frames
PowerNet and Zone
Interlock Kits
2
PowerNet Interlock Kit 2
Circuit
Breaker
Factory Install
Suffix
Catalog
Number
2
K-Frame
PN
ICK550K
L-Frame
PN
ICK550L
2
N-Frame
PN
ICK550N
2
2
2
Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23
Circuit
Breaker
Factory Install
Suffix
Catalog
Number
2
K-Frame
ZG
ZGK550K
L-Frame
ZG
ZGK550L
2
N-Frame
ZG
ZGK550N
2
2
PowerNet and Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 23
Circuit
Breaker
Factory Install
Suffix
Catalog
Number
K-Frame
ZGP
ZGPK550K
L-Frame
ZGP
ZGPK550L
N-Frame
ZGP
ZGPK550N
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 One 24-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped
from warehouse as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram
(IL 29C714).
2 Installation of these kits restrict any other attachments from being installed in the RH pole.
3 Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit (catalog number GFAU).
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-293
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Alarm Switch
2
2
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 67
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
125
DC
0.50 3
2500
125
DC
0.50 3
2500
250
DC
0.25 3
2500
2
250
DC
0.25 3
2500
2
125/250
50/60 Hz
63
2000
28
DC
33
2000
28
DC
54
2000
2
2
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data
Single-Pole Circuit Breakers
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data
Frequency
600
50/60 Hz
125
DC
250
DC
0.25 3
2500
Maximum
Current Amperes
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
125
DC
0.50 3
2500
250
DC
0.25 3
2500
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 9j
6
2500
Maximum
Voltage
0.50 3
2500
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data
67
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
125
DC
0.50 3
2500
250
DC
0.25 3
2500
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
125
DC
0.50 3
2500
250
DC
0.25 3
2500
Notes
1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
3 Non-inductive load.
4 Inductive (L/R = 0.026).
5 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
7 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
8 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
i Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
j Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-294
Frequency
56
Maximum
Voltage
2
Maximum
Voltage
8
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Auxiliary Switch
2
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 2
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
125 3
50/60 Hz
1
2500
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
4
2500
2500
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
125
DC
0.50
125
DC
0.50 4
2500
250
DC
0.25 4
250
DC
0.25 4
2500
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600
50/60 Hz
6
2
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
2500
125
DC
0.50 4
2500
4
2500
250
DC
0.25 4
2500
2500
125
DC
0.50
250
DC
0.25 4
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 25
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
2
2
Frequency
2
600
50/60 Hz
6
125
DC
0.50 4
2
DC
0.25 4
250
Notes
1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
3 For use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum.
4 Non-inductive load.
5 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
6 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
7 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
8 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue.
0.25 4
2
Maximum
Current Amperes
2500
0.50
DC
2
Maximum
Voltage
2500
DC
250
2
R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 78
4
125
2
2
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 26
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-295
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
2
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 12
2
2
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 25
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
125
DC
0.50 3
2200
125
DC
0.50 3
2500
250
DC
0.25 3
2200
250
DC
0.25 3
2500
2
2
2
2
2
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 24
Maximum
Voltage
Maximum
Current Amperes
Frequency
600
50/60 Hz
125
DC
250
DC
0.25 3
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 26
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
Maximum
Voltage
6
2500
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
0.50 3
2500
125
DC
0.50 3
2500
2500
250
DC
0.25 3
2500
2
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 25
2
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
2
600
50/60 Hz
6
2500
125
DC
0.50 3
2500
250
DC
0.25 3
2500
2
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
Maximum
Current Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand Voltage
Notes
1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
3 Non-inductive load.
4 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
5 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
6 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-296
Frequency
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Shunt Trip
2
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 678
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123
50/60 Hz
DC
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage
12
6.75
24
50/60 Hz
VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage
75
12
9
6.75
300
24
48
36
92
60
36
140
110
156
120
2
DC
VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage
100
12
9
VA
45
12
8.4
35
9
400
24
9
200
24
8.4
170
48
36
100
60
36
160
48
—
830
48
—
710
60
—
1280
60
—
1105
480
110
77
55
110 5
156
570
120
77
60
100
110
77
110
66
120 5
60
120
120
77
130
127
156
640
125
77
71
127 5
208
156
180
60
140
125
77
140
—
—
—
208 5
60
420
—
—
—
220
156
200
—
—
—
220 5
60
470
—
—
—
240
156
240
—
—
—
240 5
60
550
—
—
—
380
300
610
127
—
72
380
285
95
220
154
41
415
300
130
220
—
110
400
285
108
250
154
54
440
300
330
250
—
140
415
285
120
—
154
—
480
300
380
—
—
—
440
285
136
—
154
—
525
300
450
—
—
—
480
360
40
—
—
—
550
300
530
—
—
—
525
360
50
—
—
—
600
300
590
—
—
—
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 124
50/60 Hz
DC
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage
VA
12
9
31
12
8.4
50
24
9
173
24
8.4
247
48
36
686
48
33.6
1094
60
36
1014
60
33.6
1698
5
60.5
66
110
77
112
120 5
60.5
84
120
77
138
127 5
60.5
102
125
77
150
208 5
60.5
354
—
77
—
220 5
60.5
396
—
—
—
110
5
60.5
432
—
—
—
380
285
180
110
154
40
400
285
200
120
154
58
415
285
240
125
154
—
440
285
610
127
154
—
480
360
34
—
—
—
525
360
42
—
—
—
550
360
50
—
—
—
600
360
60
—
—
—
240
550
360
50
—
—
—
600
360
70
—
—
—
Notes
1 Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds.
3 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
4 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
5 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with
accessory kits.
6 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
7 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 8 milliseconds.
8 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-297
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
L- and M-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 125
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
2
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage
2
12
DC
VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage
9
45
12
24
9
200
2
48
34
2
60
34
110 4
4
DC
VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating Voltage
VA
9
35
24
16.8
200
24
16.8
170
24
9
170
48
33.6
830
48
33.6
710
830
48
34
710
60
33.6
1280
60
33.6
1150
1280
60
34
1105
110 4
60
100
110
77
110
60
100
110
77
110
120 4
60
120
120
77
130
60
120
120
77
130
127 4
60
140
125
77
140
2
120
127 4
60
140
125
77
140
208 4
60
420
—
—
—
2
208 4
60
420
—
77
—
220 4
60
470
—
—
—
220 4
60
470
—
—
—
240 4
60
550
—
—
—
240 4
60
550
—
—
—
380
266
95
220
154
41
2
380
266
95
220
154
41
400
266
108
250
—
54
400
266
108
250
—
54
415
266
120
—
—
—
2
415
266
120
—
—
—
440
266
136
—
—
—
440
266
136
—
—
—
480
336
40
—
—
—
2
480
336
40
—
—
—
525
336
50
—
—
—
2
525
336
50
—
—
—
550
336
50
—
—
—
550
336
50
—
—
—
600
336
70
—
—
—
600
336
70
—
—
—
Notes
1 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
2 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds.
3 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
4 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with
accessory kits.
5 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-298
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
R-Frame Electrical Rating Data 123456
Application Ratings
2
Electrical Operating Ratings
Suffix
Number
Voltage (V)
Frequency
(Hz)
Supply
Voltage (V)
Minimum
Operating Voltage (V)
Ip (A)
Irms at 0.250s (A)
Irms at 0.033s (A)
VA
One Minute Dielectric
Withstand Voltage (V)
2
03/03K
24
50/60
24
16.8
36.1
—
25.5
612
1050
24
DC
24
16.8
36.1
16.5
—
396
1050
2
48–60
50/60
48
34.0
13.1
—
9.2
450
1120
48–60
50/60
60
34.0
17.2
—
12.2
740
1120
05/05K
11/11K 3
14/14K
18/18K
23/23K
26/26K
110–240
50/60
110
60.5
4.2
—
3.0
330
1480
110–240
50/60
120
60.5
4.5
—
3.2
390
1480
110–240
50/60
127
60.5
4.6
—
3.3
430
1480
110–240
50/60
208
60.5
7.9
—
5.6
1170
1480
110–240
50/60
220
60.5
8.5
—
6.0
1370
1480
110–240
50/60
240
60.5
8.7
—
6.1
1470
1480
380–440
50/60
380
266.0
4.5
—
3.2
1220
1880
380–440
50/60
415
266.0
5.0
—
3.6
1500
1880
380–440
50/60
440
266.0
5.3
—
3.7
1640
1880
220–250
DC
220
154.0
—
2.4
—
530
1500
220–250
DC
250
154.0
—
2.7
—
680
1500
480–600
50/60
480
336.0
0.6
—
0.4
200
2200
480–600
50/60
525
336.0
0.7
—
0.5
270
2200
480–600
50/60
550
336.0
0.7
—
0.5
280
2200
480–600
50/60
600
336.0
0.8
—
0.6
360
2200
48–60
DC
48
34.0
—
9.8
—
470
1120
48–60
DC
60
34.0
—
11.6
—
700
1120
110–125
DC
110
77.0
—
3.3
—
370
1250
110–125
DC
120
77.0
—
3.6
—
440
1250
110–125
DC
125
77.0
—
3.8
—
480
1250
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds.
2 Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 62 milliseconds, at rated voltage.
3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations and 2500 mechanical operations.
4 Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute.
5 Maximum operating voltage—110% of maximum voltage range rating.
6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are yellow and white.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-299
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
2
F-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1
2
50/60 Hz
DC
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup Voltage
Pickup Voltage
Maximum
Maximum
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Minimum
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
VA
12
4.2
6.3
7.6
1.3
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
2.8
2
12
4.2
6.3
7.6
2.5
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
2.8
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
1.4
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
1.6
2
48
21.0
33.6
40.8
1.2
48
21.0
33.6
40.8
1.3
60
21.0
33.6
40.8
1.9
60
21.0
33.6
40.8
2.0
2
110
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.3
110
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.5
2
120
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.5
120
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.7
127
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.7
125
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.9
2
208
84.0
145.6
176.8
2.2
220
87.5
154.0
187.0
2.6
220
84.0
145.6
176.8
2.4
250
87.5
154.0
187.0
3.4
2
240
84.0
145.6
176.8
2.9
—
—
—
—
—
380
168.0
266.0
323.0
2.9
—
—
—
—
—
2
415
168.0
266.0
323.0
3.5
—
—
—
—
—
2
440
168.0
266.0
323.0
3.9
—
—
—
—
—
480
168.0
266.0
323.0
4.6
—
—
—
—
—
2
525
210.0
367.0
446.0
4.3
—
—
—
—
—
550
210.0
367.0
446.0
4.8
—
—
—
—
—
2
600
210.0
367.0
446.0
5.8
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
J-Frame Electrical Rating Data 23
2
50/60 Hz
DC
Pickup Voltage
2
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
Dropout Voltage
Pickup Voltage
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
VA
2
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
1.9
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
3.9
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
1.6
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
2
48
21.0
33.6
40.8
2.5
3.1
48
21.0
33.6
40.8
60
21.0
33.6
40.8
2.0
3.8
60
21.0
33.6
40.8
2
110
44.5
77.0
3.1
93.5
1.8
110
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.6
2
120
44.5
127
44.5
77.0
93.5
2.1
120
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.9
77.0
93.5
2.4
125
44.5
77.0
93.5
2
208
2.2
84.0
145.6
176.8
2.7
220
87.5
154.0
187.0
3.1
220
84.0
145.6
176.8
3.1
250
87.5
154.0
187.0
4.0
2
240
84.0
145.6
176.8
3.8
—
—
—
—
—
2
380
168.0
266.0
323.0
3.4
—
—
—
—
—
415
168.0
266.0
323.0
4.0
—
—
—
—
—
440
168.0
266.0
323.0
4.6
—
—
—
—
—
480
168.0
266.0
323.0
5.4
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
2
VA
Supply
Voltage
Notes
1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
2 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
3 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton.
2
2
2
V4-T2-300
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
K-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1
50/60 Hz
2
DC
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup Voltage
Pickup Voltage
Maximum
Maximum
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Minimum
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
VA
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
1.9
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
1.6
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
3.9
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
3.1
48
21.0
33.6
40.8
2.5
48
21.0
33.6
40.8
2.0
60
21.0
33.6
40.8
3.8
60
21.0
33.6
40.8
3.1
110
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.8
110
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.6
120
44.5
77.0
93.5
2.1
120
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.9
127
44.5
77.0
93.5
2.4
125
44.5
77.0
93.5
2.2
208
84.0
145.6
176.8
2.7
220
87.5
154.0
187.0
3.1
220
84.0
145.6
176.8
3.1
250
87.5
154.0
187.0
4.0
240
84.0
145.6
176.8
3.8
—
—
—
—
—
380
168.0
266.0
323.0
3.4
—
—
—
—
—
415
168.0
266.0
323.0
4.0
—
—
—
—
—
440
168.0
266.0
323.0
4.6
—
—
—
—
—
480
168.0
266.0
323.0
5.4
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data 1
50/60 Hz
DC
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup Voltage
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
VA
Supply
Voltage
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
1.9
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
48
21.0
33.6
40.8
60
21.0
33.6
110
44.5
77.0
120
44.5
77.0
2
Dropout Voltage
Pickup Voltage
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
VA
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
1.6
3.9
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
3.1
2.5
48
21.0
33.6
40.8
2.0
40.8
3.8
60
21.0
33.6
40.8
3.1
93.5
1.8
110
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.6
93.5
2.1
120
44.5
77.0
93.5
1.9
127
44.5
77.0
93.5
2.4
125
44.5
77.0
93.5
2.2
208
84.0
145.6
176.8
2.7
220
87.5
154.0
187.0
3.1
220
84.0
145.6
176.8
3.1
250
87.5
154.0
187.0
4.0
240
84.0
145.6
176.8
3.8
—
—
—
—
—
380
168.0
266.0
323.0
3.4
—
—
—
—
—
415
168.0
266.0
323.0
4.0
—
—
—
—
—
440
168.0
266.0
323.0
4.6
—
—
—
—
—
480
168.0
266.0
323.0
5.4
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Note
1 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-301
2.3
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
N-Frame Electrical Rating Data 1
50/60 Hz
DC
Dropout Voltage
Pickup Voltage
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup Voltage
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
VA
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
1.9
2
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
3.9
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
1.6
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
48
21.0
33.6
40.8
3.1
2.5
48
21.0
33.6
40.8
2.0
2
60
21.0
33.6
110
44.5
77.0
40.8
3.8
60
21.0
33.6
40.8
3.1
93.5
1.8
110
44.5
77.0
93.5
2
120
44.5
1.6
77.0
93.5
2.1
120
44.5
77.0
93.5
2
127
1.9
44.5
77.0
93.5
2.4
125
44.5
77.0
93.5
2.2
208
84.0
145.6
176.8
2.7
220
87.5
154.0
187.0
3.1
2
220
84.0
145.6
176.8
3.1
220
87.5
154.0
187.0
—
240
84.0
145.6
176.8
3.8
250
—
—
—
4.0
2
380
175.0
266.0
323.0
3.4
—
—
—
—
—
415
175.0
266.0
323.0
4.0
—
—
—
—
—
2
480
175.0
266.0
323.0
4.6
—
—
—
—
—
500
175.0
266.0
323.0
5.4
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
2
Supply
Voltage
Note
1 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-302
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
R-Frame AC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12
Application
Ratings
Electrical Operating Ratings
Catalog
Suffix
Voltage
(V)
Supply
Voltage
(V)
Minimum
02/02K
12
12
4.2
03/03K
24
24
05/05K
48–60
48
08/08K
11/11K
29/29K
110–127
208–240
380–500
Dropout Voltage (V)
2
Approximate Operating Time (ms)
Maximum
Pickup
Voltage
(V) Max.
VA
Minimum
UVR
Response 3
Initiation
Circuit Breaker
Contact Separation 4
Maximum Circuit
Breaker
Contact Opening
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage (V) 5
8.4
10.2
2.3
5
46
77
1024
8.4
16.8
21.0
33.5
20.4
3.1
5
46
77
1048
40.8
3.4
5
46
77
1120
60
21.0
33.5
40.8
6.0
5
46
77
1120
110
120
44.5
77.0
93.5
3.3
5
46
77
1254
44.5
77.0
93.5
3.6
5
46
77
1254
127
44.5
77.0
93.5
3.8
5
46
77
1254
208
84.0
145.6
176.8
4.2
5
46
77
1480
220
84.0
145.6
176.8
6.6
5
46
77
1480
240
84.0
145.6
176.8
7.2
5
46
77
1480
380
168.0
266.0
323.0
3.8
5
46
77
2000
415
168.0
266.0
323.0
8.3
5
46
77
2000
440
168.0
266.0
323.0
8.8
5
46
77
2000
480
168.0
266.0
323.0
9.6
5
46
77
2000
500
168.0
266.0
323.0
10.0
5
46
77
2000
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Application
Ratings
Electrical Operating Ratings
Catalog
Suffix
Voltage
(V)
Supply
Voltage
(V)
20/20K
12
12
4.2
8.4
10.2
3.4
5
46
77
1024
21/21K
24
24
8.4
16.8
20.4
4.3
5
46
77
1048
23/23K
48–60
48
21.0
33.5
40.8
4.8
5
46
77
1120
60
21.0
33.5
40.8
7.2
5
46
77
1120
110
43.8
77.0
93.5
3.3
5
46
77
1250
120
43.8
77.0
93.5
3.6
5
46
77
1250
125
43.8
77.0
93.5
3.8
5
46
77
1250
220
87.5
154.0
187.0
6.6
5
46
77
1500
250
87.5
154.0
187.0
7.5
5
46
77
1500
26/26K
28/28K
110–127
220–250
Minimum
Maximum
Approximate Operating Time (ms)
Pickup
Voltage
(V) Max.
VA
Minimum
UVR
Response 3
2
2
R-Frame DC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings 12
Dropout Voltage (V)
2
Initiation
Circuit Breaker
Contact Separation 4
Maximum Circuit
Breaker
Contact Opening
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage (V) 5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
2 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are orange and brown.
3 UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown.
4 Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate.
5 For 1 minute.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-303
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Contents
Series C External Accessories
Description
2
Page
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-Frame (15–100 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-Frame (10–225 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-Frame (70–250 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-Frame (70–400 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L-Frame (125–600 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Frame (300–800 Amperes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N-Frame (400–1200 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-Frame (800–2500 Amperes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) . . . . . . . .
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0–4) . . . . .
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Accessories
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-116
V4-T2-117
V4-T2-118
V4-T2-121
V4-T2-135
V4-T2-153
V4-T2-161
V4-T2-185
V4-T2-211
V4-T2-222
V4-T2-237
V4-T2-256
V4-T2-267
V4-T2-269
V4-T2-270
V4-T2-273
V4-T2-308
V4-T2-326
V4-T2-327
V4-T2-328
2
2
2
External Accessories
2
Product Overview
2
End Cap Kit
The end cap kit slides onto
the line or load conductor of
the circuit breaker and acts as
a threaded adapter for the
conductor to accept a ring
terminal or other bolt-on
connector. The end cap kit
is available with English and
metric thread sizes. (Field
installation only.) Listed per
UL File E7819.
J-Frame Plug Nut
The plug nut is used in
applications where screwconnected ring-type terminals
are preferred to connect
cables to circuit breaker
conductors. The plug nut is
press-fit into the opening in
the circuit breaker terminal
conductor. Screws and
washers are supplied by
customer.
Keeper Nut
The keeper nut slides onto
the line or load conductor of
the circuit breaker and acts as
a threaded adapter for the
conductor to accept a ring
terminal or other bolt-on
connector. The keeper nut
is available with English and
metric thread sizes. Screws
and washers are supplied by
customer. (Field installation
only.) Listed per UL File
E7819.
Terminal Adapter
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
L-, M-, N-Frames
2
Not required. Terminals are
threaded.
Control Wire Terminal Kit
The control wire terminal kit
provides a means to tap off
control power from a main
disconnect, using the
provided male end of a quick
disconnect.
For use with steel or stainless
steel terminals only.
Note: Terminal Kits contain one
terminal for each pole and one
terminal cover.
Multiwire Connectors
Eaton’s field-installed
multiwire connectors for the
load side (OFF) end terminals
are used to distribute the load
from the circuit breaker to
multiple devices without the
use of separate distribution
terminal blocks.
Multiwire lug kits include
mounting hardware,
insulators and tin-plated
aluminum connectors to
replace three mechanical
load lugs. UL listed as used
on the load side (OFF) end.
Terminal Shields
Terminal shields provide
protection against accidental
contact with live line side
terminations. Terminal
shields are fabricated from
high dielectric insulating
material and fasten over
the front terminal access
openings. Small openings in
the shields provide limited
access to the terminals for
tightening connectors.
(Field installation only.)
2
V4-T2-304
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Rear Fed Terminals.
Rear fed terminals allow
the cable to connect to the
breaker from the back instead
of the top. Terminal shields or
interphase barriers are
included with each rear fed
terminal kit (depending on
frame size). When catalog
number starts with a 3, it
indicates a kit with three
terminals in each kit. Catalog
number beginning with a TA
indicates one terminal.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Terminal End Covers
The terminal end covers are
designed for use in motor
control center applications
where, because of confined
spaces, line side conductors
are normally custom fitted.
The molded end covers are
made of high dielectric glasspolyester and slide over the
line ends of the circuit
breaker. Close fitting
conductor openings are
molded into the end covers.
The end cover and circuit
breaker case fit together to
form terminal compartments
that isolate discharged
ionizing gases during circuit
breaker tripping. Terminal end
covers are available with two
conductor opening diameters,
0.25-inch (6.4 mm) and 0.41inch (10.4 mm), and are listed
per UL File E7819. (Field
installation only.)
Interphase Barriers
The interphase barriers
provide additional electrical
clearance between circuit
breaker poles for special
termination applications. The
barriers are high dielectric
insulating plates that are
installed in the molded slots
between the terminals. (Field
installation only.) Two per
package.
Base Mounting Plate
Suitable for mounting six
single-pole circuit breakers.
DIN Rail Adapter
For use with standard 35 mm
DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or
35 x 15 mm per DIN
EN50022.
Adapter mounting screws
included are for use with twoand three-pole circuit
breakers. Adapters for singlepole circuit breakers clip into
the base molding.
Key Operated Attachment
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable)
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
The non-padlockable handle
block secures the circuit
breaker handle in either the
ON or OFF position. (Trip-free
operation allows the circuit
breaker to trip when the
handle block holds the circuit
breaker handle in the ON
position.) The device is
positioned over the circuit
breaker handle and secured
by a setscrew to deter
accidental operation of the
circuit breaker handle. Listed
per UL File E7819. (Field
installation only.)
Padlockable Handle
Padlockable Handle Lock
The device is positioned in
the cover opening to prevent
handle movement. Will
accommodate one 5/16-inch
(8 mm) padlock.
Snap-on Padlockable Handle
Lock Hasp
The snap-on padlockable
handle lock allows the handle
to be locked in the OFF or ON
position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to
trip when the handle lock
holds the circuit breaker
handle in the ON position.)
This device was designed
for use on the single-pole
circuit breaker, but may be
used on one-, two-, threeand four-pole styles. The
handle lock snaps onto the
escutcheon area of the
handle with an optional
retaining screw for added
secureness. The handle
lock will accommodate
one padlock with a 1/4-inch
(6.4 mm) shackle. Listed per
UL File E7819. (Field
installation only.)
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
The padlockable handle lock
hasp allows the handle to
be locked in the ON or OFF
position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to
trip when the handle lock
holds the circuit breaker
handle in the ON position.)
The hasp mounts on the
circuit breaker cover within
the trimline. The cover is
predrilled on both sides of the
operating handle so that the
hasp can be mounted on
either side of the handle.
The hasp will accommodate
up to three padlocks with
1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles,
one per circuit breaker.
Listed per UL File E7819.
(Field installation only.)
Cylinder Lock
The cylinder lock internally
blocks the trip bar in the
tripped position to prevent
the circuit breaker from
being switched to ON.
The cylinder lock is factory
installed in the left pole only
of the circuit breaker cover.
Other internally mounted
accessories cannot be
installed in the same
pole as the cylinder lock.
(Factory installation only.)
Key Interlock Kit
(Lock Not Included)
The key interlock is used to
externally lock the circuit
breaker handle in the OFF
position. When the key
interlock is locked, an
extended deadbolt blocks
movement of the circuit
breaker handle. Uniquely
coded keys are removable
only with the deadbolt
extended. Each coded key
controls a group of circuit
breakers for a given specific
customer installation.
The key interlock assembly is
Underwriters Laboratories
listed for field installation
under UL File E7819 and
consists of a mounting kit
and a purchaser supplied
deadbolt lock. The mounting
kit comprises a mounting
plate, which is secured to the
circuit breaker cover in either
the left- or right-pole position,
key interlock mounting
screws, and a wire seal.
Specific mounting kits are
required for individual key
interlock types.
Sliding Bar Interlock
The sliding bar interlock
provides mechanical
interlocking between two
adjacent three-pole circuit
breakers. It is installed on the
enclosure cover between the
circuit breakers. When the
sliding bar interlock handle
is moved from one side to the
other, a bar extends to
alternately block movement
of the circuit breaker handles
and prevents both circuit
breakers from being switched
to ON at the same time.
Sliding bar interlocks are
not UL listed. (Field
installation only.)
2.3
Walking Beam Interlock
The walking beam Interlock
provides mechanical
interlocking between two
adjacent circuit breakers of
the same pole configuration.
The walking beam interlock
mounts on a bracket behind
and between the circuit
breakers. A plunger on each
end of the beam is inserted
through an access hole in the
back plate and base of each
circuit breaker. The walking
beam interlock prevents both
circuit breakers from being
switched ON at the same
time. If a walking beam
interlock is installed, the
wiring troughs in the back
of the circuit breaker case
are blocked by the plungers
and cannot be used for cross
wiring. Factory modified
circuit breakers are required
for this application. UL
File E38116.
Electrical Operator
The electrical (solenoid)
operator is a single solenoid
mechanism that enables local
and remote circuit breaker
ON, OFF, and reset
switching. The electrical
operator is mounted on the
circuit breaker cover within
the trimline of the circuit
breaker. The electrical
operator uses a unique
bi-stable latch that allows
the device to operate using
one solenoid. The accessory
provides high-speed
switching with a maximum
operating time of 5 cycles
(80 mS), making it suitable
for generator synchronizing
applications.
Means are provided for
remote electrical operation
and for local manual
operation. A special slide
includes provisions for
padlocking the circuit breaker
handle in the OFF position.
The slide will accept three
padlock shackles with a
maximum diameter of
1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each.
An interlock electrically
disconnects the solenoid
when the electrical operator
cover is removed. The rating
data tables provide electrical
rating data for the electrical
(solenoid) operator.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-305
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
The electrical (motor) operator
allows the circuit’s breaker to
be opened, closed or reset
remotely. It also has a lock-off
capability and provisions for
manual operation.
The electrical (motor)
operator contains a reversible
motor connected to a ball
screw. The ball screw drives
the circuit breaker handle.
Limit switches and relays are
used to control the motor.
Plug-In Adapters
Plug-in adapters simplify
installation and front removal
of circuit breakers. Individual
line and load plug-in
adapters are available for
rear connection applications
on two-, three-, and four-pole
circuit breakers. Common
mounting plates for lineand load-end adapters
are available.
One plug-in adapter kit is
required for line-end and
one for load-end.
Plug-in adapters are
UL approved unless
otherwise noted.
Rear Connecting Studs
Rear connecting studs are
available in several sizes to
accommodate specific fixedmounted circuit breaker
applications.
Each rear connecting stud
assembly consists of one stud
and one tube. To maintain
proper clearances between
poles, select alternate long
and short stud assemblies for
circuit breakers with more
than one pole. One assembly
is required for line-end and
one for load-end of each pole.
Tubes must be ordered
separately. Connecting studs
are available only with English
thread sizes.
Panelboard Connecting Straps
Panelboard connecting straps
are used to connect the
circuit breaker terminals to
the panelboard bus. The
panelboard connecting straps
are available with various
ratings for outside and center
poles. (Field installation only.)
Panelboard connecting straps
are available to meet the
needs of most standard
panelboard applications.
Style numbers for mounting
brackets for CDP panelboard
installations are also included.
Note: Not UL listed. Refer to
panelboard manufacturer for
compatibility.
Type LFD Current Limiter
The LFD current limiter is an
accessory that bolts to the
load end of a standard FDB or
FD thermal-magnetic circuit
breaker, providing 200,000 A
interrupting capacity at up to
600 Vac. LFD current limiters
for thermal-magnetic and
electronic circuit breakers
are listed with Underwriters
Laboratories under File
E47239.
IQ Energy Sentinel
The IQ Energy Sentinel
is a highly accurate,
microprocessor-based,
breaker-mounted device
designed to monitor power
and energy readings. It
represents an alternative to
watt meters, watt-hour
meters, and watt demand
meters. Key advantages
include savings in space,
lower installation costs, and
remote monitoring capability.
The IQ Energy Sentinel
mounts on the load side
of a Series C F-Frame
(150 ampere) circuit breaker.
It can be applied on threephase, four-wire systems,
or single-phase, three-wire
systems with voltage
connected through
Phases A and C.
For more information, see
Descriptive Bulletin 8178.
Ground Fault Alarm Unit
The ground fault alarm unit is
a remotely mounted device
with a combination indicating
light/test button that will light
when the breaker trips or
alarms on ground fault. The
ground fault alarm unit
requires a separate 120 Vac
power source to power the
light and the internal relay,
which has 1NO and 1NC
contacts for remote indication.
The ground fault alarm unit
can be panel mounted for
ordering with an optional face
mounting bracket. For use on
Digitrip 310 only, K- through NFrame.
Note: Not UL listed.
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-306
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Potential Transformer Module
The potential transformer
module is required for the
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to
provide a voltage input to
allow the trip unit to monitor
power and energy as well as
power factor. The potential
transformer module is a 6 VA
transformer with a primary
voltage input of up to 600 volt
line to line. Three 0.1 ampere
fuses are provided on the
primary of the transformer
and can be used for isolation
purposes during dielectric
testing. The device is
normally panel mounted
and can feed up to 16 OPTIM
trip units.
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable
Test Kit
The solid-state (electronic)
portable test kit provides
verification of performance
of all ratings of Digitrip 310
electronic trip units installed
in circuit breakers while in
service under varying load
and/or phase imbalance. The
test kit operates on 120-volt,
50/60 Hz power; it includes
complete instructions and test
times for testing long time,
short time/instantaneous
operation and optional
ground fault operation of
the circuit breaker.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
The Breaker Interface Module
(BIM) is a panel mounted
user interface device that is
mounted on the front of an
electrical assembly or at a
remote location. The BIM is
used to access, configure,
test and display information
for OPTIM trip units and other
devices. The BIM consists of
four display windows, eight
function buttons, 18 LEDs,
and a graphical time/current
curve to provide breaker
status, operational
information, protection
status and energy monitoring.
A 24 Vdc power supply is
required to provide power
to the BIM. This is supplied
by the switchboard builder
to Eaton’s specifications.
The BIM is a member of
Eaton’s PowerNet family of
communicating devices that
connects OPTIM trip units,
Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip
units and energy sentinels
as a subnetwork system.
The BIM can also be
connected to a main
network via a PONI module
to PowerNet software.
Digitrip OPTIMizer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a
hand-held programmer that
is used to access, configure,
test and display information
from OPTIM trip units. The
OPTIMizer plugs into the
front of an OPTIM trip unit via
an eight-pin telephone jack
and is powered by a nine-volt
battery or the auxiliary power
module. One highlighted
feature is the “Copy” and
“Download” commands.
Setting up multiple OPTIM
trips can be finished in
minutes and with no errors.
An Auxiliary Power Module
connection provides a trip test
when control power is not
present at the breaker. The
OPTIMizer is supplied as a
standard package to include
the programmer, the eightpin connection cord, battery
and carrying case. The
auxiliary power module
is optional.
Auxiliary Power Module
The auxiliary power module
is a power supply requiring
120 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz
that provides a 32 Vdc output.
The auxiliary power module
provides control power for
testing an OPTIM trip unit
when other means of control
power is not available or
for continuous OPTIMizer
operation versus temporary
with a battery. The auxiliary
power module connects
into the top of the Digitrip
OPTIMizer via a keyed
receptacle. The main
application for the auxiliary
power module would be for
the testing of a standalone
non-communicating OPTIM
breaker that ordinarily would
not have control power.
2.3
Cause of Trip Display/Remote
Mount Cause of Trip Display
The Cause of Trip Display
can be field-installed on any
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit.
The device provides breaker
information through an LCD
screen, such as cause of trip,
phrase current, ground current
and low loads. The display
is ideal for troubleshooting
common trips such as
ground fault, long delay, and
instantaneous/short delay.
The DIGIVIEW version will
provide a local display at the
breaker without additional
wiring by connecting directly
onto the trip unit. The
DIGIVIEWR06 version has a
6 foot cable that allows users
to mount the display on the
outside of an enclosure door
and connect to the trip unit
that is contained inside
the enclosure.
2
Cause of Trip LED Module
The Cause of Trip LED
Module can be field-installed
on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip
unit. The device provides a
cause of trip indication via
LED. The Cause of Trip LED
Module connects directly
onto the trip unit. When the
breaker trips, the module
indicates the cause of trip
(long delay, short delay,
instantaneous and ground)
via LED indication. The
module is reset after the
breaker is reset.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Note: The OPTIMizer can work
off of 32 Vdc control power,
although 24 Vdc is the standard
on OPTIM breakers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-307
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Product Selection
2
Termination Hardware—End Cap Kit
2
End Cap Kit
End Cap Kit
Thread
Type
2
Thread
Size
Catalog
Number
Two-Pole F-Frame (225A)
2
Imperial
10–32
KPEK12
Metric
M–5
KPEKM12
2
Three-Pole F-Frame (225A)
Imperial
10–32
KPEK1
2
Metric
M–5
KPEKM1
2
Imperial
10–32
KPEK14
2
Metric
M–5
KPEKM14
2
Imperial
0.312–18
KPEK2
Metric
M–8
KPEKM2
2
Four-Pole J-Frame
Imperial
0.312–18
KPEK24
2
Metric
M–8
KPEKM24
2
Imperial
0.312–18
KPEK3
2
Metric
M–8
KPEKM3
2
Imperial
0.312–18
KPEK34
Metric
M–8
KPEKM34
Four-Pole F-Frame (225A)
Three-Pole J-Frame
Three-Pole K-Frame
Four-Pole K-Frame
2
Three-Pole L-Frame
Imperial
0.312-18
2
KPEK4
Metric
M-8
KPEKM4
2
Four-Pole L-Frame
Imperial
0.312–18
KPEK44
2
Metric
M–8
KPEKM44
Thread
Size
Catalog Number
Package of 12
(Priced Individually)
2
Termination Hardware—Keeper Nut
2
F-Frame Keeper Nut
F-Frame Keeper Nut
2
Thread
Type
2
Imperial
10–32
KPR1A
Metric
M–5
KPR1AM
2
Thread
Type
Thread
Size
Line/Load
End
Catalog Number
Package of 3
2
Imperial
0.375–16
Line
KPR3A
Load
KPR3B
2
Metric
Line
KPR3AM
Load
KPR3BM
2
2
K-Frame Keeper Nut
2
K-Frame Keeper Nut
M–8
Note
L-, M-, N-Frames not required. Terminals are threaded.
2
V4-T2-308
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Termination Hardware
J-Frame Plug Nut
Thread
Type
K-Frame Terminal
Adapter
2
J-Frame Plug Nut
Thread
Size
Catalog Number
Package of 6
Imperial
0.250–20
PLN2
Metric
M–6
PLN2M
2
2
2
2
K-Frame Terminal Adapter 1
Line/Load End
Catalog
Number
2
Line and load
TAD3
2
2
2
F-Frame Ordering Information
Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually.
F-Frame Kit
2
F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit 2
Description
Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs.
Maximum
Amperes
Catalog
Number
150
FCWTK
225
FCWTK225
2
2
2
2
2
J- and K-Frame Ordering Information
Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually.
J- and K-Frame Kit
2
J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit
Description
Catalog
Number
Package of 12 control wire terminal tangs.
KCWTK
2
2
2
2
L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit
2
AWG Wire
Range/Number Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
Al/Cu
3/0–350 kcmil (2)
95–150
TA602LDCW 3
2
Cu
250–350 kcmil (2)
120–250
T602LDCW 3
2
Al/Cu
400–500 kcmil (2)
185–240
2TA603LDKCW 45
2
Al/Cu
400–500 kcmil (2)
185–240
3TA603LDKCW 46
2
Al/Cu
400–500 kcmil (2)
185–240
4TA603LDKCW 47
2
2
Notes
1 K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA breakers.
2 Not for use with T250KB terminals.
3 Individually packed.
4 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
5 Two-pole kit.
6 Three-pole kit.
7 Four-pole kit.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
V4-T2-309
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Termination Hardware
2
G-Frame Control Wire Terminal
2
Description
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Control wire terminal (kit of 12)
5652B38G01
GCWTK
2
2
Multiwire Connectors
Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3)
Maximum
Amperes
2
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalog
Number 1
3
14–2
3TA100G3K
6
14–6
3TA100G6K
3
14–2
3TA150F3K
6
14–6
3TA150F6K
3
14–2
3TA250J3K
6
14–6
3TA250J6K
3
14–2/0
3TA400K3K
6
14–3
3TA400K6K
G-Frame 2
2
100
2
F-Frame
2
225
2
J-Frame
250
2
K-Frame
2
400
2
2
Rear Fed Terminals
2
Frame
Maximum
Amperes
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Catalog
Number 1
FD
150
14–4/0
TA150FDRF
150
14–4/0
3TA150FDRF
225
6–300 kcmil
TA225FDRF
225
6–300 kcmil
3TA225FDRF
400
250–500 kcmil
TA350KRF
400
250–500 kcmil
3TA350KRF
800
3/0 MAX (3)
TA800MDLRF
800
3/0 MAX (3)
3TA800MDLRF
2
2
2
KD
2
MDL
2
2
2
2
Base Mounting Hardware
Ordering Information
Hardware for surface mounting of circuit breakers is supplied only on request. Hardware consists of
mounting screws and lockwashers. Order hardware for circuit breaker pole configurations as required.
Mounting Hardware
2
Screw Length in Inches (mm)
2
Catalog
Number
G-Frame
2
2
0.138–32 x 2.63 (3.5 x 66.7 mm) Std.
624B375G23
0.138–32 x 3.00 (3.5 x 76.2 mm)
8703C80G05
Notes
1 When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit.
Catalog number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal.
2 GD breakers require special tapping for multiwire lugs, as described in the IL or use with standard aluminum collars.
2
2
2
V4-T2-310
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware
Number
of Poles
Description
Type of
Mounting
Catalog
Number
0.164-32 x 3.188-inch pan-head steel screws, lockwashers and clamps
Individual
624B375G01
Group 1
624B375G02
F-Frame
1
2
2
2
2
2
0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
Individual
4218B80G01
3, 4
0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
Individual
BMH1
2
0.250-20 x 2.75 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
Individual
BMH2
2
0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
Individual
BMH3
2
0.250-20 x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers
Individual
BMH4
2
0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers
Individual
BMH5
2
0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
Individual
BMH5
2
J-Frame
2, 3, 4
K-Frame
2, 3, 4
L-Frame
2, 3, 4
M-Frame
2, 3
N-Frame
2, 3, 4
2
R-Frame
Supplied by customer
2
2
Metric Thread Mounting Hardware
Number
of Poles
Type of
Mounting
Description
Catalog
Number
F-Frame
1
M4–0.7 x 80 mm pan-head steel screws, lockwashers, and clamps
Individual
4218B80G09
Group 1
4218B80G10
2
2
2
2
M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
Individual
4218B80G11
3, 4
M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
Individual
BMH1M
2
M6–0.7 x 70 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
Individual
BMH2M
2
M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
Individual
BMH3M
2
—
Individual
BMH4M
2
—
Individual
BMH5M
2
—
Individual
BMH5M
2
J-Frame
2, 3, 4
K-Frame
2, 3, 4
L-Frame
2, 3
2
M-Frame
2, 3
N-Frame
2, 3
R-Frame
Supplied by customer
2
Note
1 One set of hardware for two circuit breakers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-311
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Terminal Shields
2
G-Frame Terminal Shield
2
Number Units in Package
Catalog
Number
10
GTSK3
2
2
F-Frame
2
2
2
2
2
2
J-Frame
2
2
2
F-Frame Terminal Shield
Standard (Package of 10)
(Priced Individually)
Special—For Use When Electrical
Operator is Mounted on Circuit Breaker
Number
of Poles
Location
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1
Line
625B229G06
—
2
Line
625B229G07
—
3
Line
625B229G08
4210B95G01
4
Line
625B229G09
4210B95G02
J-Frame Terminal Shield
Number
of Poles
Location
Catalog Number
(Package of 10)
2, 3
Line End
1266C07G01
4
Line End
6631C01G01
2, 3
Load End
6641C16G01
4
Load End
6641C16G02
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-312
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
K-Frame
K-Frame Terminal Shield
Number
of Poles
Location
Catalog Number
(Package of 10)
2, 3
Line
TS33LN
4
Line
TS34LN
3
Load
TS33LD
Interphase Barriers
Ordering Information
Two per package.
Interphase Barrier
L-Frame Terminal Shield
2
2
Interphase Barriers
Frame
Catalog
Number
F
IPB1
J, K
IPB3
L
IPB4
M
IPB4
N
IPB5
2
2
2
2
Catalog Number
(Package of 1)
2
314C420G05
2
2
Base Mounting Plate
Base Mounting Plate
M-Frame Terminal Shield
Base Mounting Plate G-Frame GD/GHC
2
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
2
1
207B513G01
Catalog Number
(Package of 1)
2
208B966G01
2
DIN Rail Adapter
DIN Rail Adapter
DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC
Number
of Poles
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
1, 2
10
1225C79G01
3
10
1225C79G02 1
N-Frame Terminal Shield
All Metal DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC
Catalog Number
(Package of 1)
NTS3K
Number
of Poles
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
3
1
EGGDDIN
Terminal End Covers
Ordering Information
The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers
only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity
(one per circuit breaker) when ordering.
F-Frame Terminal End Covers
Conductor Opening
Diameter in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
0.25 (6.35 mm)
TEC1
0.41 (10.41 mm)
TEC2
Key Operated
Attachment
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Key Operated Attachment
F-Frame
2
Key Operated Attachment
G-Frame GD/GHC
2
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
2
10
GKOA
2
Note
1 For use on three-pole breakers only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-313
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable)
2
Lock Dog (NonPadlockable)
Padlockable Handle Lock
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable)
G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB/GMCP
Padlockable Handle
Lock
Padlockable Handle Lock
2
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
Frame
Catalog
Number
G
GPHBOFF
2
1
1294C01H01
J, K
PHB3
2
2
Handle Tie G-Frame—GHB/GHC
2
Number
of Poles
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number
2
2
10
HTBGD2P
3
10
HTBGD3P
2
2
2
Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Snap-On Padlockable
Handle Lock Hasp
Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Frame
Catalog
Number
F
PHL1
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
Non-Padlockable
Handle Block
Frame
Catalog
Number
2
F
LKD1
2
J, K
LKD3
L, M, N
LKD4
2
2
Padlockable Handle
2
Padlockable Handle
Padlockable G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB
2
Number of Units
in Package
Catalog
Number 1
2
10
1223C77G03
10
1223C77G05 2
2
10
1223C77G06 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-314
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Notes
1 Accepts 0.285 Lock Shank.
2 Padlockable in the OFF position only.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
Padlockable Handle
Lock Hasp
2
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
2
Catalog
Number
Description
2
F-Frame
Single-pole breakers
PHL1
Two-, three- and four-pole breakers
PLK1
For left side mounting
PLK1LOFF
For right side mounting
PLK1ROFF
2
2
2
J, K-Frames
Two-, three- and four-pole breakers
PLK3
For left side mounting
PLK3LOFF 1
For right side mounting
PLK3ROFF
2
2
1
L-Frame (Side Mounted)
2
Lock ON or OFF
HLK4
Lock OFF only (left-hand mount)
HLK4LOFF 1
2
Lock ON or OFF
HLK4S
Lock OFF only
HLK4SOFF 1
2
L-Frame (Top Mounted)
2
M-Frame
Lock ON or OFF
HLK4
Lock OFF only (left-hand mount)
HLK4LOFF 1
2
M-Frame (Vertical Mounting)
Lock ON/OFF
HLK4S
Lock OFF only
HLK4SOFF
2
2
N-Frame
2
Side mounted
PLK5
Top mounted (ON/OFF)
PLK5S
Top mounted (OFF only)
PLK5SOFF 1
2
Lock ON/OFF
HLK6
2
Lock OFF only
HLK6OFF 1
R-Frame
2
2
Cylinder Lock
Cylinder Lock
2
Cylinder Lock
Frame
Catalog
Number
2
F, J, K
Order by description
2
2
Note
1 For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF
position only, order either catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-315
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
Series C
Key Interlock Kit
Ordering Information
Key interlock kits contain the necessary interface and hardware to install a trapped key interlock from one of the listed manufacturers.
Key interlocks are not installed or supplied as part of the breaker, and must be obtained separately from the lock manufacturer or
through the manufacturer of the equipment on which the breaker will be installed. Select the mounting kit catalog number to match
the type of lock used.
Key Interlock Kit
photo
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Key Interlock Kit (Trapped Key Interlock)
Lock
Manufacturer
Lock
Type
Bolt Projection in
Withdrawn Position
in Inches (mm)
Kit
Catalog
Number
KYK1
F-Frame
position
2
Superior
B-4003-1
0.38 (9.5)
Kirk®
F
0.38 (9.5)
KYK1
Castell 1
K or QK
0.38 (9.5)
CTK1
J, K-Frames
2
Superior
B-4003-1
0.38 (9.5)
KYK3
2
Kirk
F
0.38 (9.5)
KYK3
Castell 1
K or QK
0.38 (9.5)
CTK3
KYK4
2
L-, M-, N-Frames
Superior
B-4003-1
0.38 (9.5)
2
Kirk
F
0.38 (9.5)
KYK4
Castell 1
K or QK
0.38 (9.5)
CTK4
KYK6
2
R-Frame
2
Superior
B-4003-1
1.0 (25.4)
Kirk
F
1.0 (25.4)
KYK6
Castell 1
K or QK
1.0 (25.4)
CTK6
Superior
B-4003-1
0.38 (9.5)
KYKJG
Kirk
F
0.38 (9.5)
KYKJG
2
Castell 1
K or QK
0.38 (9.5)
CTKJG
2
Superior
B-4003-1
0.38 (9.5)
KYKLG
Kirk
F
0.38 (9.5)
KYKLG
Castell 1
K or QK
0.38 (9.5)
CTKLG
2
JG-Frame
2
LG-Frame
2
2
Note
1 When ordering Castell Interlock, it is necessary for customer to specify that the mounting bolt holes must be
10 mm in diameter
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-316
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Sliding Bar Interlock
Ordering Information
The sliding bar interlock is
available for mounting
between two adjacent threepole circuit breakers with
circuit breakers centerline
Sliding Bar Interlock
2
spacing as indicated in table
and enclosure front panel
thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch
(3.2 or 4.8 mm). (For field
installation only.)
2
2
2
Sliding Bar Interlock
Frame
Centerline Spacing
in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
F
4.19 (106.4)
SBK1
J
4.38 (111.3)
SBK2
K
5.75 (146.0)
SBK3
L, M
8.50 (215.9)
SBK4
N
8.50 (215.9)
SBK5
Walking Beam Interlock
Ordering Information
The walking beam interlock is
available for mounting
between two adjacent circuit
breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4
mm) apart and having the
same pole configuration. The
two circuit breakers must be
factory modified to accept the
walking beam interlock
assembly (suitable for use
with either two-, three- or
four-pole circuit breakers).
Walking Beam
Interlock
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
2
With properly modified circuit
breakers, the walking beam
interlock is suitable for field
installation. Order circuit
breakers specifying
modification for walking beam
(20% price adder) and select
walking beam interlock from
table below. Circuit breakers
and walking beam interlock
are boxed and shipped
separately.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Walking Beam Interlock
Frame
Catalog
Number
2
F
WBL1
K
WBL3
2
L, M
WBL4A
N
WBL5
R1
WBL6
2
2
2
Note
1 Three-pole only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-317
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Electrical Operator
2
F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
2
2
Terminal Block
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead
Catalog
Number
Voltage
Frequency
Catalog
Number
120
AC
EOP1T07
EOP1P07
240
AC
EOP1T11
EOP1P11
2
2
F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator 1
18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead
Voltage
Frequency
Catalog
Number
2
120
50/60 Hz AC
MOPFD120C
24
DC
MOPFD24D
2
125
DC
MOPFD120C
2
208–240
50/60 Hz
MOPFD240C
220–250
DC
MOPFD240C
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
Terminal Block
Operating
Voltage
Frequency
Catalog
Number
120
50/60 Hz AC
EOP2T07
240
50/60 Hz AC
EOP2T11
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator
Terminal Block
Operating
Voltage
Frequency
Catalog
Number
120
50/60 Hz AC
EOP3MT07
240
50/60 Hz AC
EOP3MT11
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit
Frame
Catalog
Number
K
BBMK3
2
2
2
L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator (310 and OPTIM)
Terminal Block
2
Operating
Voltage
Frequency
Catalog
Number
2
120
50/60 Hz
EOP4MT07
208
50/60 Hz
EOP4MT11
2
240
50/60 Hz
EOP4MT11A
480
50/60 Hz
EOP4MT15
125
DC
EOP4MT26
24
DC
EOP4MT21
2
2
2
Note
1 Motor operators MOP1P07, MOP1P03DC, MOP1P05DC and MOP1P07DC are replaced by MOPFD
motor operators listed in table.
V4-T2-318
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator
Pigtail Leads
2
Operating
Voltage
Frequency
Catalog
Number
2
120
50/60 Hz
EOP5T07
208
50/60 Hz
EOP5T09
2
240
50/60 Hz
EOP5T11
480
50/60 Hz
EOP5T15
24
DC
EOP5T21
48
DC
EOP5T22
125
DC
EOP5T26
2
2
2
2
R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator
Factory-Installed Terminal Block
2
Operating
Voltage
Frequency
Catalog
Number
2
120
50/60 Hz
EOP6T08K
240
50/60 Hz
EOP6T11K
2
48
DC
EOP6T21K
2
2
Plug-In Adapters
2
F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
100–225
1480D13G01
1480D13G02
1480D13G07 1
Mounting plate
176C511H01
507C047H01
—
2
2
2
2
J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Terminal
End
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
Line
1260C86G05
1260C86G06
1231C67G01
Load
1260C86G07
1260C86G08
1231C67G02
One line and one load
506C144G27
506C144G28
—
—
2
PMP23
—
Mounting plate
2
2
2
2
2
K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum
2
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
400
PAD32
PAD33
—
Mounting plate
2
PMP33
—
2
2
Notes
1 100 ampere maximum.
2 Use three-pole mounting plate for two-pole circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-319
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
L-Frame (Threaded Stud Type)
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
2
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
600 (threaded stud type)
506C059G03
506C059G04
PAD44
600 (flat bar type)
1288C19G01
1288C19G02
6636C55H01
Mounting plate
504C824H01
504C824H01
—
2
2
2
2
2
M-Frame (Flat Bar Type)—600 Vac Maximum
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
800
2614D53G05
2614D53G06
Mounting plate
1290C73H01
1290C73H01
2
2
2
2
2
N-Frame (Flat Bar Type)
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
1200
2614D53G03
2614D53G04
Mounting plate
1290C73H01
1290C73H01
2
Plug-In Adapters
2
Frame
Number of
Poles
Standard
Certification
Catalog
Number
2
FD
3
IEC
PAD3F
2
FD
4
IEC
PAD4F
JD
3
IEC
PAD3JD
2
KD
3
IEC
PAD3K
LD
3
IEC
PAD3LD
2
LD
4
IEC
PAD4LD
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-320
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
Rear Connecting Studs
2
L-Frame Ordering Information
F-Frame 1
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
2
Stud Catalog
Number
Tube
Catalog
Number
2
314C960G07
For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers
2
314C960G08
100 A short
451D874G01
32B9446H20
100 A short
451D874G01
32B9446H21
100 A short
451D874G01
32B9446H22
100 A short
451D874G01
32B9446H23
M-Frame Ordering Information 1
100 A long
451D874G02
32B9446H24
100 A long
451D874G02
32B9446H25
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
100 A long
451D874G02
32B9446H26
225
314C960G01
100 A long
451D874G02
32B9446H27
400
314C960G04
400
314C960G05
400
314C960G06
600
314C960G07
600
314C960G08
600
314C960G09
800
314C960G10
800
314C960G11
800
314C960G12
For 110 to 225 Ampere Circuit Breakers
225A short
374D883G01
374D883H06
225A short
374D883G01
374D883H07
225A short
374D883G01
374D883H08
225A short
374D883G01
374D883H09
225A long
374D883G02
374D883H10
225A long
374D883G02
374D883H11
225A long
374D883G02
374D883H12
225A long
374D883G02
374D883H13
314C960G09
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
N-Frame Ordering Information 1
J-Frame 1
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
Tube
Catalog
Number
250A short
5010D23G01
456D983H05
250A short
5010D23G01
456D983H06
250A short
5010D23G01
456D983H07
250A long
5010D23G02
5010D23H05
250A long
5010D23G02
5010D23H06
250A long
5010D23G02
5010D23H07
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
800
623B222G01
800
623B222G02
800
623B222G03
1200
373B375G04
1200
373B375G03
2
2
2
2
2
Note
1 Not UL listed.
2
2
K-Frame 1
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
Standard Tube
Catalog
Number
400 A short
6642C14G02
313C909H17
400 A short
6642C14G04
313C909H18
400 A short
6642C14G06
313C909H19
400 A long
6642C14G03
313C909H20
400 A long
6642C14G05
313C909H21
400 A long
6642C14G07
313C909H22
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-321
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Panelboard Connecting Straps
2
F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
2
Bus
Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
2.75 (69.9)
2.75 (69.9)
Pole Connector Type
Center
Outside
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
50
673B142G02
673B142G09
100
673B142G02
673B142G10
2.75 (69.9)
150
673B142G04
673B142G03
2
3.50 (88.9)
50
1253C72G01
1253C72G03
2
3.50 (88.9)
100
1253C73G03
1253C73G06
3.50 (88.9)
150
1253C73G01
1253C73G05
2
2
2
2
F-Frame Mounting Bracket
2
Number of Poles
Catalog
Number
2
624B600H02
2
3
624B600H01
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Bus
Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
3.50 (88.9)
250
Pole Connector Type
Center
Outside
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2600D26G01
2600D26G02
K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Bus
Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
3.50 (88.9)
400
Pole Connector Type
Center
Outside
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
4212B78G02
4212B77G01
2
K-Frame Mounting Bracket
2
Number of Poles
Catalog
Number
2, 3
208B264H01
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-322
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2.3
L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
600
2
Pole Connector Type
Center
Outside
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
624B609G01
506C052G01
2
2
2
L-Frame Mounting Bracket
Number of Poles
Catalog
Number
2, 3
208B297H01
2
2
2
2
M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Bus
Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
3.50 (88.9)
800
Pole Connector Type
Connector
Type
Catalog
Number
Short
314C996G01
Medium
314C996G02
Long
314C996G03
2
2
2
2
2
M-Frame Mounting Bracket
Catalog
Number
2
315C270H01
2
2
N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
Bus
Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current
Rating
(Amperes)
Pole Connector Type
Connector
Type
Catalog
Number
3.50 (88.9)
1200
Short
505C606G04
Medium
505C606G05
Long
505C606G06
2
2
2
2
2
N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four Required)
Catalog
Number
2
315C270H01
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-323
2.3
2
2
2
2
2
Type LFD Current
Limiter
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Ground Fault Alarm
Unit
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
interrupting capacity at up to
600 Vac. LFD current limiters
for thermal-magnetic circuit
breakers are listed with
Underwriters Laboratories
under File E47239.
Type LFD Current Limiter
Circuit Breaker
Rating Amperes
Catalog
Number
15–70
LFD3070R
80–160
LFD3150R
Ground Fault Alarm Unit
The ground fault alarm unit is
a remotely mounted device
with a combination indicating
light/test button that will light
when the breaker trips or
alarms on ground fault. The
ground fault alarm unit
requires a separate 120 Vac
power source to power the
2
2
Series C
Type LFD Current Limiter
The LFD current limiter is an
accessory that bolts to the
load end of a standard FDB or
FD thermal-magnetic and
electronic circuit breaker,
providing 200,000 A
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
light and the internal relay,
which has 1NO and 1NC
contacts for remote
indication. The ground fault
alarm unit can be panel
mounted for ordering with an
optional face mounting
bracket. For use on Digitrip
310 only, K- through N-Frame.
GF Alarm Unit
Description
Catalog
Number
Ground fault alarm unit
GFAU
Face mounting bracket
1264C67G01
Potential Transformer Module
The potential transformer
module is required for the
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to
provide a voltage input to
allow the trip unit to monitor
power and energy as well as
power factor. The potential
transformer module is a 6 VA
transformer with a primary
voltage input of up to 600 volt
Potential Transformer
Module
Potential Transformer Module
Description
Catalog
Number
Potential transformer module
DOPTMLN
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit
The solid-state (electronic)
50/60 Hz power; it includes
portable test kit provides
complete instructions and
verification of performance of
test times for testing long
all ratings of Digitrip 310
time, short time/
electronic trip units installed
instantaneous operation
in circuit breakers while in
and optional ground fault
service under varying load
operation of the circuit
and/or phase imbalance. The
breaker.
test kit operates on 120-volt,
Portable Test Kit
Description
Solid-state (electronic)
portable test kit
IQ Energy Sentinel
The IQ Energy Sentinel
is a highly accurate,
microprocessor-based,
breaker-mounted device
designed to monitor power
and energy readings. It
represents an alternative to
watt meters, watt-hour
meters, and watt demand
meters. Key advantages
include savings in space,
lower installation costs, and
remote monitoring capability.
The IQ Energy Sentinel
mounts on the load side of a
Series C F-Frame (150
ampere) circuit breaker. It can
be applied on three-phase,
four-wire systems, or singlephase, three-wire systems
with voltage connected
through Phases A and C.
For more information, see
Descriptive Bulletin 8178.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-324
line to line. Three 0.1 ampere
fuses are provided on the
primary of the transformer
and can be used for isolation
purposes during dielectric
testing. The device is
normally panel mounted
and can feed up to 16 OPTIM
trip units.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Catalog
Number
STK2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
The Breaker Interface Module
(BIM) is a panel mounted
user interface device that is
mounted on the front of an
electrical assembly or at a
remote location. The BIM is
used to access, configure,
test and display information
for OPTIM trip units and other
devices. The BIM consists of
four display windows, eight
function buttons, 18 LEDs,
and a graphical time/current
curve to provide breaker
status, operational
information, protection status
and energy monitoring. A 24
Breaker Interface
Module (BIM)
Vdc power supply is required
to provide power to the BIM.
This is supplied by the
switchboard builder to
Eaton’s specifications. The
BIM is a member of Eaton’s
PowerNet family of
communicating devices that
connects OPTIM trip units,
Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip
units and energy sentinels as
a subnetwork system. The
BIM can also be connected to
a main network via a PONI
module to PowerNet
software.
Auxiliary Power
Module
power module connects into
the top of the Digitrip
OPTIMizer via a keyed
receptacle. The main
application for the auxiliary
power module would be for
the testing of a standalone
non-communicating OPTIM
breaker that ordinarily would
not have control power.
Catalog
Number
Digitrip OPTIMizer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a
hand-held programmer that is
used to access, configure,
test and display information
from OPTIM trip units. The
OPTIMizer plugs into the
front of an OPTIM trip unit via
an eight-pin telephone jack
and is powered by a nine-volt
battery or the auxiliary power
module. One highlighted
feature is the “Copy” and
“Download” commands.
Setting up multiple OPTIM
trips can be finished in
minutes and with no errors.
An Auxiliary Power Module
connection provides a trip test
when control power is not
present at the breaker. The
OPTIMizer is supplied as a
standard package to include
the programmer, the eightpin connection cord, battery
and carrying case. The
auxiliary power module is
optional.
Note: 24 Vdc Power Supply
A 24 Vdc power supply is
required for all Digitrip OPTIM trip
units that are required to
communicate either on the main
Eaton PowerNet network or as a
subnetwork to a BIM. The
breaker’s load is 45 mA of current.
Typically one power supply is
required per switchboard and can
provide control power to a BIM
and the OPTIM trip units. The 24
Vdc power supply should be an
“isolated high quality” power
supply with a “CE” label, and is
normally provided by the
switchboard manufacturer to
Eaton’s recommendations.
Digitrip OPTIMizer
2
2
2
2
2
2
Auxiliary Power Module
2
Catalog
Number
2
PRTBAPMDV
2
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
BIMII
Digitrip OPTIMizer
Auxiliary Power Module
The auxiliary power module is
a power supply requiring 120
Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that
provides a 32 Vdc output. The
auxiliary power module
provides control power for
testing an OPTIM trip unit
when other means of control
power is not available or for
continuous OPTIMizer
operation versus temporary
with a battery. The auxiliary
2.3
Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display
The Cause of Trip Display can
The DIGIVIEW version will
be field-installed on any
provide a local display at the
Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit.
breaker without additional
The device provides breaker
wiring by connecting directly
information through an LCD
onto the trip unit. The
screen, such as cause of trip,
DIGIVIEWR06 version has a
phrase current, ground
6 foot cable that allows users
current and low loads. The
to mount the display on the
display is ideal for
outside of an enclosure door
troubleshooting common
and connect to the trip unit
trips such as ground fault,
that is contained inside the
long delay, and
enclosure.
instantaneous/short delay.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount
Cause of Trip Display
2
Catalog
Number
2
DIGIVIEW
2
DIGIVIEWR06
Cause of Trip LED Module
The Cause of Trip LED
Module can be field-installed
on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip
unit. The device provides a
cause of trip indication via
LED. The Cause of Trip LED
Module connects directly
onto the trip unit. When the
2
breaker trips, the module
indicates the cause of trip
(long delay, short delay,
instantaneous and ground) via
LED indication. The module is
reset after the breaker is
reset.
2
2
2
2
Catalog
Number
Cause of Trip LED Module
2
OPTIMizer—standard package
Catalog
Number
2
TRIP-LED
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-325
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Accessories
2
Flex Shaft Accessories (F- through R-Frame)
2
NEMA 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft and C371 1
Wire Seal
The wire seal can be used to secure the cover on the trip unit to
prevent adjustments after settings are confirmed.
Handle Length
in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number 2
Wire Seal
4 (101.6)
C361KJ4
6 (152.4)
C361KJ6
Roller Latch 3
C361KR
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Series C Rotary Accessories
As an option, an auxiliary switch is offered so that the control
panel builder may electrically indicate the status of the breaker.
This accessory would be mounted on the mechanism and
comes with 24-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads.
Description
Catalog
Number
Wire seal
5108A03H01
Notes
1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters
required for assembly.
2 The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied
with these kits.
3 Third roller latch for use with 4- or 6-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when 3 point latching is
required.
Series C Auxiliary Switch
Catalog
Number
5108A61G01
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-326
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Technical Data and Specifications
2
Electrical Operator
F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 12
Voltage 3
Frequency
Inrush Current
Amperes
Maximum
Operating Time
Fuse
Amperes 4
120
50/60 Hz AC
10
5 cycles (80 ms)
240
50/60 Hz AC
5
5 cycles (80 ms)
Frequency
Inrush Current
Amperes
120
AC
2
24
DC
5
48
DC
125
DC
168j
Operating Voltage 3
Inrush Current Amperes
3
120 AC
31
2
208 AC
13
240 AC
12
125 DC
21
24 DC
50
F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 2567
Voltage 3
L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data
2
2
2
Frequency
Fuse
Amperes
2
50/60 Hz
31
6
208
50/60 Hz
21
—
2
240
50/60 Hz
19
4
3
2
120
480
50/60 Hz
—
—
Voltage 3
Inrush Current
Amperes
Fuse
Amperes
24
DC
50
—
120
30
6
48
DC
80
—
240
16
4
125
DC
21
—
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data
2
2
2
R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data mnop
Operating
Voltage 3
Inrush Current
Amperes
Fuse
Amperes
Operating
Voltage q
Frequency
Motor Inrush Current
Amperes
120
30
6
120
50/60 Hz
40
4
240
50/60 Hz
27
48
DC
53
24
DC
58
240
16
2
Inrush Current
Amperes
Operating
Voltage 3
1689
2
2
N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data 16kl
J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data 1689
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 UL listed under UL File E64983.
2 The electrical operator design is endurance tested for 8000 electrical operations.
3 Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage.
4 Use current-limiting type fuse where required.
5 UL listed under UL File E64124.
6 Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
7 Maximum operating time: 3 seconds max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe
duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute.
8 The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6000 electrical operations.
9 Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 mS).
j Maximum operating time: 12 cycles.
k The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 2,500 electrical operations.
l Maximum operating time: 12 cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe
duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute.
m Operator is an intermittent duty service. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not
exceed one per minute.
n Electric Operating time at rated voltage; (a) To turn breaker ON–1/2 second max. (b) To turn
breaker OFF–1/2 second max.
o Motor operating temperature; Class “A” temperature limits apply.
p A minimum 1 kVA power source is recommended for motor operation.
q Applied voltage should be no less than 85% or no more than 110% of rated voltage.
2
For OPTIM trip, OPEOPCK kit required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-327
2.3
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Rear Connecting Studs
2
F-Frame 1
2
Stud
Ampere
Rating
2
2
2
2
Stud
Catalog
Number
Panel Thickness
Tube Length
A
B
C
Tube
Catalog
Number
Dimensions
D
E
F
0.31 (7.9)–18
For 15 to 100 Ampere Circuit Breakers
100 A short
451D874G01
1.00 (25.4)
1.06 (26.9)
—
32B9446H20
—
3.63 (92.1)
100 A short
451D874G01
0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8)
1.38 (34.9)
—
32B9446H21
—
3.63 (92.1)
0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A short
451D874G01
0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9)
1.69 (42.9)
—
32B9446H22
—
3.63 (92.1)
0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A short
451D874G01
0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9)
2.00 (50.8)
—
32B9446H23
—
3.63 (92.1)
0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A long
451D874G02
1.00 (25.4)
—
3.44 (87.3)
32B9446H24
6.13 (155.6)
—
0.31 (7.9)–18
2
100 A long
451D874G02
0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8)
—
3.75 (95.2)
32B9446H25
6.13 (155.6)
—
0.31 (7.9)–18
100 A long
451D874G02
0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9)
—
4.06 (103.1)
32B9446H26
6.13 (155.6)
—
0.31 (7.9)–18
2
100 A long
451D874G02
0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9)
—
4.38 (111.3)
32B9446H27
6.13 (155.6)
—
0.31 (7.9)–18
For 110 to 225 Ampere Circuit Breakers
2
225A short
374D883G01
1.00 (25.4)
1.06 (26.9)
—
374D883H06
—
4.25 (108.0)
0.44 (11.1)–14
225A short
374D883G01
0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8)
1.38 (34.9)
—
374D883H07
—
4.25 (108.0)
0.44 (11.1)–14
225A short
374D883G01
0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9)
1.69 (42.9)
—
374D883H08
—
4.25 (108.0)
0.44 (11.1)–14
225A short
374D883G01
0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9)
2.00 (50.8)
—
374D883H09
—
4.25 (108.0)
0.44 (11.1)–14
2
2
2
225A long
374D883G02
1.00 (25.4)
—
3.44 (87.3)
374D883H10
7.50 (190.5)
—
0.44 (11.1)–14
225A long
374D883G02
0.69–0.94 (17.5 to 23.8)
—
3.75 (95.2)
374D883H11
7.50 (190.5)
—
0.44 (11.1)–14
225A long
374D883G02
0.38–0.63 (9.5 to 15.9)
—
4.06 (103.1)
374D883H12
7.50 (190.5)
—
0.44 (11.1)–14
2
225A long
374D883G02
0.25–0.31 (6.4 to 7.9)
—
4.38 (111.3)
374D883H13
7.50 (190.5)
—
0.44 (11.1)–14
2
F-Frame
2
2
2
2
E
B
Mounting Panel
2
.75
(19.1)
2
2
“F” Thread
Breaker Mounting
Surface
.06
(1.5)
A
C
D
Note
1 Not UL listed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-328
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
J-Frame
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
Panel Thickness
Tube Length
A
B
C
Tube
Catalog
Number
250A short
5010D23G01
0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4)
0.84 (21.4)
—
456D983H05
250A short
5010D23G01
0.50–0.75 (12.7–19.1)
1.09 (27.7)
—
456D983H06
250A short
5010D23G01
0.25–0.50 (6.4–12.7)
1.03 (26.2)
—
456D983H07
250A long
5010D23G02
0.75–1.00 (19.1–25.4)
—
3.88 (98.6)
5010D23H05
250A long
5010D23G02
0.50–0.75 (12.7–19.1)
—
4.13 (104.9)
5010D23H06
250A long
5010D23G02
0.25–0.50 (6.4–12.7)
—
4.38 (111.3)
5010D23H07
1.59
(40.4)
0.59
(15.0)
0.06
(1.5)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6.66
(169.2)
2
C
A
0.03
(0.7)
2
0.31 (7.9) – 18 Thread
2
2
Do Not Use More
Than 10 Ft Lbs
Torque to Tighten Nuts
0.50 (12.7) – 13 Thread
2
Breaker
2
B
Mounting Panel
3.63
(92.2)
2
2
K-Frame 1
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalog
Number
Panel Thickness
Tube Length
A
B
400 A short
6642C14G02
0.75–1 (19.1–25.4)
400 A short
6642C14G04
0.50–0.75 (12.7–18.4)
2
C
Standard Tube
Catalog
Number
Dimensions
D
E
F
0.84 (21.3)
—
313C909H17
—
3.66 (93.0)
0.75–16 (19.1–406.4)
1.09 (27.69)
—
313C909H18
—
—
—
400 A short
6642C14G06
0.25–0.5 (6.35–12.7)
1.03 (26.16)
—
313C909H19
—
—
—
400 A long
6642C14G03
0.75–1 (19.1–25.4)
—
3.78 (96.0)
313C909H20
—
—
—
400 A long
6642C14G05
0.50–0.75 (12.7–18.4)
—
4.03 (102.4)
313C909H21
6.58 (167.1)
—
—
400 A long
6642C14G07
0.25 –0.5 (6.35–12.7)
—
4.28 (108.7)
313C909H22
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
E
B
Mounting Panel
2
2
2
“F” Thread
Breaker Mounting
Surface
2
0.06
(1.5)
1.67
(42.4)
2
A
C
2
D
2
Note
1 Not UL listed.
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-329
2.3
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
L-Frame
2
Stud Length (A)
Stud Catalog
Number
5.47 (138.9)
314C960G07
2
7.97 (202.4)
314C960G08
10.47 (265.9)
314C960G09
2
2
.44
(11.2)
A
2
Insulators
Washer
2
Nut
2
2
Circuit Breaker
2
Insulating Panel
Rear
Connecting
Stud
2
2
M-Frame
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Diameter
and
Thread
Extension
Back of
Breaker
Stud
Catalog
Number
2
225
0.50 (12.7)–13
3.66 (93.0)
314C960G01
400
0.75 (19.1)–16
5.91 (150.1)
314C960G04
2
400
0.75 (19.1)–16
8.41 (213.6)
314C960G05
400
0.75 (19.1)–16
10.91 (277.0)
314C960G06
2
600
1.00 (25.4)–12
5.91 (150.1)
314C960G07
2
600
1.00 (25.4)–12
8.41 (213.6)
314C960G08
600
1.00 (25.4)–12
10.91 (277.0)
314C960G09
2
800
1.13 (28.7)–12
5.91 (150.1)
314C960G10
800
1.13 (28.7)–12
8.41 (213.6)
314C960G11
2
800
1.13 (28.7)–12
10.91 (277.0)
314C960G12
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Diameter
and
Thread
Extension
Back of
Breaker
Stud
Catalog
Number
800
1.13 (28.7)–12
5.5 (139.7)
623B222G01
2
800
1.13 (28.7)–12
8.0 (203.2)
623B222G02
2
800
1.13 (28.7)–12
10.5 (266.7)
623B222G03
1200
1.25 (31.8)–12
5.5 (139.7)
373B375G04
1200
1.25 (31.8)–12
10.5 (266.7)
373B375G03
2
2
2
2
2
N-Frame
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-330
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
2.4
Contents
GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Frames
Description
Page
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line and Load Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Line and Load Terminals . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learn
Online
V4-T2-332
V4-T2-332
V4-T2-334
V4-T2-334
V4-T2-334
V4-T2-334
V4-T2-335
V4-T2-336
V4-T2-334
V4-T2-337
Drawings
Online
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breaker Family
2
2
Definite Purpose Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2
Optimized solution for HVAC/R and Pumping Applications.
Product Overview
GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Frames
15–800 Amperes
NEMA 480 Vac
Eaton’s Definite Purpose
molded case circuit breakers
are available in three-pole
configurations, and are
designed to meet the specific
requirements of HVAC/R
and pumping applications.
As with other members of
Eaton’s family of molded
case circuit breakers, Definite
Purpose breakers provide
high quality, reliability,
unmatched performance
and outstanding value.
Eaton’s Definite Purpose
breakers are rated from 15–
800 A and are available in five
frame sizes. Each frame size
has the same compact
outside dimensions as
Series C breakers.
Additionally, Definite Purpose
breakers have been
rigorously tested to the
UL 489 standard. They
are assembled in an ISO
certified facility.
Trip Units and Terminals
Definite Purpose breakers
contain factory-sealed
thermal-magnetic trip units.
The GP-Frame breaker
(15–100 A) includes line and
load terminals and breaker
mounting hardware.
FP (15–225A), KP (200–
400 A), LP (450–600 A) and
MP (700–800 A) Frames ship
standard without mounting
hardware. For line and load
terminals, add “L” to the end
of the catalog number or “W”
for no terminals.
External Accessories
Definite Purpose breakers
use the same external
accessories as Series C
breakers: handle
mechanisms, motor
operators, lock-off devices,
busbar extensions and
multiple terminal
arrangements.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-331
2.4
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
Product Selection Guide
Electrical Characteristics
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Breaker Type
GPS
FPS
FPH
KPS
KPH
Amperage range
15–100 A
15–225A
15–225A
200–400 A
200–400 A
Performance level
Breaker capacity (kA rms)
NEMA, UL, CSA
Number of poles
240 Vac
S
S
H
S
H
65
65
100
65
100
65
480 Vac
22
35
65
35
600 Vac
—
18
25
25
35
3
3
3
3
3
Maximum voltage (Vac)
480
600
600
600
600
Thermal-magnetic
■
■
■
■
■
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-332
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
2.4
2
2
Electrical Characteristics, continued
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Breaker Type
LPS
LPH
MPS
MPH
Amperage range
450–600 A
450–600 A
700–800 A
700–800 A
Performance level
S
H
S
H
Breaker capacity (kA rms)
240 Vac
65
100
65
100
NEMA, UL, CSA
480 Vac
35
65
50
65
600 Vac
25
35
25
35
3
3
3
3
Number of poles
Maximum voltage (Vac)
600
600
600
600
Thermal-magnetic
■
■
■
■
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-333
2.4
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
2
Features
2
Base Mounting Hardware
English base mounting
hardware is included with
GP frame only. For all other
frames, order base mounting
hardware separately as per
the table to the right.
2
Base Mounting Hardware
Catalog Number
Frame
English
Metric
GP
Included
—
FP
BMH1
BMH1M
KP
BMH3
BMH3M
2
LP
BMH4
BMH4M
MP
BMH5
BMH5M
2
Note: Base mounting hardware, is included with GP-Frame breakers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
A separate catalog number is not required.
Line and Load Terminals
Both line and load terminals
are included with GP-Frame
Definite Purpose breakers.
For all other frames, add “L”
for line and load terminals
to be included or “W” for
no terminals.
Line and Load Termination
Breaker
Termination
Type
Awg Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range (mm)
Wire
Type
Bolt Size
English
Bolt Size
Metric
Torque
Lb–In
Torque
Nm
Catalog
Number
GP
Wire
#14–1/0
2.5–50
Cu only
—
—
45
5.1
Included
Optional Line and Load Terminals
Breaker
2
Maximum
Amperes
Awg Wire
Range
Wire
Type
Catalog
Number
Catalog Number
with Control Wire
Termination
100
#14–#10
Cu/Al
3T100FB 1
—
2
100
#8
Cu/Al
3T100FB 1
—
100
#6–#4
Cu/Al
3T100FB 1
—
2
100
#3–4/0
Cu/Al
3T100FB 1
—
200
#3–4/0
Cu only
3T150FB 1
—
2
225
#4–4/0
Cu/Al
3TA225FB 1
—
225
#6–300
Cu/Al
3TA225FDK 1
—
400
250–500 (1)
Cu/Al
TA350K
—
400
3/0–250 (2)
Cu/Al
3TA400K 1
3TA400KCW
TA602LDCW
FP
2
KP
2
LP
2
MP
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
500
250–350 (2)
Cu/Al
TA602LD
600
400–500 (2)
Cu/Al
3TA603LDK 1
3TA603LDKCW
800
3/0–400 (3)
Cu/Al
TA800MA2
TA800MA2CWT
800
500–750 (2)
Cu/Al
TA801MA
TA801MACWT
Note
1 Package of three terminals.
Accessories
End Cap Accessory Kit
End caps for line and load
conductor termination are
optional with each breaker.
End caps secure the
conductor with a ring-type
connector. The kit includes
one end cap, three cap
screws, three nuts and three
lock washers.
End Cap Accessory Kit
Series C Accessories
For internal accessories, see
Page V4-T2-273.
For external accessories, see
Page V4-T2-304.
2
2
V4-T2-334
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
2.4
Catalog Number Selection
2
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
FP S 3 150 L
Frame Size
GP = GP-Frame
FP = FP-Frame
KP = KP-Frame
LP = LP-Frame
MP = LP-Frame
GP-Frame
015 = 15A
020 = 20 A
025 = 25 A
030 = 30 A
035 = 35A
040 = 40 A
045 = 45A
050 = 50 A
060 = 60 A
070 = 70 A
080 = 80 A
090 = 80 A
100 = 100 A
FP-Frame
015 = 15A
020 = 20 A
025 = 25 A
030 = 30 A
035 = 35A
040 = 40 A
045 = 45A
050 = 50 A
060 = 60 A
070 = 70 A
080 = 80 A
100 = 100 A
110 = 110 A
125 = 125A
150 = 150 A
175 = 175A
200 = 200 A
225 = 225A
2
2
Options
Interrupting Rating
S = Standard
H = High 1
Number of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Ampere Rating
KP-Frame
LP-Frame
175 = 175A
450 = 450 A
200 = 200 A
500 = 500 A
250 = 250 A
600 = 600 A
300 = 300 A
400 = 400 A
K = Molded case switch 2
L = Line and load terminals
W = Without terminals or
mounting hardware 1
2
2
2
MP-Frame
700 = 700 A
800 = 800 A
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Not available on GP-Frame.
2 When choosing a molded case switch, select the highest amperage rating for the frame and the standard interrupting rating.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-335
2.4
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
2
Product Selection
2
Catalog Numbers
When ordering Definite Purpose breakers, use the appropriate
catalog numbers given below.
2
2
GP 100
GP-Frame/15–100 A
FP 225
FP-Frame/15–225 A
Three-Pole
Three-Pole
2
2
Frame/
Ampere Rating
Catalog
Number
Frame/
Ampere Rating
Catalog
Number
GP/15–100 A circuit breakers
GPS3015
FP/15–225A circuit breakers
FPS3015
2
GPS3020
FPS3020
GPS3025
FPS3025
2
GPS3030
FPS3030
2
GPS3035
FPS3035
GPS3040
FPS3040
2
GPS3045
FPS3045
GPS3050
FPS3050
2
GPS3060
FPS3060
GPS3070
FPS3070
2
GPS3080
FPS3080
2
GPS3090
FPS3090
GPS3100
FPS3100
GPS3100K
FPS3110
2
GP/100 A molded case switch
Note: All GP frames come standard with line and load terminals
FPS3125
2
and base mounting hardware. Not available without terminals.
FPS3150
FPS3175
2
FPS3200
2
FPH3015
FPS3225
2
FPH3020
2
FPH3030
2
FPH3040
FPH3025
FPH3035
2
FPH3045
2
FPH3060
FPH3050
FPH3070
2
FPH3080
2
FPH3100
FPH3090
2
FPH3110
2
FPH3150
FPH3125
FPH3175
2
FPH3200
FPH3225
2
FP/225A molded case switch
2
Note: At the end of catalog number, add “L” for terminals or “W”
for no terminals.
2
V4-T2-336
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
FPS3225K
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Definite Purpose
KP 250
KP-Frame/200–400 A
2.4
Dimensions
Three-Pole
Frame/
Ampere Rating
Catalog
Number
KP/175–400 A circuit breakers
KPS3175
KPS3200
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
All dimensions are provided for guidance and should not be used
for construction purposes unless approved.
Contact Eaton for detailed outline drawings.
GP, FP, KP, LP and MP Definite Purpose Frames
2
KPS3400
KPH3175
KPH3200
KPH3250
KPH3300
KPH3400
KP/400 A molded case switch
LP 400
Breaker Type
GP
Width 3.00 (76.2)
FP
KP
LP
MP
4.13 (104.9)
5.49 (139.4)
8.25 (209.6)
8.25 (209.6)
Height 4.88 (124.0)
6.00 (152.4)
10.12 (257.0)
10.75 (273.1)
16.00 (406.4)
Depth 2.63 (66.7)
3.38 (85.9)
4.31 (109.6)
3.81 (96.8)
4.06 (103.1)
KPS3400K
Frame/
Ampere Rating
Catalog
Number
LP/450–600 A circuit breakers
LPS3450
2
2
2
LPS3500
2
LPS3600
2
LPH3450
LPH3500
2
LPH3600
LPS3600K
2
2
MP-Frame/700–800 A
Three-Pole
Frame/
Ampere Rating
Catalog
Number
MP/700–800 A circuit breakers
MPS3700
2
2
2
MPS3800
MPH3700
2
MPH3800
MP/800 A molded case switch
2
2
Three-Pole
MP 800
2
2
LP-Frame/450–600 A
LP/600 A molded case switch
2
2
KPS3250
KPS3300
2
MPS3800K
2
2
Note: For KP, LP, MP frames above, add “L” for terminals or W”
for no terminals to end of catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-337
2.5
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Metering and Communications
Contents
PM3 Modules
Description
2
Page
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
Learn
Online
V4-T2-339
V4-T2-339
V4-T2-340
Drawings
Online
2
2
2
2
2
Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU
2
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module
2
Product Description
Application Description
The PM3 is the perfect
solution for main, branch
circuit and standalone
monitoring/metering
applications. With information
at your fingertips, you can
meter, monitor and
communicate phase current
and voltage with calculated
power and energy.
●
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
The PM3 is versatile, as it
connects to the load side of
a molded-case circuit breaker
(MCCB) and communicates
easily to a local network or
the Internet through Eaton
Power Xpert® Gateways
(PXGs). Cost of ownership
is reduced through ease of
installation. The PM3 is
your ideal MCCB
metering solution.
2
2
2
2
2
2
●
●
Communications via
Modbus® and Eaton’s
INCOM™ protocol;
compatible with Eaton’s
PXG for Web page and
Ethernet capabilities
Works in 240 Vac PM3,
480 Vac and 600 Vac
applications
●
480 Vac PM3 has
internal power supply
to power electronics
●
600 Vac PM3 requires
24 Vdc auxiliary power
Seamlessly integrates with
thermal-magnetic or
electronic trip units
Features and Benefits
●
●
●
●
●
Communicates electrical
system data and circuit
breaker status
Calculates power and
energy to an accuracy of
1.0% of reading
Configurable with thermalmagnetic or electronic
trip units
Suitable for reverse-feed
applications
Easy to install
PM3 Benefits When Combined
with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
●
Alarming: high load and
ground fault
●
Zone selective interlocking
●
Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System™
●
Cause-of-trip localized
information through
Digiview and TRIP-LED
●
Modbus/INCOM
communications
●
HMI connectivity
through PXG
●
Current and voltage
metering to 0.5% of
reading
●
Power and energy
monitoring to 1.0%
of reading
●
Reduces cost of ownership
2
2
V4-T2-338
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Standards and Certifications
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Meets ANSI C12.1
revenue grade standard
with a current and
voltage accuracy of
0.5% of reading
UL 489, Annex J
IEC 61000-4-2—ESD
IEC 61000-4-4—EFT
IEC 61000-4-5—SURGE
IEC 61000-4-6—EMC
ANSI C12.1 (1% accuracy)
UL/cUL/CE
2.5
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Metering and Communications
Product Selection
2
PM3 Modules
Frame
Catalog Number
PM3 Power Monitoring and Communications Module Technical Specifications for
Modbus RTU
2
480 V
Description
2
600 V
Specification
Current Inputs
Modbus
2
FD
—
PM3FM
Pickup current
0.3A rms
JG
—
PM3JM
Maximum reported current
FD/JG 250 A rms
KD and LG
—
PM3LM
Accuracy
0.5% of reading
2
Line-to-neutral 30–366 Vac
2
INCOM
FD
PM3FI480
PM3FI600
Voltage Inputs
JG
PM3JI480
PM3JI600
Range
KD and LG
PM3LI480
Line-to-line 52–635 Vac
PM3LI600
Supported systems
End Cap Kits
(Sold Separately)
Catalog
Number
Description
FD
Metric end cap kit KPEKM1
for F-Frame
English end cap kit KPEK1
for F-Frame
Metric end cap kit KPEKM3
for K-Frame
English end cap kit KPEK3
for K-Frame
LG
Input impedance
996 kiloohm/phase
2
Burden per phase
0.36 VA/phase max. at 600 V;
0.014 VA at 120V
2
Phase voltage connections
Internal via screw terminal to busbar
For wye system, a neutral is required to be connected to the PM3 on the
right Phoenix connector.
2
Neutral connection
If neutral is not available, the meter will calculate a virtual neutral
based on the phase-to-phase rms voltage.
The system voltage must be balanced for this to be accurate.
Metric end cap kit FJ3RTWK
for JG-Frame
English end cap kit FJ3RTDK
for JG-Frame
KD
2
Three-element wye, three-element wye + neutral
Two-element delta, four-wire delta systems
Frame
JG
2
KD/LD 630 A rms
Metric end cap kit L3RTWK
for LG-Frame
2
2
Frequency
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Accuracy
± 0.1 Hz
Resolution
0.1 Hz
2
2
Power and Energy
Accuracy
2
1% of reading (ANSI C12.1)
2
Isolation
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500 V.
Technical Data and
Specifications
Metered parameters
●
IA, IB, IC
●
VAB, VBC, VCA, Van, Vbn, Vcn
●
Apparent Energy, Forward
Real Energy, Reverse Real
Energy, Net Real Energy,
Lagging Reactive Energy,
Leading Reactive Energy,
Net Reactive Energy
●
Apparent Power A, B, C;
Apparent Power Total;
Reactive Power A, B, C;
Reactive Power Total; Real
Power A, B, C;
Real Power Total
●
Frequency, Apparent
Power Factor, Apparent
PFA, Apparent PFB,
Apparent PFC
2
Environmental Ratings
Operating temperature
–20 °C to +50 °C
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +50 °C
Operating humidity
5 to 95% RH noncondensing
2
Voltage, current
True rms
Sampling rate
13.02K samples per second
2
2
Sensing Method
2
Update Rate
Watts, VAR and VA
1.03 sec at 60 Hz
All other parameters
1.07 sec at 60 Hz
2
DC voltage
18–30 Vdc
2
Maximum current
30.0 mA at 24 Vdc
Burden
0.72W
Power Supply (External)
2
2
Standard Communication Format
Connection type
Three-wire RS-485 (A, B, Common)
Com port baud rate
9600 or 19,200 bauds
Modbus address range
01–247
Data format
Selectable (8, N, 1 | 8, N, 2 | 8, Even, 1 | 8, Odd, 1)
Protocols
Modbus RTU
Internal termination resistor
selectable ON or OFF
Via DIP switch
Default: 19,200 bauds
2
Default: 8, N, 2
2
Default: Enabled
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-339
2
2
2.5
2
Metering and Communications
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
FD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
2
1.38
(35.1)
2
2
2.88
(73.2)
3.63
(92.2)
On
Off
3.63
(92.2)
6.00
(152.4)
CL
Handle
0.69
(17.5)
Line End
7.00
(177.8)
CL
Handle
O
N
O
F
F
LED
5.50
(139.7)
3.95
(100.3)
11.00
(279.4)
10.50
(266.7)
O
N
12.00
(304.8)
1 2 3 4 5 6
123456789101112131415
2.06
(52.3)
3.34
(84.8)
Load End
123456789101112131415
2.06
(52.3)
3.42
(86.9)
3.94 (100.1)
4.13 (104.9)
2
Load End
KD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
2
1.72
(43.7)
2
2
0.86
(21.8)
2
LG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
Line End
12.14
(308.4)
CL
Handle
10.13
(257.3)
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module
Tx
ON O
Rx
Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5 6
MODBUS
COM
EARTH
24 Vdc (+)
24 Vdc (–)
13.83
(351.3)
Network Address
Power
Bell Alarm
COM
COM
Aux. Alarm
V Neutral
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module
Tx
ON O
B
MODBUS
COM
EARTH
Load End
Rx
Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5 6
STATUS
Network Address
N1
A
24 Vdc (+)
2.74
(69.6)
5.48 (139.2)
CL
Handle
10.13
(257.3)
See breaker for terminal information.
See instruction sheet for high voltage tests.
For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame
Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.
2
3.98
(101.1)
Power
Bell Alarm
COM
COM
Aux. Alarm
V Neutral
See breaker for terminal information.
See instruction sheet for high voltage tests.
For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame
Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.
2.74
(69.6)
5.48 (139.2)
4.06
(103.1)
4.88 (124.0)
13.82
(351.0)
Load End
PM3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights
Description
Frame
Weight in lbs (kg)
FD
1.26 (0.57)
JG
1.60 (0.73)
KD/LG
2.25 (1.02)
2
2
5.58
(141.7)
CL
Handle
24 Vdc (–)
2
2
Line End
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
(103.1)
3.98
(101.1)
5.58
(141.7)
8.44
(214.4)
12.14
(308.4)
STATUS
N1
A
2
2
0.86
(21.8)
4.73
(120.1)
5.77
(146.6)
CL
Handle
Off/O
8.44
(214.4)
B
2
1.72
(43.7)
On/I
2
2
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
(103.1)
3.81
(96.8)
5.77
(146.6)
4.92
(125.0)
3.34
(84.8)
3.42
(86.9)
4.41 (112.0)
4.13 (104.9)
2
2
LED
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
2
CL
Handle
PUSH TO
TRIP
FACTO
O
N
9.53
(242.1)
2
2
3.57 (90.7)
3.44
(87.4)
3.34
(84.8)
3.95
(100.3)
3.17
(80.5)
CL
Handle
S
RY EA
4.50
(114.3)
2
2
Line End
1.38
(35.1)
FACTO
2
3.50 (88.9)
3.39
(86.1)
3.19
(81.0)
123456789101112131415
2
0.69
(17.5)
JG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
S
RY EA
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Basic unit in inches (mm)
Shipping container dimensions in inches (mm)
V4-T2-340
Dimensions and Weights
FD
4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
JG
4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
KD/LG
5.48 W x 3.70 L x 4.06 H (139.2 x 94.0 x 103.2)
FD/JG
8.00 x 5.13 x 5.50 (203.2 x 130.3 x 139.7)
KD/LG
6.25 x 8.25 x 7.00 (158.7 x 209.5 x 177.8)
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
3.98
(101.1)
4.06
(103.1)
5.43 (137.9)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Contents
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Description
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories Selection Guide and
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . .
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . .
Learn
Online
Page
2
V4-T2-342
V4-T2-343
2
V4-T2-345
V4-T2-345
V4-T2-346
V4-T2-346
V4-T2-347
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-372
V4-T2-398
V4-T2-401
V4-T2-415
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Drawings
Online
2
2
2
2
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Product Description
Application Description
Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s engine generator
molded case circuit breakers
are designed specifically for
application on diesel engine
powered standby generators
where high interrupting
circuit breakers are not
required. The JG through NG
breakers are equipped with a
special trip unit, that includes
standard thermal (overload)
protection and special low
magnetic pickup range (FG
includes a fixed thermalmagnetic pickup). The
standard thermal trip unit
provides overload protection
for conductors per the
National Electrical Code®. The
low magnetic pickup range is
approximately two to five
times the continuous rating
and provides closer low-level
short-circuit protection when
applied on generators that
have very low short-circuit
capacity. This combination
allows the user to customize
the breaker to the generator
output.
Engine generator circuit
breakers are suitable for
reverse feed application.
Engine generator molded
case circuit breakers are
designed to conform with the
following standards:
●
●
●
2
2
2
Underwriters Laboratories
Standard UL 489, Molded
Case Circuit Breakers and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures
File E7819
Canadian Standards
Association Standard
C22.2 No. 5, Service
Entrance and Branch Circuit
Breakers
International
Electrotechnical
Commission
Recommendations IEC
947-2, Circuit Breakers
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Conformance with these
standards satisfies most local
and international codes,
assuming user acceptability
and simplified application.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-341
2.6
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented
only as an aid to
understanding catalog
numbers. It is not to be used
to build catalog numbers for
circuit breakers.
●
FG breakers include both
line and load side terminals
●
●
JG, KG, LG and NG
breakers with W catalog
number suffix do not
include any terminals
JG, KG, LG and NG
breakers without W catalog
number suffix include both
line and load terminals
●
●
Contact Eaton for
additional ratings and
internal/external accessories
Reverse feed
Circuit Breakers FG, JG, KG, LG and NG
FG 3 100 W
2
2
Frame
FG
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Number of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Trip Amperes
015
020
025
030
035
040
045
050
060
070
080
090
100
125
150
175
200
225
Suffix
W = Without terminals
JG
2
175
200
225
250
2
KG
300
350
400
2
2
LG
450
500
600
2
NG
700
800
900
1000
1200
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-342
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
The following table lists FG
through NG engine generator
breakers with the maximum
generator kVA and kW rating.
Engine generator breakers
are applied at 115% of the
2
generator full load current
rating (FLA). The maximum
kW rating is based on threephase generators at 80%
power factor.
2
2
2
Thermal-Magnetic
Engine Generator
Breaker 3
Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz
Magnetic
Pickup Range
240 Vac
480 Vac
600 Vac
kVA 1
kW 2
kVA 1
kW 2
kVA 1
kW 2
Catalog
Number
Fixed
5
4
11
9
14
11
FG3015 4
Fixed
7
6
14
12
18
14
FG3020 4
Fixed
9
7
18
14
23
18
FG3025 4
Fixed
11
9
22
17
27
22
FG3030 4
Fixed
13
10
25
20
32
25
FG3035 4
Fixed
14
12
29
23
36
29
FG3040 4
Fixed
16
13
32
26
41
32
FG3045 4
Fixed
18
14
36
29
45
36
FG3050 4
Fixed
22
17
43
35
54
43
FG3060 4
Fixed
25
20
51
40
63
51
FG3070 4
Fixed
29
23
58
46
72
58
FG3080 4
4
Fixed
32
26
65
52
81
65
FG3090
Fixed
36
29
72
58
90
72
FG3100 4
Fixed
40
32
79
64
99
79
FG3110 4
Fixed
45
36
90
72
113
90
FG3125 4
Fixed
54
43
108
87
135
108
FG3150 4
4
Fixed
63
51
126
101
158
126
FG3175
Fixed
72
58
144
116
181
144
FG3200 4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Fixed
81
65
162
130
203
162
FG3225
350–700
63
51
126
101
158
126
JG3175W 5
350–700
63
51
126
101
158
126
JG3175 4
350–700
72
58
144
116
181
144
JG3200W 5
350–700
72
58
144
116
181
144
JG3200 4
350–700
81
65
162
130
203
162
JG3225W 5
350–700
81
65
162
130
203
162
JG3225 4
350–700
90
72
181
144
226
181
JG3250W 5
350–700
90
72
181
144
226
181
JG3250 4
500–1000
108
87
217
173
271
217
KG3300W 5
500–1000
108
87
217
173
271
217
KG3300 4
500–1000
126
101
253
202
316
253
KG3350W 5
500–1000
126
101
253
202
316
253
KG3350 4
1000–2000
144
116
289
231
361
289
KG3400 4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating.
2 Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor.
3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units.
4 Breaker includes line and load terminals.
5 Without terminals.
2
2
2
The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW.
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-343
2.6
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Electronic
Engine Generator
Breaker 3
Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz
Magnetic
Pickup Range
240 Vac
kVA 1
kW 2
kVA 1
kW 2
kVA 1
kW 2
Catalog
Number
500–2500
162
130
325
260
406
325
LG3450 4
2
500–2500
181
144
361
289
451
361
LG3500 4
2
500–2500
217
173
433
347
542
433
LG3600 4
500–2500
253
202
505
404
632
505
NG3700 4
2
500–2500
289
231
578
462
722
578
NG3800 4
1250–5000
325
260
650
520
812
650
NG3900 4
2
1250–5000
361
289
722
578
903
722
NG31000 4
1250–5000
433
347
867
693
1083
867
NG31200 4
2
2
2
2
480 Vac
600 Vac
Notes
1 Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating.
2 Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor.
3 FG, JG, KG include thermal-magnetic trip units, LG and NG include electronic trip units.
4 Breaker includes line and load terminals.
The following catalog numbers have center tap studs for dual voltage applications: JG3070CT, JG3100CT, JG3125CT, KG3175CT, LG3300CTW.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-344
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information
Options and Accessories
Enclosures
Type 1 General Purpose
Standard Terminals
●
●
●
Surface or flush mounting
15–1200 ampere range
600 Vac, 500 Vdc
Type 1 enclosed breakers
are designed for use in
commercial buildings,
apartment buildings and
other areas where a general
purpose enclosure is
applicable. The breaker is
front operable and is capable
of being padlocked in either
the ON or OFF position.
Ratings through 1200
amperes are listed with
Underwriters Laboratories as
approved for service entrance
application. Both surface and
flush mounted enclosures are
available.
Type 3R Rainproof Surface
Mounting
●
●
●
Interchangeable hubs
(through 400 amperes)
15–1200 ampere range
600 Vac, 500 Vdc
This general purpose outdoor
service center employs a
circuit breaker inside a
weatherproof sheet steel
breaker enclosure to serve
as a main disconnect and
protective device for feeder
circuits. Ratings through
1200 amperes are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories as
suitable for service entrance
application.
Type 12 Dustproof Surface
Mounting
●
●
●
No knockouts or other
openings
15–1200 ampere range
600 Vac, 500 Vdc
The Type 12 enclosure is
designed in line with
specifications for special
industry applications where
unusually severe conditions
involving oil, coolant, dust and
other foreign materials exist
in the operating atmosphere.
The handle padlocks in the
OFF position and the cover is
interlocked with the handle
mechanism to prevent
opening the cover with the
circuit breaker in the ON
position. Ratings through
1200 amperes are listed by
Underwriters Laboratories as
suitable for service entrance
application.
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
FG
15–225
JG
175–250
KG
300–400
LG
450–600
NG
700–1200
Enclosure
Type Class
Catalog
Number
Type 1
SFDN225
Type 3R
RFDN225
Type 12
JFDN225
Type 1
SJDN250
Type 3R
RJDN250
Type 12
JJDN250
Type 1
SKDN400
Type 3R
RKDN400
Type 12
JKDN400
Type 1
SLDN600
Type 3R
RLDN600
Type 12
JLDN600
Type 1
SNDN1200
Type 3R
RNDN1200
Type 12
JNDN1200
2
Breaker
Frame
Max. Amp
Rating
AWG Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Catalog
Number
FG
100
14–1/0
2.5–50
3T100FB 1
FG
150
4–4/0
25–95
3TA225FD 1
JG
250
4–350 kcmil
25–185
TA250KB
KG
350
250–500 kcmil
120–240
TA350K
KG
400
3/0–250 kcmil (2)
95–120
3TA400K 1
LG
600
250–500 kcmil (2)
120–240
3TA603LDK
NG
700
1–500 kcmil (2)
50–300
TA700NB1
NG
1000
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
95–185
TA1000NB1
NG
1200
4/0–500 kcmil (4)
120–300
TA1200NB1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable
Max. Enclosure
Rating (Amperes)
Main Lug Number
Size Cu/Al
Ground Lug
Size Cu/Al
Catalog
Number
2
100
(1) 14–1/0
(1) 14–1/0
INK100
250
(1) 6–350 kcmil
(1) 4–300 kcmil
INK250
2
400
(1) 4–750 kcmil or
(2) 1/0–250 kcmil
(1) 4–300 kcmil
INK400
2
600
(2) 250–500 kcmil
(1) 4–300 kcmil
INK600
1200
(3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or
(4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil
(1) 6–250 kcmil
INK1200
2
2
Auxiliary Switch 2
1A-1B
Factory
Mounted
2
2
Internal Accessories
Breaker
Frame
Enclosure Selection Data
2.6
2A-2B
Field Kit
Catalog Number
Factory
Mounted
Field Kit
Catalog Number
FG 3
A06
A1X1PK
A13
A2X1RPK
JG
A06
A1X2PK
A13
A2X2PK
KG
A06
A1X3PK
A13
A2X3PK
LG
A06
A1X4PK
A13
A2X4PK
NG
A06
A1X5PK
A13
A2X5PK
Shunt Trip 2
Breaker
Frame
Rating
Factory
Mounted
Field Kit
Catalog Number
FG 3
12–24 Vdc
S02
SNT1LP03K
JG
12–24 Vdc
S42
SNT2P04K
KG
12–24 Vdc
S42
SNT3P04K
LG
12–24 Vdc
S02
SNT4LP03K
NG
12–24 Vdc
S02
SNT5LP03K
Notes
1 Package of three terminals.
2 Other accessories are available. Same as standard frame breakers.
3 Field installation on the FG Frame is not UL listed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-345
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
Technical Data and Specifications
2
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Volts AC
(50/60 Hz)
Interrupting Capacity
(Symmetrical Amperes)
240
18,000
480
14,000
2
600
10,000
2
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volts AC
(50/60 Hz)
Interrupting Capacity
(Symmetrical Amperes)
220, 240
18,000/ 9,000
380, 415
14,000/ 7,000
660, 690
18,000/ 9,000
14,000/ 7,000
10,000/5,000
Dimensions and Weights
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Enclosure Selection Data
2
Breaker
Frame
Amperes
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Enclosure
Type Class
FG
15–225
JG
175–250
KG
300–400
LG
450–600
NG
700–1200
2
2
2
A
B
C
D
E
Approx. Weight
Lbs (kg)
Conduit Sizes,
Inches
Type 1
23.25 (590.6)
8.41 (213.6)
6.28 (159.5)
18.75 (476.3)
1.20 (30.5)
15 (7)
0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 SFDN225
Type 3R
25.66 (651.8)
8.84 (224.7)
9.31 (236.5)
24.28 (616.7)
1.70 (43.2)
19 (9)
0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50 RFDN225
Type 12
25.66 (651.8)
8.84 (224.7)
9.31 (236.5)
24.28 (616.7)
1.70 (43.2)
18 (8)
—
JFDN225
Type 1
34.70 (881.4)
10.92 (277.4)
7.20 (182.9)
30.00 (762.0)
1.88 (47.8)
31 (14)
0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3
SJDN250
Type 3R
37.50 (952.5)
11.56 (293.6)
10.22 (259.6)
35.77 (908.6)
1.94 (49.3)
40 (18)
0.25, 0.50, 2, 2.50, 3
RJDN250
Type 12
37.53 (953.3)
11.56 (293.6)
10.22 (259.6)
35.77 (908.6)
1.94 (49.3)
37 (17)
—
JJDN250
Type 1
38.81 (985.8)
11.06 (280.9)
10.94 (277.9)
34.00 (863.6)
2.28 (57.9)
53 (24)
0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.50, 2, 2.50, 3, 3.50 SKDN400
Type 3R
41.69 (1058.9)
11.75 (298.5)
14.06 (357.1)
39.90 (1013.5)
1.97 (50.0)
60 (27)
0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 2.50, 3, 3.50
RKDN400
Type 12
41.69 (1058.9)
11.75 (298.5)
14.06 (357.1)
39.90 (1013.5)
1.97 (50.0)
53 (24)
—
JKDN400
Type 1
45.88 (1165.4)
14.31 (363.5)
12.38 (314.5)
46.56 (1182.6)
1.91 (48.5)
81 (37)
0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4
SLDN600
Type 3R
48.31 (1227.1)
14.91 (378.7)
15.50 (393.7)
46.56 (1182.6)
1.92 (48.8)
84 (38)
0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 3, 3.50, 4
RLDN600
Type 12
48.31 (1227.1)
14.91 (378.7)
15.50 (393.7)
46.56 (1182.6)
1.92 (48.8)
81 (37)
—
JLDN600
Type 1
61.22 (1555.0)
21.44 (544.6)
15.41 (391.4)
61.84 (1570.7)
1.97 (50.0)
178 (81)
—
SNDN1200
Type 3R
63.59 (1615.2)
22.00 (558.8)
17.63 (447.8)
61.84 (1570.7)
1.97 (50.0)
175 (79)
—
RNDN1200
Type 12
63.59 (1615.2)
22.00 (558.8)
17.63 (447.8)
61.84 (1570.7)
1.97 (50.0)
170 (77)
—
JNDN1200
Type 1 Surface Mounted
Type 3R Rainproof
E
E
B
2
2
E
C
C
2
2
Type 12, 12K Dustproof
C
ON
A
D
2
A
D
D
ON
OFF
OFF
A
B
B
2
V4-T2-346
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Catalog
Number
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Contents
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Description
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . .
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . .
Page
V4-T2-341
V4-T2-349
V4-T2-350
V4-T2-357
V4-T2-358
V4-T2-359
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-372
V4-T2-398
V4-T2-401
V4-T2-415
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
2
Product Description
DC (direct current)
systems and applications
are becoming commonplace
as alternative energy sources
have expanded and the
number of DC devices
and data centers using DC
power has swelled.
Eaton offers molded case
circuit breakers and switches
to meet circuit protection and
switching requirements for a
host of different DC end user
requirements. Applications
include UPS battery supply
circuits, solar systems and
electric vehicle charging, as
well as commercial and
industrial distribution.
Current ratings are available
from 15 to 3000 A, with
a full scale of voltage and
interrupting ratings to address
needs ranging from standard
to the highest performance.
Optional internal accessories
provide remote tripping and
indication of breaker status.
The DC breaker family is
UL 489 listed and exceeds
the requirements in UL 489
Supplement SC for UPS
applications. Eaton breakers
may be applied in both
ungrounded and select
grounded applications, with
poles connected in series
to operate at the maximum
voltages shown on Page
V4-T2-348. To use DC circuit
breakers on 600 V grounded
systems, three poles in series
must be connected on the
ungrounded leg.
All DC breakers use the
same internal and external
accessories as their
corresponding Series C
and Series G AC frame
equivalents, except for the
NBDC breaker, which uses
the same internal and
external accessories as
the standard NB frame.
2
2
2
2
2
The HFDDC through
HMDLDC and EG to RG
DC breakers use the same
internal and external
accessories as their
corresponding Series C
and Series G AC Frame
equivalents. NBDC uses the
same internal and external
accessories as standard
NB breakers.
2
2
2
2
2
Many of the Eaton AC
molded case circuit breakers
carry 250 Vdc ratings for
ungrounded systems. Refer
to Pages V4-T2-9 and
V4-T2-118 for these
interrupting tables.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-347
2.6
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Quick Reference Direct Current Circuit Breakers
UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Interrupting Capacity (kA)
Volts DC 1
Circuit Breaker
Type
Maximum
Amperes
125
Poles in
Series
250 2
Poles in
Series
500
600
Poles in
Series
750 2
Poles in
Series
EGEDC
100
10
1
35
2
35
—
3
—
—
2
EGSDC
100
35
1
42
2
50
—
3
—
—
EGHDC
100
42
1
50
2
65
—
3
—
—
2
HFDDC
225
42
1
50
2
—
42
3
42
4
2
JGEDC
250
35
1
35
2
—
35
3
—
—
JGSDC
250
42
1
42
2
—
50
3
—
—
2
JGHDC
250
50
1
50
2
—
65
3
—
—
HJDDC
250
42
1
50
2
—
42
3
—
—
2
HKDDC
400
42
1
50
2
—
42
3
—
—
LGEDC
600
22
1
22
2
—
35
3
—
—
2
LGSDC
600
22
1
22
2
—
50
3
—
—
2
LGHDC
600
50
1
50
2
—
65
3
—
—
HLDDC
600
42
1
50
2
—
35
3
—
—
2
HLDDC 3
1200
42
1
50
2
—
—
—
—
—
HMDLDC
800
42
1
50
2
—
35
3
—
—
2
NBDC
1200
42
1
50
2
—
50
3
—
—
RGHDC
3000
42
1
50
2
—
65
3
—
—
Ics
Poles in
Series
Icu
Ics
Poles in
Series
Icu
Ics
Poles in
Series
2
2
2
IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit Breaker
Type
Maximum
Amperes
125 Volts DC
Icu
250 Volts DC
600 Volts DC
EGEDC
100
10
10
1
10
10
2
—
—
—
2
EGSDC
100
35
35
1
35
35
2
—
—
—
EGHDC
100
42
42
1
42
42
2
—
—
—
2
JGEDC
250
22
22
1
22
22
2
—
—
—
2
JGSDC
250
22
22
1
22
22
2
—
—
—
JGHDC
250
42
42
1
42
42
2
—
—
—
2
HJDDC
250
—
—
—
—
—
—
20
10
3
LGEDC
600
22
22
1
22
22
2
—
—
—
2
LGSDC
600
22
22
1
22
22
2
—
—
—
LGHDC
600
42
42
1
42
42
2
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
HLDDC
600
—
—
—
—
—
—
20
10
3
HMDLDC
800
—
—
—
—
—
—
20
10
3
Notes
1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Time constants per UL 489.
2 EGEDC through HMDLDC have been tested up to 300 Vdc to allow for battery charging voltages. 750 Vdc is common in transportation applications.
HFDDC, four-pole 750 Vdc is available up to 150 A maximum. 300 Vdc and 750 Vdc are not UL 489 listed voltage ratings.
3 Four-pole frame with two-poles connected in parallel.
See Page V4-T2-358 for series connection diagrams. Use NEC rated cable to connect/short poles in series as shown.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-348
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Catalog Number Selection
2
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
2
2
DC Circuit Breaker
HFDDC 3 150 W
Frame
EGEDC = Series G—E (100 A max.)
EGSDC = Series G—E (100 A max.)
EGHDC = Series G—E (100 A max.)
HFDDC = Series C—F (225 A max.)
JGEDC = Series G—J (250 A max.)
JGSDC = Series G—J (250 A max.)
JGHDC = Series G—J (250 A max.)
HJDDC = Series C—J (250 A max.)
HKDDC = Series C—K (400 A max.)
LGEDC = Series G—L (600 A max.)
LGSDC = Series G—L (600 A max.)
LGHDC = Series G—L (600 A max.)
HLDDC = Series C—L (1200 A max.)
HMDLDC = Series C—M (800 A max.)
NBDC
= NB (1200 A max.)
RGHDC = Series G—R (3000 A max.)
Number of Poles
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Trip Unit Ampere Rating
015 = 15 A
020 = 20 A
025 = 25 A
030 = 30 A
035 = 35 A
040 = 40 A
045 = 45 A
050 = 50 A
060 = 60 A
070 = 70 A
080 = 80 A
090 = 90 A
100 = 100 A
110 = 110 A
125 = 125 A
150 = 150 A
175 = 175 A
200 = 200 A
225 = 225 A
250 = 250 A
300 = 300 A
350 = 350 A
400 = 400 A
450 = 450 A
500 = 500 A
600 = 600 A
700 = 700 A
800 = 800 A
900 = 900 A
1000 = 1000 A
1200 = 1200 A
1600 = 1600 A
2000 = 2000 A
2500 = 2500 A
3000 = 3000 A
2
Suffix
Series C, NB Frames
K
= Molded case switch
L
= Line and load terminals, F-Frame
MW = 135% magnetic trip unit, without terminals
W = Without terminals
Series G Frames
FFG = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, with terminals
FFW = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, without terminals
FAG = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, with terminals
FAW = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, without terminals
KSG = Molded case switch, with terminals
KSW = Molded case switch, without terminals
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-349
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
Product Selection
2
Type EGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 500 Vdc
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker
with Terminals
without Terminals
Catalog
Number
25
30
Type EGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 500 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker
with Terminals
without Terminals
Catalog
Number
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
EGEDC3025FFG
EGEDC3025FFW
25
EGHDC3025FFG
EGHDC3025FFW
EGEDC3030FFG
EGEDC3030FFW
30
EGHDC3030FFG
EGHDC3030FFW
2
35
EGEDC3035FFG
EGEDC3035FFW
35
EGHDC3035FFG
EGHDC3035FFW
40
EGEDC3040FFG
EGEDC3040FFW
40
EGHDC3040FFG
EGHDC3040FFW
2
45
EGEDC3045FFG
EGEDC3045FFW
45
EGHDC3045FFG
EGHDC3045FFW
50
EGEDC3050FFG
EGEDC3050FFW
50
EGHDC3050FFG
EGHDC3050FFW
2
60
EGEDC3060FFG
EGEDC3060FFW
60
EGHDC3060FFG
EGHDC3060FFW
2
70
EGEDC3070FFG
EGEDC3070FFW
70
EGHDC3070FFG
EGHDC3070FFW
80
EGEDC3080FFG
EGEDC3080FFW
80
EGHDC3080FFG
EGHDC3080FFW
2
90
EGEDC3090FFG
EGEDC3090FFW
90
EGHDC3090FFG
EGHDC3090FFW
100
EGEDC3100FFG
EGEDC3100FFW
100
EGHDC3100FFG
EGHDC3100FFW
2
2
2
2
Type EGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 500 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker
with Terminals
without Terminals
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
25
EGSDC3025FFG
EGSDC3025FFW
2
30
EGSDC3030FFG
EGSDC3030FFW
35
EGSDC3035FFG
EGSDC3035FFW
2
40
EGSDC3040FFG
EGSDC3040FFW
2
45
EGSDC3045FFG
EGSDC3045FFW
50
EGSDC3050FFG
EGSDC3050FFW
2
60
EGSDC3060FFG
EGSDC3060FFW
70
EGSDC3070FFG
EGSDC3070FFW
2
80
EGSDC3080FFG
EGSDC3080FFW
90
EGSDC3090FFG
EGSDC3090FFW
100
EGSDC3100FFG
EGSDC3100FFW
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-350
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
HFDDC
Type HFDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
2
Complete Circuit Breaker with Line and Load Terminals 1
2
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
15
HFDDC1015L
HFDDC2015L
HFDDC3015L
HFDDC4015L
20
HFDDC1020L
HFDDC2020L
HFDDC3020L
HFDDC4020L
2
25
HFDDC1025L
HFDDC2025L
HFDDC3025L
HFDDC4025L
30
HFDDC1030L
HFDDC2030L
HFDDC3030L
HFDDC4030L
35
HFDDC1035L
HFDDC2035L
HFDDC3035L
HFDDC4035L
40
HFDDC1040L
HFDDC2040L
HFDDC3040L
HFDDC4040L
45
HFDDC1045L
HFDDC2045L
HFDDC3045L
HFDDC4045L
50
HFDDC1050L
HFDDC2050L
HFDDC3050L
HFDDC4050L
60
HFDDC1060L
HFDDC2060L
HFDDC3060L
HFDDC4060L
70
HFDDC1070L
HFDDC2070L
HFDDC3070L
HFDDC4070L
80
HFDDC1080L
HFDDC2080L
HFDDC3080L
HFDDC4080L
90
HFDDC1090L
HFDDC2090L
HFDDC3090L
HFDDC4090L
100
HFDDC1100L
HFDDC2100L
HFDDC3100L
HFDDC4100L
110
HFDDC1110L
HFDDC2110L
HFDDC3110L
HFDDC4110L
125
HFDDC1125L
HFDDC2125L
HFDDC3125L
HFDDC4125L
150
HFDDC1150L
HFDDC2150L
HFDDC3150L
HFDDC4150L
175
—
HFDDC2175L
HFDDC3175L
—
200
—
HFDDC2200L
HFDDC3200L
—
225
—
HFDDC2225L
HFDDC3225L
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type JGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 2
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70
JGEDC3070FAG
JGEDC3250NN
JT3070FA
T250FJ
90
JGEDC3090FAG
JGEDC3250NN
JT3090FA
T250FJ
100
JGEDC3100FAG
JGEDC3250NN
JT3100FA
T250FJ
125
JGEDC3125FAG
JGEDC3250NN
JT3125FA
T250FJ
150
JGEDC3150FAG
JGEDC3250NN
JT3150FA
T250FJ
175
JGEDC3175FAG
JGEDC3250NN
JT3175FA
T250FJ
200
JGEDC3200FAG
JGEDC3250NN
JT3200FA
T250FJ
225
JGEDC3225FAG
JGEDC3250NN
JT3225FA
T250FJ
250
JGEDC3250FAG
JGEDC3250NN
JT3250FA
T250FJ
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 For breaker without terminals, replace “L” with “W” at end of catalog number.
2 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-351
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
Type JGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
70
JGSDC3070FAG
JGSDC3250NN
JT3070FA
T250FJ
90
JGSDC3090FAG
JGSDC3250NN
JT3090FA
T250FJ
2
100
JGSDC3100FAG
JGSDC3250NN
JT3100FA
T250FJ
125
JGSDC3125FAG
JGSDC3250NN
JT3125FA
T250FJ
2
150
JGSDC3150FAG
JGSDC3250NN
JT3150FA
T250FJ
2
175
JGSDC3175FAG
JGSDC3250NN
JT3175FA
T250FJ
200
JGSDC3200FAG
JGSDC3250NN
JT3200FA
T250FJ
225
JGSDC3225FAG
JGSDC3250NN
JT3225FA
T250FJ
250
JGSDC3250FAG
JGSDC3250NN
JT3250FA
T250FJ
2
2
2
2
JGHDC3250NN
Type JGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
70
JGHDC3070FAG
JGHDC3250NN
JT3070FA
T250FJ
90
JGHDC3090FAG
JGHDC3250NN
JT3090FA
T250FJ
2
100
JGHDC3100FAG
JGHDC3250NN
JT3100FA
T250FJ
125
JGHDC3125FAG
JGHDC3250NN
JT3125FA
T250FJ
2
150
JGHDC3150FAG
JGHDC3250NN
JT3150FA
T250FJ
2
175
JGHDC3175FAG
JGHDC3250NN
JT3175FA
T250FJ
200
JGHDC3200FAG
JGHDC3250NN
JT3200FA
T250FJ
225
JGHDC3225FAG
JGHDC3250NN
JT3225FA
T250FJ
250
JGHDC3250FAG
JGHDC3250NN
JT3250FA
T250FJ
2
2
2
2
2
HJDDC3250
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type HJDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
70
HJDDC3250F
JT3070T
TA250KB
90
HJDDC3250F
JT3090T
TA250KB
100
HJDDC3250F
JT3100T
TA250KB
125
HJDDC3250F
JT3125T
TA250KB
150
HJDDC3250F
JT3150T
TA250KB
175
HJDDC3250F
JT3175T
TA250KB
200
HJDDC3250F
JT3200T
TA250KB
2
225
HJDDC3250F
JT3225T
TA250KB
250
HJDDC3250F
JT3250T
TA250KB
2
Note
1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
2
2
2
V4-T2-352
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
HKDDC3400
Type HKDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
100
HKDDC3400F
KT3100T
TA300K
125
HKDDC3400F
KT3125T
TA300K
2
150
HKDDC3400F
KT3150T
TA300K
175
HKDDC3400F
KT3175T
TA300K
200
HKDDC3400F
KT3200T
TA300K
225
HKDDC3400F
KT3225T
TA300K
250
HKDDC3400F
KT3250T
TA350K
300
HKDDC3400F
KT3300T
TA350K
350
HKDDC3400F
KT3350T
TA350K
400
LGEDC3630NN
2
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
HKDDC3400F
KT3400T
3TA400K
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type LGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGEDC3250FAG
LGEDC3630NN
LT3250FA
TA350LK
300
LGEDC3300FAG
LGEDC3630NN
LT3300FA
TA350LK
350
LGEDC3350FAG
LGEDC3630NN
LT3350FA
TA350LK
400
LGEDC3400FAG
LGEDC3630NN
LT3400FA
TA350LK
500
LGEDC3500FAG
LGEDC3630NN
LT4500FA
3TA632LK 2
600
LGEDC3600FAG
LGEDC3630NN
LT3600FA
3TA632LK 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type LGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGSDC3250FAG
LGSDC3630NN
LT3250FA
TA350LK
300
LGSDC3300FAG
LGSDC3630NN
LT3300FA
TA350LK
350
LGSDC3350FAG
LGSDC3630NN
LT3350FA
TA350LK
400
LGSDC3400FAG
LGSDC3630NN
LT3400FA
TA350LK
500
LGSDC3500FAG
LGSDC3630NN
LT4500FA
3TA632LK 2
600
LGSDC3600FAG
LGSDC3630NN
LT3600FA
3TA632LK 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
2 Three-pole kit.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-353
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
Type LGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
250
LGHDC3250FAG
LGHDC3630NN
LT3250FA
TA350LK
300
LGHDC3300FAG
LGHDC3630NN
LT3300FA
TA350LK
2
2
2
2
2
2
HLDDC
2
350
LGHDC3350FAG
LGHDC3630NN
LT3350FA
TA350LK
400
LGHDC3400FAG
LGHDC3630NN
LT3400FA
TA350LK
500
LGHDC3500FAG
LGHDC3630NN
LT4500FA
3TA632LK 2
600
LGHDC3600FAG
LGHDC3630NN
LT3600FA
3TA632LK 2
Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
300
HLDDC3600F
LT3300T
TA602LD
350
HLDDC3600F
LT3350T
TA602LD
2
400
HLDDC3600F
LT3400T
TA602LD
2
450
HLDDC3600F
LT3450T
TA602LD
500
HLDDC3600F
LT3500T
TA602LD
2
600
HLDDC3600F
LT3600T
3TA603LDK 2
2
2
2
Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Two-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 250 Vdc 34
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete
Breaker
600
HLDDC20600
2
700
HLDDC20700
800
HLDDC20800
2
900
HLDDC20900
1000
HLDDC21000
1200
HLDDC21200
2
2
2
Catalog
Number
Notes
1 For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
2 Three-pole kit.
3 Includes breaker frame, trip unit and terminals.
4 Four-pole breaker with two poles wired in parallel.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-354
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
HMDLDC3800F
Type HMDLDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only 1
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
2
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
300
HMDLDC3800F
MT3300T
TA700MA1
350
HMDLDC3800F
MT3350T
TA700MA1
2
400
HMDLDC3800F
MT3400T
TA700MA1
450
HMDLDC3800F
MT3450T
TA700MA1
500
HMDLDC3800F
MT3500T
TA700MA1
600
HMDLDC3800F
MT3600T
TA700MA1
700
HMDLDC3800F
MT3700T
TA700MA1
800
HMDLDC3800F
MT3800T
TA800MA2
2
2
2
2
2
Type NBDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
2
Standard
Terminals
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Complete Circuit Breaker Factory
Assembled without Terminals 2
Catalog
Number
Includes Magnetic
Trip Unit Calibrated at 135%
Catalog
Number
700
NBDC3700MW
Included
TA1000NB1
800
NBDC3800MW
Included
TA1000NB1
900
NBDC3900MW
Included
TA1000NB1
1000
NBDC31000MW
Included
TA1000NB1
1200
NBDC31200MW
Included
TA1200NB1
2
2
2
2
2
RGHDC3300FFWM
2
Type RGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Complete Circuit Breaker Factory Assembled
2
2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
Imperial Mounting
Hardware
Metric Mounting
Hardware
Standard Rear
Connectors
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Includes Magnetic
Trip Unit Calibrated at 135%
Catalog
Number
1600
RGHDC3160FFWE
RGHDC3160FFWM
Included
B2016RDM
2000
RGHDC3200FFWE
RGHDC3200FFWM
Included
B2016RDM
2500
RGHDC3250FFWE
RGHDC3250FFWM
Included
B2500RDM
3000
RGHDC3300FFWE
RGHDC3300FFWM
Included
B3000RDM
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Includes frame and trip unit. Order terminals or connectors separately.
2 Six rear connectors included as standard complete circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-355
2.6
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
DC Breaker Terminal Wire Ranges
Breaker
Frame
Maximum Breaker
Ampacity
Terminal Body
Material
Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Number of
Terminals Included
Standard Terminal
Catalog Number
EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC
100
Aluminum
Cu/Al
14–1/0
2.5–50
3
3TA125EF
HFDDC
20
Steel
Cu/Al
14–10 (1)
2.5–4 (1)
3
3T20FB
100
Steel
Cu/Al
14–1/0 (1)
2.5–50 (1)
3
3T100FB
225
Aluminum
Cu/Al
4–4/0 (1)
25–95 (1)
3
3TA225FD
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC
250
Stainless steel
Cu
4–350 (1)
25–185 (1)
1
T250FJ
HJDDC
250
Aluminum
Cu/Al
4–350 kcmil (1)
25–185 (1)
1
TA250KB
HKDDC
225
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3–350 kcmil (1)
35–185 (1)
1
TA300K
350
Aluminum
Cu/Al
250–500 kcmil (1)
120–240 (1)
1
TA350K
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–250 kcmil (2)
95–120 (1)
3
3TA400K
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2–500 (1)
35–240 (1)
1
TA350LK
630
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2–500 kcmil (2)
35–240 (2)
1
TA632L
630
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2–500 kcmil (2)
35–240 (2)
3
3TA632LK
500
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–350 kcmil (2)
95–150 (2)
1
TA602LD
600
Aluminum
Cu/Al
400–500 kcmil (2)
185–240 (2)
3
3TA603LDK
600
Aluminum
Cu/Al
1–500 kcmil (2)
—
1
TA700MA1
800
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
—
1
TA800MA2
700
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
95–185 (3)
1
TA1000NB1
800
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
95–185 (3)
1
TA1000NB1
2
900
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
95–185 (3)
1
TA1000NB1
1000
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
95–185 (3)
1
TA1000NB1
2
1200
Aluminum
Cu/Al
4/0–500 kcmil (4)
120–240 (4)
1
TA1200NB1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC
HLDDC
2
HMDLDC
2
NBDC
2
2
2
2
2
Note: RGHDC breakers include six rear connectors as standard.
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s DC molded case switches are used in applications requiring a compact, high-capacity disconnect. They are UL 489 listed and
have automatic high instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection.
Molded Case Switches
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40 °C
With Line and Load Terminals
Without Line and Load Terminals
Interrupting Capacity
(Volts DC)
Poles in
Series
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
600 Vdc Maximum
100
42
3
HFDDC3100KL
HFDDC3100KW
2
150
42
3
HFDDC3150KL
HFDDC3150KW
225
42
3
HFDDC3225KL
HFDDC3225KW
2
250
65
3
JGKDC3250KSG
JGKDC3250KSW
250
42
3
HJDDC3250K
HJDDC3250KW
2
400
35
3
HKDDC3400K
HKDDC3400KW
65
3
LGKDC3400KSG
LGKDC3400KSW
2
600
65
3
LGKDC3630KSG
LGKDC3630KSW
35
3
HLDDC3600K
HLDDC3600WK
2
800
35
3
HMDLDC3800K
HMDLDC3800WK
2
100
65
3
EGK3100KSG
EGK3100KSW
500 Vdc Maximum
2
250 Vdc Maximum
100
50
2
HFDDC2100KL
HFDDC2100KW
2
150
50
2
HFDDC2150KL
HFDDC2150KW
225
50
2
HFDDC2225KL
HFDDC2225KW
2
1200
50
1
HLDDC21200K 1
HLDDC21200WK 1
2
Note
1 Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel.
2
V4-T2-356
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Accessories
2
Internal Accessories
2
Field Installation Kits
2
JGEDC,
JGSDC,
JGHDC
Description
Factory
Installation
(HFDDC)
2
HFDDC 1
EGEDC,
EGSDC,
EGHDC
LGEDC,
LGSDC,
LGHDC
HJDDC
HKDDC
HLDDC
HMDLDC
NBDC
RGHDC
Right-Pole Mounting
2
2
Auxiliary switch
1A-1B
A06
A1X1PK
AUX1A1BPK
AUX1A1BPK
A1X2PK
A1X3PK
A1X4PK
A1X4PK
4980D16G05
—
2A-2B
A13
A2X1RPK
AUX2A2BPK
AUX2A2BPK
A2X2PK
A2X3PK
A2X4PK
A2X4PK
4980D16G06
A2X6RPK
2
B06
A1L1RPK
ALM1M1BEPK ALM1M1BJPK
A1L2RPK
A1L3RPK
A1L4RPK
A1L4RPK
—
A1L6RPK
2
AAL1RPK
AUXALRMEPK AUXALRMJPK
AAL2RPK
AAL3RPK
AA114RPK
AA114RPK
—
A2L6RPK
2
Alarm switch
1 make/1 break
Auxiliary and alarm combo
1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05
2
Left-Pole Mounting
Shunt trip
12 Vdc
S02
SNT1LP03K
SNT012CPK
SNT012CPK
SNT2P04K
SNT3P04K
SNT4LP03K
SNT4LP03K
2606D58G14
—
24 Vdc
S02
SNT1LP03K
SNT024CPK
SNT024CPK
SNT2P04K
SNT3P04K
SNT4LP03K
SNT4LP03K
2606D58G13
SNT6P03K 2
48 Vdc
S06
SNT1LP08K
SNT4860CPK
SNT4860CPK
SNT2P06K
SNT3P06K
SNT4LP23K
SNT4LP23K
2606D58G12
SNT6P23K 2
60 Vdc
S06
SNT1LP08K
SNT4860CPK
SNT4860CPK
SNT2P06K
SNT3P06K
SNT4LP23K
SNT4LP23K
2606D58G11
SNT6P23K 2
125 Vdc
S10
SNT1LP12K
SNT120CPK
SNT120CPK
SNT2P11K
SNT3P11K
SNT4LP26K
SNT4LP26K
2606D58G10
SNT6P23K 2
250 Vdc
S14
SNT1LP18K
—
—
SNT2P14K
SNT3P14K
SNT4LP14K
SNT4LP14K
2606D58G09
SNT6P14K
120 Vac
S06
SNT1LP12K
SNT120CPK
SNT120CPK
SNT2P11K
SNT3P11K
SNT4LP11K
SNT4LP11K
2060D58G05
SNT6P11K 2
12 Vdc
U30
UVH1LP20K
UVR012DPK
UVR012DPK
UVH2LP20K
UVH3LP20K
UVH4LP20K
UVH4LP20K
372D032G06
UVH6RP20K 2
24 Vdc
U34
UVH1LP21K
UVR024DPK
UVR024DPK
UVH2LP21K
UVH3LP21K
UVH4LP21K
UVH4LP21K
372D032G07
UVH6RP21K 2
48 Vdc
U38
UVH1LP22K
UVR048DPK
UVR048DPK
UVH2LP22K
UVH3LP22K
UVH4LP22K
UVH4LP22K
372D032G08
UVH6RP23K 2
125 Vdc
U42
UVH1LP26K
UVR125DPK
UVR125DPK
UVH2LP26K
UVH3LP26K
UVH4LP26K
UVH4LP26K
372D032G09
UVH6RP26K 2
250 Vdc
U46
UVH1LP28K
UVR250DPK
UVR250DPK
UVH2LP28K
UVH3LP28K
UVH4LP28K
UVH4LP28K
372D032G10
UVH6RP28K 2
120 Vac
U14
UVH1LP08K
UVR120APK
UVR120APK
UVH2LP08K
UVH3LP08K
UVH4LP08K
UVH4LP08K
373D632G05
UVH6RP08K 2
Undervoltage release
Notes
1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation
under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker
is mounted and connected.
2 Right-pole mounted.
One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker. Factory installation of accessories is available. Contact Eaton for assistance with part number configuration.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-357
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
Wiring Diagrams
2
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12
2
250 Vdc Maximum—Two Poles in Series
2
2
2
2
Load
2
2
2
2
Load
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
500 Vdc or 600 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series
2
Load
2
2
2
2
2
2
Load
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
2
2
750 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles in Series
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Load
Load
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
Notes
1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
2 For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.
2
2
V4-T2-358
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
DC Breaker Dimensions
2
Frame
Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC
3
3.00 (76.2)
5.50 (139.7)
2.99 (75.9)
HFDDC
1
1.38 (35.1)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (86.0)
2
2.75 (70.0)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (86.0)
3
4.13 (105.0)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (86.0)
4
5.50 (139.7)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (86.0)
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC
3
4.13 (104.9)
7.00 (177.8)
3.57 (90.7)
HJDDC
2, 3
4.13 (105.0)
10.00 (254.0)
4.06 (103.1)
HKDDC
2, 3
5.50 (139.7)
10.13 (257.3)
4.10 (104.1)
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC
3
5.48 (139.2)
10.13 (257.3)
4.09 (103.9)
600 A Max. HLDDC
2, 3
8.25 (209.6)
10.75 (273.1)
4.06 (103.1)
1200 A Max. HLDDC
4
11.00 (279.4)
10.75 (273.1)
4.06 (103.1)
HMDLDC
2, 3
8.25 (209.6)
16.00 (406.4)
4.06 (103.1)
NBDC
3
8.25 (209.6)
16.00 (406.4)
5.50 (139.7)
RGHDC
3
15.50 (393.7)
16.00 (406.4)
9.75 (247.7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-359
2.6
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Contents
PVGard Solar Photovoltaic Circuit Breakers
Description
2
2
2
2
2
600 Vdc Per-Pole
1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
2
2
2
Page
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . . .
2
V4-T2-341
V4-T2-347
V4-T2-361
V4-T2-361
V4-T2-361
V4-T2-362
V4-T2-364
V4-T2-367
V4-T2-370
V4-T2-371
V4-T2-372
V4-T2-401
V4-T2-415
2
2
2
2
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
2
Product Overview
●
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
●
●
●
●
Two PVGard lineups
●
600 Vdc per-pole breaker
and switch. Each pole
rated 600 Vdc
●
1000 Vdc poles-in-series
breaker and switch.
Requires poles in series
connection
Both options UL 489B
listed for solar photovoltaic
circuit protection
50 °C calibration
Offers both 100% and
80% rated breakers
Handle bi-directional
current flow
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Description
Photovoltaic (PV) systems
convert the energy of the sun
into electrical power that is
fed directly into the electric
grid. Within the balance of
system (BOS), direct current
(DC) circuit breakers protect
the wiring connected from
the PV modules to the
combiner or the inverter,
while also behaving as
a disconnect.
Eaton is a global leader in
circuit protection and brings
this expertise to bear in the
photovoltaic market. PVGard
solar circuit breakers are part
of a product family that
combines a disconnect with
circuit protection in a single,
compact, resettable device
to protect and isolate DC
circuits as needed in
photovoltaic systems.
PVGard breakers can replace
fuses, fuse holders and
disconnects in combiner box
and inverter applications—
saving space, streamlining
design, purchasing and
receiving, and reducing spare
parts requirements.
There are two PVGard lineups
to choose from: the industryexclusive, 600 Vdc per-pole
breakers and switches
designed for residential and
light commercial applications
and 1000 Vdc poles-in-series
breakers and switches for
commercial and utility scale
applications.
PVGard 600 Vdc Per-Pole Lineup
Only Eaton can offer this
breakthrough breaker that will
save significant space, time
and cost. As a single-circuitper-pole device, it allows
space savings of up to 66%
when compared to traditional
poles-in-series disconnects,
switches and breakers. In
addition, it eliminates the
need for jumpers for poles-inseries connection—saving on
installation time, labor and
even inventory.
2
V4-T2-360
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
PVGard 1000 Vdc
Poles-in-Series Lineup
This 1000 Vdc poles-in-series
lineup provides reliable and
safe disconnect means and
overcurrent protection in
a single, compact device for
commercial and utility scale
PV systems. This solution
does not require jumpers
with the breaker/switch to
be a UL 489B listed device,
providing reliability and
flexibility in design without
limitation on implementation
of the breaker/switch. If
needed, cost-effective Eaton
jumpers can be included.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Application Description
Features
Photovoltaic (PV) systems
convert the energy of the sun
into electrical power that is
fed directly into the electric
grid. PVGard circuit breakers
are used to protect the wiring
from the modules to the
combiner box or inverter from
overcurrents, and to provide
an isolation mechanism.
PVGard breakers are uniquely
designed with these features:
Eaton offers a complete line of
UL 489 Listed multi-purpose
600 Vdc poles-in-series
breakers and switches, as
well as protection for the
AC side of the inverter.
Refer to Page V4-T2-347
for 600 Vdc breakers and
Page V4-T2-6 for AC
breaker selection.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2.6
Standards and Certifications
Meets the higher voltage
and lower fault current
levels of solar systems
Tested to extreme ambient
conditions from –40ºC to
+90ºC
Full complement of
accessories for status,
signalling, and on/off
operation remotely
Can handle bi-directional
flow of current
Can be applied in
grounded, ungrounded
or bi-polar systems
Meets and exceeds the
standards of UL 489B for
photovoltaic molded case
circuit breakers and
molded case switches
Available both standard
(80%-rated) and 100%rated breakers
50ºC calibration
Ability to open on signal
from DC arc or ground fault
detector
Wide range of current
ratings increases options
for matching incoming
strings
Eliminates fuse stocking
costs and matching issues
Designed specifically for
high- and low-temperature
demands of PV installations,
PVGard circuit breakers
undergo extreme ambient
cycling tests, and carry a
robust operating temperature
range. Trip units calibrate at
100% and 80% of nameplate
current in a 50ºC ambient,
ensuring continuous
operation in higher
temperature environments
typical to solar.
●
●
Designed to meet UL 489B
for solar photovoltaic circuit
protection
UL File E350638, Category
Control Number DIUR
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rigorous third-party testing
includes limited and standard
fault current tests, electrical
and mechanical endurance,
di-electric voltage withstand
and temperature tests.
Eaton’s PVGard products are
stand-alone devices without
requiring jumpers to be
UL 489B listed devices.
2
2
2
2
2
PVGard breakers are available
with a full complement of
accessories to provide string
status, enable remote trip,
on/off operation, and can
be customized to site
requirements.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-361
2.6
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
Catalog number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T2-366.
For complete internal and external accessories, see accessory section of each frame.
JG PVS Frame
JG PVS Frame, 250 A Maximum, 600 Vdc Per Pole, 1.2 kA 1
Number Poles/
600 Vdc Circuits
80% Rated
100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes
Trip Unit
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
2
90
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
JGPVS3090W
CJGPVS3090W
100
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
JGPVS3100W
CJGPVS3100W
2
125
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
JGPVS3125W
CJGPVS3125W
150
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
JGPVS3150W
CJGPVS3150W
2
175
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
JGPVS3175W
CJGPVS3175W
200
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
JGPVS3200W
CJGPVS3200W
225
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
JGPVS3225W
CJGPVS3225W
250
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
JGPVS3250W
CJGPVS3250W
2
2
2
2
KD PVS Frame
2
KD PVS Frame, 400 A Maximum, 600 Vdc Per Pole, 3 kA 1
Current Rating Amperes
2
2
Number Poles/
600 Vdc Circuits
Trip Unit
80% Rated
100% Rated
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
100
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPVS3100W
CKDPVS3100W
125
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPVS3125W
CKDPVS3125W
150
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPVS3150W
CKDPVS3150W
175
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPVS3175W
CKDPVS3175W
2
200
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPVS3200W
CKDPVS3200W
225
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPVS3225W
CKDPVS3225W
2
250
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPVS3250W
CKDPVS3250W
300
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPVS3300W
CKDPVS3300W
2
350
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPVS3350W
CKDPVS3350W
400
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPVS3400W
CKDPVS3400W
2
Note
1 Terminals not included with frames.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-362
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
2
Catalog number includes breaker frame and trip unit. Order terminals separately. See Page V4-T2-366.
2
FD PV Frame
KD PV Frame
FD PV Frame, 100 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 3 kA 1
80% Rated
100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes
Poles in Series
Trip Unit
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
30
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
FDPV4030W
CFDPV4030W
40
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
FDPV4040W
CFDPV4040W
50
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
FDPV4050W
CFDPV4050W
60
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
FDPV4060W
CFDPV4060W
70
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
FDPV4070W
CFDPV4070W
80
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
FDPV4080W
CFDPV4080W
90
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
FDPV4090W
CFDPV4090W
100
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
FDPV4100W
CFDPV4100W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
KD PV Frame, 350 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1
80% Rated
100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes
Poles in Series
Trip Unit
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
125
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPV4125W
CKDPV4125W
150
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPV4150W
CKDPV4150W
175
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPV4175W
CKDPV4175W
200
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPV4200W
CKDPV4200W
225
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPV4225W
CKDPV4225W
250
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPV4250W
CKDPV4250W
300
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPV4300W
CKDPV4300W
350
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
KDPV4350W
CKDPV4350W
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
LG PV Frame
LG PV Frame, 400 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 5 kA 1
80% Rated
100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes
Poles in Series
Trip Unit
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
250
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
LGPV4250W
CLGPV4250W
300
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
LGPV4300W
CLGPV4300W
350
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
LGPV4350W
CLGPV4350W
400
4
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
LGPV4400W
CLGPV4400W
2
2
2
2
2
MDL PV Frame
MDL PV Frame, 600 A Maximum, 1000 Vdc, 7.5 kA 1
80% Rated
100% Rated
Current Rating Amperes
Poles in Series
Trip Unit
Catalog Number
Catalog Number
300
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
MDLPV3300W
CMDLPV3300W
350
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
MDLPV3350W
CMDLPV3350W
400
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
MDLPV3400W
CMDLPV3400W
450
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
MDLPV3450W
CMDLPV3450W
500
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
MDLPV3500W
CMDLPV3500W
600
3
Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic
MDLPV3600W
CMDLPV3600W
Note
1 Terminals not included with frames.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-363
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
Accessories
2
Available Accessories
●
Auxiliary switch
●
Shunt trip
●
Electrical operator
●
Alarm lockout
●
Undervoltage release
●
Terminals
●
Lock-off devices
2
2
2
2
Factory Modifications—Freeze Testing to –40ºC 4
●
●
●
End cap kits
Rotary handle mechanisms
Flexible shaft handle
mechanisms
Optional modifications
●
Freeze testing
2
For complete internal and external accessories, see the
accessory section of each frame.
2
External Accessories
2
Description
Frame
Catalog
Number
2
Imperial Base Mounting Hardware
0.164-32 x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
FD PV
BMH1
2
0.250-20 x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
KD PV
KD PVS
BMH3
2
—
JG PVS
N/A
—
LG PV
N/A
2
0.3125-18 x 1.25 inch filister-head steel screws and
lockwashers and flat washers
MDL PV
BMH5
2
Metric Base Mounting Hardware
M4–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
FD PV
BMH1M
2
M6–0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
KD PV
KD PVS
BMH3M
2
JG PVS
Included 1
LG PV
Included 1
2
M8-1.25 x 35 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers
MDL PV
BMH5M
Interphase Barriers
FD PV
IPB1
KD PV
KD PVS
IPB3
JG PVS
FJIPBK 2
LG PV
IPB3
MDL PV
IPB4
FD PV
LKD1
KD PV
KD PVS
LKD3
JG PVS
N/A
2
F01
KD PV and KD PVS
F01
LG PV
F01
MDL PV
F01
Special calibration—contact Eaton for availability
Molded Case Switches
Eaton’s DC molded case
switches (MCS) are used in
applications requiring a
compact, high capacity
disconnect. PVGard 1000 Vdc
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 50 °C
2
2
LG PV
N/A
MDL PV
LKD4
Poles in
Series
Catalog
Number
100
3000
4
FDPV4100KW
200
5000
4
KDPV4200KW
250
5000
4
KDPV4250KW
350
5000
4
KDPV4350KW
400
5000
4
LGPV4400KSW
600
7500
3
MDLPV3600KSW
Notes
1 Base mounting hardware is included with a circuit breaker or a molded case switch
(included with breaker). If required separately, order 66A2546G02.
2 Individually priced.
3 Locks in ON and OFF position.
4 Add 20% to list price.
FD PV
PLK1
2
KD PV
KD PVS
PLK3
2
JG PVS
FJPHL
LG PV
LPHL
2
MDL PV
HLK4
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 3
2
2
2
V4-T2-364
MCS are UL 489B listed and
have automatic instantaneous
current protection. These
devices do not provide
overload protection.
Interrupting
Capacity Vdc
Non-Padlockable Handle Block
2
2
F01
JG PVS
1000 Vdc Maximum
—
2
Modification Code
FD PV
Molded Case Switches
—
2
Frame
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Internal Accessories—Right Pole Mounting
FD PV 1
JG PVS
KD PV
KD PVS
Factory
Field Kit
Modification Catalog
Code
Number
Factory
Field Kit
Modification Catalog
Code
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
2
LG PV
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
MDL PV
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Auxiliary Switch
2
2
2
1A-1B
A06
A1X1PK
A1
AUX1A1BPK
A06
A1X3PK
A1
AUX1A1BPK
A06
A1X4PK
2A-2B
A13
A2X1RPK
A2
AUX2A2BPK
A13
A2X3PK
A2
AUX2A2BPK
A13
A2X4PK
2
B06
A1L1RPK
B1
ALM1M1BJPKL B06
A1L3RPK
B1
ALM1M1BJPK B06
A1L4RPK
2
AAL1RPK
B2w
AUXALRMJPK C05
AAL3RPK
B2
AUXALRMJPK C05
AA114RPK
2
Alarm Switch
1 make/1 break
Auxiliary and Alarm Combo
1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05
2
Internal Accessories—Left Pole Mounting
FD PV 1
JG PVS
KD PV
KD PVS
Factory
Field Kit
Modification Catalog
Code
Number
Factory
Field Kit
Modification Catalog
Code
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
Field Kit
Catalog
Number
S02
S4
S42
SNT3P04K
S4
SNT012CPK
S02
SNT4LP03K
LG PV
MDL PV
Shunt Trip
12 Vdc
SNT1LP03K
SNT012CPK
24 Vdc
S02
SNT1LP03K
S6
SNT024CPK
S42
SNT3P04K
S6
SNT024CPK
S02
SNT4LP03K
48 Vdc
S06
SNT1LP08K
S7
SNT4860CPK
S50
SNT3P06K
S7
SNT4860CPK
S86
SNT4LP23K
2
2
2
2
2
60 Vdc
S06
SNT1LP08K
S7
SNT4860CPK
S50
SNT3P06K
S7
SNT4860CPK
S86
SNT4LP23K
125 Vdc
S10
SNT1LP12K
S5
SNT125DPK
S10
SNT3P11K
S2
SNT120CPK
S42
SNT4LP26K
250 Vdc
S14
SNT1LP18K
—
—
S14
SNT3P14K
—
—
S14
SNT4LP14K
120 Vac
S10
SNT1LP12K
S2
SNT120CPK
S10
SNT3P11K
S2
SNT120CPK
S10
SNT4LP11K
2
2
Undervoltage Release
12 Vdc
U30
UVH1LP20K
—
—
T02
UVH3LP20K
U1
UVR012DPK
T02
UVH4LP20K
24 Vdc
U34
UVH1LP21K
U2
UVR024CPK
T02
UVH3LP21K
U2
UVR024DPK
T06
UVH4LP21K
48 Vdc
U38
UVH1LP22K
U4
UVR048DPK
T10
UVH3LP22K
U4
UVR048DPK
T10
UVH4LP22K
60 Vdc
—
—
U4
UVR048DPK
—
—
—
—
—
—
125 Vdc
U42
UVH1LP26K
U6
UVR125DPK
T14
UVH3LP26K
U6
UVR125DPK
T14
UVH4LP26K
250 Vdc
U46
UVH1LP28K
U8
UVR250DPK
T18
UVH3LP28K
U8
UVR250DPK
T18
UVH4LP28K
120 Vac
U14
UVH1LP08K
U5
UVR120APK
U18
UVH3LP08K
U5
UVR120APK
U18
UVH4LP08K
Notes
1 Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories for the FD PV be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation
under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be
done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-365
2.6
2
2
2
Specialty Breakers
PVGard Solar Circuit Breaker Terminal Offering
Breaker
Frame
FD PV
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
JG PVS
Maximum
Breaker
Ampacity
Terminal Body
Material
Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Number of
Terminals
Included
Standard
Terminal
Catalog
Number
50
Steel
Cu/Al
14–4 (1)
2.5–25 (1)
3
3TA50FB
100
Aluminum
Cu/Al
6–300 kcmil (1)
16–150 (1)
3
3TA225FDK
100
Copper
Cu
4–4/0 (1)
25–95 (1)
3
3T225FD
Comments
Includes 3P terminal cover
250
Aluminum
Cu/Al
#8–350 kcmil (1)
—
—
TA250FJ
250
Aluminum
Cu/Al
(2) 2/0–(2) 4/0
—
1
3TA251FJK1
250
Aluminum
Cu/Al
(2) 2/0–(2) 4/0
—
2
3TA251FJK2
250
Copper
Cu
#4–350 kcmil (1)
—
—
T250FJ
225
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3–350 kcmil (1)
35–185 (1)
1
TA300K
250
Aluminum
Cu/Al
250–500 kcmil (1)
120–240 (1)
1
TA350K
250
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–250 kcmil (2)
95–120 (1)
4
4TA400K
2
250
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2/0–250 kcmil (2) or 2/0–500 kcmil (1)
70–240 (2)
4
4TA401K
300
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–250 kcmil (2)
95–120 (2)
4
4TA401K
Contains interphase barriers
2
350
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–250 kcmil (2)
95–120 (2)
4
4TA401K
Contains interphase barriers
2
225
Copper
Cu
3–350 kcmil (1)
35–185 (1)
1
T300K
250
Copper
Cu
250–500 kcmil (1)
120–240 (1)
1
T350K
2
250
Copper
Cu
3/0–250 kcmil (2)
95–120 (1)
4
4T400K
Contains interphase barriers
300
Copper
Cu
3/0–250 kcmil (2)
95–120 (2)
4
4TA401K
Contains interphase barriers
350
Copper
Cu
3/0–250 kcmil (2)
95–120 (2)
4
4TA401K
Contains interphase barriers
400
Aluminum
Cu/Al
2–500 kcmil (2)
35–240 (2)
4
4TA632LK
Includes 4P terminal cover
250
Copper
Cu
2–500 kcmil (1)
35–240 (1)
1
T350LK
400
Copper
Cu
2–500 kcmil (2)
35–240 (2)
4
4T632LK
300
Aluminum
Cu/Al
1–500 kcmil (2)
—
1
TA700MA1
600
Aluminum
Cu/Al
3/0–400 kcmil (3)
—
1
TA800MA2
2
2
2
2
2
2
KD PV
KD PVS
LG PV
MDL PV
2
2
2
2
2
Endcap Kits
Breaker Frame
Number of Poles
Thread Type
Thread Size
FD PV
4
Imperial
10–32
KPEK14
4
Metric
M–5
KPEKM14
JG PVS
3
Imperial
—
FJ3RTDK
3
Metric
—
FJ3RTWK
4
Imperial
0.312–18
KPEK34
4
Metric
M–8
KPEKM34
KD PVS
3
Imperial
—
KPEK3
3
Metric
—
KPEKM3
2
LG PV
4
Imperial
—
N/A
4
Metric
M-10
L4RTWK
2
MDL PV
3
Imperial
—
—
3
Metric
—
—
2
2
2
2
KD PV
Catalog Number
Notes
1 Three terminals with terminal shield as a kit.
2 Three terminals with two interphase barriers as a kit.
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-366
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Contains interphase barriers
Includes 4P terminal cover
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Technical Data and Specifications
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thermal-magnetic circuit
breakers
Designed to meet UL 489B
for solar photovoltaic circuit
protection
100% rated of the
continuous current rating
50 °C calibrated
Can be applied in
grounded, ungrounded or
bi-polar systems
Ability to open on signal
from DC arc or ground fault
detector
●
2
Two PVGard lineups
●
UL File EE350638,
Category Control
Number DIUR
●
600 Vdc per-pole breaker
and switch
– Each pole rated
600 Vdc
●
1000 Vdc poles-in-series
breaker and switch
– Requires poles in
series connection
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers
600 Vdc Per-Pole
2
PVGard 600 Vdc Current Ratings by Frame
UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (kA) 600 Vdc Per-Pole
2
Circuit
Breaker Type
Minimum
Amperes
2
JG PVS
KD PVS
Maximum
Amperes
kA Rating
90
250
1.2
100
400
3
2
2
Quick Reference PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers
1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
2
2
PVGard 1000 Vdc Current Ratings by Frame
UL 489B Interrupting Capacity (kA) 1000 Vdc
Circuit
Breaker Type
Minimum
Amperes
Maximum
Amperes
kA Rating
Poles in
Series
2
FD PV
30
100
3
4
KD PV
125
350
5
4
2
LG PV
250
400
5
4
MDL PV
300
600
7.5
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-367
2.6
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
PVGard 600 Vdc Per-Pole Solar PV Circuit Breakers (100% and 80% Rated Frames)
JG PVS
KD PVS
2
Number of 600 Vdc circuits
3
3
2
Maximum voltage rating
600 Vdc
600 Vdc
Ampere range
90–250 A
100–400 A
Interrupting capacity at 600 Vdc
1.2 kA
3 kA
Time constant
1 ms
1 ms
Trip unit type
Thermal-magnetic
Thermal-magnetic
8 kV
4 kV
8 kV
4 kV
10,000
400
240 per hour
6000
400
240 per hour
UL 489B
UL 489B
Design ambient temperature
Maximum current at 60 °C, as % of rated current
Maximum current at 70 °C, as % of rated current
50 °C
93%
85%
50 °C
93%
85%
Operating temperature range
Storage temperature range
Suitable for freeze temperatures to –40 °C
Relative humidity
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
Yes
Yes
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Main conducting paths
Auxiliary circuits
Endurance
Mechanical operations
Electrical operations
Maximum switching frequency
Third-party certification
Environment
Suitable for reverse-feed applications
Mounting—permissible mounting position
90
º
2
90
º
2
2
2
2
Connection diagrams
Terminations
Al/Cu wire
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
TA250FJ: (1) #8–350 kcmil
TA300K: (1) #3–350 kcmil
3TA251FJK1: (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 2
TA350K: (1) 250–500 kcmil
3TA251FJK2: (2) 2/0–(2) 4/0 3
TA403K: (2) 1/0–400 kcmil
3TA402K: (1) 500–-750 kcmil 4
Cu wire
T250FJ: (1) #4–350 kcmil
T300K: (1) #3–350 kcmil
7.00 (177.8)
4.13 (104.9)
3.57 (90.7)
10.13 (257.3)
5.50 (139.7)
4.10 (104.1)
6.6
11.42
Dimensions in inches (mm)
Height
Width
Depth
Weight in lbs
Notes
1 Three terminals with terminal shield as a kit.
2 Three terminals with two interphase barriers as a kit.
3 Not UL 489B recognized size for maximum of 400 A breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-368
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
PVGard 1000 Vdc Solar PV Circuit Breakers (100% and 80% Rated Frames)
FD PV
KD PV
Number of poles
4
Maximum voltage rating
1000 Vdc
Maximum current rating
Interrupting capacity at 1000 Vdc
2
LG PV
MDL PV
4
4
3
1000 Vdc
1000 Vdc
1000 Vdc
100 A
350 A
400 A
600 A
3 kA
5 kA
5 kA
7.5 kA
Time constant
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
1 ms
Ampere range
15–100 A
125–350 A
250–400 A
300–600 A
Trip unit type
Thermal-magnetic
Thermal-magnetic
Thermal-magnetic
Thermal-magnetic
8 kV
4 kV
8 kV
4 kV
8 kV
4 kV
8 kV
4 kV
10,000
1000
300 per hour
10,000
400
240 per hour
8000
400
240 per hour
8000
400
240 per hour
UL 489B
UL 489B
UL 489B
UL 489B
Design ambient temperature
Maximum current at 60 °C, as % of rated current
Maximum current at 70 °C, as % of rated current
50 °C
91%
88%
50 °C
91%
88%
50 °C
93%
88%
50 °C
93%
88%
Operating temperature range
Storage temperature range
Suitable for freeze temperatures to –40 °C
Relative humidity
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
–20 °C to +50 °C
–20 °C to +70 °C
Option
0 to 95% noncondensing
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rated impulse withstand voltage
Main conducting paths
Auxiliary circuits
2
Endurance
Mechanical operations
Electrical operations
Maximum switching frequency
Third-party certification
2
2
2
Environment
Suitable for reverse-feed applications
2
Mounting—permissible mounting position
2
º
90
90
º
º
2
90
90
º
2
2
1
Connection diagrams
2
2
2
2
2
2
Load
Load
(A)
2
Terminations
Al/Cu wire
#6–300 kcmil
(2) 3/0–250 kcmil
(2) #2–500 kcmil
(3) 3/0–400 kcmil
Cu wire
#4–4/0
(2) 3/0–250 kcmil
(2) #2–500 kcmil
(3) 3/0–300 kcmil
6.00 (152.4)
5.50 (139.7)
3.38 (85.9)
10.13 (257.3)
7.22 (183.4)
4.09 (103.9)
10.13 (257.3)
7.22 (183.4)
4.09 (103.9)
16.00 (406.4)
8.25 (209.5)
4.06 (103.1)
6
20
20
29
2
2
Dimensions in inches (mm)
Height
Width
Depth
Weight in lbs
2
2
Notes
1 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded systems that have one end of load (A) connected to grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
2 Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-369
2.6
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
2
2
Frame
Number of
Circuits in
a Frame
Width
Height
Depth
JG PVS
3
4.13 (104.9)
7.00 (177.8)
3.44 (87.4)
2
KD PVS
3
5.49 (139.4)
10.13 (257.2)
4.31 (109.6)
2
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series
2
Frame
Number
of Poles
Width
Height
Depth
FD PV
4
5.50 (139.7)
6.00 (152.4)
3.38 (86.0)
KD PV
4
7.22 (183.4)
10.13 (257.3)
4.09 (103.9)
LG PV
4
7.22 (183.4)
10.13 (257.3)
4.09 (103.9)
MDL PV
3
8.25 (209.6)
16.00 (406.4)
4.06 (103.1)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-370
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Wiring Diagrams
2
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application 12
2
JF PVS, KD PVS—600 Vdc Per-Pole
2
2
2
2
Load
2
Suitable for grounded or ungrounded systems.
Suitable for quantity (3) 600 Vdc circuits.
2
FD PV, KD PV, LG PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles-in-Series
2
2
2
2
2
Load
Load
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
2
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
2
2
MDL PV—1000 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series
2
Load
2
2
2
Load
2
(A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
2
2
Notes
1 Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC.
2 For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-371
2.6
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Contents
E2 Mining Service Breakers
Description
2
Page
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 Mining Service Breakers
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . .
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-341
V4-T2-347
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-374
V4-T2-378
V4-T2-389
V4-T2-392
V4-T2-398
V4-T2-401
V4-T2-415
2
2
2
E2 Mining Service Breakers
2
Product Overview
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
State-of-the-art E2 mining
service breakers incorporate
the rigid specifications and
testing procedures developed
by a focus group led by
engineers from several
large coal companies and
Eaton design engineers.
Additionally, the performance
of these breakers was proven
and verified during hundreds
of hours of field testing in
harsh mine environments.
E2
mining breakers are
available in 600 Vac, l000Y/
577 Vac and 1200 Vac.
Interchangeable trip units can
be used on either 600 or 1000
Vac frames.
The E2 mining breaker family
is designed especially for
trailing cable application per
MSHA 30 CFR 75. Field
interchangeable electronic
rms sensing trip units are
available from 150 to 2000
amperes with instantaneous
pickup settings conforming
to the code of Federal
Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2.
Electromechanical trip units
are also available with a
wide range of magnetic
pickup ranges.
2
E2 electronic trip units are the
first to provide the mining
industry with true rms
sensing, made possible by
the custom ASIC
microprocessor in each
electronic trip unit.
E2 breakers are designed to
be physically and electrically
interchangeable with Classic
Mining Service Breakers and
supersede Series C® Mining
Service Breakers. The table to
the right outlines direct
replacements.
600 Vac Mining Breaker
Replacement Chart
1000 Vac Mining Breaker
Replacement Chart
Classic
Series C
E2
FBM
FDBM
E2F
HFM
—
E2FM
HFBM
FDM
E2F
—
JDCM
E2JM
HFDM (mag. only)
E2F
HKAM
KDCM
E2KM
JDM
E2J
HLAM
LDCM
E2LM
KDM
E2K
HLCM
LDCM
E2LM
KDM
E2K
HMAM
—
E2MM
LDM
E2L
HMCM
—
E2MM
LAMH
LDM
E2L
HNBM
—
E2NM
LCM
LDM
E2L
HNBMH
—
E2NM
LCMH
LDM
E2L
HNCM
—
E2NM
—
E2M
HLCLM
—
E2NM
—
E2M
HPBM
—
E2RM 1
MCM
—
E2M
MCMH
—
E2M
NBM
—
E2N
NBMH
—
E2N
NCM
—
E2N
NCMH
—
E2N
—
KAM
KAMH
LAM
MAM
MAMH
Classic
Series C
E2M
Additional Information on Mining Breakers
Source
Description
TD01217001E
E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data
BR01217001E
E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure
TC01217001E
E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves
www.eaton.com/mining
Mining and Metals
Note
1 E2R/E2RM is a new frame physically different than the HPBM. See DS29-170MS.
2
V4-T2-372
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
E2 225/400 A K frame and
400/600 A L frame electronic
trip units feature specifically
designed instantaneous
pickup settings to conform
exactly with the code of
Federal Regulations 30 CFR
75.601-2. Electromechanical
trip units are also available
with a wide range of magnetic
pickup ranges.
Eaton’s mining service circuit
breakers provide short-circuit
protection as specified in the
code of Federal Regulations
30 CFR 75.601-2.
2.6
The tables below list the
conductor size maximum
allowable circuit breaker
instantaneous setting and
the E2 breaker that meets
that setting.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Trailing Cable Setting Per 30 CFR 75
Interrupting Capacity Rating
2
250
Conductor
Size
Maximum
Breaker
Instantaneous
Setting
Maximum
Ampere
75 °C Insulated
Conductor
E2/E2M/E2W
Instantaneous
Only
Setting
—
10
14
50
15
E2K 150 A
A
—
10
12
75
20
E2K 150 A
B
C
A
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA)
Vdc 1
Circuit
Breaker Type
Vac (50/60 Hz)
240
480
600
1000Y/577
1200
E2F
65
35
18
—
E2J
65
35
18
—
E2K
65
35
25
—
—
10
10
150
30
E2K 150 A
E2LME
100
65
35
—
—
42
8
200
50
E2K 225 A
B
E2L
65
35
25
—
—
22
6
300
65
E2K 225 A
E2M
65
35
25
—
—
22
4
500
85
E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A
C/A
E2N
65
50
25
—
—
—
3
600
100
E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A
D/B
E2R
125
65
50
—
—
—
2
800
115
E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A
E/C
E2FM
65
25
18
10
—
10
1
1000
130
E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A
F/D
E2JM
65
35
18
10
—
22
1/0
1250
150
E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A
G/E
E2KM
65
35
25
14
—
10
2/0
1500
175
E2K 225 A / E2L 400 A
H/F
E2LMZ
100
65
35
10
—
42
3/0
2000
200
E2L 400 A
G
E2LM
—
35
25
18
—
22
4/0
2500
230
E2L 400 A
H
E2MM
—
35
25
18
—
22
250
2500
255
E2L 400 A
H
E2NM 2
—
50
25
25
—
—
300
2500
285
E2L 400 A
H
E2RM
—
65
50
25
—
—
350
2500
310
E2L 400 A
H
E2KW
—
—
—
10
10
—
400
2500
335
E2L 400 A
H
500
2500
380
E2L 400 A
H
E2LW
—
—
—
10
10
—
E2MW
—
—
—
12
12
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Auxiliary Switch Electrical Rating Data
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Maximum Current
Amperes
600
50/60 Hz
6.0
125
DC
0.5 (non-inductive load)
250
DC
0.25 (non-inductive load)
2
2
2
2
Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) Electrical Rating Data
Maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Maximum Current
Amperes
600
50/60 Hz
6.0
125
DC
0.5 (non-inductive load)
250
DC
0.25 (non-inductive load)
2
2
2
Notes
1 Two poles in series. DC rating applies to breakers with thermal-magnetic trip unit.
Breakers with electronic trip units are not DC rated.
2 Series rated for application with Eaton’s E2KM and E2LM breakers.
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-373
2.6
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Catalog Number Selection
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
E2 Mining Service Breaker with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology
E2K E M 3 400 38 2 B20 W
2
2
2
2
Frame Size
E2K
E2L
E2M
E2N
E2R
2
2
2
Voltage
Blank = 600 Vac max.
M
= 1000Y/577 Vac max.
2
Frame Size
K
L
M
Electronic Trip
E = Electronic trip
Trip Unit
T
Voltage
M = 600 V and 1000 V
interchangeable
2
Current Ampere
Rating
100–2000
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
2
2
Trip Unit Function
= 310+ Electronic Inst only
(magnetic only)
Blank = 310+ Electronic LSI
38
= 310+ Electronic ALSI with
maintenance mode
M
K E M 3 400 38 T 2 B20
2
2
B20 2 = High load alarm
Terminal
W
= No terminals
Blank = Standard terminals
E2 Mining Service 310+ Electronic Trip Unit
2
2
Magnetic Rating
(If Applicable)
Blank = Standard mag.
2
= High mag.
Current Ampere
Rating
100–2000
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
2
2
Optional Features
Electronic Trip
E 1 = Electronic trip
Trip Unit Function
= 310+ Electronic Inst only
(magnetic only)
Blank = 310+ Electronic LSI
38
= 310+ Electronic ALSI with
maintenance mode
M
Notes
1 All N- and R-Frame breakers equipped with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit. No “E” suffix required.
2 Not available with instantaneous only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-374
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Magnetic Rating
(If Applicable)
Blank = Standard mag.
2
= High mag.
Optional Features
B20 1 = High load alarm
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
E2 Mining Service Breaker Frame Only 1
2
E2K M 3 400 F
Frame Size
E2J
E2K
E2L
E2M
Voltage
Blank = 600 Vac max.
M
= 1000Y/577 Vac max.
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Current Ampere
Rating
70–800
2
2
Frame
Designation
2
F
2
2
E2 Mining Service Breaker with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1
E2K M 3 400 M K W
Frame Size
E2F
E2J
E2K
E2L
E2M
Voltage
Blank = 600 Vac max.
M
= 1000Y/577 Vac max.
W 2 = 1200 Vac max.
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
2
Trip Unit Function
M
= Magnetic only
Blank = Thermal-magnetic
Magnetic Trip Range
Suffix
See catalog
Terminal
W
= No terminals
Blank = Standard terminals
Mining Service Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
2
2
2
1
E2K 3 400 T M A
Frame Size
E2J
E2K
E2L
E2M
Number
of Poles
3 = Three-pole
Current Ampere
Rating
70–800
2
2
Current Ampere
Rating
3–800
E2
2
Trip Unit
T
2
Trip Unit Function
M
= Magnetic only
Blank = Thermal-magnetic
2
Magnetic Trip Range
Suffix
See catalog
2
2
Notes
1 Does not apply to E2LME/LMZ.
2 Only available in K-, L- and M-Frames.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-375
2.6
2
2
2
Specialty Breakers
Undervoltage Release Mechanism Electrical Rating Data
Dropout Voltage
Breaker Type
E2F/E2FM
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Pickup Voltage
Supply Voltage
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
VA
110 Vac
44.5
77
93.5
1.3
120 Vac
1.5
127 Vac
1.7
110 Vdc
1.5
120 Vdc
1.7
125 Vdc
E2J/E2JM
110 Vac
1.9
44.5
77
93.5
1.8
2
120 Vac
2.1
127 Vac
2.4
2
110 Vdc
1.6
2
120 Vdc
1.9
125 Vdc
2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
2
2
2
110 Vac
2.2
44.5
77
93.5
120 Vac
2.1
127 Vac
2.4
110 Vdc
1.6
120 Vdc
1.9
125 Vdc
E2LME/E2LMZ
2
110 Vac
2.2
44.5
77
93.5
120 Vac
110 Vdc
1.25
43.8
77
93.5
120 Vdc
2
0.96
1.13
127 Vac
2
1.8
0.94
1.12
125 Vdc
1.21
2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 110 Vac
E2MM/E2MW
120 Vac
2
127 Vac
2.4
2
110 Vdc
1.6
120 Vdc
1.9
2
77
93.5
E2N/E2NM
2
2
E2R/E2RM
110 Vac
1.8
2.1
125 Vdc
2
2
44.5
2.2
44.5
77
93.5
1.8
120 Vac
2.1
127 Vac
2.4
110 Vdc
1.6
120 Vdc
1.9
125 Vdc
2.2
110 Vac
44.5
77
93.5
120 Vac
3.3
3.6
2
127 Vac
2
120 Vdc
3.6
125 Vdc
3.8
110 Vdc
2
3.8
43.8
77
93.5
2
2
2
V4-T2-376
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
3.3
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data
Operating Voltage
2
Operating Voltage
Breaker Type
Supply Voltage
Minimum
VA
Breaker Type
Supply Voltage
Minimum
VA
E2F/E2FM
48 Vac
33.6
92
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/
E2MM/E2MW
48 Vac
34
830
60 Vac
140
110 Vac
480
110 Vac
120 Vac
570
120 Vac
640
127 Vac
180
48 Vdc
220 Vac
200
60 Vdc
230 Vac
240
110 Vdc
100
120 Vdc
130
160
125 Vdc
140
127 Vac
208 Vac
48 Vdc
146
33.6
60 Vdc
110 Vdc
E2J/E2JM
77
110 Vac
60
100
710
77
60
110
120
127 Vac
140
66
110 Vdc
120 Vac
84
120 Vdc
130
127 Vac
102
125 Vdc
140
125 Vdc
110 Vac
60
120 Vac
127 Vac
110 Vdc
77
112
2
2
110 Vdc
120
120 Vdc
440
140
125 Vdc
480
2
430
77
370
2
2
110
2
2
41
18
60 Vac
2
139
210
60
92
127 Vac
117
24 Vdc
120
18
60 Vdc
2
83
120 Vac
110 Vdc
2
330
127 Vac
140
48 Vdc
2
390
150
130
110 Vac
60.5
2
110
100
125 Vdc
48 Vac
110 Vac
120 Vac
120 Vdc
24 Vac
E2R/E2RM
138
77
2
100
120 Vac
77
2
1105
71
60.5
2
140
34
66
110 Vac
2
120
125 Vdc
120 Vdc
E2LME/E2LMZ
E2N/E2NM
2
1280
120 Vdc
110 Vdc
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
55
60 Vac
2
2
2
475
2
720
82
99
120 Vdc
120
125 Vdc
121
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-377
2.6
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
3 A–150 A
E2F/E2FM
2
2
E2F/E2FM
Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—Include Line/Load Terminals, Non-Electronic Trip Units 1
2
2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
10 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
2
Thermal-Magnetic
2
15
—
—
E2F3015
—
20
—
—
E2F3020
E2FM3020
2
25
—
—
E2F3025
E2FM3025
30
—
—
E2F3030
—
2
35
—
—
E2F3035
—
2
40
—
—
E2F3040
E2FM3040
45
—
—
E2F3045
—
2
50
—
—
E2F3050
E2FM3050
60
—
—
E2F3060
E2FM3060
2
70
—
—
E2F3070
E2FM3070
80
—
—
E2F3080
E2FM3080
2
90
—
—
E2F3090
E2FM3090
2
100
—
—
E2F3100
E2FM3100
125
—
—
E2F3125
E2FM3125
2
150
—
—
E2F3150
E2FM3150
2
3
9–30
—
E2F003AM
—
7
21–70
—
E2F007CM
—
15
45–150
—
E2F015EM
—
30
90–300
—
E2F030HM
—
50–150
—
E2F030EM
—
2
50
150–500
—
E2F050KM
E2FM050KM
66–190
—
E2F050YM
E2FM050YM
2
70
210–700
—
E2F070MM
E2FM070MM
100
150–500
—
E2F100KM
E2FM100KM
300–1000
—
E2F100RM
E2FM100RM
150
450–1500
—
E2F150TM
E2FM150TM
750–2500
—
E2F150UM
E2FM150UM
Magnetic Only
2
2
2
2
2
Note
1 For two-pole application, use outer poles.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-378
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
70 A–250 A
2
E2J/E2JM
E2J/E2JM
2
2
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
10 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
70
300–650
E2J3070T
E2J3070W
E2JM3070W
90
450–900
E2J3090T
E2J3090W
E2JM3090W
100
500–1000
E2J3100T
E2J3100W
E2JM3100W
125
625–1250
E2J3125T
E2J3125W
E2JM3125W
150
750–1500
E2J3150T
E2J3150W
E2JM3150W
175
875–1750
E2J3175T
E2J3175W
E2JM3175W
200
1000–2000
E2J3200T
E2J3200W
E2JM3200W
225
300–650
E2J3225TA
E2J3225AW
E2JM3225AW
500–1000
E2J3225TD
E2J3225DW
E2JM3225DW
2
2
2
2
2
2
1125–2250
E2J3225T
E2J3225W
E2JM3225W
1250–2500
E2J3250T
E2J3250W
E2JM3250W
2
300–650
E2J3250TMA
E2J3250MAW
E2JM3250MAW
450–900
E2J3250TMC
E2J3250MCW
E2JM250MCW
2
500–1000
E2J3250TMD
E2J3250MDW
E2JM3250MDW
625–1250
E2J3250TMF
E2J3250MFW
E2JM3250MFW
750–1500
E2J3250TMG
E2J3250MGW
E2JM3250MGW
875–1750
E2J3250TMJ
E2J3250MJW
E2JM3250MJW
1000–2000
E2J3250TMK
E2J3250MKW
E2JM3250MKW
1125–2250
E2J3250TML
E2J3250MLW
E2JM3250MLW
1250–2500
E2J3250TM
E2J3250MW
E2JM3250MW
Magnetic Only
250
2
2
Thermal-Magnetic
250
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2J3250F.
2 Frame only: E2JM3250F.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-379
2.6
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
100 A–400 A
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
E2K/E2KM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units
2
2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
2
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
1200 Vac Maximum
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
10 kA at 1200 Vac
Three-Pole 34
Thermal-Magnetic
2
2
2
2
2
100
500–1000
E2K3100T
E2K3100W
E2KM3100W
E2KW3100W
125
625–1250
E2K3125T
E2K3125W
E2KM3125W
E2KW3125W
150
750–1500
E2K3150T
E2K3150W
E2KM3150W
E2KW3150W
175
875–1750
E2K3175T
E2K3175W
E2KM3175W
E2KW3175W
200
1000–2000
E2K3200T
E2K3200W
E2KM3200W
E2KW3200W
225
300–650
E2K3225TA
E2K3225AW
E2KM3225AW
E2KW3225AW
500–1000
E2K3225TD
E2K3225DW
E2KM3225DW
E2KW3225DW
1125–2250
E2K3225T
E2K3225W
E2KM3225W
E2KW3225W
250
1250–2500
E2K3250T
E2K3250W
E2KM3250W
E2KW3250W
300
1500–3000
E2K3300T
E2K3300W
E2KM3300W
E2KW3300W
2
320
1600–3200
—
—
—
E2KW3320W
350
1750–3500
E2K3350T
E2K3350W
E2KM3350W
E2KW3350W
2
400
2000–4000
E2K3400T
E2K3400W
E2KM3400W
—
300–650
E2K3400TMA
E2K3400MAW
E2KM3250MAW
E2KW3250MAW
500–1000
E2K3400TMD
E2K3400MDW
E2KM3400MDW
E2KW3350MDW
625–1250
E2K3400TMF
E2K3400MFW
E2KM3400MFW
E2KW3350MFW
2
750–1500
E2K3400TMG
E2K3400MGW
E2KM3400MGW
E2KW3350MGW
875–1750
E2K3400TMJ
E2K3400MJW
E2KM3400MJW
E2KW3350MJW
2
1000–2000
E2K3400TMK
E2K3400MKW
E2KM3400MKW
E2KW3350MKW
1125–2250
E2K3400TML
E2K3400MLW
E2KM3400MLW
E2KW3350MLW
2
1250–2500
E2K3400TMW
E2K3400MWW
E2KM3400MWW
E2KW3350MWW
2
1500–3000
E2K3400TMN
E2K3400MNW
E2KM3400MNW
E2KW3350MNW
1600–3200
—
—
—
E2KW3350MVW
1750–3500
E2K3400TMR
E2K3400MRW
E2KM3400MRW
E2KW3350MRW
2000–4000
E2K3400TM
E2K3400MW
E2KM3400MW
—
2
Magnetic Only
2
400
2
2
2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2K3400F.
2 Frame only: E2KM3400F.
3 1200 V breakers are sold as “complete breakers” only.
4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.
2
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-380
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
100 A–400 A
2
E2KE/E2KEM
E2KM
2
2
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
2
2
2
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only
2
150
50–800
KEM3150TM
E2KE3150MW
E2KEM3150MW
225
200–1500
KEM3225TM
E2KE3225MW
E2KEM3225MW
500–2500
KEM3225TM2
E2KE3225M2W
E2KEM3225M2W
400
200–1500
KEM3400TM
E2KE3400MW
E2KEM3400MW
500–2500
KEM3400TM2
E2KE3400M2W
E2KEM3400M2W
100
125
50–800
50–800
KEM3100T
KEM3125T
E2KE3100W
E2KE3125W
E2KEM3100W
E2KEM3125W
150
50–800
KEM3150T
E2KE3150W
E2KEM3150W
200
200–1500
KEM3200T
E2KE3200W
E2KEM3200W
225
200–1500
KEM3225T
E2KE3225W
E2KEM3225
500–2500
KEM3225T2
E2KE32252W
E2KEM32252W
400
200–1500
KEM3400T
E2KE3400W
E2KEM3400W
500–2500
KEM3400T2
E2KE34002W
E2KEM34002W
2
2
2
2
310+ Electronic LSI 3
2
2
2
2
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
100
50–800
KEM310038T
E2KE310038W
E2KEM310038W
125
50–800
KEM312538T
E2KE312538W
E2KEM312538W
150
50–800
KEM315038T
E2KE315038W
E2KEM315038W
200
200–1500
KEM320038T
E2KE320038W
E2KEM320038W
225
200–1500
KEM322538T
E2KE322538W
E2KEM322538
500–2500
KEM322538T2
E2KE3225238W
E2KEM3225238W
400
200–1500
KEM340038T
E2KE340038W
E2KEM340038W
500–2500
KEM340038T2
E2KE3400238W
E2KEM3400238W
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2K3400F.
2 Frame only: E2KM3400F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2KE340038B20W, KEM3400TB20.
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-381
2.6
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
160 A–400 A
E2LME/E2LMZ (Series G)
Circuit Breakers
2
2
2
2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
14 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
3600–4400
LT3400KM
E2LME3400KMW
E2LMZ3400KMW
Magnetic Only
400
Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit
2
160
320–1920
LT340031M
E2LME340031W
E2LMZ340031W
2
200
400–2400
LT340031M
E2LME340031W
E2LMZ340031W
225
450–2700
LT340031M
E2LME340031W
E2LMZ340031W
2
250
500–3000
LT340031M
E2LME340031W
E2LMZ340031W
300
600–3600
LT340031M
E2LME340031W
E2LMZ340031W
2
315
630–3780
LT340031M
E2LME340031W
E2LMZ340031W
2
350
700–4200
LT340031M
E2LME340031W
E2LMZ340031W
400
800–4800
LT340031M
E2LME340031W
E2LMZ340031W
2
2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2LME3400NN.
2 Frame only: E2LMZ3400NN.
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-382
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
300 A–600 A
2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
2
2
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
1200 Vac Maximum
10 kA at 1200 Vac
Three-Pole 3
2
2
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
300
1500–3000
E2L3300T
E2L3300W
E2LM3300W
E2LW3300W
320
2250–4500
E2L3450T
E2L3450W
E2LM3450W
E2LW3320W
350
1600–3200
—
—
—
E2LW3350W
400
1750–3500
E2L3350T
E2L3350W
E2LM3350W
E2LW3400W
450
2000–4000
E2L3400T
E2L3400W
E2LM3400W
E2LW3450W
500
2500–5000
E2L3500T
E2L3500W
E2LM3500W
—
600
3000–6000
E2L3600T
E2L3600W
E2LM3600W
—
—
—
—
2
2
Thermal-Magnetic
4
1125–2250
E2L3600TL
1600–3200
—
—
—
E2LW3450MVW
1125–2250
—
—
—
E2LW3450MLW
1500–3000
—
—
—
E2LW3450MNW
1750–3500
—
—
—
E2LW3450MRW
2000–4000
—
—
—
E2LW3450MXW
2250–4500
—
—
—
E2LW3450MYW
1125–2250
E2L3600TML
E2L3600MLW
E2LM3600MLW
—
1500–3000
E2L3600TMN
E2L3600MNW
E2LM3600MNW
—
1750–3500
E2L3600TMR
E2L3600MRW
E2LM3600MRW
—
2
2
2
2
Magnetic Only
450
600
2000–4000
E2L3600TMX
E2L3600MXW
E2LM3600MXW
—
2250–4500
E2L3600TMY
E2L3600MYW
E2LM3600MYW
—
2500–5000
E2L3600TMP
E2L3600MPW
E2LM3600MPW
—
3000–6000
E2L3600TM
E2L3600MW
E2LM3600MW
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2L3600F.
2 Frame only: E2LM3600F.
3 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.
4 600 A thermal 1125–2250 T.A.
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-383
2.6
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
300 A–600 A
E2LE/E2LEM
E2LM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
2
2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
2
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only
2
400
500–2500
LEM3400TM
E2LE3400MW
E2LEM3400MW
1000–4000
LEM3400TM2
E2LE3400M2W
E2LEM3400M2W
500–2500
LEM3600TM
E2LE3600MW
E2LEM3600MW
2500–5000
LEM3600TM2
E2LE3600M2W
E2LEM3600M2W
2
600
2
310+ Electronic LSI 3
2
300
500–2500
LEM3300T
E2LE3300W
E2LEM3300W
350
500–2500
LEM3350T
E2LE3350W
E2LEM3350W
E2LEM3400W
2
400
2
600
2
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 3
2
300
500–2500
LEM3400T
E2LE3400W
1000–4000
LEM3400T2
E2LE34002W
E2LEM34002W
500–2500
LEM3600T
E2LE3600W
E2LEM3600W
2500–5000
LEM3600T2
E2LE36002W
E2LEM36002W
LEM330038T
E2LE330038W
E2LEM330038W
500–2500
350
500–2500
LEM335038T
E2LE335038W
E2LEM335038W
2
400
500–2500
LEM340038T
E2LE340038W
E2LEM340038W
2
1000–4000
LEM340038T2
E2LE3400238W
E2LEM3400238W
600
500–2500
LEM360038T
E2LE360038W
E2LEM360038W
2500–5000
LEM360038T2
E2LE3600238W
E2LEM3600238W
2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2L3600F.
2 Frame only: E2LM3600F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2LE360038B20W, LEM3600TB20.
2
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-384
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
300 A— 800 A
2
E2M/E2MM/E2MW
E2M/E2MM/E2MW
2
2
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic Trip Units
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
1200 Vac Maximum
12 kA at 1200 Vac
Three-Pole 34
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
400
1000–2000
—
—
—
E2MW3400W
500
1250–2500
—
—
—
E2MW3500W
600
1500–3000
E2M3600TN
E2M3600W
E2MM3600W
E2MW3600W
630
1600–3200
—
—
—
E2MW3630W
800
2000–4000
E2M3800TX
E2M3800W
E2MM3800W
E2MW3800W
1500–3000
E2M3800TMN
E2M3800MNW
E2MM3800MNW
E2MW3800MNW
1600–3200
—
—
—
E2MW3800MVW
2000–4000
E2M3800TMX
E2M3800MXW
E2MM3800MXW
E2MW3800MXW
2500–5000
E2M3800TMP
E2M3800MPW
E2MM3800MPW
—
3000–6000
E2M3800TMW
E2M3800MWW
E2MM3800MWW
—
Thermal-Magnetic
2
2
2
2
2
Magnetic Only
800
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Frame only: E2M3800F.
2 Frame only: E2MM3800F.
3 1200 V breakers are sold as “complete breakers” only.
4 Maximum continuous ampere rating at 50 °C.
2
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-385
2.6
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
800 A
E2ME/E2MEM
E2MN
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
2
2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
2
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole 1
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole 2
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only
2
800
2
500–2500
MEM3800TM
E2ME3800MW
E2MEM3800MW
1000–4000
MEM3800TM2
E2ME3800M2W
E2MEM3800M2W
500–2500
MEM3800T
E2ME3800W
E2MEM3800W
1000–4000
MEM3800T2
E2ME38002W
E2MEM38002W
310+ Electronic LSI 3
800
2
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode
2
800
2
3
500–2500
MEM380038T
E2ME380038W
E2MEM380038W
1000–4000
MEM380038T2
E2ME3800382W
E2MEM3800382W
Notes
1 Frame only: E2M3800F.
2 Frame only: E2MM3800F.
3 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2ME380038B20W, MEM3800TB20.
2
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-386
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
400 A–1200 A
2
E2N/E2NM
E2NM
2
2
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
Magnetic
Trip Range
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
500–2500
—
E2N3800MW
E2NM3800MW
1200
1250–5000
—
E2N312MW
E2NM312MW
500–2500
—
E2N3400W
E2NM3400W
2
2
310+ Electronic LSI 1
400
2
2
310+ Electronic Instantaneous Only
800
2
2
500
500–2500
—
E2N3500W
E2N3M500W
600
500–2500
—
E2N3600W
E2NM3600W
700
500–2500
—
E2N3700W
E2NM3700W
800
500–2500
—
E2N3800W
E2NM3800W
900
1250–5000
—
E2N3900W
E2NM3900W
1000
1250–5000
—
E2N310W
E2NM310W
1200
1250–5000
—
E2N312W
E2NM312W
2
2
2
2
2
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 1
400
500–2500
—
E2N340038W
E2NM340038W
500
500–2500
—
E2N350038W
E2NM350038W
600
500–2500
—
E2N360038W
E2NM360038W
700
500–2500
—
E2N370038W
E2NM370038W
800
500–2500
—
E2N380038W
E2NM380038W
900
1250–5000
—
E2N390038W
E2NM390038W
1000
1250–5000
—
E2N31038W
E2NM31038W
1200
1250–5000
—
E2N31238W
E2NM31238W
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2N380038B20W.
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-387
2.6
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
1600 A–2000 A
E2R/E2RM
E2RM
Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units
2
2
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
2
600 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
35 kA at 480 Vac
Three-Pole
1000Y/ 577 Vac Maximum
250 Vdc
18 kA at 1000 Vac
Three-Pole
Magnetic
Trip Range
Trip Unit Only
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
Complete Breaker
Catalog Number
1600
2–8 x In
—
E2R316W
E2RM316W
2000
2–8 x In
—
E2R320W
E2RM320W
310+ Electronic LSI 1
2
2
310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode 1
2
1600
2–8 x In
—
E2R31638W
E2RM31638W
2000
2–8 x In
—
E2R32038W
E2RM32038W
2
Notes
1 For High Load Alarm option (B20): E2R1638B20W.
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-388
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Accessories
2
Line and Load Terminals
Breaker
Type
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Wire
Type
AWG Wire Range
(No. Conductors)
Catalog
Number
E2F/E2FM
100
Cu/AI
#14–1/0 (1)
3T100FB (package of three)
150
Cu
#4–4/0 (1)
3T150FB (package of three)
250
Cu
#4–350 (1)
T250KB
E2J/E2JM
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
225
Cu
#3–350 (1)
T300K
350
Cu
250–500 (1)
T350K
2/0–250 (2)
3T400K (three-pole kit)
400
Cu
E2LME/E2LMZ
400
Cu/AI
500–750 (1)
3TA631LK
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
400
Cu/AI
4/0–600 (1)
3TA401LDK (three-pole kit)
600
Cu
250–350 (2)
T602LD
E2M/E2MM/E2MW
600
Cu
(2) 2/0–500 kcmil
T600MA1
600
Cu/AI
(2) 1–500 kcmil
TA700MA1
800 std.
Cu/AI
(3) 3/0–400 kcmil
TA800MA2
800
Cu/AI
(2) 500–750 kcmil
TA801MA
800
Cu
(3) 3/0–300 kcmil
T800MA1
700
Cu
2/0–500 (2)
T700NB1
1000
Cu
3/0–500 (3)
T1000NB1
1200
Cu
3/0–400 (4)
T1200NB3
E2N/E2NM
1600
Cu/AI
500–1000 (4)
TA1600RD
2000
Cu/AI
2–600 (6)
TA2000RD
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
End Cap Terminals—For Use with Ring Type Terminals
Catalog
Number
Metric
Catalog
Number
2
Breaker
Type
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
E2F/E2FM
150
KPEK1
KPEMK1
—
E2J/E2JM
250
KPEK2
KPEMK2
—
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
400
KPEK3
KPEMK3
—
E2LME/E2LMZ
400
—
L3RTWK
—
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
600
KPEK4
KPEMK4
—
Imperial
2
2
2
2
External Accessories
2
Padlockable Handle
Lock Hasp
Breaker Type
2
Catalog
Number
E2F/E2FM
PLK1
E2J/E2JM
PLK3
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
PLK3
E2LME/E2LMZ
LPHL
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
HLK4
E2M/E2MM/E2MW
HLK4
E2N/E2NM
PLK5
E2R/E2RM
HLK6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-389
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
Internal Accessories
2
Undervoltage Release 1
2
2
2
2
Breaker
Type
UVR
Type
Voltage
Rating
Mounting
Location
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification Code
E2F/E2FM
Handle reset
208–240 Vac
Left pole
UVH1LP11K (thermal/magnetic only) 2
U18
Handle reset
110–127 Vdc
Left pole
UVH1LP26K (thermal/magnetic only) 2
U42
Handle reset
110–127 Vac
Left pole
UVH2LP08K 2
U18
Handle reset
208–240 Vac
Left pole
UVH2LP11K 2
U22
Handle reset
110–125 Vdc
Left pole
UVH2LP26K 2
T14
E2J/E2JM
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
23
120 volt handle reset with LED
120 Vac
Left pole
UVM3LP08K
120 volt handle reset with LED
120 Vac
Left pole
UVM3LP08KT 24
U68
Handle reset
110–127 Vac
Left pole
UVH3LP08K 2
U18
Handle reset
208–240 Vac
Left pole
UVH3LP11K 2
U22
Handle reset
110–125 Vdc
Left pole
UVH3LP26K 2
T14
Handle reset
110–127 Vac
Left pole
UVR120APK
U5
Handle reset
110–125 Vdc
Left pole
UVR125DPK
U6
120 volt handle reset with LED
120 Vac
Left pole
UVM4LP08K 23
U66
120 volt handle reset with LED
120 Vac
Left pole
UVM4LP08KT 24
U68
Handle reset
110–127 Vac
Left pole
UVH4LP08K 2
U18
Handle reset
208–240 Vac
Left pole
UVH4LP11K 2
U22
Handle reset
110–125 Vdc
Left pole
UVH4LP26K 2
T14
120 volt handle reset with LED
120 Vac
Left pole
UVM5LP08K 3
U66
2
120 volt handle reset with LED
120 Vac
Left pole
UVM5LT08K 4
U68
Handle reset
110–127 Vac
Left pole
UVH5LP08K 2
U18
2
Handle reset
208–240 Vac
Left pole
UVH5LP11K 2
U22
2
T14
2
2
2
2
2
E2LME/E2LMZ
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/E2MM/
E2MW
2
2
E2N/E2NM
U66
Handle reset
110–125 Vdc
Left pole
UVH5LP26K
120 volt handle reset with LED
120 Vac
Right pole
UVM6RP08K 35
U58
2
Handle reset
110–127 Vac
Right pole
UVH6RP08K 5
U49
Handle reset
208–240 Vac
Right pole
UVH6RP11K 5
U53
2
Handle reset
110–125 Vdc
Right pole
UVH6RP26K 5
T33
2
2
2
2
E2R/E2RM
Notes
1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed.
2 LH (RH also available).
3 Pigtail leads.
4 Terminal blocks.
5 RH only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-390
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Shunt Trip 1
2.6
Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch)
Breaker
Type
Voltage
Rating
E2F/E2FM
48–127 Vac or
48–60 Vdc
E2J/E2JM
Mounting
Location
Factory
Modification
Code
Catalog
Number
2
Left pole
SNT1LP08K
S06
208–230 Vac or
110–127 Vdc
Left pole
SNT1LP12K 2
S10
110–240 Vac or
110–125 Vdc
Left pole
SNT2P11K 3
S10
2
Breaker
Type
Number of Sets
of Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
Catalog
Number
E2F/E2FM
1
Right
A1L1LPK/A1L1RPK B06
2
Right
A2L1LPK/A2L1RPK B13
1
Right
A1L2LPK/A1L2RPK B06
E2J/E2JM
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
Factory
Modification
Code
1
Right
A1L3LPK/A1L3RPK B06
2
Right
A2L3LPK/A2L3RPK B13
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
110–240 Vac or
110–125 Vdc
Left pole
SNT3P11K 3
S10
1
Right
ALM1M1BJPK
B1
E2LME/E2LMZ
24 Vac/Vdc
Left pole
SNT024CPK
S6
2
Right
ALM2M2BJPK
B3
48–60 Vac/Vdc
Left pole
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/
E2MM/E2MW
E2N/E2NM
E2R/E2RM
E2LME/E2LMZ
2
2
2
2
SNT4860CPK
S7
A1L4LPK/A1L4RPK B06
SNT120CPK
S2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 1
E2MM/E2MW
2
Right
110–240 Vac/Vdc Left pole
Right
A2L4LPK/A2L4RPK B13
48–60 Vac
Left pole
SNT4LP05K 2
S06
E2N/E2NM
1
Right
A1L5LPK/A1L5RPK B06
48–60 Vdc
Left pole
SNT4LP23K 2
S86
2
Right
A2L5LPK/A2L5RPK B13
110–240 Vac
Left pole
SNT4LP11K 2
S10
1
Right
A1L6RPK
B05
110–125 Vdc
Left pole
SNT4LP26K 2
S42
2
Right
A2L6RPK
B12
110–240 Vac
Left pole
SNT5LP11K 2
S10
110–125 Vdc
Left pole
SNT5LP26K 2
S42
110–240 Vac
Right pole
SNT6P11K 4
S29
110–125 Vdc
Right pole
SNT6P26K 4
S45
E2R/E2RM
2
Notes
1 Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed.
2 LH (RH also available).
3 LH or RH.
4 RH only.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Auxiliary Switch
Breaker
Type
Number of Sets
of Contacts
Mounting
(1A and 1B)
Location
Catalog
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
E2F/E2FM
1
Right
A1X1PK
A06
2
Right
A2X1RPK
A13
1
Right
A1X2PK
A06
2
Right
A2X2PK
A13
1
Right
A1X3PK
A06
2
Right
A2X3PK
A13
1
Right
AUX1A1BPK
A1
E2J/E2JM
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
E2LME/E2LMZ
2
Right
AUX2A2BPK
A2
E2L/E2LM/E2LW/E2M/ 1
E2MM/E2MW
2
Right
A1X4PK
A06
Right
A2X4PK
A13
E2N/E2NM
1
Right
A1X5PK
A06
2
Right
A2X5PK
A13
2
Right
A2X6RPK
A12
4
Right
A4X6RPK
A19
E2R/E2RM
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-391
2.6
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
3 A–150 A
70 A–250 A
2
E2F/E2FM
Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—
Include Line/Load Terminals Non-Electronic Trip Units
E2J/E2JM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic
Trip Units
2
A
C
A
C
2
2
On
Off
2
B
2
B
ON/
2
2
2
2
Front View
Side View
Description
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
A
4.13 (104.9)
2
B
6.00 (152.4)
C
3.38 (85.9)
D
3.50 (88.9)
2
OFF/
D
D
Front View
2
Description
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
A
4.13 (104.9)
B
10.00 (254.0)
C
4.06 (103.1)
D
4.31 (109.5)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-392
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Side View
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
100 A–400 A
100 A–400 A
2
E2K/E2KM/E2KW
E2KE/E2KEM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic
Trip Units
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic
Trip Units
2
C
A
2
C
A
2
2
2
2
B
B
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
2
2
2
2
2
2
D
Front View
Description
2
D
Side View
Front View
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Description
A
5.49 (139.4)
A
5.49 (139.4)
B
10.13 (257.3)
B
10.13 (257.3)
C
4.06 (103.1)
C
4.06 (103.1)
D
4.31 (109.5)
D
4.31 (109.5)
Side View
2
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-393
2.6
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
160 A–400 A
300 A–600 A
E2LME/E2LMZ
E2L/E2LM/E2LW
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
Circuit Breakers
2
C
A
C
A
2
2
2
On/I
2
On/I
On/I
On/I
B
2
Off/O
2
B
Off/O
Off/O
Trip Unit May Be
Either Thermal/Magnetic
or Electronic
2
Off/O
Trip Unit May Be
Either Thermal/Magnetic
or Electronic
2
D
2
2
Front View
D
Side View
Front View
Description
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Description
2
A
5.48 (139.2)
A
8.25 (209.6)
2
B
10.13 (257.3)
B
10.75 (273.1)
C
4.00 (101.6)
C
4.06 (103.1)
D
4.22 (107.1)
D
4.38 (111.3)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-394
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Side View
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
300 A–600 A
300 A–800 A
E2LE/E2LEM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
E2M/E2MM/E2MW
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Non-Electronic
Trip Units
C
A
2
2
C
A
2
2
2
On/I
2
On/I
B
Off/O
2
Off/O
On/I
Trip Unit May Be
Either Thermal/Magnetic
or Electronic
2
On/I
2
B
Off/O
2
Off/O
2
D
Front View
Side View
2
Description
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
8.25 (209.6)
B
10.75 (273.1)
C
4.06 (103.1)
D
4.38 (111.3)
2
2
2
D
Front View
Description
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
8.25 (209.6)
B
16.00 (406.4)
C
4.06 (103.1)
D
4.38 (111.3)
Side View
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-395
2.6
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
800 A
400 A–1200 A
E2ME/E2MEM
E2N/E2NM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Units
C
A
2
C
A
2
2
2
B
2
2
On/I
On/I
ON/I
B
2
2
Off/O
Off/O
OFF/O
2
2
2
2
D
Front View
2
D
Front View
2
Side View
2
Description
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Description
A
8.25 (209.6)
A
8.25 (209.6)
2
B
16.00 (406.4)
B
16.00 (406.4)
C
4.06 (103.1)
C
5.50 (139.7)
2
D
4.38 (111.3)
D
6.00 (152.4)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-396
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Side View
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
Please see TD01217001E for detailed dimensions.
2
1600 A–2000 A
2
E2R/ E2RM
Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Units
2
C
A
2
2
2
2
B
2
2
2
2
D
Front View
Description
2
Side View
2
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
15.50 (393.7)
B
16.00 (406.4)
C
9.00 (228.6)
D
10.00 (254.0)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-397
2.6
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Contents
E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker
Description
2
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classic Mining Breakers
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker
2
Product Overview
Application Description
The Eaton E2VAC mining
vacuum circuit breaker is a
vacuum-based solution with
advanced communications,
designed to improve safety,
reliability and productivity.
Combining robust circuit
protection and safety
features with state-of-the-art
monitoring capability, the
E2VAC breaker is ideal for
underground power center
applications.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Available in 480, 600 and
1000 Vac styles, the E2VAC
provides protection for up to
500 A in motor circuits and
trailing cables. By using
vacuum contactors to make
and break line/load
connections, the dangers of
an external arc flash are
eliminated while reliably
switching normal load and
high stress fault currents.
The E2VAC can be installed
as a fixed breaker, but it is
also available with remote
racking capability that allows
personnel to remove the
breaker from service:
●
●
While standing at a safe
distance from the breaker
Completely disconnecting
the breaker from live
voltage without having to
depower the entire power
center for maintenance
Eaton’s EDR-5000
distribution relay is fully
integrated into the E2VAC
breaker and provides
advanced monitoring
capability for real power,
reactive power, power factor
and frequency in addition to
the standard voltage, current
and phase angle measurements.
V4-T2-398
Features and Benefits
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Industry-leading vacuum
interrupter (VI) technology
used to eliminate the risk
of external arc flash;
includes VI malfunction
detection
Blown fuse detection with
audible and visible
indication
Phase loss and open CT
detection
Dust-tight receptacle
supplies power from the
front of the breaker
EDR-5000 distribution relay
provides voltage, current
and phase angle
monitoring capability
Instantaneous protection
for short circuit and ground
faults; phase imbalance
and undervoltage
protection
Advanced user interface
with LEDs and LCD screen
for fault indication and
keypad for programming
Vacuum sealed contacts
improve the equipment
life, especially in harsh
environments
Key Differentiators
Remote racking capability
greatly increases service
accessibility and safety by
keeping the operator at a
great distance from the
arc flash
●
Maintenance Mode
enables lower
instantaneous pickups to
minimize the risk of arc
flash energy release during
breaker service
●
Advanced monitoring
capability for kW, kVAR,
power factor and
frequency
●
Reports sequence of up to
300 events and stores fault
data for up to 20 faults
●
Reduced footprint allows
users to maximize space in
the power center
●
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Page
V4-T2-341
V4-T2-347
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-372
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-399
V4-T2-400
V4-T2-415
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Catalog Number Selection
2
E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker
2
E2VAC R 480V 3 400
Frame
Blank = Fixed
R
= Remote
racking
Voltage
480V = 480 Vac max.
600V = 600 Vac max.
1000V = 1000Y/577 Vac max.
Number of Poles
3 = Three-pole
2
2
Current Rating
300 = 300 A
400 = 400 A
600 = 600 A
2
2
2
Product Selection
E2VAC
2
2
E2VAC Mining Circuit Breakers with EDR-5000 Relay
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40 °C
480 Vac Maximum
600 Vac Maximum
1000 Vac Maximum
Trip Range
100 kA, Three-Pole
Catalog Number
100 kA, Three-Pole
Catalog Number
100k A, Three-Pole
Catalog Number
50–320
E2VAC480V3300
E2VAC600V3300
E2VAC1000V3300
2
Fixed Standard Breaker
300
400
265–405
E2VAC480V3400
E2VAC600V3400
E2VAC1000V3400
600
408–600
E2VAC480V3600
E2VAC600V3600
E2VAC1000V3600
2
2
Standard Breaker with Remote Racking
300
50–320
E2VACR480V3300
E2VACR600V3300
E2VACR1000V3300
400
265–405
E2VACR480V3400
E2VACR600V3400
E2VACR1000V3400
600
408–600
E2VACR480V3600
E2VACR600V3600
E2VACR1000V3600
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-399
2.6
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Fixed Standard E2VAC Breaker
34.11 (866.4)
20.00 (508.0)
2
28.00 (711.2)
2
2
2
2
24.00
(609.6)
2
2
2
2
2
1.06 (26.9)
15.00 (381.0)
2
2
1.06 (26.9)
0.50
(12.7)
2
2
Side View
Front View
21.50
(546.1)
22.50
(571.5)
2
0.50
(12.7)
2
2
20.12 (511.0)
2
Recommended Cutout
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-400
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Contents
Description
Page
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 Mining Service Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . .
Classic Mining Breakers
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR . . . .
V4-T2-341
V4-T2-347
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-372
V4-T2-398
V4-T2-403
V4-T2-408
V4-T2-410
V4-T2-415
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Classic Mining Breakers
2
Product Overview
Classic mining service circuit
breakers continue to be
manufactured and are
primarily applied to achieve
an exact physical and
electronic replacement of
previously Cutler-Hammer
installed Westinghouse
equipment. To upgrade to the
current offering of E2 mining
circuit breakers, consult the
cross reference information
on Page V4-T2-410.
2
2
2
2
AC Interrupting Capacity, Symmetrical Amperes
2
Breaker Type
HLAM 2
All Other 1000 Volt
Breakers 2
2
—
—
—
30,000
—
—
—
2
22,000
22,000
—
—
—
—
—
10,000
12,000
14,000
60 Hz
AC Volts
KAM
LAM, MAM, NBM
HKAM
240
25,000
42,000
480
22,000
600
1000 1
2
2
2
Special DC Interrupting Capacity
Interrupting Capacity (Amperes) at 300–330 Vdc
2
Two Poles in Series 4
Single-Pole
Breaker
Type
Maximum
Ampere Rating
0.0–0.15 mH Inductance 3
0.15–0.5 mH Inductance
0.5–0.9 mH Inductance
2.4 mH Inductance
KAM
225
15,000
10,000
15,000
5000
LAM
400/600
15,000
10,000
15,000
5000
MAM
800
15,000
10,000
15,000
5000
NBM
1200
15,000
10,000
15,000
5000
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Based on circuit power factor of 50% or greater.
2 HLAM must be rear stud connected. If front connected, interrupting capacity rating is 10,000 amperes.
3 Resistive circuit.
4 Two poles in electrical series in ungrounded leg of circuit.
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-401
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
Classic Circuit Breakers For Mining Service
2
Undervoltage Release Data
Undervoltage releases are calibrated to pick up at 72 to 85% of rated voltage dropout between
35 to 70% of rated voltage.
2
2
Volts
KAM, HKAM 1
480/60
0.021
10,000
10.1
240/60
0.019
—
4.6
0.021
—
2.5
2
120/60
2
2
Line
Amperes
0.13
—
15.6
480/60
0.033
12,000 3
15.9
240/60
0.028
6,000
6.7
120/60
0.029
—
3.5
120/60 2
0.13
—
15.6
120/60
LAM, HLAM, MAM,
HMAM, NBM, HNBM 1
2
2
Series
Resistors 1
2
2
2
2
Shunt Trip Coil Data
Breaker
Type
KAM, HKAM, LAM, HLAM, MAM,
HMAM, NBM, HNBM
2
2
2
Total
VA
Breaker
Type
Volts
Amperes
VA
480/60
0.085
40.8
240/60
1.7
408
120/60
0.88
105.6
48 DC
8.0
384
Notes
1 Supplied for external customer mounting.
2 New design electrical reset UVR.
3 16,000 for Type MAM and HMAM.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-402
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
For reference only. Replace these frames with E2 Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on Page V4-T2-410.
2
Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers
2
Accessories
(Included in Frame)
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes 3
2
M
None
200–400
M
UVR 4
200–400
2
M
Standard shunt trip 3
200–400
225
TM
UVR 4
300–700
2
225
TM
UVR 4
500–1000
2609D60G67
3
180
M
None
200–400
1291C26G08
3
180
M
UVR 4
200–400
2609D60G69
3
180
M
Standard shunt trip 3
200–400
5685D48G75
3
225
TM
None
300–700
5685D48G74
3
225
TM
None
500–1000
Breaker
Type
Frame
Style Numbers 12
Poles
Amperes
KAM
2609D60G64
2
180
1291C26G07
2
180
2609D60G66
2
180
1291C26G01
2
1291C26G02
LAM
Trip
Type
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
300–700
1291C26G03
3
225
TM
UVR
1291C26G04
3
225
TM
UVR 4
500–1000
2609D60G01
3
225
TM
Standard shunt trip 3
300–700
2609D60G02
3
225
TM
Standard shunt trip 3
500–1000
2609D60G40
3
225
M
None
300–700
2609D60G41
3
225
M
None
500–700
1291C26G05
3
225
M
UVR 4
300–700
4
500–1000
500–1000
1291C26G06
3
225
M
UVR
1291C32G01
2
400
TM
UVR 4
2609D60G61
2
400
M
Shunt trip (48 Vdc)
750–1500
1291C32G03
3
400
TM
UVR 4
500–1000
5685D48G73
3
400
TM
None
800–1600
1291C32G02
3
400
TM
UVR 4
800–1600
2609D60G03
3
400
TM
Standard shunt trip 3
800–1600
2609D60G44
3
400
M
None
800–1600
1291C32G04
3
400
M
UVR 4
800–1600
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Terminals not included in style number.
2 All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated.
3 Rated 120 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type.
4 UVR is auto-reset type, 120 Vac.
2
2
M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-403
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
For reference only. Replace these frames with E2 Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on Page V4-T2-410.
2
Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers, continued
2
Breaker
Type
Frame
Style Numbers 12
Poles
Amperes
Trip
Type
Accessories
(Included in Frame)
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes 3
2609D60G17
2
600
TM
UVR 3
750–1500
2
2609D60G18
2
800
TM
UVR 3
1000–2000
2
2609D60G63
3
400
TM
UVR 3
2000–4000
5685D48G72
3
600
TM
None
1500–3000
MAM
3
1500–3000
2
2609D60G19
3
600
TM
UVR
2609D60G04
3
600
TM
Standard shunt trip 3
1500–3000
2
2609D60G05
3
800
TM
Standard shunt trip 3
2000–4000
5685D48G71
3
800
TM
None
2000–4000
2
2609D60G20
3
800
TM
UVR 3
2000–4000
2
2609D60G46
3
800
M
None
1500–3000
2609D60G47
3
800
M
UVR 3
1500–3000
2609D60G48
3
800
M
None
2000–4000
2
3
2000–4000
2609D60G49
3
800
M
UVR
1229C37G13
2
1000
TM
UVR 4
1500–3000
1229C37G14
2
1200
TM
UVR 4
2000–4000
2
1227C36G10
3
1000
TM
None
2500–5000
2
1229C37G15
3
1000
TM
UVR 4
2500–5000
1227C36G13
3
1000
TM
Standard shunt trip 3
2500–5000
2
1227C36G14
3
1200
TM
Standard shunt trip 3
2500–5000
1227C36G09
3
1200
TM
None
2500–5000
2
NBM
2
2
2
2
2
2500–5000
1229C37G16
3
1200
TM
UVR
1227C36G19
3
1200
M
None
2500–5000
1229C37G17
3
1200
M
UVR 4
2500–5000
Notes
1 Terminals not included in style number.
2 All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated.
3 Rated 120 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type.
4 UVR is auto-reset type, 120 Vac.
M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-404
4
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
1000 Volt Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers
HKAM
Breaker
Type
Frame
Style Numbers
Poles
Amperes
Trip
Type
Accessories
(Included in Frame)
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes 1
HKAM
2609D60G70
3
180
M
None
200–400
2
1291C26G16
3
180
M
UVR
5685D48G87
3
225
TM
None
300–700
1291C26G12
3
225
TM
UVR 2
300–700
5685D48G86
3
225
TM
None
500–1000
1291C26G13
3
225
TM
UVR 2
500–1000
1291C26G14
3
225
M
UVR 2
300–700
1291C26G15
3
225
M
UVR 2
500–1000
5685D48G85
3
400
TM
None
800–1600
1291C32G07
3
400
TM
UVR 2
800–1600
2
800–1600
2
2
2
200–400
2
2
2
2
HLAM
HLAM
1291C32G09
3
400
M
UVR
2
2
2
2
HMAM
HMAM
5685D48G84
3
600
TM
None
1500–3000
2609D60G28
3
600
TM
UVR 3
1500–3000
5685D48G83
3
800
TM
None
2000–4000
2609D60G29
3
800
TM
UVR 3
2000–4000
2609D60G57
3
800
M
UVR 3
1500–3000
2609D60G58
3
800
M
UVR 3
2000–4000
2
2
2
2
2
2
HNAM
HNBM
1227C36G12
3
1000
TM
None
2500–5000
1229C37G19
3
1000
TM
UVR 2
2500–5000
1227C36G11
3
1200
TM
None
2500–5000
2
2500–5000
2500–5000
1229C37G20
3
1200
TM
UVR
1229C37G18
3
1200
M
UVR 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 The magnetic trip range does not change when rating plug is changed.
2 120 volt, 60 Hz electrical reset type.
3 Rated 120 volts, 60 Hz; undervoltage release is handle reset type.
2
2
M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-405
2.6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Classic Mining Service Breaker Frames Only
Breaker
Type
Frame Size,
Amperes
Number
of Poles
Style
Numbers
Breaker
Type
Frame Size,
Amperes
Number
of Poles
Style
Numbers
KAM 1
225
2
2602D86G11
MAM 2
800
2
2600D43G11
225
3
2602D86G12
800
3
2600D43G12
KAMH 1
225
2
2602D86G13
MAMH 2
800
2
2600D43G13
225
3
2602D86G14
800
3
2600D43G14
HKAM 1
225
3
1264C99G05
HMAM 2
800
3
1264C99G03
LAM 2
400
2
2602D99G05
NBM 2
1200
2
2610D64G07
400
3
2602D99G06
1200
3
2610D64G08
1200
2
2610D64G09
1200
3
2610D64G10
1200
3
2610D64G13
LAMH
2
400
2
2602D99G07
400
3
2602D99G08
HLAM 2
400
3
1264C99G02
LAM3600F
600
3
2603D48G07
LAMH3600F
600
3
2603D48G08
HLAM3600F
600
3
2603D48G09
NBMH
2
HNBM 2
2
2
Trip Units for Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Thermal-Magnetic
Magnetic Only
2
Breaker
Type
Conductor
Size
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes
Maximum Continuous
Amperes
Three-Pole 3
Style Numbers
Three-Pole
Style Numbers
2
HKAM
#6
150–400
180
—
2609D99G22
#4–#3
300–700
225
5685D48G40
2611D75G01
#4–#1
500–1000
225
5685D48G34
2611D75G02
#4–#1
750–1500
400
5685D48G97
2609D99G21
#2–#2/0
800–1600
400
5685D48G28
2611D75G03
#2–2/0
750–1500
600
2609D99G20
—
2/0–500 kcmil
1500–3000
600
2609D99G19
—
#2–#2/0
750–1500
600
—
—
2/0–500 kcmil
1500–3000
600
5685D48G22
2611D75G04 4
#1–3/0
1000–2000
800
—
—
3/0–500 kcmil
2000–4000
800
5685D48G16
2611D75G05
2/0–500 kcmil
1500–3000
1000
—
—
2
2
HLAM
2
HLAM600
2
HMAM
2
2
HNBM
2
2
2
2
4/0–500 kcmil
2500–5000
1000
5685D48G10
—
3/0–500 kcmil
2000–4000
1200
—
—
4/0–500 kcmil
2500–5000
1200
5685D48G04
2611D75G07
Notes
1 Frame modified for left-hand mounting of UVR attachment.
2 Frame modified for right-hand mounting of UVR attachment.
3 Three-pole trip units only are suitable for replacement in 1000 volt mining service circuit breakers.
4 800 amperes.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-406
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Terminals For Classic Mining Service Breakers
Terminals are UL listed for wire type and range listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound.
2
Breaker
Type
Terminal
Type
Maximum
Amperes
Package of 3 Line Terminals
Style Number
Wire Range,
Type
FBM, HFBM
Style pressure type terminals
100
624B100G02
#14–1/0 Al/Cu
50
624B100G10
#14–#4 Al/Cu
100
624B100G17
# 4–4/0 Al/Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals
2
2
2
2
2
Terminals For Mining Service Breakers
Breaker
Type
Terminal
Type
Maximum
Amperes
Terminal
Catalog Number
Wire Range, Type
Number of Cables
KAM, HKAM
Standard pressure terminals (copper only)
225
T225LA
(1) #6–350 kcmil
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals
225
TA225LA1
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al
LAM
Standard copper pressure terminals
225
T225LA
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu
400
T401LA
(1) #4–250 kcmil Cu plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu
225
TA225LA1
(1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al
400
TA400LA1
(1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu
400
TA401LA
(1) 600–750 kcmil Al
600
T600LA
(2) 250–500 kcmil Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals
LAM-600, LAMH-600, HLAM-600
Standard copper pressure terminals
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals
600
TA600LA
(2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu
MAM, HMAM, MAMH
Standard copper pressure terminals
350
T350MA
(1) #1–600 kcmil Cu
600
T600MA1
(2) 2/0–500 kcmil Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals
NBM, HNBM, NBMH
Standard copper pressure terminals
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals
800
T800MA1
(3) 3/0–300 kcmil Cu
600
TA700MA1
(2) #1–500 kcmil Al/Cu
800
TA800MA2
(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu
800
TA801MA
(2) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu
1000
T1000NB1
(3) 3/0–500 kcmil Cu
1200
T1200NB1
(4) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu
1000
TA1000NB1
(3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu
1200
TA1200NB1
(4) 4/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu
1200
TA1201NB1
(3) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-407
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
Accessories
2
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
2
Rear Connected Studs 1
For complete stud assembly,
order a stud and tube based
on thickness of customer’s
mounting panel. A short stud
must be assembled adjacent
to a long stud to maintain
Rear Connected Studs For Insulated Panels Only: Two Per Pole
clearances required by
Underwriters Laboratories.2
Two studs required per pole.
For List Prices, see Eaton’s
Price and Availability Digest.
Extension Back
of Breaker In
Inches (mm)
Stud
Style Numbers
0.50 (12.7)–13
3.22 (81.8)
1241 345
0.50 (12.7)–13
6.28 (159.5)
1241 346
225 34
0.50 (12.7)–13
4.97 (126.2)
1241 392
400 3
0.75 (19.1)–16
5.47 (138.9)
05B7383G22
7.97 (202.4)
05B7383G23
2
KAM, HKAM Breakers
0.75 (19.1)–16
0.75 (19.1)–1.00 (25.4) Short
656D565G01
0.84 (21.3)
456D983H05
0.75 (19.1)–16
10.47 (265.9)
05B7383G24
2
Long
656D565G02
3.78 (96.0)
456D983H08
1.00 (25.4)–12
5.91 (150.1)
314C960G16
456D983H06
1.00 (25.4)–12
8.41 (213.6)
314C960G17
456D983H09
1.00 (25.4)–12
10.91 (277.1)
314C960G18
2
2
2
2
2
2
Mounting Panel
Thickness In
Inches (mm)
Stud
Length
0.50 (12.7)–0.75 (19.1) Short
Long
0.25 (6.4)–0.50 (12.7)
2
2
Tube
Style
Numbers
656D565G01
656D565G02
Length In
Inches (mm)
1.09 (27.7)
4.03 (102.4)
Style
Numbers
Short
656D565G01
1.34 (34.0)
456D983H07
Long
656D565G02
4.28 (108.7)
456D983H10
Stud
Ampere Number
LAM, HLAM Breakers
225 3
600
MAM, HMAM, MAMH Breakers
225
0.50 (12.7)–13
3.66 (93.0)
314C960G01
400
0.75 (19.1)–16
5.91 (150.1)
314C960G04
0.75 (19.1)–16
8.41 (213.6)
314C960G05
0.75 (19.1)–16
10.91 (277.1)
314C960G06
1.00 (25.4)–12
5.91 (150.1)
314C960G07
1.00 (25.4)–12
8.41 (213.6)
314C960G08
1.00 (25.4)–12
10.91 (277.1)
314C960G09
1.13 (28.7)–12
4.91 (124.7)
314C960G10
1.13 (28.7)–12
8.41 (213.6)
314C960G11
1.13 (28.7)–12
10.91 (277.1)
314C960G12
600
2
2
Diameter, In
Inches (mm)
and Thread
800
2
2
NBM, HNBM, NBMH Breakers
1.13 (28.7)–12
5.50 (139.7)
623B222G01
2
1.13 (28.7)–12
8.00 (203.2)
623B222G02
1.13 (28.7)–12
10.50 (266.7)
623B222G03
1.25 (31.8)–12
5.50 (139.7)
373B375G04
1.25 (31.8)–12
10.50 (266.7)
373B375G03
800
2
1200
2
2
Line and Load Terminal Shields 5
2
2
Breaker Type
Description
Style Numbers
KAM
Line terminals
1261C93G01
Load terminals
1262C46G01
Line terminals
1261C95G01
Load terminals
1262C48G01
Line terminals
1261C97G01
Load terminals
1261C97G02
LAM-400
2
2
MAM
2
Notes
1 Not UL Iisted.
2 400 ampere LA studs of the same length have sufficient clearance; however, customer
connections may make it necessary to use a short stud adjacent to a long stud.
3 150, 300 and 400 ampere frames only.
4 This is a special stud that includes six contact nuts for use where bus contact nuts
must be used.
5 For breakers used with terminals and cable connections. Sold in packages of 10.
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-408
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Standard Handle Reset Undervoltage Release
For Classic breakers field
when voltage drops below
mountable on special frames
35 to 70% of coil rating. Picks
listed on Page V4-T2-410, or
up and seals in at 72 to 85%
replacement on breakers
of coil rating. For line voltages
originally equipped with this
up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac.
type UVR.
Externally mounted resistors
are supplied for certain ratings.
For undervoltage protection.
Standard leads extend 18.00
A solenoid device mounts
inches (457.2 mm) outside of
within breaker case. Coil
breaker. Longer leads may
must be energized before
be specified.
closing breaker. Trips breaker
Shunt Trips
For tripping breaker from a
remote point. A solenoid
device mounts within breaker
case. Breaker trips when coil
is energized. A cutoff switch
breaks the circuit to the
momentary rated coil when
breaker opens. Available for
Breaker
Type
KAM, HKAM
Volts
Style
Numbers
120 Vac
4995D12G11
LAM, HLAM
Breaker
Type
MAM, HMAM,
MAMH
NBM, HNBM,
NBMH
Volts
(50–60 Hz)
Style
Numbers
480 Vac
2605D15G16
240 Vac
2605D15G17
120 Vac
2605D15G19
480 Vac
2606D56G16
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
120 Vac 1
1228C76G03
240 Vac
2606D56G17
240 Vac
4995D12G13
120 Vac
2606D56G19
480 Vac
4995D12G14
48 Vdc
2606D56G07
125 Vdc
4995D12G09
480 Vac
2606D57G16
240 Vac
2606D57G17
120 Vac
2606D57G19
480 Vac
2606D58G16
240 Vac
2606D58G17
120 Vac
2606D58G19
2
2
120 Vac
120 Vac
5672D69G11
1
MAM, HMAM,
MAMH
—
240 Vac
5672D69G13
NBM, HNBM,
NBMH
480 Vac
5672D69G14
120 Vac
4995D11G11
120 Vac 1
1229C35G03
Left-Hand Mounting
240 Vac
4995D11G13
KAM, HKAM
480 Vac
4995D11G14
120 Vac
4995D10G01
120 Vac 1
240 Vac
480 Vac
4995D10G04
480 Vac
2605D15G02
240 Vac
2605D15G03
120 Vac
2605D15G05
480 Vac
2606D56G02
1228C76G03
240 Vac
2606D56G03
4995D10G03
120 Vac
2606D56G05
480 Vac
2606D57G02
240 Vac
2606D57G03
120 Vac
2606D57G05
480 Vac
2606D58G02
240 Vac
2606D58G03
120 Vac
2606D58G05
Left-Hand Mounting
KAM, HKAM
control voltages up to 250
Vdc or 600 Vac. Voltage and
frequency must be specified.
Standard leads extend 18.00
inches (457.2 mm) outside of
breaker. Longer leads may
be specified.
Right-Hand Mounting
Right-Hand Mounting
LAM, HLAM
2.6
LAM, HLAM
MAM, HMAM,
MAMH
NBM, HNBM,
NBMH
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Electrical reset UVR.
2 Auto reset type.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-409
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
Reference Information
2
E2 Cross-Reference
Series C Mining
Superseded by E2 Mining
Series C Mining
Superseded by E2 Mining
1491D72G31
E2J3070T
FDBM3040
E2F3040
2
1491D72G32
E2J3090T
FDBM3045
E2F3045
1491D72G33
E2J3100T
FDBM3050
E2F3050
2
1491D72G37
E2J3200T
FDBM3050U62
E2F3050U62
6622C87G27
E2K3225AWU66
FDBM3050WU62
E2F3050WU62
2
6622C87G28
E2K3225DWU66
FDBM3060
E2F3060
2
6622C87G32
E2K3400GWU66
FDBM3070
E2F3070
E2KM3100
E2KEM3100W
FDBM3070WU62
E2F3070WU62
2
E2KM3100U66
E2KEM3100WU66
FDBM3080
E2F3080
E2KM3125
E2KEM3125W
FDBM3090
E2F3090
2
E2KM3125U66
E2KEM3125WU66
FDBM3100
E2F3100
E2KM3150
E2KEM3150W
FDBM3100LM04U62
E2F3100M04U62
2
E2KM3150MU66
E2KEM3150WU66
FDBM3125
E2F3125
2
E2KM3150TM
E2KEM3150MW
FDBM3150
E2F3150
E2KM3150U66
E2KEM3150MWU66
FDBM3150L
E2F3150L
2
E2KM3200
E2KEM3200W
FDM3015
E2F3015
E2KM3200U66
E2KEM3200WU66
FDM3015L
E2F3015L
2
E2KM3225
E2KEM3225W
FDM3015LU62
E2F3015LU62
E2KM3225F
E2KM3400F
FDM3020
E2F3020
2
E2KM3225FUV
E2KM3400F
FDM3020LU62
E2F3020LU62
2
E2KM3225MU66
E2KEM3225MWU66
FDM3025
E2F3025
E2KM3225TM
E2KEM3225TM
FDM3025L
E2F3025L
2
E2KM3225U66
E2KEM3225WU66
FDM3025LS22
E2F3025LS22
E2LM3300U66
E2LEM3300WU66
FDM3025LU62
E2F3025LU62
2
E2LM3350U66
E2LEM3350WU66
FDM3030
E2F3030
2
E2LM34002U66
E2LEM34002WU66
FDM3030LS22
E2F3030LS22
E2LM3400F
E2LM3600F
FDM3040
E2F3040
2
2
E2LM3400FUV
E2LM3600F
FDM3040L
E2F3040L
E2LM3400M2U66
E2LEM3400M2WU66
FDM3040LU62
E2F3040LU62
2
E2LM3400MU66
E2LEM3400MWU66
FDM3050
E2F3050
E2LM3400U66
E2LEM3400WU66
FDM3050LU62
E2F3050LU62
2
FDBM3015
E2F3015
FDM3050U62
E2F3050U62
2
FDBM3015WU62
E2F3015WU62
FDM3060
E2F3060
FDBM3020
E2F3020
FDM3060LU62
E2F3060LU62
2
FDBM3025
E2F3025
FDM3070
E2F3070
FDBM3025U62
E2F3025U62
FDM3070A02U62
E2F3070A02U62
2
FDBM3030
E2F3030
FDM3080
E2F3080
FDBM3030U62
E2F3030WU62
FDM3090
E2F3090
2
FDBM3030WU62
E2F3030WU62
FDM3100
E2F3100
FDBM3035
E2F3035
FDM3100LS22
E2F3100LS22
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-410
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Superseded by E2 Mining
Series C Mining
Superseded by E2 Mining
FDM3100LU62
E2FLU62
JDCM3150W
E2JM3150W
FDM3125
E2F3125
JDCM3175W
E2JM3175W
FDM3125LU62
E2F3125LU62
JDCM3200W
E2JM3200W
FDM3150
E2F3150
JDCM3225A5W
E2JM3225AW
HFDM003AM
E2F003AM
JDCM3225D5W
E2JM3225DW
HFDM003AMLU62
E2F003AMLU62
JDCM3225W
E2JM3225W
HFDM007CM
E2F007CM
JDCM3250A5MW
E2JM3250MAW
HFDM007CMU62
E2F007CMU62
JDCM3250A5MWU18
E2JM3250MAWU18
HFDM015EM
E2F015EM
JDCM3250A5W
E2JM3250AW
HFDM015EMA02
E2F015EMA02
JDCM3250C5MW
E2JM3250MCW
HFDM015EMLU62
E2F015EMLU62
JDCM3250D5MW
E2JM3250MDW
HFDM015EMU62
E2F015EMU62
JDCM3250D5MWA06
E2JM3250MDWA06
HFDM030HM
E2F030HM
JDCM3250D5W
E2JM3250DW
HFDM030HMLU62
E2F030HMLU62
JDCM3250D5WS10
E2JM3250DWS10
HFDM030HMU62
E2F030HMU62
JDCM3250F
E2JM3250F
HFDM050KM
E2F050KM
JDCM3250F5MD01
E2JM3250MFD01
HFDM050KML
E2F050KML
JDCM3250F5MW
E2JM3250MFW
HFDM050KMLU62
E2F050KMLU62
JDCM3250G5MW
E2JM3250MGW
HFDM050KMU62
E2F050KMU62
JDCM3250G5WA02D01
E2JM3250MGA02D01
HFDM070MM
E2F070MM
JDCM3250J5MW
E2JM3250MJW
HFDM070MMU62
E2F070MMU62
JDCM3250J5MWA02
E2JM3250MJA02
HFDM1001M
E2F1001M
JDCM3250J5WA02D01
E2JM3250MJA02D01
HFDM1001MS22
E2F1001MS22
JDCM3250J5WD01
E2JM3250MJD01
HFDM100LM
E2F100LM
JDCM3250K5MW
E2JM3250MKW
HFDM100LMA02
E2F100LMA02
JDCM3250L5MW
E2JM3250MLW
HFDM100LMU62
E2F100LMU62
JDCM3250MW
E2JM3250MW
HFDM 100RM
E2F100RM
JDCM3250W
E2JM3250W
HFDM100RML
E2F100RML
JDCMAA2D1
E2JM3250MM02D01
HFDM100RMS22
E2F100RMS22
JDCMDD1S30
E2JM3250MDS30D01
HFDM100RMU62
E2F100RMU62
JDCMFD01
E2JM3250MFD01
HFDM150TM
E2F150TM
JDCMGA02D1
E2JM3250MGA02D01
HFDM150TML
E2F150TML
JDCMJA2D1
E2JM3250MJA02D01
HFDM150TMU62
E2F150TMU62
JDCMJD01
E2JM3250MJD01
HFDM150UM
E2F150UM
JDM2250F
E2JM3250F
JCDA2D1S30
E2JM250MDA2D1S30
JDM3070W
E2J3070W
JCMA2D1S30
E2JM250MFA2D1S30
JDM3090W
E2J3090W
JDCM3070W
E2JM3070W
JDM3100W
E2J3100W
JDCM3090W
E2JM3090W
JDM3125W
E2J3125W
JDCM3100W
E2JM3100W
JDM3150W
E2J3150W
JDCM3125W
E2JM3125W
JDM3150WU18
E2J3150WU18
Series C Mining
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-411
2.6
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Series C Mining
Superseded by E2 Mining
Series C Mining
2
JDM3175W
E2J3175W
JM3250TL5M_1125-2250
E2J3250TML
2
JDM3200W
E2J3200W
JM3250TM
E2J3250TM
JDM3200WA06
E2J3200WA06
KDCM3100W
E2KM3100W
2
JDM3225A5W
E2J3225AW
KDCM3125W
E2KM3125W
JDM3225D5W
E2J3225DW
KDCM3150W
E2KM3150W
2
JDM3225W
E2J3225W
KDCM3175W
E2KM3175W
JDM3250A5MW
E2J3250MAW
KDCM3200W
E2KM3200W
JDM3250A5W
E2J3250AW
KDCM3225A5MW
E2KM3200MAW
2
JDM3250C5MW
E2J3250CW
KDCM3225D5MW
E2KM3200MDW
JDM3250D5MW
E2J3250MDW
KDCM3225W
E2KM3225W
2
JDM3250D5W
E2J3250DW
KDCM3250W
E2KM3250W
JDM3250F
E2J3250F
KDCM3250WU18
E2KM3250WU18
2
JDM3250F5MW
E2J3250MFW
KDCM3300W
E2KM3300W
2
JDM3250G5MW
E2J3250MGW
KDCM3350W
E2KM3350W
JDM3250J5MW
E2J3250MJW
KDCM3400D5MA02D09H04
E2KM3400MDA02D09H04
2
Superseded by E2 Mining
2
JDM3250K5MW
E2J3250MKW
KDCM3400D5MW
E2KM3400MDW
JDM3250L5MW
E2J3250MLW
KDCM3400D5MWA02D07
E2KM3400MDA02D07
2
JDM3250MW
E2J3250MW
KDCM3400D5W
E2KM3400DW
JDM3250W
E2J3250W
KDCM3400D5WD09
E2KM3400DD09
2
JDM3250WS10
E2J3250WS10
KDCM3400F
E2KM3400F
2
JM2225T1125-2250
E2J3225T
KDCM3400F5MW
E2KM3400MFW
JM3070T
E2J3070T
KDCM3400FD09G04
E2KM3400MFD09G04
2
JM3090T
E2J3090T
KDCM3400G5MW
E2KM3400MGD09G05
JM3100T
E2J3100T
KDCM3400G5MWD09H04
E2KM3400MGD09H04
2
JM3125T
E2J3125T
KDCM3400G5W
E2KM3400MGW
JM3150T
E2J3150T
KDCM3400G5WD07
E2KM3400MGD07
2
JM3175T
E2J3175T
KDCM3400J5MA02D09
E2KM3400MJA02D09
2
JM3200T
E2J3200T
KDCM3400J5MA2D9G4S30
E2KM3400MJA2D9G4S30
JM3225T
E2J3225T
KDCM3400J5MD09
E2KM3400MJD09
2
JM3225TA5
E2J3225TA
KDCM3400J5MD09H04S30
E2KM3400MJD09H04S30
JM3225TD5
E2J3225TD
KDCM3400J5MW
E2KM3400MJW
2
JM3250T
E2J3250T
KDCM3400J5MWA02D07
E2KM3400MJA02D07
2
JM3250TA5
E2J3250TA
KDCM3400J5MWA06
E2KM3400MJWA06
JM3250TA5M_350-700
E2J3250TMA
KDCM3400J5MWD07S30
E2KM3400MJD07S30
2
JM3250TC5M
E2J3250TMC
KDCM3400J5WD07
E2KM3400MJD07
JM3250TD5_500-1000
E2J3250TMD
KDCM3400K5MW
E2KM3400MKW
2
JM3250TF5M_625-1250
E2J3250TMF
KDCM3400K5MWS10
E2KM3400MKWS10
JM3250TG5M_750-1500
E2J3250TMG
KDCM3400K5MWU18
E2KM3400MKWU18
JM3250TJ5M_875-1750
E2J3250TMJ
KDCM3400L5MW
E2KM3400MLW
JM3250TK5M_1000-2000
E2J3250TMK
KDCM3400L5MWD09H04
E2KM3400MLD09H04
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-412
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Series C Mining
Superseded by E2 Mining
Series C Mining
KDCM3400L5MWS10
E2KM3400MLWS10
KDM3300WS10
E2K3300WS10
KDCM3400L5WD07
E2KM3400MLD07
KDM3350W
E2K3350W
KDCM3400MW
E2KM3400MW
KDM3400D5MW
E2K3400MDW
KDCM3400N5MW
E2KM3400MNW
KDM3400D5W
E2K3400DW
KDCM3400N5MWA06
E2KM3400MNWA06
KDM3400D5WU18
E2K3400DWU18
KDCM3400N5WA02D07
E2KM3400MNA02D07
KDM3400F
E2K3400F
KDCM3400R5MW
E2KM3400MRW
KDM3400F5MW
E2K3400MFW
KDCM3400W
E2KM3400W
KDM3400FK37A06D09D18
E2KE3400A06D09D18
KDCM3400W5MW
E2KM3400MWW
KDM3400G5A06D09U18
E2K3400GA06D09U18
KDCMDMD07
E2KM3400MDD07
KDM3400G5A13D09U18
E2K3400GA13D09U18
KDCMNA2D7
E2KM3400MNA02D07
KDM3400G5MW
E2K3400MGW
KDM2400F
E2K2400F
KDM3400G5W
E2K3400GW
KDM2400G5MS50
E2K2400MGWS50
KDM3400G5WA06
E2K3400GWS10
KDM2400G5MW
E2K2400MGW
KDM3400G5WS10
E2K3400GWS10
KDM2400W5MW
E2K2400MWW
KDM3400G5WU18
E2K3400GWU18
KDM2400W5MWA06D07S10
E2K2400MWA06D07S10
KDM3400J5MW
E2K3400MJW
KDM2400W5MWA06D10S10
E2K2400MWA06D10S10
KDM3400K5MS54
E2K3400MKWS54
KDM2400W5MWD07
E2K2400MWD07
KDM3400K5MW
E2K3400MKW
KDM2400W5MWD07S10
E2K2400MWD07S10
KDM3400L5MW
E2K3400MLW
KDM2400W5MWD10
E2K2400MWD10
KDM3400MW
E2K3400MW
KDM2400W5MWD10S10
E2K2400MWD10S10
KDM3400MWA06U18
E2K3400MWA06U18
KDM2400W5MWS10
E2K2400MWWS10
KDM3400N5MW
E2K3400MNW
KDM3100W
E2K3100W
KDM3400R5MW
E2K3400MRW
KDM3125W
E2K3125W
KDM3400W
E2K3400W
KDM3150W
E2K3150W
KDM3400W5MW
E2K3400MWW
KDM3150WA06
E2K3150WA06
KEM3100T
KEM3100T
KDM3175W
E2K3175W
KEM3125T
KEM3125T
KDM3200W
E2K3200W
KEM3150T
KEM3150T
KDM3225A5W
E2K3225AW
KEM3150TM
KEM3150TM
KDM3225D5A13D09U18
E2K3225DA13D09U18
KEM3200T
KEM3200T
KDM3225D5MW
E2K3400MDW
KEM3225T
KEM3225T
KDM3225D5W
E2K3225DW
KEM3225T2
KEM3225T2
KDM3225F
E2K3400F
KEM3225TM
KEM3225TM
KDM3225W
E2K3225W
KEM3225TM2
KEM3225TM2
KDM3225WK37
E2KE3225W
KM2225TA5
E2K2225TA
KDM3225WK37U18
E2KE3225WU18
KM2225TA5M
E2K2400TMA
KDM3225WK38
E2KE3225MW
KM2225TD5
E2K2225TD
KDM3250W
E2K3250W
KM2225TD5M
E2K2400TMD
KDM3300W
E2K3300W
KM2400TD5
E2K2400TD
KDM3300WA06U18
E2K3300WA06U18
KM2400TD5M
E2K2400TMD
2
Superseded by E2 Mining
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-413
2.6
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
2
Series C Mining
Superseded by
E2 Mining
Series C
Mining
Superseded by
E2 Mining
KM2400TG5M
E2K2400TMG
LEM3300T
LEM3300T
2
KM2400TN5M
E2K2400TMN
LEM3350T
LEM3350T
2
KM2400TW5M
E2K2400TMW
LEM3400T
LEM3400T
KM3100T
E2K3100T
LEM3400T2
LEM3400T2
2
KM3125T
E2K3125T
LEM3400TM
LEM3400TM
KM3150T
E2K3150T
LEM3400TM2
LEM3400TM2
2
KM3175T
E2K3175T
LEM3600T
LEM3600T
KM3200T
E2K3200T
LEM3600TM
LEM3600TM
2
KM3225T
E2K3225T
LM3600TL6M
E2L3600TML
2
KM3225TA5
E2K3225TA
LM3600TN6M
E2L3600TMN
KM3225TA5M
E2K3400TMA
LM3600TP6M
E2L3600TMP
2
KM3225TD5
E2K3225TD
LM3600TR6M
E2L3600TMR
KM3225TD5M
E2K3400TMD
LM3600TS6M
E2L3600TM
2
KM3250T
E2K3250T
LM3600TX6M
E2L3600TMX
KM3300T
E2K3300T
UVE3LP08K
UVE3LP08K
KM3350T
E2K3350T
UVE4LP08K
UVE4LP08K
2
KM3400T
E2K3400T
KM3400TD5
E2K3400TD
Additional Information on Mining Breakers
2
KM3400TF5M
E2K3400TMF
Source
Description
KM3400TG5M
E2K3400TMG
2
TD01217001E
E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data
KM3400TJ5M
E2K3400TMJ
KM3400TK5M
E2K3400TMK
KM3400TL5M
E2K3400TML
2
KM3400TM
E2K3400TM
KM3400TN5M
E2K3400TMN
2
KM3400TR5M
E2K3400TMR
KM3400TW5M
E2K3400TMW
2
LDCM3600EMA05W
E2LEM3600MA05W
2
LDCM3600F
E2LM3600F
LDM3600F
E2L3600F
2
2
BR01217001E
E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure
TC01217001E
E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves
www.eaton.com/mining
Mining and Metals
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-414
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
2.6
Contents
GFR Relay
Description
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PVGard Solar Circuit Breakers—600 Vdc Per-Pole
and 1000 Vdc Poles-in-Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classic Mining Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2VAC Mining Vacuum Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Page
V4-T2-341
V4-T2-347
V4-T2-360
V4-T2-372
V4-T2-401
V4-T2-398
V4-T2-416
V4-T2-417
V4-T2-417
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Add-On Ground Fault Protection—Type GFR
Product Description
A Type GFR ground fault
protection system, when
properly installed on a
grounded electrical system,
will sense phase-to-ground
fault currents. When the level
of fault current is in excess of
the pre-selected current
pickup and time delay
settings, the GFR relay will
initiate a trip action of a
disconnect device, which will
open the faulted circuit and
clear the fault.
2
Standards and Certifications
The GFR devices are UL
Class I devices designed to
protect electrical equipment
against extensive damage
from arcing ground faults.
A basic Type GFR ground
fault protection system
consists of a ground fault
relay, a ground fault current
sensor and a disconnect
device equipped with a shunt
trip device. This disconnect
device can be a molded case
circuit breaker, a power
circuit breaker, a bolted
pressure switch or other
fusible disconnect device,
suitable for application with
UL Class I ground fault
sensing and relaying
equipment.
Eaton’s GFR ground fault
relays, current sensors, test
panels and accessory devices
are UL listed by Underwriters
Laboratories in accordance
with their standard for ground
fault sensing and relaying
equipment, UL 1053, under
File E48381.
2
2
2
2
2
Note: Relays are also listed with
CSA under their file number
43357.
2
2
2
2
2
Note: Suitable for either surface
or semi-flush mounting.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-415
2.6
2
Each installation requires:
●
2
●
2
Specialty Breakers
Product Selection
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
One relay unit (select trip
ampere as required)
One current sensor (select
configuration required)
GFR Relay
●
●
One circuit breaker or
disconnect device with
shunt trip, or a shunt trip
attachment for mounting in
existing breaker
Test panel (optional)
GFR Relay
2
Ground Fault Pickup Amperes
1–12
5–60
100–1200
Catalog
Number 1
Catalog
Number 1
Catalog
Number 1
GFR1200EI
2
GFR Relay
Types
2
For 120 Volt 50/60 Hz Control
Electrical reset with zone interlocking
GFR12EI
GFR60EI
2
Electrical reset without zone interlocking
GFR12E
GFR60E
GFR1200E
2
Mechanical reset with zone interlocking
GFR12MI
GFR60MI
GFR1200MI
Mechanical reset without zone interlocking
GFR12M
GFR60M
GFR1200M
2
For 120 Vdc Control
Electrical reset with zone interlocking
—
—
GFR1200EID
2
Electrical reset without zone interlocking
—
—
GFR1200ED
Mechanical reset with zone interlocking
—
—
GFR1200MID
Mechanical reset without zone interlocking
—
—
GFR1200MD
2
2
2
Typical Current Sensor
Current Sensor
Window Size
in Inches (mm)
2
Catalog
Number
Used with Relays Rated 1–12 Amperes
2
5.50 (139.7) I.D.
1283C45G01
2
2.50 (63.5) I.D.
5.50 (139.7) I.D.
1256C13G01
2
7.81 x 11.00 (198.4 x 279.4) Rect. 2
1257C88G04
3.31 x 24.94 (84.1 x 760.5) Rect. 2
1257C92G03
Used with Relays Rated 5–60 Amperes
2
179C768G01
Used with Relays Rated 100–1200 Amperes
2
2.50 (63.5) I.D.
179C768G02
5.50 (139.7) I.D.
1256C13G02
2
8.25 (209.6). I.D.
179C767G02
7.81 x 11.00 (198.4 x 279.4) Rect. 2
1257C88G03
2
9.94 x 16.94 (252.5 x 430.3) Rect. 2
1257C90G02
2
9.94 x 23.94 (252.5 x 608.1) Rect. 2
1257C91G02
15.94 x 19.94 (404.9 x 506.4) Rect. 2
1257C89G02
3.31 x 24.94 (84.1 x 633.5) Rect. 2
1257C92G04
2
6.75 x 29.64 (171.5 x 752.9) Rect.
2
2
Notes
1 Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting.
2 One end removable for installation.
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-416
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
1255C39G03
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Specialty Breakers
Accessories
Options
Additional optional equipment
can be added to the protection
system to meet the
requirements of the specifying
engineer, including:
●
●
●
Ground fault test panel
Ground fault warning
indicator relay
Ground fault indicating
ammeter
GFR relays are available with
zone selective interlocking
circuitry to interlock several
relays within the same
system. This allows the relay
which detects a ground fault
to instantly clear the fault by
tripping the disconnect
device. The relay
simultaneously sends a signal
to relay units “upstream” from
the fault to time delay or to
block their operation
completely. Current sensors
in various designs provide a
range of “window” sizes to
accommodate standard bus
and cable arrangements.
Shunt trip attachments may
be ordered for field mounting
in Eaton’s molded case circuit
breakers, or may be ordered
factory installed in the
breaker.
Test Panel (120 Vac)
Used to test the ground fault
system, to give an indication
the relay has tripped the
breaker, and to reset the relay
after tripping. These
functions may be separately
mounted pilot devices.
Note: When a mechanically reset
relay is used with a test panel,
both the relay and test panel
must be reset following either a
simulated ground fault test or
actual ground fault. Not UL listed.
Test
120 Volt
50/60 Hz
120 Volt
50/60 Hz
Ammeter Kit
2
Sensor
2
●
Catalog
Number
1–12 ampere
752B820G01
5–60 ampere
752B820G02
GFRTP
100–1200 ampere
752B820G03
Shunt Trip Attachments
Use 120 Vac shunt trips.
Faceplate
Recommended when these
relays are semi-flush
mounted, to close the door
cutout opening.
600 volt, 50/60 Hz
maximum system voltage
●
●
Ground fault detection
ranges:
●
1 to 12, 5 to 60 or 100 to
1200 amperes
Output contacts:
●
240 volt, 50/60 Hz:
3.0 amperes
●
120 volt, 50/60 Hz:
6.0 amperes
●
28 Vdc: 3.0 amperes
●
125 Vdc: 0.5 amperes
Control power
requirements:
●
120 volt, 50/60 Hz or
125 Vdc (optional)
Catalog
Number
Manual reset
1234C67G01
Self-resetting
1234C67G02
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Face Plate
Description
Catalog
Number
2
Faceplate
752B410G01
2
2
Ground Fault Warning
Indicator
Description
2
2
Electrical Ratings
GFR Relay
●
Kit Catalog
Number
Ground Fault Warning Indicator
This is an accessory item for
use with GFR relays with
interlocking circuitry. At
approximately 30–50% of the
relay pickup setting, the
indicator switches separate
120 Vac control power to a
lamp or relay, (not included)
to give an indication of a
ground fault. The indicator is
rated 110/120 Vac 50/60 Hz
for a maximum indicator load
of 0.5 amperes.
Technical Data and
Specifications
Note: Not UL listed.
GFR System
Used with
Optional Test Panel
Control
Indicating Ammeter
The optional indicating
ammeter connects to the
sensor terminals through a
momentary contact
pushbutton, and will indicate
(in amperes) any ground fault
current flowing through the
sensor. Kit includes the
ammeter and pushbutton.
2.6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-417
2.7
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series G
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series G
2
Product Overview
2
2
2
2
2
Handle mechanisms are used
to operate molded case
circuit breakers, molded case
switches and motor circuit
protectors. They are available
in three basic configurations—
Flange Mounted, Throughthe-Door and Direct (CloseCoupled)—providing safe,
dependable operation and
ease of installation.
Through-the-Door
High-Performance Rotary
●
Universal Rotary
●
Direct (Close-Coupled)
●
Universal Direct
Handle mechanisms are used
on enclosed circuit breakers,
control panels and motor
control centers in many
different applications. Eaton
has a handle mechanism for
virtually any need.
Flange Mounted
●
Flex Shaft™
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-418
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Page
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-424
V4-T2-426
V4-T2-427
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-438
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-445
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Description
Handle Mechanisms
Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-420
V4-T2-423
V4-T2-424
V4-T2-426
V4-T2-427
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-438
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-445
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
Product Description
The high-performance rotary
handle mechanism uses a
simple, yet robust design
to make installation and
operation easy. The external
handle’s key functional
components are all metallic,
ensuring reliability. The metalon-metal interface between
the handle and shaft prevents
contaminant buildup that
could impede operation,
while UV and chemical agent
resistant materials protect
the handle from heat and
fading in direct sunlight, as
well as chemicals that may
be introduced in harsh
environments.
Features
In addition to its robust
design features, the handle
mechanism has stand-off
support that allows for easy
operation with a gloved hand.
With a shallow profile, the
handle can easily be used in
applications where an internal
or double door is required.
●
The high-performance
external handle can accept
padlocks or multi-hasp locks.
The door is interlocked when
padlocked and cannot be
bypassed.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
NEMA Type 1/3R/12 (IP54)
and NEMA Type 4/4X
(IP65) ratings
Black/Blue or Red/Yellow
external handle colors
Three shaft lengths—6, 12
and 24 inches, which can
be cut to size to match
enclosure depth
Conveniently packaged as
kit containing handle, shaft
and mechanism
Replacement parts are
available separately
Metallic functional
components ensure
reliability
Metal-on-metal interface
between handle and shaft
UV and chemical agentresistant materials protect
the handle
Shallow profile
Compatible with both
Series C and Series G
molded case circuit
breakers and molded case
switch platforms
●
●
●
●
Same handle can be used
on multiple frame sizes,
reducing the number of
parts needed
Red and yellow handles to
designate emergency
disconnecting means
All handle mechanisms can
accept padlocks or multihasp locks for added
flexibility
Fast, easy installation
(see video on website for
step-by-step instructions)
Standards and Certifications
The mechanisms for EG, JG
and LG breakers have an
internal handle that can be
operated independent of
door position, and locked-out
to meet one of the key NFPA
requirements (NFPA® 79)
and UL 508A disconnect
requirements.
●
●
NEMA 1/3R/12, IP54
NEMA 4/4X, IP65
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-419
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2
Product Selection
2
Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames
2
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—EG-, JG- and LG-Frame
2
2
Description
Rating Type
EG-Frame
JG-Frame
LG-Frame
NEMA
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
IP
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD06B0 / 68C6040G25
JGHMVD06B0 / 68C6041G13
—
4/4X
65
EGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6040G28
JGHMVD06BX0 / 68C6041G16
—
S01 blue handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD12B0 / 68C6040G26
JGHMVD12B0 / 68C6041G14
—
4/4X
65
EGHMVD12BX0 / 68C6040G29
JGHMVD12BX0 / 68C6041G17
—
S01 blue handle,
24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD24B0 / 68C6040G27
JGHMVD24B0 / 68C6041G15
—
4/4X
65
EGHMVD24BX0 / 68C6040G30
JGHMVD24BX0 / 68C6041G18
—
S01 red handle,
6-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD06R0 / 68C6040G31
JGHMVD06R0 / 68C6041G19
—
4/4X
65
EGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6040G34
JGHMVD06RX0 / 68C6041G22
—
2
S01 red handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD12R0 / 68C6040G32
JGHMVD12R0 / 68C6041G20
—
4/4X
65
EGHMVD12RX0 / 68C6040G35
JGHMVD12RX0 / 68C6041G23
—
2
S01 red handle,
24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD24R0 / 68C6040G33
JGHMVD24R0 / 68C6041G21
—
4/4X
65
EGHMVD24RX0 / 68C6040G36
JGHMVD24RX0 / 68C6041G24
—
S2 blue handle,
6-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD06B / 68C6040G13
JGHMVD06B / 68C6041G01
LGHMVD06B / 68C6042G01
4/4X
65
EGHMVD06BX / 68C6040G16
JGHMVD06BX / 68C6041G04
LGHMVD06BX / 68C6042G04
S2 blue handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD12B / 68C6040G14
JGHMVD12B / 68C6041G02
LGHMVD12B / 68C6042G02
4/4X
65
EGHMVD12BX / 68C6040G17
JGHMVD12BX / 68C6041G05
LGHMVD12BX / 68C6042G05
S2 blue handle,
24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD24B / 68C6040G15
JGHMVD24B / 68C6041G03
LGHMVD24B / 68C6042G03
4/4X
65
EGHMVD24BX / 68C6040G18
JGHMVD24BX / 68C6041G06
LGHMVD24BX / 68C6042G06
S2 red handle,
6-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD06R / 68C6040G19
JGHMVD06R / 68C6041G07
LGHMVD06R / 68C6042G07
4/4X
65
EGHMVD06RX / 68C6040G22
JGHMVD06RX / 68C6041G10
LGHMVD06RX / 68C6042G10
2
S2 red handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD12R / 68C6040G20
JGHMVD12R / 68C6041G08
LGHMVD12R / 68C6042G08
4/4X
65
EGHMVD12RX / 68C6040G23
JGHMVD12RX / 68C6041G11
LGHMVD12RX / 68C6042G11
2
S2 red handle,
24-inch shaft 1
1/3R/12
54
EGHMVD24R / 68C6040G21
JGHMVD24R / 68C6041G09
LGHMVD24R / 68C6042G09
4/4X
65
EGHMVD24RX / 68C6040G24
JGHMVD24RX / 68C6041G12
LGHMVD24RX / 68C6042G12
S01 Blue Handle
2
2
2
2
2
S01 Red Handle
S2 Blue Handle
2
2
2
2
S2 Red Handle
2
S01 blue handle,
6-inch shaft
Notes
1 24-inch handle comes with support bracket.
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-420
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Handle Mechanisms for Series G Frames
2
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—NG- and RG-Frame
S3 Blue Handle
Rating Type
NG-Frame
RG-Frame
2
Description
NEMA
IP
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
S3 blue handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
NGHMVD08B / 68C6043G01
—
4/4X
65
NGHMVD08BX / 68C6043G03
—
2
2
2
S3 Red Handle
S3 red handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
NGHMVD08R / 68C6043G02
—
4/4X
65
NGHMVD08RX / 68C6043G04
—
2
2
2
S4 Blue Handle
S4 blue handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
NGHMVD08BT / 68C6043G05
RGHMVD08B / 68C6044G01
4/4X
65
NGHMVD08BTX / 68C6043G07
RGHMVD08BX / 68C6044G03
2
2
2
2
S4 Red Handle
S4 red handle,
10-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
NGHMVD08RT / 68C6043G06
RGHMVD08R / 68C6044G02
4/4X
65
NGHMVD08RTX / 68C6043G08
RGHMVD08RX / 68C6044G04
2
2
2
2
Note
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-421
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2
Separate Components for Series G Frames
2
Series G Components—Shafts and Mechanisms
2
Shaft
Width
Shaft Length
Frame
6-Inch
10-Inch
12-Inch
24-Inch 1
Mechanism
Only
EG
8 mm
66A6010G95
—
66A6010G96
66A6010G97
1498D66G17
69D6025G17
2
JG
8 mm
66A6010G95
—
66A6010G96
66A6010G98
2
LG
8 mm
66A6010G95
—
66A6010G96
66A6010G99
69D6051G30
NG
12 mm
—
66A6013H01
—
—
69D9101G30
RG
12 mm
—
66A6013H01
—
—
69D9101G31
2
2
Series G Components—Handles Only
2
2
2
Rating Type
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
68C6048G41
68C6048G42
68C6048G01
68C6048G02
—
68C6048G44
68C6048G03
68C6048G04
—
1/3R/12
54
68C6048G41
68C6048G42
68C6048G01
68C6048G02
—
—
2
2
S4
Red/Yellow
68C6048G43
2
2
S4
Blue/Black
54
RG
2
S3
Red/Yellow
65
2
2
S3
Blue/Black
4/4X
NG
2
S2
Red/Yellow
1/3R/12
2
2
S2
Blue/Black
EG
JG
IP
S01
Red/Yellow
NEMA
LG
2
S01
Blue/Black
Frame
2
2
Handles Only
4/4X
65
68C6048G43
68C6048G44
68C6048G03
68C6048G04
—
—
—
—
1/3R/12
54
—
—
68C6048G01
68C6048G02
68C6048G05
68C6048G06
—
—
4/4X
65
—
—
68C6048G03
68C6048G04
68C6048G07
68C6048G08
—
—
1/3R/12
54
—
—
—
—
68C6048G05
68C6048G06
68C6048G09
68C6048G10
4/4X
65
—
—
—
—
68C6048G07
68C6048G08
68C6048G11
68C6048G12
1/3R/12
54
—
—
—
—
—
—
68C6048G09
68C6048G10
4/4X
65
—
—
—
—
—
—
68C6048G11
68C6048G12
Series G Components—Optional Caps
As an alternative to blue or red, a black, replaceable cap is available.
Catalog Number
S01
66A6032H01
Black handle cap
HPHC0DGX
S2
66A6032H02
Black handle cap
HPHC2DGX
S3
66A6032H03
Black handle cap
HPHC3DGX
Series G Replacement Hardware
This kit provides replacement parts for
Series G high performance handle only.
Catalog Number
High-performance handle
replacement parts kit
66A6029G01
Notes
1 24-inch handle comes with support bracket.
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-422
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Dimensions
2
Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches)
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
2
Front Operation
Handle Type
Direction of Operation
2
Door Drilling
Type S01
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-423
2.7
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description
2
Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Universal Rotary
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-425
V4-T2-426
V4-T2-427
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-438
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-445
2
2
2
Universal Rotary
2
Product Description
2
2
2
2
2
2
Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s Universal Rotary is
suitable for use with Type 1
or 12 enclosure types. All
rotary handle mechanisms
include a handle “lock off” to
prevent turning the breaker
ON while in the OFF position,
and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/
Reset positions. The
Universal Rotary has the
added feature of international
markings for ON (I) and OFF
(O). The Universal Rotary is
made of molded material.
The Universal Rotary
mechanisms for EG-, JG- and
LG-Frame MCCBs can be
operated by hand with the
door open or “locked off” to
prevent operation with the
door open.
Universal Rotary is UL listed
and meets CSA requirements.
Universal Rotary also meets
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
for international compliance.
Rotary UL File Number is
E64983.
2
2
Features
2
Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism
2
2
2
2
Rotary
NEMA Enclosure Type
Number
Handle
of Poles 1
3R
12
4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2
Series C rotary
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Metal
Black
45 deg.
6, 12, 16, 24
Universal rotary
—
■
—
■
—
■
■
■
Molded plastic
Yellow/Red/Black
90 deg.
6, 12, 24
International
Handle Indication:
Markings
ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O)
Notes
1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-424
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Handle
Material
Available
Handle
Colors
Handle
Rotation
Shaft
Lengths
(Inches)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Product Selection
Universal Rotary
2
Universal Rotary Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms
2
Handle
Color
UL
Rating
Shaft Length
in Inches (mm)
Complete
Catalog Number 1
2
1, 12
6.00 (152.4)
EHMVD06B
2
12.00 (304.8)
EHMVD12B
24.00 (609.6)
EHMVD24B
EG-Frame
Black
Red
1, 12
2
2
6.00 (152.4)
EHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8)
EHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6)
EHMVD24R
2
6.00 (152.4)
FJHMVD06B
2
12.00 (304.8)
FJHMVD12B
24.00 (609.6)
FJHMVD24B
JG-Frame
Black
Red
1, 12
1, 12
6.00 (152.4)
FJHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8)
FJHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6)
FJHMVD24R
6.00 (152.4)
KLHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8)
KLHMVD12B
24.00 (609.6)
KLHMVD24B
6.00 (152.4)
KLHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8)
KLHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6)
KLHMVD24R
1
6.00 (152.4)
HMVD5B
1
9.00 (228.6)
HMVD6B
2
2
2
2
LG-Frame
Black
Red
1, 12
1, 12
2
2
2
2
NG-Frame
Black
2
RG-Frame
Black
Series G Rotary
2
2
Series G Rotary Ordering Information
Shaft
Length
Inches (mm)
Complete
Catalog
Number 2
Separate Catalog Number
2
Catalog Number
Standard
Handle 3
Breaker
Mechanism 4
Shaft 5
IEC IP65 67
IEC IP66 67
2
2
N-Frame (ND and NG)
6.00 (152.4)
HM5R06
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
4217B37G08
WHM5R06
WHM5R06X
12.00 (304.8)
HM5R12
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
4217B37G05
WHM5R12
WHM5R12X
16.00 (406.4)
HM5R16
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
4217B37G06
WHM5R16
WHM5R16X
24.00 (609.6)
HM5R24
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
4217B37G07
WHM5R24
WHM5R24X
Notes
1 Complete catalog number includes handle, mechanism, shaft and mounting hardware.
2 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket.
3 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number.
Handle is cast aluminum.
4 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm).
5 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension.
6 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware.
7 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-425
2.7
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description
2
Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-424
V4-T2-427
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-438
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-445
2
2
2
2
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
2
Product Description
2
2
2
2
Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms mount directly
to the circuit breaker.
They are used in shallow
enclosures where the
standard variable depth
Through-the-door type
mechanism is not practical
or cannot be used.
2
The Universal Direct handle
mechanisms are rated Type 1
and Type 12.
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is available as
standard with a door interlock
to prevent opening the
enclosure while the circuit
breaker is in the ON position.
It is also available without a
door interlock.
Application Description
Standards and Certifications
Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms are typically
used for applications where
high volume, standardized
enclosures are being
fabricated.
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is UL listed,
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
compliant, and meets CSA
requirements.
2
2
2
2
Product Selection
Universal Direct
(EG–LG)
Universal Direct Handle Mechanisms
Black Handle Color
Red Handle Color
With Interlock
Without Interlock
With Interlock
Without Interlock
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
EG
EHMCCBI
EHMCCB
EHMCCRI
EHMCCR
2
JG
JHMCCBI
JHMCCB
JHMCCRI
JHMCCR
LG
LHMCCBI
LHMCCB
LHMCCRI
LHMCCR
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-426
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
2
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-424
V4-T2-426
2
V4-T2-428
V4-T2-429
V4-T2-429
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-438
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-445
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Flex Shaft
Product Description
Flange-Mounted Handle
Mechanisms
Flange-mounted handle
mechanisms mount on the
flange of an enclosure door.
The Flex Shaft is an extra
heavy-duty mechanism that
includes a flexible shaft in
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m)
through 10 feet (3m) for use
with various size enclosures.
The Flex Shaft handle will
accept up to three padlock
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be
used with Type12 fabricated
enclosures. An optional
handle is available for Flex
Shaft that is suitable for use
with Type 4 environments.
2
Standards and Certifications
Flex Shaft comes preset from
the factory, requiring only
minor field adjustments on
installation, which takes
about 10 minutes—a
significant time savings
compared to installation of
other types of flange handle
mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than
competitive designs, and the
handle fits standard flange
cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
can be remotely mounted
from breaker, where an
operator can use it by
“funneling” the cable
through conduit.
Flex Shaft is UL listed under
File E64983 and meets CSA
requirements.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-427
2.7
2
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
Note: Type 4X handle
mechanisms are available.
Add Suffix X to the complete
Catalog Number.
Flex Shaft
Note: When selecting the length
of shaft, ensure minimum
bending radius of 4 inches
(101.6 mm) is maintained to
operate properly.
Note: The standard method
of shipment includes the
mechanism preset at the factory;
however, minor field adjustments
may be required.
Flex Shaft Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms 12
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
2
2 (0.6)
3 (0.9)
4 (1.2)
5 (1.3)
6 (1.8)
Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
EG
EHMFS02
EHMFS03
EHMFS04
EHMFS05
EHMFS06
2
JG
N/A
JHMFS03
JHMFS04
JHMFS05
JHMFS06
2
LG
N/A
—
LHMFS04
—
—
NG
N/A
N/A
F5S04C
F5S05C
F5S06C
RG
N/A
N/A
F6S04
F6S05
F6S06
2
2
2
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
7 (2.1)
8 (2.4)
9 (2.7)
10 (3.1)
2
Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2
EG
EHMFS07
EHMFS08
EHMFS09
EHMFS10
JG
JHMFS07
JHMFS08
JHMFS09
JHMFS10
2
LG
LHMFS07
—
—
LHMFS10
2
NG
N/A
N/A
N/A
F5S10C
RG
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
2
High-Performance
Flex Shaft
High-Performance Flex Shaft Flange Mounted Handle Mechanism 12
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
2 (0.6)
3 (0.9)
4 (1.2)
5 (1.3)
6 (1.8)
Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
EG
EGFS02HP
EGFS03HP
EGFS04HP
EGFS05HP
EGFS06HP
2
JG
N/A
JGFS03HP
JGFS04HP
JGFS05HP
JGFS06HP
LG
N/A
N/A
LGFS04HP
N/A
N/A
2
NG
N/A
N/A
F5S04HP
F5S05HP
F5S06HP
RG
N/A
N/A
F6S04HP
F6S05HP
F6S06HP
2
2
2
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
2
7 (2.1)
8 (2.4)
9 (2.7)
10 (3.1)
Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
EG
EGFS07HP
EGFS08HP
EGFS09HP
EGFS10HP
2
JG
JGFS07HP
JGFS08HP
JGFS09HP
JGFS10HP
2
LG
LGFS07HP
N/A
N/A
LGFS10HP
NG
N/A
N/A
N/A
F5S10HP
RG
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
2
Notes
1 Three-pole only for EG-; three- and four-pole for JG- and LG-Frame.
2 EG-, JG- and LG-Frame can be left- or right-hand mounted.
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-428
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Accessories
2
Handle Auxiliary Switch—Early Break Design,
1A–1B Contact for Flex Shaft
Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft
(E- through R-Frame) 1
2
Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number 2
2
EG
AUX1EBFSEG
C361KJ4
JG
AUX1EBFSJG
C361KJ6
2
LG
AUX1EBFSLG
C361KR
2
Auxiliary contact changes state prior to parting of breaker
contacts to allow for shutdown of equipment. Contacts mounted
on breaker mechanism customer supplied wiring.
2
2
2
2
Dimensions
2
Type 12 Safety Door Hardware for Flex Shaft
(E- through R-Frame) 1
Catalog
Number 2
Handle Length
in Inches (mm)
C361KJ4
4.00 (101.6)
C361KJ6
6.00 (152.4)
C361KR
Roller latch 3
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door hardware and any adapters
required for assembly.
2 The 1/4-inch x 1/2-inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill rectangular locking bar is not supplied
with these kits.
3 Third roller latch for use with 4.00- or 6.00-inch (101.6 or 152.4 mm) handle when three-point
latching is required.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-429
2.7
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
2
Product Overview
2
2
2
2
2
Handle mechanisms are used
to operate molded case
circuit breakers, molded case
switches and motor circuit
protectors. They are available
in three basic configurations—
Flange Mounted, Throughthe-Door and Direct (CloseCoupled)—providing safe,
dependable operation and
ease of installation.
Through-the-Door
High-Performance Rotary
●
Series C Rotary
●
Universal Rotary
●
Direct (Close-Coupled)
●
Universal Direct
●
Euro IEC
●
G Direct
Handle mechanisms are used
on enclosed circuit breakers,
control panels and motor
control centers in many
different applications. Eaton
has a handle mechanism for
virtually any need.
Flange Mounted
●
Flex Shaft
●
C371
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-430
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Page
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-424
V4-T2-426
V4-T2-427
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-438
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-445
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Standards and Certifications
Through-the-Door Handle
Mechanisms
Eaton’s through-the-door
handle mechanisms mount
on the front of an enclosure
or cabinet door and externally
operate the circuit breaker via
a variable depth shaft or a
linear operator (Type MC).
Each rotary type handle
mechanism includes a
handle, base operating
mechanism and shaft that
can be cut to various lengths.
Series C Rotary and Universal
Rotary handle mechanisms
are for use with molded case
circuit breakers (G, F, J, K, L,
MDL), molded case switches
and motor circuit protectors.
Type 4/4X handles are similar
to standard handles except
they include an internal
neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X
handle style number is
6648C22G03. Due to
gasketing effect between
the handle and the housing,
the handle may not indicate
a tripped position.
Universal Rotary F-Frame
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle
Mechanisms
Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms mount directly
to the circuit breaker. They are
used in shallow enclosures
where the standard variable
depth Through-the-door type
mechanism is not practical
or cannot be used. They are
typically for applications
where high volume,
standardized enclosures
are being fabricated.
The Euro IEC Direct handle
mechanism can be used on
F- through R-Frames.
The G Direct is available with
a black or the yellow handle,
and with or without a shroud.
It is suitable for use with
NEMA 1 enclosures. It is for
use only with the G-Frame
(GD, GC, GHC, GMCP).
An escutcheon ring and
interlock clip are provided as
standard. The standard design
includes a lock-off feature.
Flange-Mounted Handle
Mechanisms
Flange-mounted handle
mechanisms mount on the
flange of an enclosure door.
The Flex Shaft is an extra
heavy-duty mechanism that
includes a flexible shaft in
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m)
through 10 feet (3m) for use
with various size enclosures.
The Flex Shaft handle will
accept up to three padlock
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
3/8-inch (9.5 mm). Can be
used with NEMA 1, 3R and
12 fabricated enclosures. An
optional handle is available for
Flex Shaft that is suitable for
use with NEMA 4 and 4X
environments. Flex Shaft
comes preset from the
factory, requiring only minor
field adjustments on
installation, which takes
about 10 minutes—a
significant time savings
compared to installation of
other types of flange handle
mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than
competitive designs and the
handle fits standard flange
cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
can be remotely mounted
from breaker, where an
operator can use it by
“funneling” the cable
through conduit.
Type C371 is UL Listed under
File E62635.
Flex Shaft is UL Listed under
File E64983 and meets
CSA requirements.
Series C Rotary and Universal
Rotary, are UL Listed and
meet CSA requirements.
Universal Rotary also meets
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
for international compliance.
Rotary UL File Number is
E64983.
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is UL 489 Listed,
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2,
and meets CSA requirements.
The Euro IEC Direct handle
mechanism is IEC-240-1. G
Direct is UL Listed and meets
CSA requirements.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
The Type C371 circuit breaker
operating mechanisms are
designed for installation in
control enclosures where
main or branch circuit
protective devices are
required. All circuit breaker
mechanisms are suitable for
right-hand mounting.
2
2
2
2
Auxiliary contacts are not
available for mounting on
operating mechanisms.
Where required, have them
installed in circuit breaker.
2
2
2
Handle Extension
Handle extension is not
included with J, K, L, M and
N-Frame breakers. It must be
purchased separately.
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-431
2.7
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Description
Handle Mechanisms
Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-424
V4-T2-426
V4-T2-427
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-433
V4-T2-435
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-438
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-445
2
2
2
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
2
Product Description
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
The high-performance rotary
handle mechanism uses a
simple, yet robust design
to make installation and
operation easy. The external
handle’s key functional
components are all metallic,
ensuring reliability. The metalon-metal interface between
the handle and shaft prevents
contaminant buildup that
could impede operation,
while UV and chemical agent
resistant materials protect
the handle from heat and
fading in direct sunlight, as
well as chemicals that may
be introduced in harsh
environments.
Features
In addition to its robust
design features, the handle
mechanism has stand-off
support that allows for easy
operation with a gloved hand.
With a shallow profile, the
handle can easily be used in
applications where an internal
or double door is required.
●
The high-performance
external handle can accept
padlocks or multi-hasp locks.
The door is interlocked when
padlocked and cannot be
bypassed.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
2
2
●
●
2
2
NEMA Type 1/3R/12 (IP54)
and NEMA Type 4/4X
(IP65) ratings
Black/Blue or Red/Yellow
external handle colors
Three shaft lengths—6, 12
and 24 inches, which can
be cut to size to match
enclosure depth
Conveniently packaged as
kit containing handle, shaft
and mechanism
Replacement parts are
available separately
Metallic functional
components ensure
reliability
Metal-on-metal interface
between handle and shaft
UV and chemical agentresistant materials protect
the handle
Shallow profile
Compatible with both
Series C and Series G
molded case circuit
breakers and molded case
switch platforms
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-432
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
●
●
●
●
Same handle can be used
on multiple frames sizes
reducing the number of
parts needed
Red and yellow handles to
designate emergency
disconnecting means
All handle mechanisms can
accept padlocks or multihasp locks for added
flexibility
Fast, easy installation
(see video on website for
step-by-step instructions)
Standards and Certifications
The mechanisms for EG, JG
and LG breakers have an
internal handle that can be
operated independent of
door position, and locked-out
to meet one of the key NFPA
requirements (NFPA® 79)
and UL 508A disconnect
requirements.
●
●
NEMA 1/3R/12, IP54
NEMA 4/4X, IP65
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Product Selection
2
Handle Mechanisms for Series C Frames
2
2
Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle)—GC/GD- and GMCP-Frame
Rating Type
S01 Blue Handle
S01 Red Handle
GC/GD-Frame
GMCP-Frame
IP
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Description
NEMA
S01 blue handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
GCHMVD12B / 68C6039G01
GMHMVD12B / 68C6039G05
4/4X
65
GCHMVD12BX / 68C6039G03
GMHMVD12BX / 68C6039G07
S01 red handle,
12-inch shaft
1/3R/12
54
GCHMVD12R / 68C6039G02
GMHMVD12R / 68C6039G06
4/4X
65
GCHMVD12RX / 68C6039G04
GMHMVD12RX / 68C6039G08
2
2
2
2
2
2
Separate Components for Series C Frames
2
2
Series C Components—Shaft and Mechanism
Shaft Length
Frame
Shaft
Width
6-Inch
10-Inch
GC/GD
6 mm
—
GMCP
6 mm
GD
FD
JD
KD
LD
12-Inch
Mechanism
Only
2
—
66A6013H02
GCHMVD / 2A92095G15
—
—
66A6013H02
GMHMVD / 2A92095G16
2
8 mm
66A6010G95
—
66A6010G96
1498D34G90
8 mm
66A6010G95
—
66A6010G96
1498D34G91
10 mm
66A6012G15
—
66A6012G16
1498D34G92
10 mm
66A6012G15
—
66A6012G16
1498D34G93
10 mm
66A6012G15
—
66A6012G16
1498D34G94
MDL
10 mm
66A6012G15
—
66A6012G16
1498D34G95
ND
12 mm
—
66A6013H01
—
69D9101G30
RD
12 mm
—
66A6013H01
—
69D9101G31
2
2
2
2
2
Note
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-433
2.7
2
2
2
Rating Type
Frame
GC/GD
GMCP
2
GD
2
FD
JD
2
2
KD
2
LD
2
MDL
2
ND
2
2
2
Handle Mechanisms
Series C Components—Handles Only
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
RD
Handles Only
IP
S01
Blue/Black
S01
Red/Yellow
S2
Blue/Black
S2
Red/Yellow
S3
Blue/Black
S3
Red/Yellow
S4
Blue/Black
S4
Red/Yellow
1/3R/12
54
68C6048G41
68C6048G42
—
—
—
—
—
—
4/4X
65
68C6048G43
68C6048G44
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
NEMA
1/3R/12
54
68C6048G41
68C6048G42
—
—
—
—
—
4/4X
65
68C6048G43
68C6048G44
—
—
—
—
—
—
1/3R/12
54
68C6048G41
68C6048G42
68C6048G01
68C6048G02
—
—
—
—
4/4X
65
68C6048G43
68C6048G44
68C6048G03
68C6048G04
—
—
—
—
1/3R/12
54
68C6048G41
68C6048G42
68C6048G01
68C6048G02
—
—
—
—
4/4X
65
68C6048G43
68C6048G44
68C6048G03
68C6048G04
—
—
—
—
1/3R/12
54
—
—
68C6048G01
68C6048G02
—
—
—
—
4/4X
65
—
—
68C6048G03
68C6048G04
—
—
—
—
1/3R/12
54
—
—
68C6048G01
68C6048G02
—
—
—
—
4/4X
65
—
—
68C6048G03
68C6048G04
—
—
—
—
1/3R/12
54
—
—
68C6048G01
68C6048G02
68C6048G05
68C6048G06
—
—
4/4X
65
—
—
68C6048G03
68C6048G04
68C6048G07
68C6048G08
—
—
1/3R/12
54
—
—
68C6048G01
68C6048G02
68C6048G05
68C6048G06
—
—
4/4X
65
—
—
68C6048G03
68C6048G04
68C6048G07
68C6048G08
—
—
1/3R/12
54
—
—
—
—
68C6048G05
68C6048G06
68C6048G09
68C6048G10
4/4X
65
—
—
—
—
68C6048G07
68C6048G08
68C6048G11
68C6048G12
1/3R/12
54
—
—
—
—
—
—
68C6048G09
68C6048G10
4/4X
65
—
—
—
—
—
—
68C6048G11
68C6048G12
Note
Shaft guide (68C6048G49) is optional and can be used with any high-performance handle listed above for greater alignment tolerance.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-434
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Dimensions
2
Approximate Dimensions in mm (Inches)
2
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms
2
Front Operation
Handle Type
Direction of Operation
2
Door Drilling
Type S01
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Type S4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-435
2.7
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description
2
Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Universal Rotary
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-426
V4-T2-427
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-437
V4-T2-438
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-445
2
2
2
Series C Rotary
2
Product Description
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s through-the-door
handle mechanisms mount
on the front of an enclosure
or a cabinet door and
externally operate the circuit
breaker via a variable depth
shaft or a linear operator
(Type MC). Each rotary type
handle mechanism includes a
handle, a base operating
mechanism and a shaft that
can be cut to various lengths.
These rotary handles are
robust and durable, made
entirely of metal parts. It also
has a lock-out tag-out level at
the tip of the handle for
padlocking.
Series C Rotary is UL listed and
meets CSA requirements.
NEMA Type 4/4X handles are
similar to standard handles
except they include an
internal neoprene gasket.
NEMA Type 4/4X handle style
number is 6648C22G03. Due
to gasketing effect between
the handle and the housing,
the handle may not indicate a
tripped position.
Series C Rotary handle
mechanisms are used with
molded case circuit breakers
(F, J, K, L, MDL), molded
case switches and motor
circuit protectors.
2
Features
2
Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism
2
Rotary
NEMA Enclosure Type
Number
Handle
of Poles 1
3R
12
4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2
2
Series C rotary
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Metal
Black
45 deg.
6, 12, 16, 24
Universal rotary
—
■
—
■
—
■
■
■
Molded plastic
Yellow/Red/Black
90 deg.
6, 12, 24
2
2
International
Handle Indication:
Markings
ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O)
Notes
1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.
2
2
2
V4-T2-436
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Handle
Material
Available
Handle
Colors
Handle
Rotation
Shaft
Lengths
(Inches)
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
2
Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms
Series C Rotary
2
Series C Rotary Ordering Information
2
Complete
Catalog
Number 1
Separate Catalog Number
Standard
Handle 2
Breaker
Mechanism 3
Shaft 4
IEC IP65 56
IEC IP66 56
6.00 (152.4)
HM1R06
6648C22G25
6648C23G11
4217B37G08
WHM1R06
WHM1R06X
12.00 (304.8)
HM1R12
6648C22G25
6648C23G11
4217B37G05
WHM1R12
WHM1R12X
16.00 (406.4)
HM1R16
6648C22G25
6648C23G11
4217B37G06
WHM1R16
WHM1R16X
24.00 (609.6)
HM1R24
6648C22G25
6648C23G11
4217B37G07
WHM1R24
WHM1R24X
2
6.00 (152.4)
HM2R06
6648C22G01
6648C23G21
4217B37G08
WHM2R06
WHM2R06X
2
12.00 (304.8)
HM2R12
6648C22G01
6648C23G21
4217B37G05
WHM2R12
WHM2R12X
16.00 (406.4)
HM2R16
6648C22G01
6648C23G21
4217B37G06
WHM2R16
WHM2R16X
24.00 (609.6)
HM2R24
6648C22G01
6648C23G21
4217B37G07
WHM2R24
WHM2R24X
2
6.00 (152.4)
HM3R06
6648C22G01
6648C23G25
4217B37G08
WHM3R06
WHM3R06X
2
12.00 (304.8)
HM3R12
6648C22G01
6648C23G25
4217B37G05
WHM3R12
WHM3R12X
16.00 (406.4)
HM3R16
6648C22G01
6648C23G25
4217B37G06
WHM3R16
WHM3R16X
24.00 (609.6)
HM3R24
6648C22G01
6648C23G25
4217B37G07
WHM3R24
WHM3R24X
6.00 (152.4)
HM4R06
6648C22G11
6648C23G19
4217B37G08
WHM4R06
WHM4R06X
12.00 (304.8)
HM4R12
6648C22G11
6648C23G19
4217B37G05
WHM4R12
WHM4R12X
16.00 (406.4)
HM4R16
6648C22G11
6648C23G19
4217B37G06
WHM4R16
WHM4R16X
24.00 (609.6)
HM4R24
6648C22G11
6648C23G19
4217B37G07
WHM4R24
WHM4R24X
2
6.00 (152.4)
HM7R06
6648C22G21
6648C23G17
4217B37G08
—
—
12.00 (304.8)
HM7R12
6648C22G21
6648C23G17
4217B37G05
—
—
2
16.00 (406.4)
HM7R16
6648C22G21
6648C23G17
4217B37G06
—
—
24.00 (609.6)
HM7R24
6648C22G21
6648C23G17
4217B37G07
—
—
Shaft
Length
Inches (mm)
Catalog Number
F-Frame
J-Frame
K-Frame
L- and MDL-Frame
MD/MDS
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
N-Frame (ND and NG)
6.00 (152.4)
HM5R06
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
4217B37G08
WHM5R06
WHM5R06X
12.00 (304.8)
HM5R12
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
4217B37G05
WHM5R12
WHM5R12X
16.00 (406.4)
HM5R16
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
4217B37G06
WHM5R16
WHM5R16X
24.00 (609.6)
HM5R24
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
4217B37G07
WHM5R24
WHM5R24X
Notes
1 Complete catalog number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket.
2 Handle is designed suitable for NEMA Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. Use style number 6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X Suffix to complete catalog number.
Handle is cast aluminum.
3 Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts. Shaft is.50-inch (12.7 mm).
4 Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension.
5 IEC handle mechanism supplied with metric thread mounting hardware.
6 Complete catalog number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-437
2.7
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description
2
Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Universal Rotary
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-425
V4-T2-426
V4-T2-427
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-438
V4-T2-439
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-445
2
2
2
Universal Rotary
2
Product Description
2
2
2
2
2
2
Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s Universal Rotary is
suitable for use with Type 1
or 12 enclosure types. All
rotary handle mechanisms
include a handle “lock off” to
prevent turning the breaker
ON while in the OFF position,
and indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/
Reset positions. The
Universal Rotary has the
added feature of international
markings for ON (I) and OFF
(O). The Universal Rotary is
made of molded material.
The Universal Rotary
mechanisms for EG-, JG- and
LG-Frame MCCBs can be
operated by hand with the
door open or “locked off” to
prevent operation with the
door open.
Universal Rotary is UL listed
and meets CSA requirements.
Universal Rotary also meets
IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-2
for international compliance.
Rotary UL File Number is
E64983.
2
2
Features
2
Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism
2
2
2
2
Rotary
NEMA Enclosure Type
Number
Handle
of Poles 1
3R
12
4/4X 1 Lock-Off 2
Series C rotary
—
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Metal
Black
45 deg.
6, 12, 16, 24
Universal rotary
—
■
—
■
—
■
■
■
Molded plastic
Yellow/Red/Black
90 deg.
6, 12, 24
International
Handle Indication:
Markings
ON/OFF TRIPPED/RESET ON (I) OFF (O)
Notes
1 Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
2 All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-438
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Handle
Material
Available
Handle
Colors
Handle
Rotation
Shaft
Lengths
(Inches)
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Product Selection
2
Universal Rotary F-Frame
2
Universal Rotary
F-Frame
2
Series C Universal Rotary 1
Handle
Color
Shaft Length
in Inches (mm)
Complete
Catalog Number
2
G-Frame
Black
Red
2
6.00 (152.4)
GHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8)
GHMVD12B
6.00 (152.4)
GHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8)
GHMVD12R
2
2
2
F-Frame
Black
Red
6.00 (152.4)
FHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8)
FHMVD12B
6.00 (152.4)
FHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8)
FHMVD12R
24.00 (609.6)
FHMVD24R
6.00 (152.4)
JHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8)
JHMVD12B
6.00 (152.4)
JHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8)
JHMVD12R
6.00 (152.4)
KHMVD06B
12.00 (304.8)
KHMVD12B
6.00 (152.4)
KHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8)
KHMVD12R
2
6.00 (152.4)
LHMVD06B
2
12.00 (304.8)
LHMVD12B
6.00 (152.4)
LHMVD06R
12.00 (304.8)
LHMVD12R
2
2
2
J-Frame
Black
Red
2
2
2
K-Frame
Black
Red
2
L-Frame
Black
Red
2
2
2
Note
1 Only available as complete handle mechanism. Parts not sold separately.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-439
2.7
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description
2
Page
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-424
V4-T2-427
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-441
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-445
2
2
2
2
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
2
Product Description
2
2
2
2
Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms mount directly
to the circuit breaker.
They are used in shallow
enclosures where the
standard variable depth
Through-the-door type
mechanism is not practical
or cannot be used.
2
The Universal Direct handle
mechanisms are rated Type 1
and Type 12.
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is available as
standard with a door interlock
to prevent opening the
enclosure while the circuit
breaker is in the ON position.
It is also available without a
door interlock.
Application Description
Standards and Certifications
Direct (close-coupled) handle
mechanisms are typically
used for applications where
high volume, standardized
enclosures are being
fabricated.
The Universal Direct handle
mechanism is IEC 60947-1
and IEC 60947-2 compliant.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-440
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Product Selection
2
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms
2
2
Euro IEC Direct
Black Handle
Frame
Catalog
Number
F
HMCC1B
J
HMCC2B
K
HMCC3B
L and M
HMCC4B
N
HMVD5B
R
HMVD6B
2
2
2
2
2
2
G Direct 1
Black Handle
2
Yellow Handle
With Shroud
Without Shroud
With Shroud
Without Shroud
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
GD/GHC
HRGCC1S
HRGCC10
HRGCC3S
HRGCC30
GMCP
HRGMC1S
HRGMC10
HRGMC3S
HRGMC30
2
2
2
Note
1 Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-441
2.7
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Contents
Handle Mechanisms
Description
2
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Flex Shaft
2
Product Description
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Flange-Mounted Handle
Mechanisms
Flange-mounted handle
mechanisms mount on the
flange of an enclosure door.
The Flex Shaft is an extra
heavy-duty mechanism that
includes a flexible shaft in
various lengths, 3 feet (0.9m)
through 10 feet (3m) for use
with various size enclosures.
The Flex Shaft handle will
accept up to three padlock
shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of
3/8 inches (9.5 mm). It can be
used with Type12 fabricated
enclosures. An optional
handle is available for Flex
Shaft that is suitable for use
with Type 4 environments.
Standards and Certifications
Flex Shaft comes preset from
the factory, requiring only
minor field adjustments on
installation, which takes
about 10 minutes—a
significant time savings
compared to installation of
other types of flange handle
mechanisms. The Flex Shaft
mechanism also takes up less
interior enclosure space than
competitive designs, and the
handle fits standard flange
cutouts. Flex Shaft handle
can be remotely mounted
from breaker, where an
operator can use it by
“funneling” the cable
through conduit.
Flex Shaft is UL listed under
File E64983 and meets CSA
requirements.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-442
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Page
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-424
V4-T2-426
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-443
V4-T2-445
2.7
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Product Selection
2
Handle Mechanisms
2
Flex Shaft 12
2
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
3 (0.9)
4 (1.2)
5 (1.5)
6 (1.8)
7 (2.1)
8 (2.4)
9 (2.7)
10 (3.0)
Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
G1
F0S03C
F0S04C
F0S05C
F0S06C
—
—
—
—
F
F1S03C
F1S04C
F1S05C
F1S06C
F1S07C
F1S08C
F1S09C
F1S10C
F (dual)
F1S03CD
F1S04CD
F1S05CD
F1S06CD
F1S07CD
F1S08CD
F1S09CD
F1S10CD
J
F2S03C
F2S04C
F2S05C
F2S06C
F2S07C
F2S08C
F2S09C
F2S10C
K
F3S03C
F3S04C
F3S05C
F3S06C
F3S07C
F3S08C
F3S09C
F3S10C
L and MDL
—
F4S04C
F4S05C
F4S06C
—
—
—
F4S10C
N
—
F5S04C
F5S05C
F5S06C
—
—
—
F5S10C
R
—
F6S04
F6S05
F6S06
—
—
—
—
MD, MDS (old)
—
F7S04
F7S05
F7S06
—
—
—
F7S10C
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
High Performance Flex Shaft 12
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
2
3 (0.9)
4 (1.2)
5 (1.3)
6 (1.8)
7 (2.1)
8 (2.4)
9 (2.7)
10 (3.1)
Breaker
Frame
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
G
F0S03HP
F0S04HP
F0S05HP
F0S06HP
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F
F1S03HP
F1S04HP
F1S05HP
F1S06HP
F1S07HP
F1S08HP
F1S09HP
F1S10HP
F (dual)
F1S03HPD
F1S04HPD
F1S05HPD
F1S06HPD
F1S07HPD
F1S08HPD
F1S09HPD
F1S10HPD
J
F2S03HP
F2S04HP
F2S05HP
F2S06HP
F2S07HP
F2S08HP
F2S09HP
F2S10HP
K
F3S03HP
F3S04HP
F3S05HP
F3S06HP
F3S07HP
F3S08HP
F3S09HP
F3S10HP
L and MDL
N/A
F4S04HP
F4S05HP
F4S06HP
N/A
N/A
N/A
F4S10HP
N
N/A
F5S04HP
F5S05HP
F5S06HP
N/A
N/A
N/A
F5S10HP
R
N/A
F6S04HP
F6S05HP
F6S06HP
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
2
2
2
2
Flange-Mounted Handle Mechanisms
2
Type C371
2
Operating Mechanism w/ 4-Inch Handle
Circuit Breaker or
Motor Circuit Protector
Frame
Size
Variable Depth
Mounting Range
Min./Max. 23
Operating
Mechanism Only 4
For NEMA 1–12
Enclosure
For NEMA 4/4X
Enclosure
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
HMCP and Series C—EHD, FDB, FD, FDC, HFD, ED
150
6.50–16 (165.1–406.4)
C371E
C371E1
C371E2
HMCP and Series C—HJD, JD, JDB, JDC
250
6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4)
C371F
C371F5
C371F6
HMCP and Series C—DK, HKD, KD, KDB
400
6.50–16.63 (165.1–422.4)
C371F
C371F5
C371F6
Series C—HLD, LD, LDC
600
8.50–22 (215.9–558.8)
C371G
C371G5
C371G6
Series C MD, MDS—(No MDL)
800
8.75–22 (222.3–558.8)
C371K
C371K5
C371K6
Series C—HND, ND, NDC
1200
9.75–22 (247.7–558.8)
C371K
C371K5
C371K6
Notes
1 Suitable for GC/GD MCCB; not suitable
for GMCP.
2 For increased maximum allowable
depth, see connecting rods on
Page V4-T2-444.
3 Dimensions shown are from panel
flange surface.
4 Does not include handle.
Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available.
Add Suffix X to complete catalog number.
Add Suffix I to complete catalog number for
IEC handle. Original narrow handle design
(No C Suffix) is available. Remove C from
catalog number.
2
2
2
2
2
2
When selecting the length of shaft,
ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches
(101.6 mm) (5 inches, 12.7 mm for L-, N- and
R-Frames) is maintained to operate properly.
The standard method of shipment includes
the mechanism preset at the factory;
however, minor field adjustments may
be required.
Dual breakers operator available on F-Frame
only. Only the F, J and K can mount LH and
RH all other RH only.
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-443
2.7
2
2
2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Handle Only
Circuit Breaker
Frame Size
(Amperes)
NEMA
Enclosure Type
150
Operating
Handle Length
Catalog
Number
1/3R/3/12
4.00 (101.6)
C371H1
2
4/4X
4.00 (101.6)
C371H2
1/3R/3/12
6.00 (152.4)
C371H3
2
4/4X
6.00 (152.4)
C371H4
1/3R/3/12
4.00 (101.6)
C371H5
4/4X
4.00 (101.6)
C371H6
1/3R/3/12
6.00 (152.4)
C371H7
4/4X
6.00 (152.4)
C371H8
2
2
250–1200
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Channel Support Kit (Rod Not Supplied)
For use to prevent bending of the operating handle mounting
surface. This is especially useful when the operating handle is
mounted on a channel in a multi-door enclosure.
Amperes
Catalog Number
600–1200
C371CS6
Connecting Rods 1
2
Application
Catalog Number
Disconnect switches (30, 60, 100, 200 A sizes)
C371CS1
2
Circuit breakers (150, 250, 400 A sizes)
C371CS1
Circuit breakers (600, 800, 1200 A sizes)
C371CS2
2
2
Note
1 Increase maximum allowable depth by 5 inches (127 mm).
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V4-T2-444
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Handle Mechanisms
2.7
Contents
Handle Extension
Description
Handle Mechanisms—Series G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Universal Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft
Handle Mechanisms—Series C
High-Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms .
Series C Rotary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms . . .
Flex Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handle Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
2
V4-T2-418
V4-T2-419
V4-T2-424
V4-T2-426
2
2
2
V4-T2-432
V4-T2-436
V4-T2-440
V4-T2-442
V4-T2-443
V4-T2-445
2
2
2
2
2
2
Handle Extension
2
Product Description
2
●
●
●
Suitable for use on two- or
three-pole G-Frame
Not included with J, K, L,
M and N-Frame breakers;
it must be purchased
separately
Included with R-Frame
breakers
2
2
2
2
2
Product Selection
Handle Extension
2
Handle Extension 12
Frame
Style
Number
J, K
HEX3
L, M
HEX4
N
HEX5
R
HEX6
2
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Handle extension is not included with J, K, L, M and N-Frame
breakers. It must be purchased separately.
2 Handle extension is included with breaker with R-Frame
breakers.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 4—Circuit Protection CA08100005E—October 2015 www.eaton.com
V4-T2-445
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
